09000 90008_HP UX_Reference_Vol_3_3_4_5_7_9_Sep86 90008 HP UX Reference Vol 3 4 5 7 9 Sep86

User Manual: 09000-90008_HP-UX_Reference_Vol_3_3_4_5_7_9_Sep86

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 417

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Flio-

':1:.

HP-QX Reference
Vol. 3: Sections 3, 4, 5, 7, and 9

HEWLETT
PACKARD

HP-UX Reference
Vol. 3: Sections 4, 5, 7, and 9
for
HP Part Number 09000-90008

This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this
document may be photocopied, reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of HewlettPackard Company. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in paragraph (b)(3)(B) of the Rights
in Technical Data and Software clause in DAR 7-104.9(a).
Use of this manual and flexible disc(s) or tape cartridge(s) supplied for this pack is restricted to this product only. Additional
copies of the programs can be made for security and back-up purposes only. Resale of the programs in their present form
or with alterations, is expressly prohibited.
©

This software and documentation is based in part on the Fourth Berkeley Software Distribution under license from the
Regents of the University of California.

Hewlett-Packard Company
3404 East Harmony Road, Fort Collins, Colorado 80525

Printing History
New editions of this manual will incorporate all material updated since the previous edition.
Update packages may be issued between editions and contain replacement and additional pages
to be merged into the manual by the user. Each updated page will be indicated by a revision
date at the bottom of the page. A vertical bar in the margin indicates the changes on each page.
Note that pages which are rearranged due to changes on a previous page are not considered
revised.
The manual printing date and part number indicate its current edition. The printing date changes
when a new edition is printed. (Minor corrections and updates which are incorporated at reprint
do not cause the date to change.) The manual part number changes when extensive technical
changes are incorporated.
July 1985 ... Edition 1. This manual replaces HP-UX Reference Manual 09000-90007 and documents HP-UX Release 5.0 for Series 200, 300 and 500.
November 1985 ... Edition 2. Updated from Edition 1 to reflect Series 200/300 HP-UX Release
5.1 changes. Several omitted pages in Edition 1 were also added.
June 1986 ... Edition 3. Update 1 incorporated.
September 1986 ... Edition 3 Update 1. This update reflects additions and changes incorporated
in Series 500 HP-UX Release 5.1. Added command autobackup(lM) and core files support
(core(5)), changed block size limitations for SDF file formats, and fixed various bugs.

NOTICE
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
HEWLETT-PACKARD MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL. INCLUDING. BUT NOT LIMITED TO.
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Hewletl·Packard shall not be liable
for errors contained herein or direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance,
or use of this material.

WARRANTY
A copy of the specific warranty terms applicable to your
Sales and Service Office.

Hewlett~Packard

product and replacement parts can be obtained from your local

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Commands

....

intro(1) ................................................................................................................. introduction to Section 1
acctcom ........................................................................................ search and print process accounting files
adb ...................... ........ ................. ......... .......... ............ ....... ........... ................................................ debugger
adjust .................. ......... ................ .......... ..................... ............................... ................ simple text formatter
admin .................. .......... .............. ................................ .............................. create and administer sees files
ar ...................................... .................... .............................. ......................... archive and library maintainer
arcv .......... ..... ........... ........ ........................................ ........... ................. ....... convert archives to new format
as ......... ..................... ....... ........ .... ..... ......... ......... ............. ........... ............................ assembler for MC68000
asa ............................................................... .......... .......... ........... interpret ASA carriage control characters
at .. .................... ............................................ .............. ........ .......... .......... execute commands at a later time
aterm ............................ .......... .......... .............................. general purpose asynchronous terminal emulation
atrans .............. ........... .............. ........... ... .................. ........... ....... .......... ............ translate assembly language
awk ...................... .................... ............................................ text pattern scanning and processing language
banner ................. .......... ................ .......... .................... ..................... ............... make posters in large letters
basename ..................................................................................................... extract portions of path names
bc .................................................................................................... arbitrary-precision arithmetic language
bdiff ................................................................................................................................................ .. big diff
bfs ........................................................................................................................................ big file scanner
bifchmod .............................................................................................................. change mode of a BIF file
bifchown ........................................................ ..................................................... change file owner or group
bifcp ...................................................................................................................... copy to or from BIF files
bifdf ............................ ............................ ................ .................................. report number of free disc blocks
biffind ........................................................................ ........................................... find files in a BIF system
biffsck .......... ........ .......... .............. ......................... Bell file system consistency check and interactive repair
biffsdb .......... ........ .................. ......... .......... ......... .......... ..................... ....... ............. Bell file system debugger
bifls ...... ...... .......... ............ ............ ................... ............ ........ ........... .............. list contents of BIF directories
bifrnkdir ..................................................................................................................... make a BIF directory
bifmkfs .............................................................................................................. construct a Bell file system
bifrm ............................................................................................................ remove ElF files or directories
bs ....... ........... ....... ..... ....... ....... ........ ..................... .............. compiler/interpreter for modest-sized programs
cal. .... ..... ... ....... .... ..... ... ................. ....... ... ...... .......... ............. .......... ............... ......................... print calendar
calendar ............... .................. ......................... ..... ............... .................... ........ .... ...... ......... reminder service
cat ............................................................................................................ concatenate, copy, and print files
cb ............................................................................................................... C program beautifier, formatter
cc ........................................................................................................................................... ..... C compiler
cd ................. ........ ............ .................. ..... ............. ................ ........................ ........ change working directory
cdb ............................................................................................. C, FORTRAN, Pascal symbolic debugger
cdc ........ ...... .......... ............ ...... ...................................... ...... change the delta commentary of an sees delta
cflow .......................................................................................................................... generate C flow graph
chatr ................................................................................................... change program's internal attributes
chmod ...................................................................................................................................... change mode
chown ................................................................................................................. change file owner or group
chsh .................. ,................................................................................................... change default login shell
clear ............................................................................................................................ clear terminal screen
cmp ...................... .......... ............. ... .......... ......... ........... ..................... ....... ......... ............... compare two files
col ..................................................................................................... filter reverse linefeeds and backspaces
comm ............ ........ ............ ................ ........... ................. .................... select/reject common lines of two files
compact ................................................................................. compress and uncompress files, and cat them
cp ............................................................................................................................ copy, link or move files
cpio .... ............................ ................ .......... .................... ............. .................. ..... copy file archives in and out
cpp ............................................................................................. ............................ C language preprocessor
crontab ......... ........ ....................... ....... ......... ........................ ................ ......... ....... ............... user crontab file
csh .................................................................................................................................................... C shell
ctags ........... .......................................................................... .............................................. create a tags file

-1-

Table of Contents

cu ....................................................................................................................... call another HP-UX system
cut .... ...... ..... .............. ....... ..... ....... ........ ... ............ ................ ....... cut out selected fields of each line of a file
cxref ........ ...... ........ ............ ......... ........ .......... ... ...... .... ................ ......... ... generate C program cross-reference
date .... ...... ..... ......... ...... .......... ........ ........ ... ... ...... ... ..... ....... ..... ........... ........ ........ ... ..... print and set the date
dc ....... ........... ............... ....... ........... ........... ... ......... ..... .... ........ ........... ..... ... ........... ........ ..... ... desk calculator
dd .................................................................................... convert, reblock, translate, and copy a (tape) file
delta ................................................................................................. make a delta (change) to an sees file
deroff ......................................................................................... remove nroff/troff, tbl, and eqn constructs
diff ............................................................................................................. ......... differential file comparator
diff3 .......................................................................................................... 3-way differential file comparison
diffmk ........ ......... ...... ................... ............ ... ........ ......... .................. ................ mark differences between files
dircmp .. ....... ......... ............. ............. ............. ......... .................. ......... ........... directory difference comparison
du .................. ......... .......... ......... ....... .... .......... ....... ........... .......... ..... ............ ... ........ ... summarize disk usage
echo ..... ............................................. ................................. ....................... ............... echo (print) arguments
ed ...................... ................................................... ..................................... .................................. text editor
edit ............................................................................................. text editor (variant of ex for casual users)
enable ................................................................................................................. enable/disable LP printers
env ........................... ..................................................................... set environment for command execution
err ............................................. ..................... ................................. report error information on last failure
ex .............................................. ................................................................................. text editor commands
expand ...................................... ...................... .................................. expand tabs to spaces, and vice versa
expr ........................... ................................................... ...................... evaluate arguments as an expression
fl7 ....................................................................................................................................................... see fc
factor ..................... .................... ...................... ................................ factor a number, generate large primes
fc ................................................ :........................................................................... FORTRAN 77 compiler
file ................. ............................ ........ ...................................... ................. ...................... determine file type
find ......... ........ ........ .................... ............................ ........... ....... ................................ ......... ........ ..... find files
findmsg ..................................... ...................... .......................... create message catalog file for modification
findstr ........................................ ....................... ................. ...... find strings for inclusion in message catalog
fixman ............................................................................... fix manual pages for faster viewing with man(1)
fold ............................................. ............................................. fold long lines for finite-width output device
gencat .......................................................................................... generate a formatted message-catalog file
get ...... ................... ........ ............................... ............................................ ....... get a version of an sees file
getopt .......... ......... ...... ........... ........ ... ................. .................... ....... .................... ...... parse command options
getprivgrp .................. ...................................................................... ......... ... get special attributes for group
grep ........ ........................... ........ ............ ........... ....... ........... .......... ...... ... ... search an AseII file for a pattern
groups show group memberships
head ........................................... ....................... .......... ........................................... give first few lines of file
help .. .................................................................... ........................ ............ ........... ...................... ask for help
hostname ..................... ................................................................. set or print name of current host system
hp .............. ........ .......................................... handle special functions of HP 2640 and 2621 series terminals
hyphen .. ................... ........ ......... ............................. .......... ......... ......... ...................... find hyphenated words
id ............................................................................................................... print user, group IDs and names
insertmsg ........................................................... ......... .......... use findstring output to insert calls to getmsg
ipcrm .... ........................... ................... ......... remove a message queue, semaphore set, or shared memory id
ipcs ....................... .................... ........ .................. ......... report inter-process communication facilities status
join ............. .............................. ....... ........................................................ ........ relational database operator
kill ......................... ................................... ... .......... ............................................... ......... terminate a process
last .................. .......................... ....... ............................................ indicate last logins of users and teletypes
Id ............................. ....................................... ............................................................................. link editor
leave ..................................................................................................... remind you when you have to leave
lex ............................................. .................................. ..... ...... generate programs for lexical analysis of text
Iifcp .................................................................................................................... '.' copy to or from LIF files
Iifinit ....... ................................................................................................... write LIF volume header on file
lifts ................... ....... ................. ....................... ......... ................................ ...... list contents of LIF directory

-2-

Table of Contents

lifrename .................................... ................................ ................................... ..................... rename LIF files
lifrm ........................................................... ....................................................................... remove a LIF file
line ................................................................................................................. read one line from user input
linkinfo .................................................................................................... object file link information utility
lint .................................................................................................................. a C program checker/verifier
lock .................................................................................................................................. reserve a terminal
login . ........ .......................................................................... ............................. .......... ....................... sign on
logname . ........................... ....... ...................... .................. ..................................................... get login name
lorder .......................................................................... .................... find ordering relation for object library
Ip ................................................................................ ............ send or cancel requests to an LP line printer
Ipstat ........................................................ ........................................................ print LP status information
Is ................................................................................. ........................................ list contents of directories
Isdev .... ................ ........................................................ ............................... list device drivers in the system
m4 ...................................................................... ......... ....................................................... macro processor
machid .............. .......................... ................................ ......... provide truth value about your processor type
mail .................... .......... .................. ............ ........ .............................. ...... ..... send mail to users or read mail
mailx ........................................................................... :.............................................. send and receive mail
make ..................... ................. .................... ....................................... maintain, update, recompile programs
man ...... ....................... ................. ............................... ......................................... on-line manual command
mediainit .............................................................. initialize hard disc, flexible disc, or cartridge tape media
mesg ................................................................................................... permit or deny messages to terminal
mkdir ................................................................................................................................ make a directory
mkstr ................ .................. .................. ............................. extract error messages from C source into a file
mm .............. ................................................................ ........... print documents formatted with MM macros
more .... .................................. .............................. ....................................... file perusal filter for crt viewing
mt ........ .............................................................................................. magnetic tape manipulating program
newgrp .... ................ .................................. ........................ ......................................... log in to a new group
news ..... ....................................... ............. .......... ......... ........................... ................... ........ print news items
nice .. .................................... ........ .................. .............................................. run a command at low priority
nl .......... ............................................................... .................... .................................... line numbering filter
nm ............................................................................................ print name list (symbol table) of object file
nohup .................................................................... run a command immune to hangups, logouts, and quits
nroff ........................................................................................................................................... format text
od .......... ....................... ........................... ............. ........................................... octal and hexadecimal dump
pack .................................................................................................................... compress and expand files
pam ...................................................................................... Personal Applications Manager, a visual shell
passwd ......................................................... ............................................................. change login password
paste ................................................................................................ ........... merge lines in one or more files
pc ..... .... ............................... ................................................ ................................................ Pascal compiler
pr .......... ............................................ ................... ........... ............................................... ..... .......... print files
prealloc ............................................... ................................................... .................. preallocate disc storage
prof .................................... .......................... .......................................... ........................ display profile data
prs ................................ ........ ........ ........................ ................................... print and summarize an sees file
ps .......................... .................................... ........... ........ ... ............... ............................. report process status
ptx ................................................................. ....... ....................... ............................. create permuted index
pwd ........................................................................................................................ working directory name
query .... ........ ........................................................ ........ ................ ......... interactive IMAGE database access
ratfor ................................................................................................................ rational FORTRAN dialect
rev...................................... ............................ .......... ................................................... reverse lines of a file
revision ...................................................................................................... get HP-UX revision information
rm ........................................................................................................................ remove files or directories
rmdel ........................................................................................................ remove a delta from an sees file
rmnl ...... ................ .............................. ....................................... remove extra new-line characters from file
rtprio ................ ............ ........................ ........................ .......... ......... execute process with real-time priority
sact .................................................................................................. print current sees file editing activity

-3-

Table of Contents
sccsdiff ...... .................................. .......... .......... ........... ......... .................... compare two versions of sees file
sed .............................................................. ................................................................ ..... stream text editor
sh .. ........................................ ............................ ......... shell, the standard command programming language
size ...................... ............................................................................ ...................................... . object file size
sleep .................. ....................................................................................... suspend execution for an interval
sip .................................................................................................................... ............... set printer options
sort ................ ,......................................................................................................... sort and/or merge files
spell ......................................................................................................... ....................... find spelling errors
split ................................... ................. ........ ..... .......... ................... .............................. split a file into pieces
ssp ...... ............................................................................................ remove multiple line-feeds from output
strings .... .......... ............................................ .......................................... find printable strings in binary file
strip .................................................................................. .................... remove symbols and relocation bits
stty .................................. .......................... ............................................. set the options for a terminal port
su ................................................................................................................................ become another user
sum ............................................................ .............................. ..... print checksum and block count of a file
sync .......................................... ......... ................... ............................. ......... ............. update the super block
tabs ....................................... ........ ..................... ........ .................... ........ ................... set tabs on a terminal
tail ................................................................................................................... deliver the last part of a file
tar ............................................... ....... ........ .................................. ......... ............................ tape file archiver
tbl .............................................................. ...................................... ............. format tables for nroff or trofl'
tcio ................................................................................................................. CS/80 Cartridge Tape utility
tee .......................... ............ ........................................................ ....... ............ ....... ...................... pipe fitting
test ............................... ............................. .......... ..... .............. ..................... condition evaluation comman(l
time ................................................................................................................................... time a command
touch .................................................................................. update access/modification/change times of file
tput ............................ ... ................. ........... .......... .................................................. query terminfo database
tr .................................................................................................................................. translate characters
true .............................................................................................................................. provide truth values
tset ............................................. ................................ ................... ........... terminal dependent initialization
tsort ..................................................................................................................................... topological sort
tty .......................................................................................................................... get the terminal's name
ul . ......................................................................................................................................... do underlining
umask ................................................................................................................ set file-creation mode mask
uname .................... ............................ .............................. .................. print name of current HP-UX version
unget ...................... .................... ...................................................... ..... undo a previous get of an sees file
uniq ............................................ .......................... ...................... .................... report repeated lines in a file
units ................................................................. ,................ .... ......................... ....... unit conversion program
upm .................... .................... .......................................... .................. unpack cpio archives from HP media
uucp ...................................................................................................... HP-UX to HP-UX copy; file transfer
uuls .......................................................................... list spooled uucp transactions grouped by transaction
uusnap .................................... .......... ........ .............. .............................. show snapshot of the uuep system
uustat ........................ ................................ ........................................... uucp status inquiry and job control
uuto .......................................................................................................... public HP-UX-to-HP-UX file copy
uux .................................................................................................... HP-UX to HP-UX command execution
val .................................................................................................................................... validate sees file
vi .................................... .... ...................... .......... .......... ............................ ................. ....... visual text editor
vis .................... ..................................................... make unprintable characters in a file visible or invisible
wait .... ........... ...... ........ ........... .......... .......... .......... .................. .......................... await completion of process
wc ...................... ........... ............... ............. .......... ........... .................. ........... word, line, and character count
what .................................................................... .......... .................. ....... identify files for sees information
whereis ........................................................................... locate source, binary, and/or manual for program
who ............................................................................................................... which users are on the system
whoami .............. ........................ .................... .......... ...................................... print effective current user id
write ............................................................................................. interactively write (talk) to another user
xargs .................... ............................ ........ ....................... construct argument list( s) and execute command

-4-

Table of Contents

yacc ................................ .......................... ................... ...... ............ ............... yet another compiler-compiler

1M. System Maintenance Utilities
accept ... .............................................................................................. ............ allow or prevent LP requests
acct .......................................................... overview of accounting and miscellaneous accounting commands
acctcms ................................................................ command summary from per-process accounting records
acctcon .................................................................................................................. connect-time accounting
acctmerg .... ......... ...................................... ................... .......................... merge or add total accounting files
acctprc ...... .................... ........................... ...... .............. ................................................... process accounting
acctsh ............................................................... ............. .............................. shell procedures for accounting
backup .......... ............. ..... .......... ........................................ ............................. backup or archive file system
brc ............................................................................................................ system initialization shell scripts
captoinfo ............................................................ convert a termcap description into a terminfo description
catman .............................. .......... ................................................... ......... create the cat files for the manual
chroot ......... ......... ............ ......... .................. ............................ ........... change root directory for a command
chsys .................... ........... ... ............................................ .... change to different operating system or version
c1ri ............................. ...... .......................... ............. ................................................................... clear i-node
c1rsvc ....................................................................................................... clear x.25 switched virtual circuit
config ................................................................................................................ configure an HP-UX system
cpset ......... ....................... ........................ ......... ......... .......... ............ install object files in binary directories
cron ........... ........................... ........ ............................. ........ ................................................ ..... clock daemon
devnm .................. ........ ........... ........ ........ .......... .................. ..................... ................... ...... ........ device name
df ..................................... ................. ......... ......... ..................................... report number of free disk blocks
diskusg ............................... ..................... ..................................... generate disc accounting data by user ID
fsck .... ......................................................... ......... .............. file system consistency check, interactive repair
fsclean ........................................................... ................. determine shutdown status of specified file system
fsdb .................................. ......... ................................................................................... file system debugger
fwtmp ................................................... .......................................... ............... ...... manipulate wtmp records
getty .. ................. .......... .......................... ............................. .................. ........... set the modes of a terminal
getx25 .............................. , ........................ ........................... ............ ......................................... get x.25 line
init ................................... ............... ................................................. ................ process control initialization
install ................................................... ................... .................... ................................ ..... install commands
kermit ............................................................................................. KERMIT-protocol file transfer program
killall ...... ......... ................... ........... ................ .......... ............................. ...... send signal to all user processes
link ..... ......................... .............. ....... ......... .......... .................... ......... ... exercise link and unlink system calls
Ipadmin ............................ ........................... ....... ................................... administer the LP spooling system
Ipsched ................................................................... start/stop the LP request scheduler and move requests
makekey ..................................................................... ............................. .......... ..... generate encryption key
mkdev ....... ........ ............ ........ ................... ........................... ........... .......... .......... ................ make device files
mkfs ........................................... ....................................................... ............. ........... construct a file system
mklp ............. ............. ................. ................. ........ ...... ....... .......................... configure the LP spooler system
mknod .......................................................... ............................................................ create special, fifo, files
mount ...................................................................................... .................. mount and unmount file system
mvdir .................... .................... ................... .......... ............................... ......... ...... ............. move a directory
ncheck .................................................................... .................................... generate names from i-numbers
newfs ..... ............................. ................. ....................................... .......... ........ ..... construct a new file system
opx25 ................. ................ ....................... ........................................ ................. execute HALGOL programs
osck ............................................................................................ check integrity of as in SDF boot area(s)
oscp .................................................................................... copy, create, append to, split operating system
osmark ............................ .... ........................................................ mark SDF as file as loadable/unloadable
osmgr .................................. ............................ ............ ........ operating system manager package description
pwck ............... ......... .......... ......... ................. ......... ............................. ........... .. password/group file checkers
reboot ...................................... ........................................................................................ reboot the system

-5-

Table of Contents

revck .................................................................................. check internal revision numbers of HP-UX files
rootmark ............................................................................... mark/unmark volume as HP-UX root volume
runacct ............ .......................................................................... ....................... ........... run daily accounting
sdfinit ......................... ................................... ...................... initialize Structured Directory Format volume
setmnt .......... ......... ..... ................ ..................... ....... ................... ............................... establish mnttab table
setprivgrp ................................................... ...... ........................................... set special attributes for group
shutdown ........ ..................... ................. .......... ........ ....................................... ......... terminate all processing
stopsys ........................ ........ ...................................................... stop operating system with optional reboot
swapon ....................... ................................. .................. enable additional devices for swapping and paging
'syncer ...... ....... ............ ................ ............ ......... ......... .................... periodically sync for file system integrity
tic ....... ................. ................... .................... ........ .......... ................... ................... ........ ..... terminfo compiler
tunefs ......................... ............................. ................. ........................................................ tune a file system
uconfig ................................................. .......... .................. .......... ............................ ... system reconfiguration
umodem ............................................................................ ........ .... XMODEM protocol file transfer program
untic ..................................................... ....... ....... ....................... .................................. terminfo de-compiler
uucico ................................................................................................................ uucp copy in and copy out
uuclean .......................................................................................................... uucp spool directory clean-up
uusub .......................................... ..................... ......................... ............ .................... monitor uucp network
uuxqt ................................................................................................................... uucp command execution
wall ................................................................................................................................... write to all users
whodo ............................................................................................................... which users are doing what

2. System Calls
access ............................................................ .......................... ........... .......... determine accessibility of a file
alarm ..................................................................................................................... set process's alarm clock
brk ........................................................... .................................... ...... change data segment space allocation
chdir .......... ..................... ............................ ......... ........ ......... .......... ......... ............. change working directory
chmod ..... .......... ..................... .......... .......... .......... ...... .......... ................... ......... ... change access mode of file
chown . .......... ......... ................... .................... ................... ................... ...... change owner and group of a file
chroot .. ................ ...................................... .................. ......... ............................ .......... change root directory
close ........... ............... ................................ ....... ................. .......................................... close a file descriptor
creat ............................................................. .......................... ............... create new file, rewrite existing file
dup ............................ ..................... .............................. ............................. duplicate an open file descriptor
dup2 .. ........................................................................................................ duplicate an open file descriptor
ems ....... .......... ....... ............ ......... .................. .................. ...................... .............. Extended Memory System
errinfo ............................................................................... .............................. ...................... error indicator
errno .............................................. ................... .................... ................... .... error indicator for system calls
exec ............... ............................ ........... ....... .......................................................... ..... ............. execute a file
exit ................................................................................. .......... ........................................ terminate process
fcnt! ................... ....... .......... .................... ........ ......... ... ...... ........ .............................. ......... ........ ... file control
fork . ............................................................... .................... .......................................... create a new process
fsync ......................... ...................................................... synchronize a file's in-core state with that on disc
ftime ... ...... ........ ..................... .......................... .......... ....... ..................... ... get date and time more precisely
get groups ... .......... ....................................... ....... .......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ............ get group access list
gethostname ........ ....... .... ......... .................. ........ ........... ........ .......... ......... .......... .... get name of current host
getitimer ............................................ ........................................................... get/set value of interval timer
getpid ....................... ..................................................... get process, process group, and parent process IDs
getprivgrp .............................................................................................. get/set special attributes for group
gettimeofday ...... ...... ............ ...................................................................................... get/set date and time
getuid .................................................................................. get real/effective user, real/effective group IDs
ioct! ................................................................... ..................................................................... control device
kill .... .......... ............................ ........... .......... ......... .......... .............................. ......... send signal to process( s)
link .... .......... ......... ..................................... .................. ..................... ......... ................... ............ link to a file

-6-

Table of Contents

lockf ...... ..................... ...... .................. ........ ........... .............. provide semaphores and record locking on files
lseek .................................................................................. ...................... move read/write file pointer; seek
memadvise .......... .................. ................................................... advise OS about segment reference patterns
memallc ...................................................... ................................................. allocate and free address space
memchmd ........................................................................................ change memory segment access modes
memlck ...................................... ........ ................................... lock/unlock process address space or segment
memvary ............ ........................... ............ ........................ ....................................... modify segment length
mkdir .......................................................................................................................... create a directory file
mknod .................................................................................. ........... make directory, special or ordinary file
mount . ....................................... ........ ................................ ........................ ................... mount a file system
msgcti .................................................................... .... ........ ................................ message control operations
msgget ............................................................................................................................. get message queue
msgop ..... ......... ... ................ ........................... ........ ............ ............................................ message operations
nice ........................................ ........................................................................... change priority 'of a process
open .................... .................. ....................................................................... open file for reading or writing
pause ....................................... .................................... ...... .......................... ..... suspend process until signal
pipe ............................................................................................................. create an inter-process channel
plock ........................................ .......................................... ................ lock process, text, or data in memory
prealloc ........................................................ ..... ........... ..................................... preallocate fast disc storage
profil .......................................................................................................................... execution time profile
ptrace ...................................................................................................................................... process trace
read ........................................................................................................................................ read from file
reboot ................. ................... .......................................................................................... reboot the system
rmdir ........................................................................................................................ remove a directory file
rtprio ........................................................................................................ change or read real-time priority
select ............................................................................................................. synchronous I/O multiplexing
semctl ......... ........ ........................................................................................... semaphore control operations
semget ........................................................................................................................ get set of semaphores
semop .................. ............ ....................... ..................... ........... .................. ......... ........ semaphore operations
setgroups ....................................................... ............................................................... set group access list
sethostname ............................................................................................ .................... set name of host cpu
setpgrp ......................................................................................................................... set process group ID
setuid ....................................................................................................................... set user and group IDs
shmctl ..................................................................................................... shared memory control operations
shmget ............................................................................................................. get shared memory segment
shmop ................................................................................................................. shared memory operations
sigblock .................................................................................................................................... block signals
signal ..................................................................................................... set up signal handling for program
sigpause ........................................................... automatically release blocked signals and wait for interrupt
sigsetmask ............................................................................................................... set current signal mask
sigspace .................................................................................................. assure sufficient signal stack space
sigvector .............. ......................... ...................................... .................................... software signal facilities
stat ......................................................................................................................................... get file status
stime ................................................................................................................................ set time and date
stty ........................................................................................................................................ control device
swapon ......................................................................... add a swap device for interleaved paging/signalling
sync ......................................................................................................................... update the super block
time ................................................................................................................................................ get time
times ............................................ ........................................ ................. get process and child process times
trapno ..................................................................................................................... hardware trap numbers
truncate ................................................................................................. truncate a file to a specified length
ulimit ........................................................................................................................ get and set user limits
umask ............. ........ .................................... .......................... ........... .............. get and set file creation mask
umount ..................................................................................................................... unmount a file system
uname .................................................................................................... get name of current HP-UX system

-7-

Table of Contents

unlink .......................................... ................... ......................................... remove directory entry; delete file
ustat ........................................... ........................ .................................................... get file system statistics
utime .... ....... ........ ......... .......... ........... ................... ......... ......... ............ set file access and modification times
vfork ..... ....... .... ... ..... ..... .... ...... ........ ... ...... ... .......... ..... spawn new process in a virtual memory efficient way
vsadv .......................................... ................... ............................... advise system about backing store usage
vson .................................................. ............................................... advise as about backing store devices
wait ................ .................... ........ ......... ......... ......... ........... ...... ........... ..... wait for child process to terminate
write ...................................................................................................................................... write on a file

3. Subroutines
a641 .... ........ .......... .......... ...... ........... ............................. ......... ........ convert between long and base-64 ASCII
abort ........ .................................. ........................................ ........................................ generate an rOT fault
abs .............................................. ............................................. .................................. integer absolute value
assert ......... ....... ...... ..... .......... ..... ............ ........ ............ ....... .......... .......... .............. ........ program verification
atof ................... ................. ......... ............. ........ ........... ........ .......... ......... .............. convert ASCII to numbers
bessel ...... ......... ...... ............ ......... ... ........ ........ ........ .......... ........ ......... ..... ....... ....... ............ .... bessel functions
bsearch ... ....... ........... ..... ............. .......... ......... .......... ................... ......... ........ binary search on a sorted table
catread .............. ....................................... ......... ........................... MPEjRTE-style message catalog support
clock ......... ................ ..... ....... .......... .......... ......... .......... .................. ................. ... ........ report CPU time used
conv ...... ........... ....... ......... .......... ............................ ................. ........... ......... ................ character translation
crypt .................................................................................................................................... DES encryption
ctermid ..................... ........... ........ ......... ................... .................. ... ....... ........ generate file name for terminal
ctime ........ ...... ........... ......... ................... ......... .......... ................................... convert date and time to ASCII
ctype .......... ........ .......... .......... ................. ......... ........... ......... ......... ........ ... ........ ... ..... character classification
curses ................................................................................ CRT screen handling and optimization routines
cuserid ...... .................. .......... ........ ............. .................... .............. .......... .... character login name of the user
dial....... ........ ....... ............ ..................... ......... ...... ........... .... establish an out-going terminal line connection
directory ... ........ .......... ........... ..... ............ ........ ............ ....... ........ ......... .......... ................ directory operations
drand48 ............. .................................................... generate uniformly-distributed pseudo-random numbers
ecvt ......... ........ .......... ........... ................. ................... ........ .......... .......... ........ .................... output conversion
end ...... ......... ........ ........... ................. ..... ..... ... ....... ........... ....... .......... ..................... last locations in program
erf ......... .............................................. ......... ....... ... .......... error function and complementary error function
exp ............................................................................. exponential, logarithm, power, square root functions
fclose ............ ........ .......... .................. ..................................... ............................. ....... close or flush a stream
ferror ...... ..... .................. .............................. ....... ............ ...... .......... .......... .......... stream file status inquiries
floor ................................................................................. absolute value, floor, ceiling, remainder functions
fopen ......................................................... '" ................ open or re-open a stream file; convert file to stream
fread ...................................................................................... buffered binary input/output to a stream file
frexp ......................................................................................................... split into mantissa and exponent
fseek .......... ........ ......... ........... ........ ......... .......... .... ...... ................................................ .... reposition a stream
ftw ... ......... ......... ......... ................... ........... .......... ................. ........ ...................... ................... walk a file tree
gamma ............ .................. ... ........ ......... ........ .................... ................ .......... ............... ... log gamma function
getc .. ............ ....... ......... .............................. ........ .................... .......... get character or word from stream file
getcwd .. ...... ....................... ................ ......... ......................... ...... get pathname of current working directory
getenv ........................................................ ..... ......................................... ........ value for environment name
getfsent ........................... ....................................................................... get file system descriptor file entry
getgrent ................................... ............................................ ...................... .................... get group file entry
getlogin ......... ........ .......... .................. ................... .................. ......... ................... ............. ...... get login name
getmsg .. ...... ........... ............................ ......... .......... .................. .......... .......... ....... get message from a catalog
getopt ............... ........... ................... ......... .......... ......... ........ ........... .................... get option letter from argv
getpass .................. .......... ......... .......... ......... .......... .................. .......... .......... ....................... read a password
getpw .......... ......................... ....... ..... ......... ........................... ........... ........................... .... get name from urD
getpwent ..... ............ ......................... ... ........ .................... ...... ..... .......... .................... get password file entry

-8-

Table of Contents

gets ............. ......... ...... .................... ......... ............ ............................ .............. get a string from a stream file
getut .................................... .......................................... ............................................ access utmp file entry
gpio_get--status ........................................................................................ return status lines of GPIO card
gpio--set_ctl ........................................................................................ ........ set control lines on GPIO card
hpib_abort .................................................. .......... .............................. stop activity on specified HP-IB bus
hpib_bus--status ................................................................. ...................... return status of HP-IB interface
hpib_carLppoIL...resp ............................................................... control response to parallel poll on HP-IB
hpib_eoi_ctl .............................................................................................. control EO! mode for HP-IB file
hpib-.io ............................................................................ perform I/O with an HP-IB channel from buffers
hpib_pass_ctl ..................................... ........ ............. ............................. change active controllers on HP-IB
hpib_ppoll ........................ ........ ................................ ............................. conduct parallel poll on HP-IB bus
hpib_ppoll-I"esp_ctl .................................................................. control response to parallel poll on HP-IB
hpib-I"en_ctl ......................................................................... ...... control the Remote Enable line on HP-IB
hpib-I"qst--srvce ........ .......................................................... .... allow interface to enable SRQ line on HP-IB
hpib--senLcmnd ..................................................... ................................ send command bytes over HP-IB
hpib--spoll .................................................... .......... ................................ conduct a serial poll on HP-IB bus
hpib--status_wait .................................................. wait until the requested status condition becomes true
hpib_wait_on_ppoll ........................................................ wait until a particular parallel poll value occurs
hsearch ....... ...................... ....... ............................ ...... ..... ................ .......... ... ....... manage hash search tables
hypot ......... .................... ........ ......... ......... ..... .......................................... ........................ Euclidean distance
initgroups ......................................... ................... ................................................. initialize group access list
intrapoff ................................................................................................ disable/enable integer trap handler
io_burst ........................................ ......... ................... ......... perform low-overhead I/O on an HP-IB channel
io_eol_ctl ....... ....... ................... ......... .......... ........ ............. set up read termination character on special file
io_get_terffi-I"eason ....... ......... ............ ................ ................... ......... ... determine how last read terminated
io-.interrupt_ctl ....................................................................... enable/disable interrupts for associated eid
io_oD-interrupt .......................................................................................... device interrupt (fault) control
iO-I"eset ..................................................................................................................... reset an I/O interface
io--speeLctl ...... ................. ......... ... ........ ........ ............ ....... .......... inform system of required transfer speed
io_timeout_ctl ................................................................................ establish time limit for I/O operations
io_width_ctl ................................................ ............................................................ set width of data path
l3tol ............................................................... ................. convert between 3-byte integers and long integers
langinfo ................ ......................... ....................................... ........ ............ NLS native language information
logname ... ............................ .......... ........ .............................. ......... ........... ........ ..... return login name of user
lsearch .............................. ..................................................................................... linear search and update
malloc .............. ....... ........... ........ .............................. ............... ........... ...................... main memory allocator
matherr ..................................... ...................................................................... mathematical error handling
memory ......... ......... ......................... .................... .................... ........ ... ......... ................... memory operations
mktemp ......... ......................... ............................... .................. .......... ......... ........... make a unique file name
monitor ... ...................................................... ........................................................ prepare execution profile
nLconv . ....................................................... .................................... translate characters for use with NLS
nLctype .......... ....... ....... ........... ....... ... ................... ................... ........... classify characters for use with NLS
ni--String ...... .............. ..................... ................... ........................... . non-ASCII string collation used by NLS
nlist ................................. ................. ............. .................................. .................... get entries from name list
perror ... ................. .................. ......... ................... ..................................... ................. system error messages
popen .................................................................................................... initiate pipe I/O to/from a process
printf ..................... ........................................ ....... ........................................................... output formatters
printmsg ................ ........................................ ...... .......... print formatted output with numbered arguments
putc .................................................. ................... ................... ... ............ put character or word on a stream
putenv ................................................................................................. change or add value to environment
putpwent .............................. .......... ............... ........................................................ write password file entry
puts ...... .................................................................................... ....................... put a string on a stream file
qsort ....... ...... ........... ........... ....... ............................. ............................................. .... ...... ............ quicker sort
rand ........ ............ ................. .................. .......... .......... ................... ................... ... random number generator
regcmp ......... ............................................. ...................................... compile and execute regular expression

-9-

Table of Contents

scanf ............................................................. .................. formatted input conversion, read from stream file
setbuf .................................................................................................... ...... assign buffering to a stream file
setjmp ............. ............................................................................................. ........... ............... non-local goto
sinh ...................................................................... .................. ...................................... hyperbolic functions
sleep ................................................. ............. ............................ .................... suspend execution for interval
sputl .................................................................... access long integer data in machine-independent manner
ssignal ...................................... ........................................................................................... software signals
stdio ............................................................................ standard buffered input/output stream file package
stdipc ............................... ................. ................................. stamdard inter-process communication package
string ................................................................................................................. character string operations
strtod .......................................................................................... convert string to double-precision integer
strtol ...................................................................................................................... convert string to integer
swab .................................................... ....................................................................................... swap bytes
system ................................................................ ....................................................... issue a shell command
termcap ....................................................................................... access terminal capabilities in termcap(5)
tmpfile ............. ....................................... .................................................................. create a temporary file
tmpnam ........ .......... .................... ........ .............................. ........ ........ ...... create a name for a temporary file
trig .......................................................................................................................... trigonometric functions
tsearch .............................................................................................................. manage binary search trees
ttyname ........................ ................ ............................ .............................................. find name of a terminal
ttyslot .................................. ...................... .............................................. find current user slot in utmp file
ungetc .................................................... ...................... .................... push character back into input stream
vprintf ................................ .......................................... print formatted output from varargs argument list

4. Special Files
ct ................ ................... ..................................... ............................... ................ CS/80 cartridge tape access
disc ..................................... ................................................................................... ........... direct disc access
graphics ........................................................ ........................................ information for crt graphics devices
hpib ............................................. ................ ....................................... ................ hpib interface information
iomap ................................................................................................................... physical address mapping
lp .......................... ...... ................................................. ................ ........ .......................... printer information
mem .............................. .......................................................................................................... core memory
modem .................................... ............................ ........................... asynchronous serial modem line control
mt .............................................. .................. ............................ ........... magnetic tape interface and controls
null ......................................................... ........... ....................................................... null file ("bit bucket")
pty ........................................................................................................................... pseudo-terminal driver
sttyv6 ................................................................................ version 6/PWD-compatibility terminal interface
termio .. ...... .............. ....... ................ ... .............................................. .................... general terminal interface
tty ......................................... ......... ................................................................ controlling terminal interface

5. File Formats
a.out ......................................................................................................... assembler and link editor output
acct ......................................................................................................... per-process accounting file format
ar ........................................ ......... ......... ....... ............................... ......... ................. .......... archive file format
bif .................................................................. ...................................... Bell Interchange Format file utilties
checklist .... ........................................................ ................................... list of file systems processed by fsck
coL..seq_8 ............................ ..................................... collating sequence tables for 8-bit NLS character sets
coL..seq_16 ............................................................. collating sequence tables for 16-bit NLS character sets
core .............................................................................. .......................................... format of core image file
cpio ........................................................................................................................... format of cpio archive
dialups ..... .... ............... ............. ........ .............. .............. ........ ........................... .......... dialup security control

-10-

Table of Contents

dir ...................................... ...... .................................................................................. SDF directory format
disktab ............ .......... .................................... ...................................... ..................... ...... disc description file
errfile ......... .... ..... ................... ................... .......... ..................................... ............... system error logging file
fs ...................... ......................... ....... ................... .......... ............................... ......... format of system volume
fspec ............ ................................. ............ .................. ....... ... ...................... format specification in text files
gettydefs ............................................................................. speed and terminal settings used by getty(lM)
group ............................... ................................................. ...................................... ...................... group file
inittab ........................................................................................................ control information for init(lM)
inode ..................... .............. ...................... ...... .............. .............. ........... ......... ......... ...... format of an i-node
issue .......................................... ........................................ ........................................ issue identification file
lif ..................................... ........................................................ ...... Logical Interchange Format description
magic ....................................................................................... magic numbers for HP-UX implementations
master ......... ........................... .......... ........ ........... ..................... ....... ........... master device information table
mknod ................................ ......... ......... ..... ...... .................. .................................... create a special file entry
mnttab ........ ................................ ............. .................. .......... ............................... mounted file system table
model . ................ ........ ............................... ..................................................... HP-UX machine identification
nlist ......................... ..... ............................ ...... ............................ ................................ nlist structure format
passwd .................. ............ ......... ......... ........ ............. ................. ................. .................. ............ password file
privgrp ........... ........ ...................................... ......... .................. ............................... privileged values format
profile . ........... ..... ................... ... ...... .......... ................................ ...... set up user's environment at login time
ranlib .................... ............................ ........ ........... ... .................. table of contents format for object libraries
sccsfile ...................... .................................... .............. .................................. ... ......... ...... format of SCCS file
term ... ............... ............................................. ............................ .......................... compiled term file format
terminfo .......................................................................................................... terminal capability data base
ttytype ................................................................................................. data base of terminal types by port
utmp ................................ ................................................................ ............. utmp and wtmp entry format

6. Games
No games are currently supported.

7. Miscellaneous Facilities
ascii ............ ......................................................................................... .............. map of ASCII character set
environ .... ......................... ......... .... ......... ......................... .................. ... ....... ... ..... ......... .... user environment
fcnt! .... ...................... ............ ......................... ...................... ................. .................... ...... file control options
hier .......... ................. ...................................... .......... ................................................... file system hierarchy
hpnls ......................................................................................................... Native Language Support model
kana8 ........ ........................ ........................ ............ ...... ................ map of KANAS character set used by NLS
langid .......................... .................................... ....................... language identification variable used by NLS
man .......................................................... ........ ...................... macros for formatting entries in this manual
math.. ......... ............................................... ....... ........... ........... ....................... math functions and constants
mm .............. ................................................................... the MM macro package for formatting documents
regexp ............ ........................ ........ ..................................... regular expression compile and match routines
roman8 .................... ........................................ .................. .................. ROMANS character set used by NLS
stat ................................................................................................. data returned by stat/fstat system call
term ............... ........................................... .................... ............... .... .................. conventional device names
types .................................................... ............................................................ primitive system data types
values. ................................. ......... ......... .... ... ............... ....... ........... ....... ......... ...... machine-dependent values
varargs ........................................................................................................... handle-variable-argument list

-11-

Table of Contents

9. Glossary

-12-

INTRO(3)

NAME
intro - introduction to subroutines and libraries
SYNOPSIS
#include
,~~'

#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
The level given is the level for which the library is available, not the level at which the
linkable object code appears. The supporting host will contain appropriate libraries
for HP-UX/RUN ONLY and HP-UX/NUCLEUS systems.
Origin:

System III, System V, UCB

DESCRIPTION
This section describes functions found in various libraries, other than those functions that directly
invoke HP-UX system primitives, which are described in Section 2 of this volume. Certain major
collections are identified by a letter after the section number:
(3C)

These functions, together with those of Section 2 and those marked (3S), constitute the
Standard C Library llbc, which is automatically loaded by the C compiler, cc(l). The link
editor Id(l) searches this library under the -Ic option. Declarations for some of these functions may be obtained from #include files indicated on the appropriate pages.
(3M) These functions constitute the Math Library, libm. They are automatically loaded as
needed by the FORTRAN compiler /77(1). They are not automatically loaded by the C
compiler, cc(l); however, the link editor searches this library under the -1m option.
Declarations for these functions may be obtained from the #include file .
Several generally useful mathematical constants are also defined there (see math(5».
(3N) These functions constitute the networking library, libn. The link editor searches this
library under the -In option. Declarations for these functions can be obtained from the
#include file .
(3S) These functions constitute the "standard I/O package" (see stdio(3S». These functions are
in the library libc, already mentioned. Declarations for these functions may be obtained
from the #include file .
(3X) Various specialized libraries. The files in which these libraries are found are given on the
appropriate pages.
DEFINITIONS
A character is any bit pattern able to fit into a byte on the machine. The null character is a
character with value 0, represented in the C language as '\0'. A character array is a sequence of
characters. A null-terminated character array is a sequence of characters, the last of which is the
null character. A string is a designation for a nul/-terminated character array. The null string is
a character array containing only the null character. A NULL pointer is the value that is
obtained by casting 0 into a pointer. The C language guarantees that this value will not match
that of any legitimate pointer, so many functions that return pointers return it to indicate an
error. NULL is defined as 0 in ; the user can include an appropriate definition if not
using .
FILES
/lib/libc.a
/lib /libm.a
/lib/libn.a
SEE ALSO
intro(2), stdio(3S), math(5).
ar(l), cc(l), m(l), Id(l), lintel), nm(l), ranlib(l), intro(2), stdio(3S).
DIAGNOSTICS
Functions in the C and Math Libraries (3C and 3M) may return the conventional values 0 or

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

INTRO(3)

±HUGE (the largest-magnitude single-precision floating-point numbers; HUGE is defined in the
header file) when the function is undefined for the given arguments or when the value
is not representable. In these cases, the external variable ermo (see errno(2)) is set to the value
EDOM or ERANGE.
WARNING

Many of the functions in the libraries call and/or refer to other functions and external variables
described in this section and in section 2 (SY8tem Call8). If a program inadvertantIy defines a
function or external variable with the same name, the presumed library version of the function or
external variable may not be loaded. The lint(l) program checker reports name conflicts of this
kind as "multiple declarations" of the names in question. Definitions for sections 2, 3C, and 38
are checked automatically. Other definitions can be included by nsing the -1 option (for example,
-1m includes definitions for the Math Library, section 3M). Use of lint is highly recommended.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

A64L(3C)

A64L (3C)

NAME

a641, l64a - convert between long integer and base-64 ASCII string
SYNOPSIS

long a641 (s)
char *8j
char *164a (I)
long Ij
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

These functions are used to maintain numbers stored in base-64 ASCII characters. This is a
notation by which long integers can be represented by up to six characters; each character
represents a "digit" in a radix-64 notation.
The characters used to represent "digits" are . for 0, / for 1, 0 through 9 for 2-11, A through Z
for 12-37, and a through z for 38-63.
The leftmost character is the least significant digit. For example,
aD

= (38 x 64°)+

(2 x 64 1)

= 166

A641 takes a pointer to a null-terminated base-64 representation and returns a corresponding
long value. If the string pointed to by s contains more than six characters, a641 will use the first
six.
L64a takes a long argument and returns a pointer to the corresponding base-64 representation.
If the argument is 0, 164a returns a pointer to a null string.
BUGS

The value returned by 164a is a pointer into a static buffer, the contents of which are overwritten
by each call.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

ABORT(3C)

NAME
abort - generate an IOT fault
SYNOPSIS
int abort ( )
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUNONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Abort first closes all open files if possible, then causes the SIGIOT signal to be sent to the process.
This usually results in termination with a core dump.
It is possible for abort to return control if SIGIOT is caught or ignored, in which case the value

returned is that of the kiU(2) system call.
SEE ALSO
adb(l), exit(2), kill(2), signal(2).
DIAGNOSTICS
If SIGIOT is neither caught nor ignored, and the current directory is writable, a core dump is
produced and the message "abort - core dumped" is written by the shell.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

ABS(3C)

ABS (3C)

NAME

abs - return integer absolute value
SYNOPSIS

iut abs (i)
iut i;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Abs returns the absolute value of its integer operand.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/500 and Integral Personal Computer:
The largest negative integer recognized by the system returns itself.
SEE ALSO

floor(3M).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

ASSERT (3X)

NAME

assert - verify program assertion
SYNOPSIS

#include
assert (expression)
int expression;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

This macro is useful for putting diagnostics into programs. When it is executed, if expression is
false (zero), assert prints
"Assertion failed: expression, file xyz, line nnn"
on the standard error output and aborts. In the error message, xyz is the name of the source file
and nnn the source line number of the assert statement.
Compiling with the preprocessor option -DNDEBUG (see cpp (1)), or with the preprocessor control statement "#define NDEBUG" ahead of the "#include " statement, will stop
assertions from being compiled into the program.
SEE ALSO

cpp(l), abort(3C).

Hewlett-Packard

July 2, 1985

ATOF(3C)

NAME

atof, atoi, atol - convert ASCII to numbers
SYNOPSIS

double atof (nptr)
char *nptr;
int atoi (nptr)
char *nptr;
long atol (nptr)
char *nptr;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System III

DESCRIPTION

These functions convert a string pointed to by nplr to floating, integer, and long integer representation respectively. The first unrecognized character ends the string.
Alaf recognizes an optional string of tabs and spaces, then an optional sign,' then a string of digits
optionally containing a decimal point, then an optional e or E followed by an optionally signed
integer.
Alai and alai recognize an optional string of tabs and spaces, then an optional sign, then a string
of digits.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/500:
A lai and alai are identical.
SEE ALSO

scanf(3S).
BUGS

There are no provisions for overflow.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 19, 1985

BESSEL (3M)

NAME
jO, j1, jn, yO, y1, yn - Bessel functions
SYNOPSIS
#include

double jO (x)
double x;
double jl (x)
double x;
double jn (n, x)
int n;
double x;
double yO (x)
double x;
double yl (x)
double x;
double yn (n, x)
int n;
double x;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
JO and Jl return Bessel functions of x of the first kind of orders 0 and 1 respectively. In returns
the Bessel function of x of the first kind of order n.
YO and yl return the Bessel functions of x of the second kind of orders 0 and 1 respectively. Yn
returns the Bessel function of x of the second kind of order n. The value of x must be positive.

DIAGNOSTICS
Non-positive arguments cause yO, yl and yn to return the value -HUGE and to set errna to
EDOM. They also cause a message indicating DOMAIN error to be printed on the standard error
output; the process will continue.
Arguments too large in magnitude cause jO, il, yO and yl to return zero and to set errna to
ERANGE. In addition, a message indicating TLOSS error is printed on the standard error output.
These error-handling procedures may be changed with the function matherr(3M).
SEE ALSO
matherr(3M).

Hewlett-Packard

July 9, 1985

BSEARCH ( 3C)

BSEARCH ( 3C )

NAME
bsearch - binary search a sorted table
SYNOPSIS
char *bsearch «char *) key, (char *) base, nel, sizeof (*key), compar)
unsigned nelj
int (*compar)( )j
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Level:
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
B8earch is a binary search routine generalized from Knuth (6.2.1) Algorithm B. It returns a
pointer into a table indicating where a datum may be found. The table must be previously sorted
in increasing order according to a provided comparison function. Key points to a datum instance
to be sought in the table. Ba8e points to the element at the base of the table. Nel is the number
of elements in the table. Compar is the name of the comparison function, which is called with
two arguments that point to the elements being compared. The function must return an integer
less than, equal to, or greater than zero as accordingly the first argument is to be considered less
than, equal to, or greater than the second.

EXAMPLE
The example below searches a table containing pointers to nodes consisting of a string and its
length. The table is ordered alphabetically on the string in the node pointed to by each entry.
This code fragment reads in strings and either finds the corresponding node and prints out the
string and its length, or prints an error message.
#include
#define TABSIZE

1000

struct node {
char *string;
int length;
};
struct node table[TABSIZE];

/ * these are stored in the table */

/ * table to be searched */

struct node *node_ptr, node;
int node_compare(); /* routine to compare 2 nodes */
char str-Bpace[20];
/* space to read string into */

node. string = str-Bpace;
while (scanf("%s", node. string) != EOF) {
node_ptr = (struct node *)bsearch«char *)(&node),
(char *)table, TABSIZE,
sizeof( struct node), node_compare);
if (nodLptr != NULL) {
(void)printf("string = %20s, length = %d\n",
node_ptr- >string, node_ptr- > length);
} else {

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

BSEARCH ( 3C )

BSEARCH ( 3C)

(void)printf("not found: %s\n", node.string);

}

/*
This routine compares two nodes based on an
alphabetical ordering of the string field.

*/
int
node_compare(node1, node2)
struct node *node1, *node2;
{
return strcmp(node1->string, node2->string);
}
NOTES
The pointers to the key and the element at the base of the table should be of type pointer-toelement, and cast to type pointer-to-character.
The comparison function need not compare every byte, so arbitrary data may be contained in the
elements in addition to the values being compared.
Although declared as type pointer-to-character, the value returned should be cast into type
pointer-to--element.
SEE ALSO
hsearch(3C), Isearch(3C), qsort(3C), tsearch(3C).
DIAGNOSTICS
A NULL pointer is returned if the key cannot be found in the table.
BUGS
A random entry is returned if more than one entry matches the selection criteria.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

CATREAD(3C)

CATREAD (3C)

NAME
catread - MPE/RTE-style message catalog support
SYNOPSIS
int catread (fd, set-Ilum, msg-Ilum, msg_buf, buflen [,argj ... )
int fd, set-Ilum, msg-Ilum, buflenj
char *msg_buf, *argj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD
Origin:

Native Language Support:
8-bit data, customs, messages
DESCRIPTION
Catread is layered on getmsg(9C) for supporting message catalog applications from MPE/RTE.
Refer to the external specifications for message catalogs on these systems for use of this routine.
The message read from the catalog may have embedded formatting information in the form
![digitj. An exclamation mark followed by a digit n is replaced by the nth argument string. If
exclamation marks are not numbered, they are replaced by the arguments in serial order. Either
all or none must be numbered.
If successful, returns the number of non-null bytes placed in the buffer.

DIAGNOSTICS
Catread returns a negative integer if seLnum or msg_num are not found in the catalog.
SEE ALSO
gencat(l), getmsg(3C), hpnls(7).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

CLOCK(3C)

NAME

clock - report CPU time used
SYNOPSIS
long clock ( )
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Clock returns the amount of CPU time (in microseconds) used since the first call to clock. The
time reported is the sum of the user and system times of the calling process and its terminated
child processes for which it has executed wait(2) or system(3S).

The resolution of the clock varies depending on the hardware and software configuration. See
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES for the various vales.
SEE ALSO
times(2), wait(2), system(3S).
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200: The clock resolution is 20 milliseconds.

Series 500:

The clock resolution is 10 milliseconds as a default.

BUGS

The value returned by clock is defined in microseconds for compatibility with systems that have
CPU· clocks with much higher resolution. Because of this, the value returned will wrap around
after accumulating only 2147 seconds of CPU time (about 36 minutes).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

CONV(3C)

NAME
toupper, tolower, _toupper, _tolower, toascii - translate characters
SYNOPSIS
#include

int toupper (e)
int ej
int tolower (e)
int Cj
int _toupper (e)
int Cj
int _tolower (e)
int Cj
int toaseii (e)
int ej
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Toupper and tolower have as domain the range of getc(3S): the integers from -1 through 255. If
the argument of toupper represents a lower-case letter, the result is the corresponding upper-case
letter. If the argument of tolower represents an upper-case letter, the result is the corresponding
lower-case letter. All other arguments in the domain are returned unchanged.

The macros _toupper and _tolower accomplish the same thing as toupper and tolower but have
restricted domains and are faster. _toupper requires a lower-case letter as its argument; its result
is the corresponding upper-case letter. The macro _tolower requires an upper-case letter as its
argument; its result is the corresponding lower-case letter. Arguments outside the domain cause
undefined results. Use of this form will never work with foreign character sets.
Toascii yields its argument with all bits turned off that are not part of a standard 7 bit ASCII
character; it is intended for compatibility with other systems.

SEE ALSO
ascii(7), ctype(3C), getc(3S), nLconv(3C).

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 2, 1985

CRYPT(3C)

CRYPT (3C)

NAME
crypt - generate password encryption
SYNOPSIS
char *crypt (key, salt)
char *key, *saitj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Crypt is the password encryption function. It is based on the NBS Data Encryption Standard
(DES), with variations intended (among other things) to frustrate use of hardware implementations of the DES for key search.
Key is a user's typed password. Salt is a two-character string chosen from the set [a-zA-Zo9./]; this salt string is used to perturb the DES algorithm in one of 4096 different ways, after
which the password is used as the key to encrypt repeatedly a constant string. The returned
value points to the encrypted password, in the same alphabet as the salt. The first two characters
are the salt itself.

SEE ALSO
login(l), passwd(l), getpass(3C), passwd(5)
BUGS
The return value points to static data that is overwritten by the next call to crypt (3C).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

CTERMID (38)

CTERMID ( 3S )

NAME

ctermid - generate file name for terminal
SYNOPSIS

#include
char *ctermid (s)
char *s;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Ctermid generates the path name of the controlling terminal for the current process, and stores it
in a string.
8 is a NULL pointer, the string is stored in an internal static area, the contents of which are
overwritten at the next call to ctermid, and the address of which is returned. Otherwise, 8 is
assumed to point to a character array of at least L_ctermid elements; the path name is placed in
this array and the value of 8 is returned. The constant L_ctermid is defined in the <8tdio.h>
header file.

NOTES

The difference between ctermid and ttyname (3C) is that ttyname must be handed a file descriptor
and returns the actual name of the terminal associated with that file descriptor, while ctermid
returns a string (jdev /tty) that will refer to the terminal if used as a file name. Thus ttyname is
useful only if the process already has at least one file open to a terminal.
SEE ALSO

ttyname(3C).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

CTIME(3C)

NAME

ctime, nl_ctime, daylight, local time, gmtime, asctime, nLasctime, timezone, tzset, tzname vert date and time to string

con~

SYNOPSIS

#include
char *ctime (clock)
long *clock;
char *nl_ctime (clock, format, langid)
long *clock; char *format; int langid;
struct tm *localtime (clock)
long *clock;
struct tm *gmtime (clock)
long *clock;
char *asctime (tm)
struct tm *tm;
char *nl_asctime (tm, format, langid)
struct tm *tm; char *format; int langid;
extern long timezone;
extern int daylight;
extern char *tzname[2];
void tzset ( )
HP~UX

COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP~UX/RUN

Origin:

System V

ONLY

Native Language Support:
8-bit data, customs, messages
DESCRIPTION
Ctime converts a long integer, pointed to by clock, representing the time in seconds since 00:00:00

GMT, January 1, 1970, and returns a pointer to a
the fields have constant width.

26~character

string in the following form. All

Sun Sep 1601:03:52 1973\n\0
NLctime extends the capabilities of ctime in two ways. First the format specification allows the
date and time to be output in a variety of ways. Format uses the field descriptors defined in
date(1}. If the format is the null string, the D_T.-FMT string defined by langinfo(3C} is used.
Second langid provides month and weekday names (when selected as alphabetic by the format
string) to be in the user's native language.
Localtime and gmtime return pointers to "tm" structures, described below. Localtime corrects
for the time zone and any summer time zone corrections (Daylight Savings time in the US),
according to the TZ string in the user's environment. Gmtime converts directly to Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT), which is the time the HP-UX System uses.
Asctime converts a "tm" structure to a
returns a pointer to the string.

26~character

string, as shown in the above example, and

NLasctime, like nLctime, allows the date string to be formatted, and month and weekday
names to be in the user's native language. However, like asctime , it takes "tm" as its argument.

Hewlett~Packard

~1~

JUly 2, 1985

CTIME(3C)

Declarations of all the functions and externals, and the "tm" structure, are in the
header file. The structure declaration is:
struct tm {
int t~ec;
int tm-1Ilin;
int tm--.hour;
int tm-1Ilday;
int tm-1Ilon;
int tm_year;
int tIIL.wday;
int tIIL.yday;
in t tIIL-isds t;

/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*

seconds (0 - 59) */
minutes (0 - 59) */
hours (0 - 23) */
day of month (1 - 31) */
month of year (0 - 11) */
year - 1900 */
day of week (Sunday = 0) */
day of year (0 - 365) */

};
Trl'L-isdst is non-zero if a summer time zone correction such as Daylight Savings time is in effect.
The external long variable timezone contains the difference, in seconds, between GMT and local
standard time (in EST, timezone is 5*60*60); the external variable daylight is non-zero if and only
if you have specified a summer time zone correction in your TZ environment variable. The values
of the external variables timezone, daylight, and tzname are set from the environment variable TZ
by the function tzset, which may be called directly, or indirectly through the functions localtime,
ctime, or nLctime. TZ is set by default when the user logs on, to a value in the local
/etc/profile file (see projile(5)).
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/500:
Tztab(5) is not currently supported.
SEE ALSO
time(2), getenv(3C), langinfo(3C), profile(5), environ(7), hpnls(7).
BUGS

The return values point to static data whose content is overwritten by each call.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

CTYPE(3C)

NAME

isalpha, isupper, islower, isdigit, isxdigit, isalnum, isspace, ispunct, isprint, isgraph, iscntrl, isasciiclassify characters
SYNOPSIS

#include
int isalpha (c)
int c;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

These macros classify character-coded integer values by table lookup. Each is a predicate returning nonzero for true, zero for false. Isascii is defined on all integer values; the rest are defined
only where isascii is true and on the single non-ASCII value EOF (see stdio(3S».
isalpha

c is a letter.

isupper

c is an upper-case letter.

islower

c is a lower-case letter.

is digit

c is a digit [0-9].
[a-~.

isxdigit

c is a hexadecimal digit [0-9], [A-F] or

isalnum

c is an alphanumeric (letter or digit).

isspace

c is a space, tab, carriage return, new-line, vertical tab, or form-feed.

ispunct

c is a punctuation character (neither control nor alphanumeric).

isprint

c is a printing character, code 040 (space) through 0176 (tilde).

isgraph

c is a printing character, like isprint except false for space.

iscntrl

c is a delete character (0177) or an ordinary control character (less than 040).

isascii

c is an ASCII character, code less than 0200.

DIAGNOSTICS
If the argument to any of these macros is not in the domain of the function, the result is

undefined.
SEE ALSO

nLctype(3C), stdio(3S), ascii(7).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

!July 2, 1985

CURSES (3X)

NAME

curses - CRT screen handling and optimization package
SYNOPSIS

#include
cc [ flags ) files -lcurses [ libraries )
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/NUCLEUS

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

These routines provide a means for updating screens with reasonable optimization. To ensure
proper initialization, the routine initscr{ ) must be called before any other routines that deal with
windows and screens are used. The endwin{) routine should be called before exiting to restore
conditions as they existed prior to program entry. Character-at-a-time input without echoing
(used in most interactive, screen oriented-programs), is obtained by calling "nonl{); cbreak{);
noecho{ );" after calling initscr{).
The full-curses interface provides a means for manipulating window data structures. Windows
can be thought of as two-dimensional arrays of characters representing all or part of a CRT
screen. A default window called stdscr is supplied. Other windows can be created by using
newwin. Windows are referred to by variables declared "WINDOW *"; the type WINDOW is
defined in curses.h to be a C structure. These data structures are manipulated with functions
described below. Two simple (and widely used) examples are move and addch. (More-general
versions of these functions are provided. Their names begin with 'w', to signify that you can
specify the window to be used. Routines not beginning with 'w' affect only stdscr.) After manipulation, re/resh{) is called to make the user's CRT screen look like stdscr.
Mini-Curses is a subset of curses. It only supports manipulation of the standard window. To
invoke this subset, use -DMINICURSES as a cc option. This level is smaller and faster than full
curses.
If the environment variable TERM INFO is defined, any program using curses checks for a local

terminal definition before checking in the standard place. For example, if the standard place is
/users/lib/terminfo, and TERM is set to "hp2623", the compiled file is normally found in
/users/lib/terminfo/h/hp2623 (the "h" is copied from the first letter of "hp2623" to avoid
creation of huge directories). However, if TERMINFO is set to /users/mark/myterms, curses
first
checks
/users/mark/myterms/h/hp2623,
then,
if
that
fails,
checks
/usr/lib/terminfo/h/hp2623. This is useful when developing experimental definitions and
when write permission in /users/lib/terminfo is not available.
SEE ALSO

terminfo(5) and termcap(3).
FUNCTIONS

All routines listed here are fully accessible to full curses. Those marked with an asterisk are also
available to Mini-Curses.
addch(ch)*
addstr(str)*
attroff( attrs)*
attron(attrs)*
attrset(attrs)*
baud rate()*
beep() *
box(win, vert, hor)

Hewlett-Packard

add a character to (like putchar)
(wraps to next line at end of line)
calls addch with each character in str
turn off attributes named
turn on attributes named
set current attributes to attrs
current tenninal speed
sound beep on tenninal
draw a box around edges of win
vert and hOT are chars to use for vert.

-1-

July 2, 1985

CURSES (3X)

cbreak( )*
clear() *
clearok(win, bf)
clrtobot( )
clrtoeol( )
delay_output(ms)*
delch( )
deleteln( )
delwin(win)
doupdate( )
draino(ms)
echo( )*
endwin()*
erase() *
erasechar( ) *
fixterm( )
flash() *
flushinp()*
getch( )
getstr(str)
gettmode( )
getyx(win, y, x)
has-ic( )*
has-il( )*
idlok( win, bf) *
inch()
initscr( )*
insch(c)
insertln( )
intrflush(win, bf)
keypad(win, bf)
killchar( )*
leaveok(win, flag)

longname()
meta(win, flag)*
move(y, x)*
mvaddch(y, x, ch)*
mvaddstr(y, x, str) *
mvcur(oldrow, oldcol, newrow, newcol}
mvdelch(y, x)
mvgetch(y, x)
mvgetstr (y, x, str)
mvinch(y, x)
mvinsch(y, x, c)
mvprintw(y, x, fmt, args)
mvscanw(y, x, fmt, args)
mvwaddch(win,~, x, ch)
mvwaddstr(win, y, x, str)
mvwdelch(win, y, x)
mvwgetch(win, y, x)
mvwgetstr(win, y, x, str)

Hewlett-Packard

and hor. edges of box
set cbreak mode
clear stdser
clear screen before next redraw of win
clear to bottom of stdser
clear to end of line on stdser
insert ms millisecond pause in output
delete a character
delete a line
delete win
update screen from all wnooutrefresh
drain output to ms milliseconds
set echo mode
end window modes
erase stdser
return user's erase character

restore tty to "in curses" state
flash screen or beep
throwaway any typeahead
get a char from tty
get a string through stdser
dummy entry point. Does nothing.
get (y, x) co-ordinates
true if terminal can do insert character
true if terminal can do insert line
use terminal's insert/delete line if bf != 0
get char at current (y, x) co~rdinates
initialize screens

insert a char
insert a line
interrupts flush output if bf is TRUE
enable keypad input
return current user's kill character
OK to leave cursor anywhere after refresh if

flag!=O for win, otherwise cursor must be left
at current position.
return verbose name of terminal
allow meta characters on input if flag != 0
move to (y, x) on stdser
move(y, x) then addch(ch)
move(y, x) then addstr(str)
low-level cursor motion
like delch, but move(y, x) first
etc.

JUly 2, 1985

CURSES (3X)

mvwin(win, by, bx)
mvwinch(win, y, x)
mvwinsch(win, iY, X, c)
mvwprintw(win, y, x, fmt, args)
mvwscanw(win, y, x, fmt, args)

napms(ms)
newpad(nlines, ncols)
newterm(type, fpout, fpin)*
newwin(lines, cols, begiIL-y, begiIL-X)
nl()*
nocbreak( )*
nodelay(win, bf)
noecho()*
nonl()*
noraw( )*
overlay(winI, win2)
overwrite(winI, win2)
pnoutrefresh(pad, pminrow, pmincol,
sminrow, smincol, smaxrow, smaxcol)

suspend program for ms milliseconds
create a new pad with given dimensons s
set up new terminal of given type to I/O on fpout/fpin.
create a new window.
set newline mapping
unset cbreak mode
enable nodelay input mode through getch
unset echo mode
unset newline mapping
unset raw mode
overlay winI on win2
overwrite winI on top of win2
like prefresh but with no output until doupdate called

prefresh(pad, pminrow, pmincol,
sminrow, smincol, smaxrow, smaxcol)

printw(fmt, argI, arg2, ... )
raw() *
refresh( )*
resetterm( ) *
resetty()*
saveterm( )*
savetty()*
scanw(fmt, argI, arg2, ... )
scroll(win)
scrollok( win, flag)
set_term(new)*
setscrreg(t, b)
setterm(type)
setupterm(term, filenum, errret)
standend ( ) *
standout( )*
subwin(win, lines, cols, begiIL-y, begiIL-X)
touchwin(win)
traceoff( )
traceon( )
typeahead (fd)
unctrl(ch)*
waddch(win, ch)
waddstr( win, str)
wattroff(win, attrs)
wattron(win, attrs)
wattrset(win, attrs)
wclear (win)
wclrto bot (win)
wclrtoeol(win)
wde1ch(win, c)
wdeleteln(win)

Hewlett-Packard

refresh from pad starting with given upper left corner
of pad with output to given portion of screen
printf on stdser
set raw mode
make current screen look like stdser
set tty modes to "out of curses" state
reset tty flags to stored value
save current modes as "in curses" state
store current tty flags
scanf through stdser
scroll win one line
allow terminal to scroll if flag != 0
set the current terminal to new
set user scrolling region to lines t through b
establish terminal with given type
initialize specified terminal
clear standout mode attribute
set standout mode attribute
create a subwindow
change aU of win
dummy entry point. Does nothing
dummy entry point. Does nothing
use file descriptor fd to check typeahead
printable version of ch
add char to win
add string to win
turn off attrs in win
turn on attrs in win
set attrs in win to attrs
clear win
clear to bottom of win
clear to end of line on win
delete char from win
delete line from win

-3-

July 2, 1985

CURSES (3X)

werase(win)
wgetch(win)
wgetstr(win, str)
winch(win)
winsch(win, c)
winsertln(win)
wmove(win, y, x)
wnoutrefresh(win)
wprintw(win, fmt, arg1, arg2, ... )
wrefresh(win)
wscanw(win, fmt, arg1, arg2, ... )
wsetscrreg(win, t, b)
wstandend(win)
wstandout(win)

CURSES (3X)

erase win

get a char through win
get a string through win
get char at current (y, x) in win
insert char into win
insert line into win
set current (y, x) co-ordinates on win
refresh but no screen output
printf on win
make screen look like win
scanf through win
set scrolling region of win
clear standout attribute in win
set standout attribute in win

TERMINFO LEVEL ROUTINES

These routines should be called by programs wishing to deal directly with the terminfo database.
Due to the low level of this interface, it is discouraged. Initially, setupterm should be called. This
will define the set of terminal dependent variables defined in terminfo(5). The include files
and should be included to get the definitions for these strings, numbers,
and flags. Parameterized strings should be passed through tparm to instantiate them. All terminfo strings (including the output of tparm) should be printed with tputs or putp . Before exiting, resetterm should be called to restore the tty modes. (Programs desiring shell escapes or
suspending with control-Z can call resetterm before the shell is called and fixterm after returning
from the shell.)
fixterm( )
resetterm( )
setupterm(term, fd, rc)

restore tty modes for terminfo use
(called by setupterm)
reset tty modes to state before program entry
read in database. Terminal type is the
character string term, all output is to UNIX
System file descriptor fd. A status value is
returned in the integer pointed to by re: 1
is normal. The simplest call would be
setupterm(O, 1, 0) which uses all defaults.

tparm(str, pI, p2, ... , p9)
tputs( str, affcnt, putc)

putp(str)
vidputs( attrs, putc)

vidattr( attrs)

Hewlett-Packard

instantiate string str with parms Pi"
apply padding info to string str.
affent is the number of lines affected,
or 1 if not applicable. Pute is a
putchar-like function to which the characters
are passed, one at a time.
handy function that calls tputs
(str, 1, putchar).
output the string to put terminal in video
attribute mode attrs, which is any
combination of the attributes listed below.
Chars are passed to putchar-like
function pute.
Like vidputs but outputs through
putchar.

-4-

July 2, 1985

CURSES (3X)

TERMCAP COMPATIBILITY ROUTINES

These routines were included as a conversion aid for programs that use termcap. Their parameters are the same as for termcap, but they are emulated using the term info database. They may
be removed at a later date.
tgetent (bp, name)
look up termcap entry for name
tgetfiag(id)
get boolean entry for id
tgetnum(id)
get numeric entry for id
tgetstr(id, area)
get string entry for id
apply parms to given cap
tgoto( cap, col, row)
tputs(cap, affcnt, fn)
apply padding to cap calling fn as putchar
ATTRIBUTES

The following video attributes can be passed to the functions attron,attroff,attrset.
A_STANDOUT
Terminal's best highlighting mode
A_UNDERLINE
Underlining
A.....REVERSE
Reverse video
A.....BLINK
Blinking
A~IM
Half bright
A.....BOLD
Extra bright or bold
A.....BLANK
Blanking (invisible)
A.....PROTECT
Protected
A-AL TCHARSET
Alternate character set

Hewlett-Packard

-5-

July 2, 1985

CURSES (3X)

FUNCTION KEYS
The following function keys are returned by getch if keypad has been enabled and the function is
supported. Note that some of these may not be currently supported due to lack of definitions in
termin/o, or because the terminal does not transmit a unique code when the key is pressed.
Name

Value

KEY~REAK

0401
break key (unreliable)
The four arrow keys ...
0402
0403
0404
0405
0406
Home key (upward+left arrow)
0407
backspace (unreliable)
0410
Function keys. Space for 64 is reserved.
(KEYJO+(n))
Formula for fn.
Delete line
0510
Insert line
0511
0512
Delete character
0513
Insert char or enter insert mode
Exit insert char mode
0514
0515
Clear screen
0516
Clear to end of screen
0517
Clear to end of line
0520
Scroll 1 line forward
0521
Scroll 1 line backwards (reverse)
0522
Next page
0523
Previous page
0524
Set tab
0525
Clear tab
0526
Clear all tabs
Enter or send (unreliable)
0527
soft (partial) reset (unreliable)
0530
0531
reset or hard reset (unreliable)
0532
print or copy
home down or bottom (lower left)
0533

KEY--.DOWN
KEY_UP
KEY.-LEFT
KEY-RIGHT
KEY-HOME
KEY~ACKSPACE

KEYJO
KEYJ(n)
KEY--.DL
KEY-..lL
KEY--.DC
KEY-..lC
KEY~IC

KEY_CLEAR
KEY~OS
KEY~OL

KEY-BF
KEY_SR
KEY--.NPAGE
KEYJPAGE
KEY_STAB
KEY_CTAB
KEY_CATAB
KEY~NTER

KEY_SRESET
KEY-RESET
KEYJRINT
KEY.-LL

Key name

WARNING
The plotting library plot(3X) and the curses library curses(3X) both use the names erase() and
move(). The curses versions are macros. If you need both libraries, put the plot(3X) code in a
different source file than the curses(3X) code, and/or #undef move() and erase() in the plot(3X)
code.

Hewlett-Packard

-6-

July 2, 1985

CUSERID ( 3S)

CUSERID ( 3S )

NAME
cuserid - get character login name of the user
SYNOPSIS
#include
char *cuserid (s)
char *Sj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
HP-UX/NUCLEUS
Level:
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Cuserid generates a character-string representation of the login name that the owner of the
current process is logged in under. If s is a NULL pointer, this representation is generated in an
internal static area, the address of which is returned. Otherwise, s is assumed to point to an
array of at least L_cuserid characters; the representation is left in this array. The constant
L_cuserid is defined in the header file.
DIAGNOSTICS
If the login name cannot be found, cuserid returns a NULL pointer; if s is not a NULL pointer, a
null character (\0) will be placed at s[O).
BUGS

Cuserid uses getpwnam(3C); thus the results of a user's call to the latter will be obliterated by a
subsequent call to the former.
SEE ALSO
getlogin(3C), getpwent(3C).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

DIAL (3C)

NAME

dial - establish an out-going terminal line connection
SYNOPSIS

#include
int dial (call)
CALL callj
void undial (fd)
int fdj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

System V

Dial returns a file-descriptor for a terminal line open for read/write. The argument to dial is a
CALL structure (defined in the header file).

When finished with the terminal line, the calling program must invoke undial to release the semaphore that has been set during the allocation of the terminal device.
The definition of CALL in the < dial.h> header 'file is:
typedef struct {
struct termio *attr;
int
baud;
int
speed;
char
*line;
char
*telno;
int
modem;
char
*device;
int

/ * pointer to termio attribute struct */
/ * transmission data rate */
/* 212A modem: low=300, high=1200 */
/* device name for out-going line */
/* pointer to tel-no digits string */
/* specify modem control for direct lines */
!*Will hold the name of the device usedd
to make a connection */
!* The length of the device used to
make connection */

dev-.len;

} CALL;
The CALL element speed is intended only for use with an outgoing dialed call, in which case its
value should be either 300 or 1200 to identify the 113A modem, or the high- or low-speed setting
on the 212A modem. Note that the 113A modem or the low-speed setting of the 212A modem will
transmit at any rate between 0 and 300 bits per second. However, the high-speed setting of the
212A modem transmits and receivers at 1200 bits per second only. The CALL element baud is for
the desired transmission baud rate. For example, one might set baud to 110 and speed to BOO (or
1200). However, if speed set to 1200 baud must be set to high (1200).
If the desired terminal line is a direct line, a string pointer to its device-name should be placed in
the line element in the CALL structure. Legal values for such terminal device names are kept in
the L-devices file. In this case, the value of the baud element need not be specified as it will be
determined from the L-devices file.

The telno element is for a pointer to a character string representing the telephone number to be
dialed. Such numbers may consist only of symbols described on the acu(7). The termination
symbol will be supplied by the dial function, and should not be included in the telno string passed
to dial in the CALL structure.
The CALL element modem is used to specify whether or not modem control is required for direct
lines. This element should be non-zero if modem control is required for the line. The CALL element attr is a pointer to a termio structure, as defined in the termio.h header file. A NULL value
for this pointer element may be passed to the dial function, but if such a structure is included, the
elements specified in it will be set for the outgoing terminal line before the connection is established. This is often important for certain attributes such as parity and baud-rate.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

DIAL (3C)

DIAL(3C)

The CALL element device is used to hold the device name (cuI..) that establishes the connection.
The CALL element dev_len is the length of the device name that is copied into the array device.
FILES
/usr /lib/uucp /L-devices
lusr /spool/uucp/LCK .. tty-device
SEE ALSO
uucp(lC), alarm(2), read(2), write(2), acu(4), termio(4).
DIAGNOSTICS
On failure, a negative value indicating the reason for the failure will be returned. Mnemonics for
these negative indices as listed here are defined in the < dial.h> header file.
INTRPT
D--.HUNG
NO-.ANS
ILLJD
AJROB
LJROB
NO-.Ldv
DV.-NT-.A
DV.-NT-.K
NOJD-.A
NOJD-.K

-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7

-8
-9
-10
-11

/ * interrupt occurred *I
/* dialer hung (no return from write) */
1* no answer within 10 seconds */
/ * illegal baud-rate *I
/* acu problem (openO failure) */
/* line problem (openO failure) */
/* can't open LDEVS file */
/ * requested device not available */
/* requested device not known */
/ * no device available at requested baud */
/* no device known at requested baud */

WARNINGS
Including the header file automatically includes the header file.
The above routine uses , which causes it to increase the size of programs, not otherwise
using standard I/O, more than might be expected.
BUGS
An alarm(2) system call for 3600 seconds is made (and caught) within the dial module for the
purpose of "touching" the LCK.. file and constitutes the device allocation semaphore for the terminal device. Otherwise, uucp(1C) may simply delete the LCK.. entry on its 90-minute clean-up
rounds. The alarm may go off while the user program is in a read(2) or write(2) system call,
causing an apparent error return. If the user program expects to be around for an hour or more,
error returns from reads should be checked for (errno==EINTR), and the read possibly reissued.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2,1985

DIRECTORY (3C)

DIRECTORY ( 3C )

NAME
opendir, readdir, telldir, seekdir, rewinddir, closedir - directory operations
SYNOPSIS
#include
DIR *opendir(filename}
char *filenamej
struct direct *readdir( dirp}
DIR *dirpj
long telldir( dirp}
DIR *dirpj
seekdir( dirp, loc}
DIR *dirpj
long locj
rewinddir( dirp}
DIR *dirpj
closedir( dirp}
DIR *dirpj

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UXjSTANDARD
Origin:

UeB

DESCRIPTION
The purpose of this library package is to provide functions which allow programs to read directory
entries without having to know the actual directory format associated with the file system. This
allows programs to be ported from one file system to another. Therefore, this is the recommended
way to read directory entries.
Opendir opens the directory named by filename and associates a directory stream with it. Opendir returns a pointer to be used to identify the directory stream in subsequent operations. The
pointer NULL is returned if filename cannot be accessed, if filename is not a directory, or if
sufficient memory cannot be allocated for a buffer of size DIRBLKSIZ blocks (see HARDWARE
DEPENDENCIES).
Readdir returns a pointer to the next directory entry. It returns NULL upon reaching the end of
the directory or detecting an invalid seekdir operation.
Telldir returns the current location, in bytes, associated with the named directory stream.
Seekdir sets the position of the next readdir operation on the directory stream. Loc is a byte offset
within the directory file. The new position reverts to the one associated with the directory stream
when the telldir operation was performed. Values returned by telldir are good only for the lifetime
of the DIR pointer from which they are derived. If the directory is closed and then re-opened, the
telldir value may be invalidated due to undetected directory compaction. It is safe to use a previous telldir value immediately after a call to opendir and before any calls to readdir.
Rewinddir resets the position of the named directory stream to the beginning of the directory.
Closedir causes the named directory stream to be closed, and the structure associated with the
DIR pointer to be freed.

See lusr/include/ndir.h for a description of the fields available in a directory entry. The preferred
way to search the current directory for entry "name" is:
len = strlen(name};
dirp = opendir("."};
for (dp = readdir(dirp); dp != NULL; dp = readdir(dirp}) {

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

DIRECTORY (3C)

if (dp->cLnamlcn == len && istrcmp(dp->cLname, name)) {
closedir( dirp);
return FOUND;

}
closedir( dirp);
return NOTJOUND;
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200:
Malloc(3C) is used to allocate memory.
Series 500:
Malloc(3C) is used to allocate memory.
SEE ALSO

/usr/include/ndir.h, close(2), Iseek(2), open(2), read(2).

Hewlett-Packard

- 2-

November 15, 1985

DRAND48 ( 3C)

NAME

drand48, erand48, Irand48, nrand48, mrand48, jrand48, srand48, seed48, lcong48 - generate uniformly distributed pseudo-random numbers
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

SYNOPSIS

double drand48 ( )
double erand48 (xsubi)
unsigned short xsubi[3];
long Irand48 ( )
long nrand48 (xsubi)
unsigned short xsubi[3];
long mrand48 ( )
long jrand48 (xsubi)
unsigned short xsubi[3];
void srand48 (seedval)
long seedval;
unsigned short *seed48 (seed16v)
unsigned short seed16v[3];
void Icong48 (param)
unsigned short param[7];
DESCRIPTION

This family of functions generates pseudo-random numbers using the well-known linear
congruential algorithm and 48-bit integer arithmetic.
Functions drand48 and erand48 return non-negative double-precision lioating-point values uniformly distributed over the interval $[0.0,-1.0).$
Functions Irand48 and nrand48 return non-negative long integers uniformly distributed over the
interval $[0,-2 sup 31 ).$
Functions mrand48 and jrand48 return signed long integers uniformly distributed over the interval $[-2 sup 31 , -2 sup 31 ).$
Functions srand48, seed48 and Icong48 are initialization entry points, one of which should be
invoked before either drand48, Irand48 or mrand48 is called. (Although it is not recommended
practice, constant default initializer values will be supplied automatically if drand48, Irand48 or
mrand48 is called without a prior call to an initialization entry point.) Functions erand48,
nrand48 and jrand48 do not require an initialization entry point to be called first.
All the routines work by generating a sequence of 48-bit integer values, $X sub i ,$ according to
the linear congruential formula
X sub{n+1} -=-(aX sub n' + 'c) sub {roman mod-m} --------n>=O.
The parameter $m'='2 sup 48$; hence 48-bit integer arithmetic is performed. Unless Icong48
has been invoked, the multiplier value $a$ and the addend value $c$ are given by
a-mark =-roman 5DEECE66D'sub 16-=-roman 273673163155'sub 8
c-lineup =-roman B'sub 16-=-roman 13'sub 8.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

DRAND48 ( 3C )

DRAND48 (3C)

The value returned by any of the functions drand48, erand48, lrand48, nrand48, mrand48 or
jrand48 is computed by first generating the next 48-bit $X sub i$ in the sequence. Then the
appropriate number of bits, according to the type of data item to be returned, are copied from the
high-order (leftmost) bits of $X sub i$ and transformed into the returned value.
The functions drand48, Irand48 and mrand48 store the last 48-bit $X sub i$ generated in an
internal buffer; that is why they must be initialized prior to being invoked. The functions
erand48, nrand48 and jrand48 require the calling program to provide storage for the successive
$X sub i$ values in the array specified as an argument when the functions are invoked. That is
why these routines do not have to be initialized; the calling program merely has to place the
desired initial value of $X sub i$ into the array and pass it as an argument. By using different
arguments, functions erand48, nrand48 and jrand48 allow separate modules of a large program to
generate several independent streams of pseudo-random numbers, i.e., the sequence of numbers in
each stream will not depend upon how many times the routines have been called to generate
numbers for the other streams.
The initializer function srand48 sets the high-order 32 bits of $X sub i$ to the 32 bits contained
in its argument. The low-order 16 bits of $X sub i$ are set to the arbitrary value $roman 330E
sub 16 .$
The initializer function seed48 sets the value of $X sub i$ to the 48-bit value specified in the
argument array. In addition, the previous value of $X sub i$ is copied into a 48-bit internal
buffer, used only by seed48, and a pointer to this buffer is the value returned by seed48. This
returned pointer, which can just be ignored if not needed, is useful if a program is to be restarted
from a given point at some future time - use the pointer to get at and store the last $X sub i$
value, and then use this value to reinitialize via seed48 when the program is restarted.
The initialization function Icong48 allows the user to specify the initial $X sub i ,$ the multiplier
value $a,$ and the addend value $c.$ Argument array elements param[O-2} specify $X sub i ,$
param[3-5} specify the multiplier $a,$ and param[6} specifies the 16-bit addend $c.$ After
/cong48 has been called, a subsequent call to either srand48 or seed48 will restore the "standard"
multiplier and addend values, $a$ and $c,$ specified on the previous page.

SEE ALSO

creat(2), dup(2), open(2), fclose(3S), pipe(2), fclose(3S), fseek(3S), popen(3S).
DIAGNOSTICS
Fopen and /reopen return a NULL pointer if file-name cannot be accessed, if there are too many

open files, or if the arguments are incorrect.
Fdopen returns a NULL if there are too many open files, or if the arguments are ill-formed.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

FREAD (3S)

NAME
fread, fwrite - buffered binary input/output to a stream file
SYNOPSIS
#include
int fread (ptr, size, nitems, stream)
char *ptrj
int size, nitemsj
FILE *streamj
int fwrite (ptr, size, nitems, stream)
char *ptrj
int size, nitemsj
FILE *streamj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Fread copies, into an array pointed to by ptr, nitems items of data from the named input stream,
where an item of data is a sequence of bytes (not necessarily terminated by a null byte) of length
size. Fread stops appending bytes if an end-of-file or error condition is encountered while reading stream, or if nitems items have been read. Fread leaves the file pointer in stream, if defined,
pointing to the byte following the last byte read if there is one. Fread does not change the contents of stream.

Fwrite appends at most nit ems items of data from the array pointed to by ptr to the named output stream. Fwrite stops appending when it has appended nitems items of data or if an error
condition is encountered on stream. Fwrite does not change the contents of the array pointed to
by ptr.
The argument size is typically sizeof(*ptr) where the pseudo-function sizeof specifies the length of
an item pointed to by ptr. If ptr points to a data type other than char it should be cast into a
pointer to char.
SEE ALSO
read(2), write(2), fopen(3S), getc(3S), gets(3S), printf(38), putc(3S), puts(3S), scanf(3S).
DIAGNOSTICS
Fread and fwrite return the number of items read or written. If size or nit ems is non-positive, no
characters are read or written and 0 is returned by both fread and fwrite.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 2, 1985

FREXP(3C)

NAME
frexp, ldexp, modf - split floating-point into mantissa and exponent
SYNOPSIS
double frexp (value, eptr)
double valuej
int *eptrj

double ldexp (value, exp)
double valuej
int expj
double modf (value, iptr)
double value, *iptrj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Every non-zero nwnber can be written uniquely as x * 2 n, where the "mantissa" (fraction) x is in
'
the range 0.5 ::; I x I < 1.0, and the "exponent" n is an integer.

Frexp returns the mantissa of a double value, and stores the exponent indirectly in the location
pointed to by eptr. If value is zero, both results returned by Irexp are zero.
Ldexp returns the quantity value * 2exp •
ModI returns the signed fractional part of value and stores the integral part indirectly in the location pointed to by iptr.
DIAGNOSTICS
If ldexp would cause overflow, ±HUGE is returned (according to the sign of value), and ermo is
set to ERANGE.
If Idexp would cause underflow, zero is returned and ermo is set to ERANGE.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

FSEEK(3S)

NAME

fseek, rewind, ftell - reposition a file pointer in a stream
SYNOPSIS
#include
int fseek (stream, offset, ptrname)
FILE *stream;
long offset;
int ptrname;
long rewind (stream)
FILE .stream;
long ftell (stream)
FILE .stream;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Fseek sets the position of the next input or output operation on the stream. The new position is
at the signed distance offset bytes from the beginning, from the current position, or from the end
of the file, according as ptrname has the value 0, 1, or 2.
Rewind(stream) is equivalent to /seek(stream, OL, 0).
Fseek and rewind undo any effects of ungetc(3S).

After /seek or rewind, the next operation on a file opened for update may be either input or output. Rewind also does an implicit clearerr(3s) call.
Ftell returns the offset of the current byte relative to the beginning of the file associated with the
named stream.

SEE ALSO
Iseek(2), fopen(3S), popen(3S), ungetc(3S).
DIAGNOSTICS
Fseek returns non-zero for improper seeks, otherwise zero. An improper seek can be, for example,
an /seek done on a file that has not been opened via /open; in particular, /seek may not be used
on a terminal, or on a file opened via popen(3S).
Ftell returns -1 for error conditions.

WARNING
Although on HP-UX an offset returned by /tell is measured in bytes, and it is permissible to seek
to positions relative to that offset, portability to non-UNIX systems requires that an offset be
used by /seek directly. Arithmetic malY not meaningfully be performed on such an offset, which is
not necessarily measured in bytes.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

FTW(3C)

FTW (3C)

NAME
ftw - walk a file tree
SYNOPSIS
#include
int ftw (path, fn, depth)
char *path;
int (*fn) ( );
int depth;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Ftw recursively descends the directory hierarchy rooted in path. For each object in the hierarchy,
Itw calls In, passing it a pointer to a null-terminated character string containing the name of the
object, a pointer to a stat structure (see stat(2») containing information about the object, and an
integer. Possible values of the integer, defined in the header file, are FTWJ for a file,
FTW-.D for a directory, FTW-.DNR for a directory that cannot be read, and FTW~S for an
object for which stat could not successfully be executed. If the integer is FTW-.DNR, descendants
of that directory will not be processed. If the integer is FTW~S, the stat structure will contain
garbage. An example of an object that would cause FTW~S to be passed to In would be a file in
a directory with read but without execute (search) permission.

Ftw visits a directory before visiting any of its descendants.
The tree traversal continues until the tree is exhausted, an invocation of In returns a nonzero
value, or some error is detected within Itw (such as an I/O error). If the tree is exhausted, Itw
returns zero. If In returns a nonzero value, Itw stops its tree traversal and returns whatever value
was returned by In. If Itw detects an error, it returns -1, and sets the error type in errna.

Ftw uses one file descriptor for each level in the tree. The depth argument limits the number of
file descriptors so used. If depth is zero or negative, the effect is the same as if it were 1. Depth
must not be greater than the number of file descriptors currently available for use. Ftw will run
more quickly if depth is at least as large as the number of levels in the tree.
SEE ALSO
stat(2), malloc(3C).
BUGS
Because Itw is recursive, it is possible for it to terminate with a memory fault when applied to
very deep file structures.
It could be made to run faster and use less storage on deep structures at the cost of considerable
complexity.
Ftw uses mallac (3C) to allocate dynamic storage during its operation. If Itw is forcibly terminated, such as by langjmp being executed by In or an interrupt routine, Itw will not have a
chance to free that storage, so it will remain permanently allocated. A safe way to handle interrupts is to store the fact that an interrupt has occurred, and arrange to have In return a nonzero
value at its next invocation.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

GAMMA (3M)

NAME
gamma, signgam - log gamma function
SYNOPSIS
#include
double gamma (x)
double x;
extern int signgam;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Gamma returns In( I r( x) I ), where r( x) is defined as

e- t tX-1dt. The sign of r( x) is returned

in the external integer signgam. The argument x may not be a non-positive integer. (Gamma is
defined over the reals excluding the non-positive integers).
The following C program fragment might be used to calculate

if «y = gamma(x» > LNJ1AXDOUBLE)
errore );
y = signgam * exp(y);
where LNJ1AXDOUBLE is the least value that causes exp(3M) to return a range error, and is
defined in the header file.
DIAGNOSTICS
For non-positive integer arguments HUGE is returned, and erma is set to ED OM. A message
indicating SING error is printed on the standard error output.
If the correct value would overflow, gamma returns HUGE and sets erma to ERANGE.

These error-handling procedures may be changed with the function matherr(3M).
SEE ALSO
exp(3M), matherr(3M), values(5).

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 9, 1985

GETC(3S)

NAME
getc, getchar, fgetc, getw - get character or word from a stream file
SYNOPSIS
#include
int getc (stream)
FILE *stream;
int getchar ()
int fgetc (stream)
FILE *stream;
int getw (stream)
FILE *stream;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UXjRUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Getc returns the next character (Le., byte) from the named input stream, as an integer. It also
moves the file pointer, if defined, ahead one character in stream. Getchar is defined as
getc{stdin). Getc and getchar are macros and so cannot be used if a function is necessary; for
example one cannot have a function pointer point to them.

Fgetc behaves like getc, but is a function rather than a macro. Fgetc runs more slowly than getc,
but it takes less space per invocation and its name can be passed as an argument to a function.
Getw returns the next word (i.e. int in 0) from the named input stream. Getw increments the
associated file pointer, if defined, to point to the next word. The size· of a word is the size of an
integer and varies from machine to machine. Getw assumes no special alignment in the file.
SEE ALSO
fclose(3S), ferror(3S), fopen(3S), fread(3S), gets(3S), putc(3S), scanf(3S).
DIAGNOSTICS
These functions return the constant EOF at end-of-file or upon an error. Because EOF is a valid
integer, ferror(3S) should be used to detect getw errors.
WARNING
If the integer value returned by getc, getchar, or fgetc is stored into a character variable and then
compared against the integer constant EOF, the comparison may never succeed, because signextension of a character on widening to integer is machine-dependent.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

GETC(3S)

BUGS

Because it is implemented as a macro, getc treats incorrectly a stream argument with side effects.
In particular, getc( *f++) does not work sensibly. Fgetc should be used instead.
Because of possible differences in word length and byte ordering, files written using putw are
machine-dependent, and may not be read using getw on a different (non-HP-UX) processor.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

GETCWD(3C)

NAME
getcwd - get path-name of current working directory
SYNOPSIS
char *getcwd (buf, size)
char *bufj
int sizej
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Getewd returns a pointer to the current directory path-name. The value of size must be at least
two greater than the length of the path-name to be returned.
If buf is a NULL pointer, getcwd will obtain size bytes of space using mal/oe(3C). In this case, the
pointer returned by getcwd may be used as the argument in a subsequent call to free.

The function is implemented by using popen(3S) to pipe the output of the pWd(l) command into
the specified string space.
EXAMPLE
char *cwd, *getcwdO;

if «cwd

= getcwd«char *)NULL, 64))
perror("pwd");
exit(l);

== NULL) {

}
printf("%s\n", cwd);
SEE ALSO
pwd(l), malloc(3C), popen(3S).
DIAGNOSTICS
Returns NULL with errno set if size is not large enough, or if an error ocurrs in a lower-level
function.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

GETENV(3C)

NAME

getenv - return value for environment name
SYNOPSIS

char *getenv (name)
char *name;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Getenv searches the environment list (see environ(7)) for a string of the form name=value, and
returns a pointer to the value in the current environment if such a string is present, otherwise a
NULL pointer. Name may be either the desired name, null-terminated, or of the form
name=value, in which case getenv uses the portion to the left of the "=" as the search key.
SEE ALSO

exec(2), putenv(3C), environ(5).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

GETFSENT ( 3X)

GETFSENT ( 3X )

NAME

getfsent, getfsspec, getfsfile, getfstype, setfsent, endfsent - get file system descriptor file entry
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

Large Machine/HP Extension

Origin:

HP and UeB

SYNOPSIS

#include
struct checklist *getfsentO
struct checklist *getfsspec (spec)
char *specj
struct checklist *getfsfile(file)
char *filej
struct checklist *getfstype(type)
char *typej
int setfsentO
int endfsentO
DESCRIPTION

Get/sent, get/sspec, get/sfile, and get/stype each return a pointer to an object with the following
structure containing the broken-out fields oti a line in the / etc / checklist file. The structure is
declared in the header file:
struct checklist {
char
*fs-spec;
char
*fs_bspec;
*fsJle;
char
char
*fs_type;
int
fs_passno;
in t
fLireq;

1* special file name

*/
/ * block special file name */
1* file sys directory name */
1* type: ro, rw, sw, xx */
1* fsck pass number
*/
/* backup frequency
*/

};
The fields have meanings described in checklist(5). If the block special file name, the file system
directory name, the type and the pass number are not all defined on the associated line in
/etc/checklist, these routines will return pointers to NULL in the fs_bspec, fSJle and fs_type
fields and -1 in the fs_passno field. Fs~req is reserved for future use. If the fs~req field is not
present on the line these routines will return -1 in the fs~req field.

Get/sent reads the next line of the file, opening the file if necessary.
Set/sent opens and rewinds the file.
End/sent closes the file.
Get/sspec and get/sfile sequentially search from the beginning of the file until a matching special
file name or file system file name is found, or until EOF is encountered. Get/stype does likewise,
matching on the file system type field.
FILES

/ etc / checklist
SEE ALSO

checklist(5)
DIAGNOSTICS

Null pointer (0) returned on EOF, invalid entry or error.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 2, 1985

GETFSENT ( 3X)

GETFSENT (3X)

BUGS

All infonnation is contained in a static area so it must be copied if it is to be saved.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

GETGRENT (3C)

NAME

getgrent, getgrgid, getgrnam, setgrent, endgrent, fgetgrent - get group file entry
SYNOPSIS

#include
struct group *getgrent ( )
struct group *getgrgid (gid)
int gid;
struct group *getgrnam (name)
char *name;
void setgrent ( )
void endgrent ( )
struct group *fgetgrent (f)
FILE *f;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/NUCLEUS

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Getgrent, getgrgid and getgrnam each return pointers to an object with the following structure
containing the broken-out fields of a line in the /etc/group file. Each line contains a "group"
structure, defined in the < grp.h> header file.
struct

group {
char
char
int
char

*gr-Ilame; /* the name of the group */
*gr_passwd;
/* the encrypted group password */
gr_gid;
/* the numerical group ID */
**gr-Illem; /* vector of pointers to member names */

};
Getgrent when first called returns a pointer to the first group structure in the file; thereafter, it
returns a pointer to the next group structure in the file; so, successive calls may be used to search
the entire file. Getgrgid searches from the beginning of the file until a numerical group id matching gid is found and returns a pointer to the particular structure in which it was found. Getgrnam searches from the beginning of the file until a group name matching name is found and
returns a pointer to the particular structure in which it was found. If an end-of-file or an error is
encountered on reading, these functions return a NULL pointer.
A call to setgrent has the effect of rewinding the group file to allow repeated searches. Endgrent
may be called to close the group file when processing is complete.

Fgetgrent returns a pointer to the next group structure in the stream
of jete/group.

which matches the format

FILES

/etc/group
SEE ALSO

getlogin(3C), getpwent(3C), group(5).
DIAGNOSTICS
A NULL pointer is returned on EOF or error.
WARNING

The above routines use , which causes them to increase the size of programs, not otherwise using standard I/O, more than might be expected.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

GETGRENT (3C)

BUGS

All information is contained in a static area, so it must be copied if it is to be saved.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

GETLOGIN ( 3C)

GETLOGIN (3C)

NAME
getlogin - get login name
SYNOPSIS
char *getlogin ( );
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/NUCLEUS
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Getlogin returns a pointer to the login name as found in /etc/utmp. It may be used in conjunction with getpwnam to locate the correct password file entry when the same user ID is shared by
several login names.
If getlogin is called within a process that is not attached to a terminal, it returns a NULL pointer.
The correct procedure for determining the login name is to call cuserid, or to call getlogin and if it
fails to call getpwuid.
FILES
/etc/utmp
SEE ALSO
cuserid(3S), getgrent(3C), getpwent(3C), utmp(5).
DIAGNOSTICS

Getlogin returns the NULL pointer if name is not found.
BUGS
The return values point to static data whose content is overwritten by each call.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 2, 1985

GETMSG(3C)

NAME

getmsg - get message from a catalog
SYNOPSIS
char *getmsg (fd, set---1lum, msg---1lum, buf, buflen)
int lfd, set---1lum, msg---1lum, buflen;
char bufD;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

Native Language Support:
8-bit data, customs, messages
DESCRIPTION
Getmsg attempts to read up to buften-l bytes of a message string into the area pointed to by bul.
A null byte is inserted to terminate the string placed in the buffer.

Fd is the file descriptor returned by a call to open(2) the catalog containing the messages.
SeLnum is available to group messages together into a logical unit. For instance, messages in
Finnish could be grouped in set number 6 to match the language id for Finnish (See
currlangid{9C) and langid(7)).
DIAGNOSTICS
Returns a pointer to an empty (null) string if Id is invalid or 8eLnum or m8!1-num is not in the
catalog.
SEE ALSO
gencat(I), insertmsg(I), read(2), hpnls(7).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

GETOPT(3Cj

NAME
getopt, optarg, optind, opterr - get option letter from argument vector
SYNOPSIS
int getopt (argc, argv, optstring)
int argc;
char **argv, *opstring;

extern char *optarg;
extern int optind, opterr;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Getopt returns the next option letter in argv (starting from argv[lj) that matches a letter in optstring. Optstring is a string of recognized option letters; if a ietLel ., fulluwed by a colon, the
option is expected to have an argument that mayor may not be separated from it by white space.
Optarg is set to point to the start of the option argument on return from getopt.

Getopt places in optlnd the argv index of the next argument to be processed. Because optind is
external, it is normally initialized to zero automatically before the first call to getopt.
When all options have been processed (i.e., up to the first non-option argument), getopt returns
EOF. The special option -- may be used to delimit the end of the options; EOF will be returned,
and -- will be skipped.
DIAGNOSTICS
Getopt prints an error message on stderr and returns a question mark (?) when it encounters an
option letter not included in optstring. This error message may be disabled by setting opterr to
zero.
WARNING
The above routine uses , which causes it to increase the size of programs, not otherwise
using standard I/O, more than might be expected.
Options can be any ASCII characters except colon (:), question mark (?), or null (\0). It is
impossible to distinguish between a ? used as a legal option, and the character that getopt returns
when it encounters an invalid option character in the input.
EXAMPLE
The following code fragment shows how one might process the arguments for a command that can
take the mutually exclusive options a and h, and the options f and 0, both of which require arguments:
main (argc, argv)
int argc;
char **argv;

{
int c;
extern char *optarg;
extern int optind;
while ((c = getopt(argc, argv, "abf:o:")) != EOF)
switch (c) {
case 'a':

if (bflg)
errflg++;

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

GETOPT(3C)

else
afIg++;
break;
case 'b':
if (aflg)
errfig++;
else
bproc( );
break;
case 'f:
Hile = optarg;
break;
case '0':
ofile = optarg;
break;
case '1':
errfig++;
}
if (errfig) {
fprintf(stderr, "usage: ... ");
exit (2);
}
for ( ; optind < argc; optind++) {
if (access(argv[optind], 4)) {

}
SEE ALSO

getopt(l).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

GETPASS(3C)

GETPASS (3C)

NAME
getpass - read a password
SYNOPSIS
char *getpass (prompt)
char *prompt;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/NUCLEUS
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Getpa88 reads up to a newline or EOF from the file /dev /tty, after prompting on the standard
error output with the null-terminated string prompt and disabling echoing. A pointer is returned
to a null-terminated string of at most 8 characters. If / dev /tty cannot be opened, a NULL
pointer is returned. An interrupt will terminate input and send an interrupt signal to the calling
program before returning.

FILES
/dev/tty
SEE ALSO
crypt(3C).
WARNING
The above routine uses , which causes it to increase the size of programs not otherwise
using standard I/O, more than might be expected.
BUGS
The return value points to static data whose content is overwritten by each call.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

GETPW(3C)

NAME

getpw - get name from UID
SYNOPSIS

int getpw (uid, bur)
int uid;
char *buf;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/NUCLEUS

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Getpw searches the password file for a user id number that equals uid, copies the line of the password file in which uid was found into the array pointed to by bul, and returns o. Getpw returns
non-zero if uid cannot be found. The line is null-terminated.

This routine is included only for compatibility with prior systems and should not be used; see
getpwent (3C) for routines to use instead.
FILES

/etc/passwd
SEE ALSO

getpwent(3C), passwd(5).
DIAGNOSTICS
Getpw returns non-zero on error.
WARNING

The above routine uses , which causes it to increase, more than might be expected, the
size of programs not otherwise using standard I/O.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

GETPWENT (3C)

NAME
getpwent, getpwuid, getpwnam, setpwent, endpwent, fgetpwent - get password file entry
SYNOPSIS
#include
struct passwd *getpwent ( )
struct passwd *getpwuid (uid)
int uid;
struct passwd *getpwnam (name)
char *name;
void setpwent ( )
void endpwent ( )
struct passwd *fgetpwent (f)
FILE *f;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/NUCLEUS
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Getpwent, getpwuid and getpwnam each returns a pointer to an object with the following structure containing the broken-out fields of a line in the /etc/passwd file. Each line in the file contains a "passwd" structure, declared in the header file:
struct passwd {
char
char
int
int
char
char
char
char
char

*pw---1lame;
*pw _passwd;
pw_uid;
pw_gid;
*pw_age;
*pw_comment;
*pw_gecos;
*pw_dir;
*pw-Bhell;

};
struct comment {
char
char
char
char

*c_dept;
*C----Ilame;
*c_acct;
*c_bin;

};
This structure is declared in so it is not necessary to redeclare it.
The pw_comment field is unused; the others have meanings described in passwd(5).
Getpwent when first called returns a pointer to the first passwd structure in the file; thereafter, it
returns a pointer to the next passwd structure in the file; so successive calls can be used to search
the entire file. Getpwuid searches from the beginning of the file until a numerical user id matching uid is found and returns a pointer to the particular structure in which it was found.
Getpwnam searches from the beginning of the file until a login name matching name is found, and
returns a pointer to the particular structure in which it was found. If an end-of-file or an error is
encountered on reading, these functions return a NULL pointer.

A call to setpwent has the effect of rewinding the password file to allow repeated searches.
Endpwent may be called to close the password file when processing is complete.

Hewlett-Packard

July 2, 1985

GETPWENT (3C)

Fgetpwent returns a pointer to the next passwd structure in the stream
mat of /etc/passwd.

t, which matches the for-

FILES
/etc/passwd
SEE ALSO
getlogin(3C), getgrent(3C), passwd(4).
DIAGNOSTICS
A NULL pointer is returned on EOF or error.
WARNING
The above routines use , which causes them to increase the size of programs, not otherwise using standard I/O, more than might be expected.
BUGS
All infonnation is contained in a static area, so it must be copied if it is to be saved.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

GETS(3S)

GETS (3B)

NAME
gets, fgets - get a string from a stream
SYNOPSIS
#include

char *gets (s)
char *s;
char *fgets (s, n, stream)
char *s;
int n;
FILE *stream;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Gets reads characters from the standard input stream, std'in, into the array pointed to by s, until
a new-line character is read or an end-of-file condition is encountered. The new-line character is
discarded and the string is terminated with a null character.
Fgets reads characters from the stream into the array pointed to by s, until n-l characters are
read, or a new-line character is read and transferred to s, or an end-of-file condition is encountered. The string is then terminated with a null character.

BEE ALSO
ferror(3S), fopen(3S), fread(3S), getc(3S), puts(3S), scanf(3S).
DIAGNOSTICS
If end-of-file is encountered and no characters have been read, no characters are transferred to s
and a NULL pointer is returned. If a read error occurs, such as trying to use these functions on a
file that has not been opened for reading, a NULL pointer is returned. Otherwise s is returned.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

GETUT(3C)

NAME
getutent, getutid, getutline, pututline, setutent, endutent, utmpname - access utmp file entry
SYNOPSIS
#include
#include
struct utmp *getutent ( )
struct utmp *getutid (id)
struct utmp *idj
struct utmp *getutline (line)
struct utmp *line;
void pututline (utmp)
struct utmp *utmpj
void setutent ( )
void endutent ( )
void utmpname (file)
char *file;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Getutent, getutid and getutline each return a pointer to a structure of the following type:
struct

utmp {
char
char
char
short
short
struct
short
short
} ut_exit;

ut_userI8]; /* User login name */
uLidl4); /* /etc/inittab id (usually line #) */
ut~ineI12);
/* device name (console, Inxx) */
ut_pid;
/* process id */
ut_type; /* type of entry */
exit-Btatus {
e_termination; /* Process termination status */
e_exit; /* Process exit status */
/* The exit status of a process
* marked as DEADJROCESS. */
ut_time; /* time entry was made */

};
Getutent reads in the next entry from a utmp-like file. If the file is not already open, it opens it.
If it reaches the end of the file, it fails.
Getutid searches forward from the current point in the utmp file until it finds an entry with a
uLtype matching id->uLtype if the type specified is RUNJVL, BOOT_TIME, OLD_TIME or
NEW_TIME. If the type specified in id is INITJROCESS, LOGINJROCESS, USERJROCESS or
DEADJROCESS, then getutid will return a pointer to the first entry whose type is one of these
four and whose uLid field matches id->uLid. If the end of file is reached without a match, it
fails.
Getutline searches forward from the current point in the utmp file until it finds an entry of the
type LOGINJROCESS or USERJROCESS which also has a ut_line string matching the
llne->ut_line string. If the end of file is reached without a match, it fails.
Putut/lne writes out the supplied utmp structure into the utmp file .. It uses getutzd to search forward for the proper place if it finds that it is not already at the proper place. It is expected that

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 2, 1985

GETUT(3C)

normally the user of pututline will have searched for the proper entry using one of the getut routines. If so, pututline will not search. If pututline does not find a matching slot for the new entry,
it will add a new entry to the end of the file.
Setutent resets the input stream to the beginning of the file. This should be done before each
search for a new entry if it is desired that the entire file be examined.
Endutent closes the currently open file.
Utmpname allows the user to change the name of the file examined, from /etc/utmp to any
other file. It is most often expected that this other file will be /etc/wtmp. If the file does not
exist, this will not be apparent until the first attempt to reference the file is made. Utmpname
does not open the file. It just closes the old file if it is currently open and saves the new file name.

FILES
/etc/utmp
/etc/wtmp
SEE ALSO
ttyslot(3C), utmp(4).
DIAGNOSTICS
A NULL pointer is returned upon failure to read, whether for permissions or having reached the
end of file, or upon failure to write.
COMMENTS
The most current entry is saved in a static structure. Multiple accesses require that it be copied
before further accesses are made. Each call to either getutid or getutline sees the routine examine
the static structure before performing more I/O. If the contents of the static structure match
what it is searching for, it looks no further. For this reason to use getutline to search for multiple
occurrences, it would be necessary to zero out the static after each success, or getutline would just
return the same pointer over and over again. There is one exception to the rule about removing
the structure before further reads are done. The implicit read done by pututline (if it finds that it
is not already at the correct place in the file) will not hurt the contents of the static structure
returned by the getutent, getutid or getutline routines, if the user has just modified those contents
and passed the pointer back to pututline.
These routines use buffered standard I/O for input, but pututline uses an unbuffered non-standard
write to avoid race conditions between processes trying to modify the utmp and wtmp files.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

GPIO_GET-STATUS ( 31)

NAME

gpio_get-status - return status lines of GPIO card
SYNOPSIS

int gpio_get-status (eid)
int eid;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Gpio_geLstatus enables you to read the status register of the GPIO interface associated with the
device file identified by eid. Eid is an entity identifier of an open GPIO device file obtained from
an open(2), dup(2), !cntl(2), or creat(2). The current state of each status line on the interface
card is mapped to the value returned, with STSO mapped to the least significant bit. Only x
least-significant bits are used, where x is the number of status lines available on the hardware

interface being used.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
Series 500:
For the current GPIO card, x is 2.
RETURN VALUE
Gpio_get_status returns the value of the status register of the GPIO interface associated with eid,
and -1 if an error was encountered.
DIAGNOSTICS
Gpio_geLstatus fails under the following conditions and sets errna (see errna(2)) to the value in

square brackets:
eid does not refer to an open file [EBADFj;
eid does not refer to a GPIO device file [ENOTTYj.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

NAME

gpio--'3et_ctl - set control lines on GPIO card
SYNOPSIS

int gpio--'3et_ctl (eid, value)
int eid, value;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Gpio_set_ctl enables you to set the control register of a GPIO interface. Eid is an entity
identifier of an open GPIO device file obtained from an open(2), dup(2), !cntl(2) , or creat(2) call.
Value is the value to be written into the control register of the GPIO interface associated with eid.

Value is mapped onto the control lines on the interface card, with the least significant bit mapped
to CTLO. Only the x least significant bits are used, where x is the number of control lines available on the hardware interface being used.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
Series 500:
For the current GPIO card, x is 2.
RETURN VALUE
Gpio_set_ctl returns 0 if successful, and -1 if an error was encountered.
DIAGNOSTICS
Gpio_set_ctl fails under the following circumstances and sets errno (see errno(2)) to the value in

square brackets:
eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to a GPIO device file [ENOTTY].

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

HPIB-ABORT (31)

NAME
hpib_abort - stop activity on specified HP-IB bus
SYNOPSIS
int hpib_abort (eid);
int eid;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED
HP

Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Hpib_abort terminates activity on the addressed HP-IB bus by pulsing the IFC line. Eid is an
entity identifier of an open HP-IB raw bus device file obtained from an open(2), dup(2), /cntl(2),
or creat(2) call.
Hpib_abort also sets the REN line and clears the ATN line. The status of the SRQ line is not
affected. The interface must be the system controller of the bus.

RETURN VALUE
Hpib_abort returns 0 (zero) if successful, or -1 if an error was encountered.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
DIAGNOSTICS
Hpib_abort fails under the following circumstances, and sets ermo (see ermo(2)) to the value in
square brackets:
eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY];

the specified interface is not the system controller [EIO].

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

HPIB-.BUS_STATUS ( 31)

NAME
hpib_bus-Btatus - return status of HP-IB interface
SYNOPSIS
int hpib_bus-Btatus (eid, status);
int eid, status;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Hpib_bus_status enables you to determine selected status information about an HP-IB channel. Eid is an entity identifier of an open HP-IB raw bus device file obtained from an open(2),
dup(2), jcntl(2), or creat(2) call. Status is an integer determining what status information is
returned for a particular call. The values defined for status and their associated meanings are:

Value

o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Meaning
Is the
What
What
Is the
Is the
Is the
Is the
What

channel currently in remote state?
is the current state of the SRQ line?
is the current state of the NDAC line?
channel currently system controller?
channel currently active controller?
channel currently addressed as talker?
channel currently addressed as listener?
is the channel's bus address?

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
Series 500:
A bug in the HP27110A HP-IB interface causes an erroneous report of the state of the
SRQ line. There is a small window when hpib_bus_status(eid, 1) reports that the SRQ
line is clear when in reality it is set. OR-ing together five successive readings of the
state of the SRQ line yields a reading of about 99% accuracy.
The remote state status is not defined when the interface is the active controller,
although reading remote state status in such a situation is not an error.
Series 200/300:
The status of those lines being driven by the interface is undefined, although reading
them in such a situation is not an error. Non-active controllers cannot sense the SRQ
line. Active listeners cannot sense the NDAC line.
RETURN VALUE
Hpib_bus_status's return value depends upon the value of status, as follows:

Status

Return Value
-1

0-6
0-6
7

Hewlett-Packard

o
1

Meaning
Error condition.
False condition (line is clear).
True condition (line is set).
Bus address of interface card.

- 1-

November 15, 1985

HPIB-.BUS_STATUS (31)

HPIB-.BUS_STA TUS ( 31)

DIAGNOSTICS

Hpib_bus_status fails under the following conditions, and sets errno (see errno(2)) to the value in
square brackets:

eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY];
status is outside the range [0-7] [EINVAL].

Hewlett-Packard

- 2-

November 15, 1985

HPIB_CARDJPOLL---.RESP (31)

NAME

hpib_carLppolLJesp - control response to parallel poll on HP-IB
SYNOPSIS

int hpib_card_ppolLresp (eid,fiag);
int eid,fiag;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Hpib_carLppolLresp enables an interface to enable (or disable) itself for parallel polls. It
also controls the sense, and determines the line on which the response is sent. This gives the
interface the ability to either ignore or respond to a parallel poll depending upon whether or
not it is enabled to respond.

Eid is an entity identifier of an open HP-IB raw bus device file obtained from an open(2), dup(2),
fcntl(2), or creat(2) call. Flag is an integer having one of the following bit patterns:

Bit Pattern
10000
OSPPP

Meaning
Disable parallel poll response.
Enable parallel poll response, where
S = sense of the response, and
PPP = 3-bit binary number specifying the line on which the
response is sent (0 - 7 octal).

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.

Series 500:
Note that the HP 27110A/B HP-IB interface cards do not support programmatic parallel
poll response configuration.
RETURN VALUE
Hpib_carLppolLresp returns 0 (zero) if successful, or -1 if an error was encountered.
SEE ALSO
hpib_ppoll(3I) and hpib_ppoILresp_ctl(3I).
DIAGNOSTICS
Hpib_carLppolLresp fails under the following circumstances, and sets errna (see errna(2»
the value in square brackets:

eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY];

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

November 15, 1985

HPIB-EOLCTL ( 31)

HPIB-EOLCTL (31)

NAME
hpib_eoi_ctl - control EOI mode for HP-IB file
SYNOPSIS
int hpib_eoLctl (eid, flag);
int eid, flag;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED
HP

Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Hpib_eoLctl enables you to turn EOI mode on or off. Eid is an entity identifier of an open HP-IB
raw device file obtained from an open(2), dup(2), !cntl(2) , or creat(2) call. Flag is an integer
which, if non-zero, enables EOI mode, and otherwise disables it.
EOI mode causes the last byte of all subsequent write operations to be written out with the EOI
line asserted, signifying the end of the data transmission. By default, EOI mode is disabled when
the device file is opened.
Entity ids for the same device file obtained by separate open(2) requests have their own EOI
modes associated with them. Entity ids for the same device file obtained by dup(2) or inherited
by a !ork(2) request share the same EOI mode. In the latter case, if one process enables EOI
mode, then EOI mode is in effect for all such file descriptors.
RETURN VALUE
Hpib_eoLctl returns a 0 (zero) if successful, or -1 if an error was encountered.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
DIAGNOSTICS
Hpib_eoLctl fails under any of the following circumstances and sets errno (see errno(2)) to the
value in square brackets:
eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to an HP-IB device file [ENOTTY].

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

HPIB-.lO (31)

HPIB-.lO ( 31)

NAME
hpib---.io - perform I/O with an HP-IB channel from buffers
SYNOPSIS
#include
int hpib_io(eid, iovec, iolen)
int eidj
struct iodetail *iovecj
int iolenj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Hpib_io enables you to perform and control read and/or write operations on the specified HP-IB
bus. Eid is an entity identifier of an open HP-IB raw bus device file obtained from an open(2),
dup(2), jcntl(2), or creat(2) call. lovec is a pointer to an array of structures of the form:
struct iodetail {
char mode;
char terminator;
int count;
char *buf;
};
The iodetail structure is defined in the include file Iibdvio.h. lolen specifies the number of structures in iovec.
The mode parameter in the iodetail structure describes what is to be done during I/O on the
buffer pointed to by buf. Mode is constructed by OR-ing flags from the following list:
Only one of the following two flags must be specified:
HPIBREAD

Perform a read of the HP-IB bus, placing data into the accompanying
buffer.

HPIBWRITE

Perform a write to the HP-IB bus, using data from the accompanying
buffer.

The following flags may be used in most combinations (not all combinations are valid), or
not at all:
HPIBATN

Data is written with ATN enabled.

HPIBEOI

Data written is terminated with EOI (this flag is ignored when HPIBATN is enabled).

HPIBCHAR

Data read is terminated with the character given in the terminator
element of the jodetail structure.

Terminator describes the termination character, if any, that should be checked for on input.
Count is an integer specifying the maximum number of bytes to be transferred.

A read operation terminates when either count is matched, an EOI is detected, or the designated terminator is detected (if HPIBCHAR is set in mode).
A write operation terminates when count is matched, and the final byte is sent with EOI asserted
(if HPIBEOI is set in mode).
If HPIBATN is set in mode, then write operations occur with ATN enabled. Setting HPIBATN for
a read operation is ignored and has no effect.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

November 15, 1985

HPIB---.IO(3I)

The members of the iovec array are accessed in order.
RETURN VALUES

If all transactions are successful, hpib_io returns a zero and updates the count element in each
structure in the iovec array to reflect the actual number of bytes read or written.
If an error is encountered during a transaction defined by an element of iovec, hpib_io
returns without completing any transactions that might follow. In particular, if an error occurs,
hpib_io returns a -1, and the count element of the transaction which caused the error is set to -l.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
DIAGNOSTICS

Hpib_io fails under any of the following circumstances, and sets errno (see errno(2)) to the value
in square brackets:

eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY];
a timeout occurs [EIO];

eid is not the active controller [EIO].

Hewlett-Packard

- 2-

November 15, 1985

HPIB-.P ASS_CTL ( 31 )

HPIB-.PASS_CTL ( 31)

NAME

hpib_pass_ctl - change active controllers on HP-IB
SYNOPSIS
int hpib_pass_ctl (eid, ba)
int eid, ba;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Hpib_pass_ctl passes control of a bus to an inactive controller on that bus. The inactive controller becomes the active controller of that bus. Eid is an entity identifer of an open HP-IB raw
bus device file obtained from an open(2), dup(2), !cntl(2), or creat(2) call. Ba is the bus address

of the intended device.
Not all devices can accept control. Pass control passes only active control of the bus. It cannot
pass system control of the bus. The specified interface must be the current active controller
but need not be the system controller. The pass control operation does not suspend your program if the inactive controller does not take active control of the bus. However, the interface is
no longer active controller.
RETURN VALUE
Hpib_pass_ctl returns 0 (zero) if successful, or -1 if an error was encountered.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
DIAGNOSTICS
Hpib_pass_ctl fails under any of the following circumstances, and sets errno (see errno(2)) to the

value in square brackets:
eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF);
eid does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY);

the interface is not the active controller [EIO);
ba does not refer to a valid bus address [EINV ALl.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

HPIB.-PPOLL ( 31)

NAME
hpib_ppoll - conduct parallel poll on HP-IB bus
SYNOPSIS
int hpib_ppoll (eid);
int eid;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Hpib_ppo/l conducts a parallel poll on an HP-IB bus. eid is a file descriptor of an open HP-IB raw
bus device file obtained from an open(2), dup(2), jcntl(2), or creat(2) call.
Devices enabled to respond and that are in need of service can then assert the appropriate DIO
line. This enables the controller to determine which devices, if any, need service at a given time.
Hpib_ppoll raises attention (ATN) and end or identify (EOI) lines for 25 microseconds before
reading the response. The interface must be the active controller to conduct a parallel poll.
RETURN VALUE
Hpib_ppoll returns an integer value whose least significant byte corresponds to the byte formed
by the 8 data input/output (DIO) lines. Devices enabled to respond to a parallel poll do so on
the appropriate DIO line. DIO line 0 corresponds to the least significant bit in the response
byte. A -1 return value indicates that an error occurred.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
DIAGNOSTICS
Hpib_ppoll fails under the following situations, and sets ermo (see ermo(2)) to the value in
square brackets:

eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY];
the interface is not current the active controller [EIO].

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

HPIBJPOLL-RESP_CTL (31)

NAME
hpib_ppoll-Yesp_ctl - Define interface parallel poll response
SYNOPSIS
int hpib_ppoIL..resp_ctl (eid, response)
int eid, response;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Eid is an entity identifier of an open HP-IB raw bus device file, obtained irom an apen(2), dup(2),
jcntl(2), or creat(2) call.
Hpib_ppoILresp_ctl defines a response to be sent when an active controller performs a parallel
poll on an HP-IB interface. The value of response indicates whether this computer does or does
not need service. A non-zero response value indicates that service is required. This statement only
sets up a potential response; no actual response if generated when the statement is executed. The
sense of the response and the line number to respond on are set by hpib_carLppoILresp(3) or
by the active controller. When first opened, the default response and sense are O.

RETURN VALUE
Hpib_ppoILresp_ctl returns 0 if the response is successfully set, or -1 if an error has occured.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
DIAGNOSTICS
Hpib_ppoILresp_ctl fails under the following situations, and sets errna (see errno(2») to the
value in square brackets:
eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF]
eid does not refer to a raw HP-IB device file [ENOTTY]

SEE ALSO
hpib_ppoll(3I), hpib_carLppoll-Yesp(3I)

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

November 15, 1985

NAME
hpib-I'eIL-ctl - control the Remote Enable line on HP-IB
SYNOPSIS
int hpih-I"en_ctl (eid, flag);
int eid, flag;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Hpib_rerl-ctl enables/disables the Remote Enable (REN) line depending upon the value of
flag. Eid is an entity identifer of an open HP-IB raw bus device file obtained from an open(2),
dup2), fcntl(2),or creat(2) call. Flag is an integer which, if non-zero, enables the REN line, and
otherwise disables it.
Hpib_rerl-ctl, in conjunction with hpib_senLcmnd(3), enables you to place devices into the
remote state or local state. The REN line is normally enabled at all times, and is in this state at
power-up. Only the system controller may enable/disable the REN line.

RETURN VALUE
Hpib_rerl-ctl returns 0 (zero) if successful, or -1 if an error was encountered.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
DIAGNOSTICS
Hpib_rerl-ctl fails under the following circumstances, and sets ermo (see errno(2») to the value
in square brackets:
eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY];

the interface is not the system controller [EIO].

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

HPIB-RQST_SRVCE(31)

HPIB-RQST-SRVCE ( 31)

NAME
hpib-I"qst-Brvce - allow interface to enable SRQ line on HP-IB
SYNOPSIS
int hpib-I"qst-Brvce (eid, cv) j
int eid, CVj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Hpib_rqsLsrvce specifies the response byte that the interface sends when it is serially polled
by the active controller. Eid is an entity identifier of an open HP-IB raw bus device file obtained
from an open(2), dup(2), jcnt/(2), or creat(2) call. Cv is an integer control value representation of
the desired response byte.
Hpib_rqsLsrvce optionally enables the SRQ line depending upon the response byte. If bit 6 of the
response byte is set, the SRQ line is enabled. It remains enabled until the active controller conducts a serial poll or until the computer executes the request function with bit 6 cleared. The
SRQ line is not enabled, however, as long as the interface is active controller. If bit 6 is set, the
interface remembers its response byte, and enables the SRQ line when control is passed to another
device on the bus.

The response byte looks as follows:

Bit

o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

~eaning

SPOLL bit (least significant bit of response byte)
SPOLL bit
SPOLL bit
SPOLL bit
SPOLL bit
SPOLL bit
SRQ line
SPOLL bit (most significant bit of response byte)

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
Series 500:
Note that the HP 271lOA/B HP-IB interface cards allow only bit 6 to be set. All other
bits remain cleared.
RETURN VALUE
Hpib_rqsLsrvce returns 0 (zero) if successful, or -1 if an error was encountered.
DIAGNOSTICS
Hpib_rqsLsrvce fails under the following circumstances, and sets errno (see errno(2)) to the
value in square brackets:
eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY].

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

HPIB-BEND_CMND (31)

NAME

hpib-BenLcmnd - send command bytes over HP-IB
SYNOPSIS

int hpib----BenLcmnd (eid, ca, length);
int eid, length;
char *ca;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin:

DESCRIPTION

Hpib_senLcmnd enables you to send arbitrary bytes of information on the HP-IB with the ATN
line asserted. This enables you to configure and control the bus. Eid is an entity identifier of
an open HP-IB raw bus device file obtained from an open(2), dup(2), fcntl(2), or creat(2} call. ea
is a character pointer to a string of bytes to be written to the HP-IB bus as commands. Length is
an integer specifying the number of bytes in the string pointed to by ca.
The interface
bus.

must

currently be the active controller in order to send commands over the

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
Note that, for all HP-IB interfaces, both built-in and plug-in, the most significant bit of
each byte is overwritten with a parity bit. All commands are written with odd parity.
RETURN VALUE

Hpib_senLcmnd returns 0 (zero) if successful, or -1 if an error was encOlmtered.
DIAGNOSTICS

Hpib_senLcmnd fails under the following circumstances, and sets errno (see errno(2» to the
value in square brackets:

eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY];
the interface is not currently the active controller [EIO].

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

NovemberJ5,1985

HPIB---BPOLL (31)

HPIB---BPOLL ( 31)

NAME
hpib-spoll - conduct a serial poll on HP-IB bus
SYNOPSIS
int hpib----Bpoll (eid, ba)j
int eid, baj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED
HP

Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Hpib_spoll conducts a serial poll of the specified device. Eid is an entity identifier of an open HPIB raw bus device file obtained from an open(2), dup(2), !cntl(2) , or creat(2) call. Ba is the bus
address of the intended device.
Hpib_spoll polls a single device for its response byte. The information stored in the response
byte is device specific with the exception of bit 6. If bit 6 of the response byte is set, the
addressed device has asserted the SRQ line, and is requesting service. (Note that the least
significant (right-most) bit of the response byte is bit 0.)

Not all devices respond to the serial poll function. Consult the device documentation. Specifying
a device that does not support serial polling may cause a timeout error or suspend your program indefinitely (see hpib_rqsLsrvce(3)). The interface cannot serial poll itself. The interface must be the active controller.
RETURN VALUE
If hpib_spoll is successful, the device response byte is returned in the least significant byte of the
return value. Otherwise, -1 is returned, indicating an error.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
SEE ALSO
hpib-1"qst-srvce (31).
DIAGNOSTICS
Hpib_spoll fails under the following circumstances, and sets errno (see errno(2)) to the value in
square brackets:
eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY];

the device polled did not respond before timeout, or the interface is not the active controller [EIO];
ba is the address of the polling interface itself or is an invalid bus address [EINVAL].

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

November 15, 1985

HPIB_STATUS_WAIT ( 31)

NAME
hpib-Etatus_wait - wait until the requested status condition becomes true
SYNOPSIS
int hpib---Btatus_wait (eid, status);
int eid,status;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Hpib_statuB-wait enables you to wait until a specific condition has occurred before returning.
Eid is an entity identifier of an open HP-IB raw bus device file obtained from an open(2), dup(2),
!cntl(2), or creat(2) call. Status is an integer specifying what information is returned. The possible values for status and their associated meanings are:
Status
1
4

5
6

Meaning
Wait
Wait
Wait
Wait

until
until
until
until

the SRQ line is enabled.
this channel is the active controller.
this channel is addressed as talker.
this channel is addressed as listener.

The wait is subject to the current timeout in effect. If a timeout occurs before the desired condition occurs, the function returns with an error.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
Series 500:
When an hpip_status_wait is in progress, all other bus activity is held off until it has
completed. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that a timeout be in effect before all
hpib_statuB-wait calls.
RETURN VALUE
Hpib_status_wait returns zero when the condition requested becomes true. A value of -1 is
returned if an error occurs. A -1 is also returned if a timeout occurs before the desired condition
becomes true.
DIAGNOSTICS
Hpib_statuB-wait fails under the following circumstances, and sets ermo (see errno(2» to the
value in square brackets:

eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY];
a timeout occured [EIO];

status contains an invalid value [EINVAL].

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

NAME
hpib_wait_oIL-ppoll - wait until a particular parallel poll value occurs
SYNOPSIS
int hpih_wait_oIL-ppoll (eid, mask, sense);
int eid, mask, sense;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Hpib_waiLo11--ppoll waits for a parallel poll response to occur on one or more lines. Eid is an
entity identifier of an open HP-IB raw bus device file obtained from an open(2), dup(2), fcntl(2), or
creat(2) call.
Mask is an integer that specifies on which line the parallel poll response is expected. Mask's value
is obtained from an 8-bit binary number, each bit of which corresponds to one of the eight lines.
For example, if you want to wait for a response on lines 2 or 6, the correct binary number is
01000100. This converts to a decimal equivalent of 68, which is the number you should assign to
mask.
Sense simply specifies what response you are expecting on the selected lines. Sense is constructed
in the same way as mask - eight bits for eight lines. If a bit is set, then the function returns when
the line corresponding that bit is cleared. Similarly, if a bit in sense is clear, the function returns
when the corresponding line is set. Using the previous example, a sense = 00000100 = 4
(decimal) causes the function to return when line 6 is set, and return when line 2 is cleared.

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
Series 500:
When an hpib_waiLo11--ppoll is in progress, all other bus activity is held off until it has
completed. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that a timeout be in effect before all
hpib_waiLo11--ppoll calls.
RETURN VALUE
Hpib_wait_o11--ppoll returns a value of -1 if an error or timeout condition occurs. A successful
completion of the function returns the response byte XOR-ed with the sense value and AND-ed
with the mask.
DIAGNOSTICS
Hpib_waiLo11--ppoll fails under the following circumstances, and sets errno (see errno(2» to the
value in square brackets:
eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to an HP-IB raw bus device file [ENOTTY];

a timeout occured [EIO];
the interface is not currently the active controller [EIO].

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

HSEARCH ( 3C)

HSEARCH ( 3C )

NAME
hsearch, hcreate, hdestroy - manage hash search tables
SYNOPSIS
#include
ENTRY *hsearch (item, action)
ENTRY item;
ACTION action;
int hcreate (nel)
unsigned nel;
void hdestroy ( )
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Level:
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Hsearch is a hash-table search routine generalized from Knuth (6.4) Algorithm D. It returns a
pointer into a hash table indicating the location at which an entry can be found. Item is a structure of type ENTRY (defined in the header file) containing two pointers: item. key
points to the comparison key, and item. data points to any other data to be associated with that
key. (Pointers to types other than character should be cast to pointer-to-character.) Act!on is a
member of an enumeration type ACTION indicating the disposition of the entry if it cannot be
found in the table. ENTER indicates that the item should be inserted in the table at an
appropriate point. FIND indicates that no entry should be made. Unsuccessful resolution is indicated by the return of a NULL pointer.
Hcreate allocates sufficient space for the table, and must be called before hsearch is used. Nel is
an estimate of the maximum number of entries that the table will contain. This number may be
adjusted upward by the algorithm in order to obtain certain mathematically favorable circumstances.
Hdestroy destroys the search table, and may be followed by another call to hcreate.

EXAMPLE
The following example will read in strings followed by two numbers and store them in a hash
table, discarding duplicates. It will then read in strings and find the matching entry in the hash
table and print it out.
#include
#include
struct info {
/* this is the info stored in the table */
int age, room; /* other than the key. */

};
#define NUM-EMPL

5000

# of elements in search table

main (

{

Hewlett-Packard

/ * space to store strings */
char string-Bpace[NUM-EMPL*20];
/* space to store employee info */
struct info info-Bpace[NUM-EMPL];
/ * next avail space in string-Bpace */
char *str_ptr = string-Bpace;
/* next avail space in info-Bpace */

-1-

July 2, 1985

HSEARCH ( 3C)

struct info *info_ptr = info-space;
ENTRY item, *foun~tem, *hsearch( );
/ * name to look for in table */
char name_to---.1lnd[30J;
int i = 0;
/* create table */
(void) hcreate(NUM---.EMPL);
while (scanf("%s%d%d", str_ptr, &info_ptr->age,
&info_ptr->room) != EOF && i++ < NUM---.EMPL)
/ * put info in structure, and structure in item */
item.key = str_ptr;
item. data = (char *)info_ptr;
str_ptr += strlen(str_ptr) + 1;
info_ptr++;
/ * put item into table */
(void) hsearch(item, ENTER);

/ * access table */
item. key = name_to---.1lnd;
while (scanf("%s", item.key) != EOF) {
if ((found~tem = hsearch(item, FIND)) != NULL) {
/* if item is in the table */
(void)printf("found %s, age = %d, room = %d\n",
foun~tem->key,

((struct info *)founLitem->data)->age,
((struct info *)found_item->data)->room);
else {
(void )printf(" no such employee %s \n" ,
name_to---.1lnd)

SEE ALSO
bsearch(3C), Isearch(3C), malloc(3C), malloc(3X), string(3C), tsearch(3C).
DIAGNOSTICS
Hseareh returns a NULL pointer if either the action is FIND and the item could not be found or
the action is ENTER and the table is full.
Hereate returns zero if it cannot allocate sufficient space for the table.
WARNING
Hseareh and here ate use malloc(3C) to allocate space.
BUGS
Only one hash search table may be active at any given time.

Hewlett~Packard

~2~

July 2, 1985

HYPOT(3M)

NAME
hypot - Euclidean distance function
SYNOPSIS
#h~<;lude

double hypot (x, y)
double x, Yi
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Hypot returns
sqrt(x

* x + y * y),

taking precautions against unwarranted overflows.
DIAGNOSTICS
When the correct value would overflow, hypot returns HUGE and sets ermo to ERANGE.
These error-handling procedures may be changed with the function matherr(3M).
SEE ALSO
matherr(3M), sqrt(3F).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

INITGROUPS (3C)

NAME

initgroups - initialize group access list
SYNOPSIS

initgroups(name, basegid)
char *name;
int basegid;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

UeB

DESCRIPTION

Initgroups reads through the group file and sets up, using the setgroups(2) call, the group access
list for the user specified in name. The basegid is automatically included in the groups list. Typically this value is given as the group number from the password file.
FILES

/ etc /logingroup
SEE ALSO
setgroups(2)
DIAGNOSTICS

Initgroups returns -1 if it was not invoked by the super-user.
BUGS

Initgroups uses the routines based on getgrent(3). If the invoking program uses any of these routines, the group structure will be overwritten in the call to initgroups.
On most systems, no one seems to keep / etc/logingroup up to date.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 10, 1985

INTRAPOFF ( 3M)

Series 500 Only

INTRAPOFF ( 3M)

NAME
intrapoff, intrapon - disable/enable integer trap handler
SYNOPSIS
int intrapoff()

int intrapon()
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/NON-STANDARD
Origin:

Remarks: Intrapoff and intrapon are implemented on the Series 500 only.
DESCRIPTION
The Series 500 architecture has a single trap handler for both integer overflow (an integer value
greater than 2'31-1) and integer divide-by-zero. By default, an operation which results in
integer overflow or integer divide-by-zero invokes the integer trap handler. Any integer divideby-zero generates the signal SIGFPE. As a side effect, any integer overflow also invokes the
integer trap handler. The trap handler recognizes integer overflow as a special case and simply
returns to the calling routine. A user sees no difference in results, but could see a severe performance degradation depending on how often the trap handler is invoked.
Intrapoff disables this integer trap handler. Integer overflow and integer divide-by-zero do not
invoke the integer trap handler. Instead, integer divide-by-zero returns a large integer (2'31-1).
Integer overflow operations simply overflow into the most significant bit. There is no performance
penalty since the trap handler is not entered.

A program doing many integer overflows could see a significant performance improvement. A
user must take care however, since integer divide-by-zero does not give signal SIGFPE while the
integer trap handler is disabled.
Intrapon restores the default condition. Integer divide-by-zero and integer overflow operations
invoke the integer trap handler. Integer divide-by-zero gives signal SIGFPE; integer overflow
results in a performance penalty caused by entering and leaving the integer trap handler.

When intrapoff is used, the integer trap handler is disabled at that procedural level and all levels
below it. It is not disabled for any procedural level above the procedure within which intrapoff
was called. For example,

a();
{
Call function b.

intrapoff( );
c();
/* Call function c.

b();

}
b();

{

c();

{

Do some work.

}
The integer trap handler is disabled for functions band c. It is automatically re-enabled on exit
from function b. The integer trap handler can also be re-enabled at any time using intrapon.
EXAMPLES
The math library routine rand generates random integers using:

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 19, 1985

INTRAPOFF (3M)

randx

Series 500 Only

INTRAPOFF ( 3M)

= randx * (((1103515245L + 12345»>16) & Ox7ffff)

where randx is an unsigned integer. The value assigned to randx is often greater than 2'31-1.
To avoid the performance degradation of entering the integer trap handler each time this occurs,
the integer trap can be turned off before the assignment using in trap ojJ.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 19, 1985

IO_BURST ( 31)

Series 200/300 Only

NAME
io_burst - perform low overhead I/O with an HP-IB channel
SYNOPSIS
#incIude
io_burst (eid, flag)
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library-HP-UX/EXTENDED NON-STANDARD
Origin:

Remarks:

lo_burst is implemented on the Series 200/300 only.

DESCRIPTION
lo_burst enables you to perform low-overhead burst transfers on the specified HP-IB bus. Eid is
the entity identifier for an open HP-IB bus device file returned by a previous call to open(2},
dup(2}, creat(2} or to /cntl(2} with an F--DUPD command option. Flag is an integer which, if
non-zero, enables burst mode, and otherwise disables it.
In burst mode, memory-mapped I/O address space assigned to the interface card select code is
mapped directly into user address space such that the user can transfer data directly to or from
the interface card. This eliminates the need for kernel calls and their associated overhead. Burst
mode affects only read(2}, write (2), hpib_io(8}, and hpib_senLcmnd(8} calls. All other operations are unaffected. When burst mode is enabled, the interface is locked and no other processes
are allowed to use the interface until burst mode is disabled.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
Timeouts for read(2), write(2), hpib_io(3), and hpib_senLcmnd(3) do not work while
in burst mode. However, these commands can be interrupted by signals.
RETURN VALUE
lo_burst returns zero if successful or -1 if an error was encountered.
DIAGNOSTICS
lo_burst fails under any of the following circumstances and sets ermo (see errno(2)) to the value
in square brackets:

eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];
eid does not refer to an HP-IB bus device file [ENOTTY];
a timeout occurs [EIO];
WARNING
Enabling burst mode locks the interface and should not be used with any interface supporting a
system disc or swap device.
SEE ALSO
read(2), write(2),

Hewlett-Packard

hpib~o(3I),

hpib---BenLcmnd(3I)

- 1-

November 18, 1985

NAME
io_eol_ctl - set up read termination character on special file
SYNOPSIS
int io_eoLctl (eid, flag, match);
int eid, flag, match;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Io_coLetl enables you to specify a character to be used in terminating a read operation from
the specified file id.
Eid is an entity identifier of an open HP-IB raw bus device file obtained from an open(2), dup(2),
/entl(2) , or ereat(2) call. Flag is an integer which enables or disables character-match termination. A non-zero value enables character-match termination, while a zero value disables it. Match
is an integer containing the numerical equivalent of the termination character. Match is ignored if
flag is zero. When in 8-bit mode, the lower 8 bits of match are used as the termination character.
In 16-bit mode, the lower 16 bits are used.

Upon opening a file, the default condition is character-match termination disabled. When
enabled, the character specified by match is checked for during read operations. The read is terminated upon receipt of this character, or upon any of the other termination conditions normally
in effect for this file. Examples of other conditions are satisfying the specified byte count, and
receiving a character when the EOI line is asserted (HP-IB). When the read is terminated by a
match character, this character is the last character returned in the buffer.
File descriptors for the same device file obtained by separate open(2) requests have their own termination characters associated with them. File descriptors for the same device file inherited by a
/ork(2) request share the same termination character. In the latter case, if one process changes
the termination character, the new termination character is in effect for all such file descriptors.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
Series 500:
When termination is requested in 16-bit mode, the upper byte of the halfword is examined first, and then the lower byte. If the lower byte matches the termination character,
all is as expected. However, if the upper byte matches, the following action is taken:
both the upper and lower bytes are moved into the given buffer, and
the count returned is odd, indicating that there is a lower byte following the
matching upper byte. This information is passed to the upper level software to
deal with as it pleases.
RETURN VALUE
la_eoLetl returns 0 (zero) if successful, or -1 if an error was encountered.
SEE ALSO
io_widtLctJ(3I).
DIAGNOSTICS
la_eaLetl fails under the following circumstances, and sets errna (see errna(2)) to the value in
square brackets:
eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

IO-.EOL_CTL ( 31)

eid does not refer to a channel device file [ENOTTY].

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

November 15, 1985

NAME
io_get_terIlLIeason - determine how last read terminated
SYNOPSIS
int io_get_terIlLJeason (eid);
int eid;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Io_geLter11'L-reason returns the termination reason for the last read made on this file descriptor. Eid is an entity identifier of an open HP-IB raw bus device file obtained from an open(2),
dup(2), !cntl(2), or creat(2) call.
All file descriptors descending from an open(2) request (such as from dup(2) or !ork(2)) set this
status. For example, if the calling process had opened this file descriptor, and later forked, the
status returned would be from the last read done by either the calling process or its child.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
Series 500:
If the last read had multiple applicable termination reasons, such as having EOI asserted
on the last byte when that byte was the termination match character (see io_eoLctl(3)),
the highest numbered reason is used (in this case, 4). Since interactive terminals are
treated as record-oriented devices when they are in cooked mode, the termination reason
is 4 when terminated by a new-line character. If no read has been done on the file
descriptor since it was opened, the termination reason is O.
Series 200/300:
PSTS is checked only at the beginning of a transfer. An interrupt caused by an EIR will
also terminate a transfer. The termination reason in this case is also 4.
SEE ALSO
io_eoLctl(3I).
RETURN VALUE
Io_geLter11'L-reason returns a value indicating how the last read on the specified file descriptor
was terminated. This value is interpreted as follows (note that combinations are possible):
Value

-1

o
1
2
4

Description
An error was encountered while making this function request.
Last read encountered some abnormal termination reason not covered by
any of the other reasons.
Last read terminated by reading the number of bytes requested.
Last read terminated by detecting the specified termination character.
Last read terminated by detecting some device-imposed termination
condition. Examples are: EOI for HP-IB, PSTS line on GPIO, or some other
end-of-record condition, such as the physical end-of-record mark on a 9-track
tape.

DIAGNOSTICS
Io_geLter11'L-reason fails under the following circumstances, and sets errno (see errno(2)) to the
value in square brackets:

eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF];

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

IO_GET_TERM-REASON (31)

eid does not refer to a channel device file [ENOTTY].

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

November 15, 1985

IO--INTERRUPT_CTL (31)

Series 500 Only

IO--INTERRUPT_CTL (31)

NAME

io_interrupt_ctl - enable/disable interrupts for the associated eid.
SYNOPSIS
int io_interrupt_ctl (eid, enable.....flag)
int eid, enable.....flag;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin:

Remarks:

fo_interrupLctl is implemented on the Series 500 only.

DESCRIPTION
Eid is an entity identifier of an open raw HP-IB bus or GPIO device file, obtained from an open(2),
dup(2), fcntl(2), or creat(2) call. Enable_flag is an integer which enables or disables interrupts for
the associated eid. A non-zero value enables interrupts.

Interrupts may be disabled or enabled by the user as desired. When an interrupt occurs for a
given eid, the interrupts associated with this eid are automatically disabled from reoccurring.
Interrupts for this eid can be re-enabled by using io_interrupLctl.
RETURN VALUE
io_interrupLctl returns 0 (zero) if successful, or -1 if an error was encountered.
DIAGNOSTICS
fo_interrupLctl fails under the following situations and sets ermo (see errno(2)) to the value in
square brackets:

eid does not refer to an open file [EBADF]
eid does not refer to a device that supports interrupts [ENOTTY]
no interrupt conditions were specified for this eid [EINV ALi
SEE ALSO
io_orl-interrupt(31)

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

IO_ON-INTERRUPT (31)

Series 500 Only

IO_ON-INTERRUPT (31)

NAME

io_oILinterrupt - device interrupt (fault) control
SYNOPSIS

#include
int (*io_on---.interrupt (eid, causevec, handler))O
int eid;
struct interrupt-Btruct *causevec;
int (*handler)0;
handler (eid, causevec)
int eid;
struct interrupt-Btruct *causevec;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

Device I/O Library - HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin:

Remarks:

Io_orl-interrupt is implemented on the Series 500 only.

DESCRIPTION
Eid is an entity identifier of an open raw HP-IB bus or GPIO device file, obtained from an open(2),
dup(2), /cntl(2), or creat(2) call.

Causevec is a pointer to a structure of the form:

struct interrupL..struct {
int cause;
int mask;
};
The interrupLstruct structure is defined in the file dvio.h.
The cause parameter is a bit vector specifying which of the interrupt or fault events will cause the
handler routine to be invoked. The interrupt causes are often specific to the type of interface
being considered. As well, certain exception (error) conditions can be handled using the
io_orl-interrupt capability. Specifying a zero-valued cause vector effectively turns off the interrupts for that eid.
The mask parameter is used when an HP-IB parallel poll interrupt is being defined. Mask is an
integer that specifies which parallel poll response lines are of interest. Mask's value is obtained
from an 8-bit binary number, each bit of which corresponds to one of the eight lines. For example,
if you want an interrupt handler invoked for a response on lines 2 or 6, the correct binary number
is 01000100. This converts to a decimal equivalent of 68, which is the number you should assign to
mask.
When an interrupt that is to be caught occurs during a read, write, open, or ioctl system call on a
slow device (like a terminal; but not a file), during a pause system call, during a sigpause(2) system call, or during a wait system call that does not return immediately due to the existence of a
previously stopped or zombie process, the interrupt handling function will be executed and the
interrupted system call will return a -1 to the calling process with ermo set to EINTR.
Interrupt handlers are not inherited across a /ork(2). All eid for the same device file produced by
dup(2) share the same handler.
An interrupt for a given eid is implicitly disabled after the occurrence of the event. The interrupt
condition can be re-enabled by using io_interrupLctl(3I).
Upon the occurrence of an event specified by cause, the receiving process is to execute the interrupt handler function pointed to by handler. When the handler returns the user process resumes
at the point of execution left when the event occurred.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

IO_ON-INTERRUPT ( 31)

Series 500 Only

IO_ON-INTERRUPT (31)

Handler will be passed two parameters, the eid associated with the event, and a pointer to a
causevec structure. The cause of the interrupt can be determined by the value returned in the
cause field of the causevec structure. If the interrupt handler was invoked due to a parallel poll
interrupt, then the mask field of the causevec structure will contain the parallel poll response
byte XOR-ed with the sense and AND-ed with the mask

RPIB INTERRUPTS
This section describes interrupt causes specific to an HP-IB device. For an HP-IB device the cause
is a bit vector which is used as follows: To enable a given event, the appropriate bit (in cause),
shown below, must be set to 1:

SRQ
TLK
LTN
TCT
IFC

REN
DCL
GET

PPOLL

SRQ and active controller.
Talker addressed.
Listener addressed.
Controller in charge.
IFC has been asserted
Remote enable
Device clear
Group execution trigger
Parallel poll

GPIO INTERRUPTS
This section describes interrupt causes specific to a gpio device. For a gpio device the cause is a
bit vector which is used as follows. To enable a given event, the appropriate bit (in cause), shown
below, must be set to 1:

EIR
SIEO
SIEI

External interrupt
Status line 0
Status line 1

RARDW ARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300/500
Eid is an integer file descriptor (fildes) that identifies an open device special file.
Series 500:
The 5.0 HP _UX system does not support parallel-poll interrupts. The internal HP-IB
supplied with the Model 550 cannot support talker-addressed, listener-addressed,
controller-in-charge, and remote-enable interrupt. GPIO interrupts on the EIR line are
not supported.
RETURN VALUE
lo_olL-interrupt returns a pointer to the previous handler if the new handler is successfully
installed, otherwise it returns a -I and errno is set.
DIAGNOSTICS
lo_olL-interrupt can fail for any of the following reasons:
Fildes does not refer to an open file [EBADF]
Fildes does not refer to a GPIO or a raw HP-IB device file [ENOTTY]
Handler points to an illegal address [EFAULT]
causevec points to an illegal address. [EFAULT]

Hewlett-Packard

- 2-

November 15, 1985

IO_ON-INTERRUPT (31)

Series 500 Only

IO_ON-INTERRUPT (31)

SEE ALSO

coL..seq_16(5), coL.-Seq_8(5), hpnls(7), langid(7).

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 2, 1985

NLIST(3C)

NAME

nlist - get entries from name list
SYNOPSIS

#include
int nlist (file-name, nl)
char *file-name;
struct nlist *nl;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

System V

Remarks:

Ntist is currently implemented on the Series 200 and the Integral PC only.
The use of symbol table type and value information is inherently non-portable. Use of
nllst should reduce the effort required to port a program which uses such information,
but complete portability across all implementations of HP-UX cannot be expected.
DESCRIPTION

Ntist examines the name list in the executable file whose name is pointed to by file-name, and
selectively extracts a list of values and puts them in the array of nlist structures pointed to by nl.
The name list nl consists of an array of structures initially containing names of variables; once
nllst has been called, the information is augmented with types and values. The list is terminated
with a null name; that is, a null string is in the name position of the structure. Each variable
name is looked up in the name list of the file. If the name is found, the type and value information is inserted into the structure. If the name is not found, the type and value fields are set to
zero. The structure nlist is defined in the include file nlist.k. See a.out(5) and nlist(5) for more
discussion of the symbol table structure.
The file must have the organization and symbol table described for an a.out file in a.out.k (5).
The information is extracted from the symbol table used by the link editor, Id(l).
The list of names provided by the caller is in an array of structures, each containing a pointer to a
string giving the name for which information is desired. The rest of the structure contains a type
field, a value field, and possibly other machine specific information which will be filled in by the
nlist call. The list is terminated with a null name pointer. The structure updated by this call is
described in nlist (5). The name pointer in the nlist structure will always be the first field regardless of how the other fields may change across implementations.
On machines which have such a file, this subroutine is useful for examining the system name list
kept in the file /hp-ux. In this way programs can obtain system addresses that are up to date.
NOTES

The header file is automatically included by for compatability. However, if
the only information needed from is for use of nlist, then including is
discouraged.
SEE ALSO

a.out(5), nlist(5).
DIAGNOSTICS

All nlist structure fields are set to 0 if the file cannot be found or if it is not a valid object file
containing a linker symbol table.

Nlist returns -1 upon error; otherwise it returns O.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

PERROR(3C)

NAME

perror, errno, sys_errlist, sys-.nerr - system error messages
SYNOPSIS

void perror (s)
char *Sj
extern int errnOj
extern char *sys_errlist[ jj
extern int

sys~errj

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

Native Language Support:
8-bit data, customs, messages
DESCRIPTION
Perror produces a message on the standard error output, describing the last error encountered

during a call to a system or library function. The argument string s is printed first, then a colon
and a blank, then the message and a new-line. To be of most use, the argument string should
include the name of the program that incurred the error. The error number is taken from the
external variable errno, which is set when errors occur but not cleared when non-erroneous calls
are made.
To simplify variant formatting of messages, the array of message strings sys_errlist is provided;
errno can be used as an index in this table to get the message string without the new-line.
Sys_nerr is the largest message number provided for in the table; it should be checked because
new error codes may be added to the system before they are added to the table.
Iff the user's LANG shell variable is set, perror also attempts to return a translation of the error
message.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:
The error indicator errinfo is implemented in addition to errno, enabling you to obtain a
more detailed description of the error. See errinfo(2).
Translated messages not accessed.
Series 200:
Translated messages not accessed.
SEE ALSO

errinfo(2), errno(2).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

POPEN(3S)

NAME
popen, pclose - initiate pipe I/O to/from a process
SYNOPSIS
#include
FILE *popen (command, type)
char *command, *type;

int pclose (stream)
FILE *stream;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
The arguments to popen are pointers to null-terminated strings containing, respectively, a shell
command line and an I/O mode, either r for reading or w for writing. Pop en creates a pipe
between the calling program and the command to be executed. The value returned is a stream
pointer such that one can write to the standard input of the command, if the I/O mode is w, by
writing to the file stream; and one can read from the standard output of the command, if the I/O
mode is r, by reading from the file stream.
A stream opened by popen should be closed by pclose, which waits for the associated process to
terminate and returns the exit status of the command.
Because open files are shared, a type r command may be used as an input filter and a type w as
an output filter.
SEE ALSO
pipe(2), wait(2), fclose(3S), fopen(3S), system(3S).
DIAGNOSTICS

Popen returns a NULL pointer if files or processes cannot be created, or if the shell cannot be
accessed.
Pclose returns -1 if stream is not associated with a "popened" command.
BUGS
If the original and "popened" processes concurrently read or write a common file, neither should

use buffered I/O, because the buffering gets all mixed up. Problems with an output filter may be
forestalled by careful buffer flushing, e.g. with fflush; see Jclose(3S).

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 2, 1985

PRINTF(3S)

NAME
printf, fprintf, sprintf - print formatted output
SYNOPSIS
#include
int printr (format [ , arg
char *formatj

1 ...

int fprintf (stream, format [ , arg 1 ...
FILE *streamj
char *formatj

)

int sprintf (s, format [ , arg 1 ...
char *s, formatj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Printf places output on the standard output stream stdout. Fprintf places output on the named
output stream. Sprintf places "output", followed by the null character (\0), in consecutive bytes
starting at *s; it is the user's responsibility to ensure that enough storage is available. Each function returns the number of characters transmitted (not including the \0 in the case of sprint!), or
a negative value if an output error was encountered.
Each of these functions converts, formats, and prints its args under control of the format. The
format is a character string that contains two types of objects: plain characters, which are simply
copied to the output stream, and conversion specifications, each of which results in fetching of
zero or more args. The results are undefined if there are insufficient args for the format. If the
format is exhausted while args remain, the excess args are simply ignored.
Each conversion specification is introduced by the character %. After the %, the following
appear in sequence:
Zero or more flags, which modify the meaning of the conversion specification.
An optional decimal digit string specifying a minimum field width. If the converted value
has fewer characters than the field width, it will be padded on the left (or right, if the
left-adjustment flag '-', described below, has been given) to the field width. If the field
width for an s conversion is preceded by a 0, the string is right adjusted with zeropadding on the left.
A precision that gives the minimum number of digits to appear for the d, 0, u, x, or X
conversions, the number of digits to appear after the decimal point for the e and f
conversions, the maximum number of significant digits for the g conversion, or the maximum number of characters to be printed from a string in s conversion. The precision
takes the form of a period (.) followed by a decimal digit string; a null digit string is
treated as zero.
An optional I (ell) specifying that a following d, 0, u, x, or X conversion character applies
to a long integer arg, or an optional h specifying that a following d, 0, u, x, or X conversion character applies to a short integer arg. A I before any other conversion character is
ignored.
A character that indicates the type of conversion to be applied.
A field width or precision may be indicated by an asterisk (*) instead of a digit string. In this
case, an integer arg supplies the field width or precision. The arg that is actually converted is not
fetched until the conversion letter is seen, so the args specifying field width or precision must
appear before the arg (if any) to be converted.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

PRINTF(3S)

The flag characters and their meanings are:
The result of the conversion will be left-justified within the field.
The result of a signed conversion will always begin with a sign (+ or -).
+
blank
If the first character of a signed conversion is not a sign, a blank will be prefixed to the
result. This implies that if the blank and + flags both appear, the blank flag will be
ignored.
This flag specifies that the value is to be converted to an "alternate form." For c, d,
#
B, and u conversions, the flag has no effect. For 0 conversion, it increases the precision
to force the first digit of the result to be a zero. For x or X conversion, a non-zero
result will have Ox or OX prefixed to it. For e, E, f, g, and G conversions, the result
will always contain a decimal point, even if no digits follow the point (normally, a
decimal point appears in the result of these conversions only if a digit follows it). For
g and G conversions, trailing zeroes will not be removed from the result (which they
normally are).
The conversion characters and their meanings are:
d,o,u,x,X The integer arg is converted to signed decimal, unsigned octal, decimal, or hexadecimal notation (x and X), respectively; the letters abcdef are used for x conversion
and the letters ABCDEF for X conversion. The precision specifies the minimum
number of digits to appear; if the value being converted can be represented in fewer
digits, it will be expanded with leading zeroes. (For compatibility with older versions,
padding with leading zeroes may alternatively be specified by prepending a zero to the
field width. This does not imply an octal value for the field width.) The default precision is 1. The result of converting a zero value with a precision of zero is a null
string.
The float or double arg is converted to decimal notation in the style "[-]ddd.ddd",
f
where the number of digits after the decimal point. is equal to the precision
specification. If the precision is missing, six digits are output; if the precision is explicitly 0, no decimal point appears.
e,E
The float or double arg is converted in the style" [-]d.ddde±ddd", where there is one
digit before the decimal point and the number of digits after it is equal to the precision; when the precision is missing, six digits are produced; if the precision is zero, no
decimal point appears. The E format code will produce a number with E instead of e
introducing the exponent. The exponent always contains exactly three digits.
g,G
The float or double arg is printed in style for e (or in style E in the case of a G format code), with the precision specifying the number of significant digits. The style
used depends on the value converted: style e will be used only if the exponent resulting from the conversion is less than -4 or greater than the precision. Trailing zeroes
are removed from the result; a decimal point appears only if it is followed by a digit.
c
The character arg is printed.
,
B
The arg is taken to be a string (character pointer j and characters from the string are
printed until a null character (\0) is encountered or the number of characters indicated by the precision specification is reached, If the precision is missing, it is taken to
be infinite, so all characters up to the first null character are printed. A NULL value
for arg will yield undefined results.
%
Print a %; no argument is converted.
In no case does a non-existent or small field width cause truncation of a field; if the result of a
conversion is wider than the field width, the field is simply expanded to contain the conversion
result. Characters generated by printf and fprintf are printed as if putc(3S) had been called,
EXAMPLES
To print a date and time in the form "Sunday, July 3, 10:02", where weekday and month are
pointers to null-terminated strings:

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2,1985

PRINTF(3S)

printf(,,%s, %s %d, %d:%.2d", weekday, month, day, .hour, min);
To print

to 5 decimal places:

printf("pi = %.5f", 4

* atan(l.O));

SEE ALSO

ecvt(3C), putc(3S), scanf(3S), stdio(3S), and vprintf(3S).

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

July 2, 1985

PRINTMSG ( 3C)

NAME
printmsg, fprintmsg, sprintmsg - print formatted output with numbered arguments
SYNOPSIS
#include
int printmsg (format [ , arg
char *format;

I ...
I ... )

int fprintmsg (stream, format [ , arg
FILE *stream;
char *format;
int sprintmsg (s, format [ , arg
char *s, *format;

I ... )

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

Native Language Support:
8-bit data, customs, messages
DESCRIPTION
Printmsg , fprintmsg , and sprintmsg are derived from their counterparts in print/{3S), with the
amplification that the conversion character % is replaced by the sequence % digit$. Digit is a
decimal digit n in the range 1-9, and indicates that this conversion should be applied to the nth
argument, rather than to the next unused one. All other aspects of formatting are unchanged.
All conversion specifications must contain the %digit$ sequence, and it is the user's responsibility
to make sure the numbering is correct. All parameters must be used exactly once.
EXAMPLE
To create a language independent date and time printing routine we would write
printmsg(format, weekday, month, day, hour, min);
For American usage format would be a pointer to the string
"%1$s, %2$s %3$d, %4$d:%5$.2d"
and for German usage to a string
"%1$s, %3$d %2$s %4$d:%5$.2d"
the resulting outputs will be "Sunday, July 3, 10:02", and "Sonntag, 3 Juli 10:02" , assuming
that the proper strings have been passed in.
SEE ALSO
getmsg(3C), printf(3S), hpnls(7).

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 2, 1985

PUTC(3S)

NAME
putc, putchar, fputc, putw - put character or word on a stream
SYNOPSIS
#include
int putc (c, stream)
int Cj
FILE *streamj
int putchar (c)
int Cj
int fputc (c, stream)
int Cj
FILE *streamj
int putw (w, stream)
int Wj
FILE *streamj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Pute writes the character e onto the output stream (at the position where the file pointer, if
defined, is pointing). Putehar(e) is defined as pute(e, stdout). Pute and putehar are macros.

Fpute behaves like pute, but is a genuine function rather than a macro; it may therefore be used
as an argument. Fpute runs more slowly than pute, but it takes less space per invocation and its
name can be passed as an argument to a function.
Putw writes the word (i.e., int in C) w to the output stream (at the position at which the file
pointer, if defined, is pointing). The size of a word is the size of an integer and varies from
machine to machine. Putw neither assumes nor causes special alignment in the file.
Output streams, with the exception of the standard error stream stderr, are by default buffered if
the output refers to a file and line-buffered if the output refers to a terminal. The standard error
output stream stderr is by default unbuffered, but use of freopen (see fopen(3S») will cause it to
become buffered or line-buffered. When an output stream is unbuffered, information is queued for
writing on the destination file or terminal as soon as written; when it is buffered, many characters
are saved up and written as a block. When it is line-buffered, each line of output is queued for
writing on the destination terminal as soon as the line is completed (that is, as soon as a new-line
character is written or terminal input is requested). Fflush can also be used to explicitly write the
buffer. Setbuf(38) or setvbuf(3S) may be used to change the stream's buffering strategy.
SEE ALSO
fclose(3S), ferror(3S), fopen(38), fwrite(38), getc(3S), fread(3S), printf(3S), puts(3S), setbuf(3S).
DIAGNOSTICS
On success, these functions each return the value they have written. On failure, they return the
constant EOF. This will occur if the file stream is not open for writing or if the output file cannot
be grown. Because EOF is a valid integer, ferror(3S) should be used to detect putw errors.
Line buffering may cause confusion or malfunctioning of programs which use standard I/O routines but use read(2) themselves to read from standard input. In cases where a large amount of
computation is done after printing part of a line on an output terminal, it is necessary to ffiush(3)
the standard output before going off and computing so that the output will appear.
BUGS
Because it is implemented as a macro, pute treats incorrectly a stream argument with side effects.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

PUTC(3S)

In particular, putc(c, *f++)j doesn't work sensibly. Fputc should be used instead.
Because of possible differences in word length and byte ordering, files written using putw are
machine-dependent, and may not be read using getw on a different (non-HP-UX) processor. For
this reason putw should be used with care.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

PUTENV(3C)

NAME

putenv - change or add value to environment
SYNOPSIS

int putenv (string)
char *string;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
String points to a string of the form "name=value." Putenv makes the value of the environment
variable name equal to value by altering an existing variable or creating a new one. In either
case, the string pointed to by string becomes part of the environment, so altering the string will
change the environment. The space used by string is no longer used once a new string-defining
name is passed to putenv.
DIAGNOSTICS
Putenv returns non-zero if it was unable to obtain enough space via maUoe for an expanded

environment, otherwise zero.
SEE ALSO

exec(2), getenv(3C), malloc(3C), environ(5).
WARNINGS
Putenv manipulates the environment pointed to by environ, and can be used in conjunction with
getenv. However, envp (the third argument to main) is not changed.
This routine uses maUoe(3C) to enlarge the environment.
After putenv is called, environmental variables are not in alphabetical order.
A potential error is to call putenv with an automatic variable as the argument, then exit the calling function while string is still part of the environment.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 2, 1985

PUTPWENT(3C)

PUTPWENT ( 3C )

NAME

putpwent - write password file entry
SYNOPSIS

#include
#include
int putpwent (p, f)
struct passwd *Pj
FILE *fj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/NUCLEUS

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Putpwent is the inverse of getpwent(3C). Given a pointer to a passwd structure as created by
getpwent (or getpwuid or getpwnam), putpwent writes a line on the stream j, which matches the
format of /etc/passwd.
DIAGNOSTICS

Putpwent returns non-zero if an error was detected during its operation, otherwise zero.
SEE ALSO

getpwent(3C).
WARNING

The above routine uses , which causes it to increase the size of programs, not otherwise
using standard I/O, more than might be expected.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

PUTS(3S)

NAME
puts, fputs - put a string on a stream
SYNOPSIS
#include
int puts (s)
char *s;
int fputs (s, stream)
char *s;
FILE *stream;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Puts writes the null-terminated string pointed to by s, followed by a new-line character, to the
standard output stream stdout.
Fputs writes the null-terminated string pointed to by s to the named output stream.

Neither function writes the terminating null character. Note that puts appends a new-line character, but jputs does not.
DIAGNOSTICS
Both routines return EOF on error. This will happen if the routines try to write on a file that has
not been opened for writing.
SEE ALSO
ferror(3S), fopen(3S), fread(3S), printf(3S), putc(3S).
NOTES
Puts appends a new-line character while jputs does not.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

QSORT(3C)

NAME

qsort - quicker sort
SYNOPSIS

void qsort ((char *) base, nel, sizeof (*base), compar)
unsigned nel;
int (*compar)( );
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Qsort is an implementation of the quicker-sort algorithm. It sorts vectors of arbitrarily-sized ele-

ments based on user-supplied size information and a comparison routine, in place
Base points to the element at the base of the table. NeZ is the number of clements in the table.
Compar is the name of the comparison function, which is called with two arguments that point to
the elements being compared. The function passed as compar must return an integer less than,
equal to, or greater than zero as a consequence of whether its first argument is to be considered
less than, equal to, or greater than the second. This is the same return convention that strcmp
uses.
NOTES

The pointer to the base of the table should be of type pointer-to-element, and cast to type
pointer-to-character.
The comparison function need not compare every byte, so arbitrary data may be contained in the
elements in addition to the values being compared.
The order in the output of two items which compare as equal is unpredictable.
SEE ALSO

sort(l), bsearch(3C), Isearch(3C), string(3C).
BUGS
If width is zero, a divide-by-zero error is generated.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

RAND (3C)

NAME

rand, srand - simple random-number generator
SYNOPSIS

int rand ( )
void srand (seed)
unsigned seed;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Rand uses a multiplicative congruential random-number generator with period 232 that returns
successive pseudo-random numbers in the range from 0 to 215_1.

Srand can be called at any time to reset the random-number generator to a random starting
point. The generator is initially seeded with a value of 1.
NOTE

The spectral properties of rand leave a great deal to be desired. Drand48(3C) provides a much
better, though more elaborate, random-number generator.
SEE ALSO

drand48(3C).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

REGCMP(3X)

NAME
regcmp, regex - compile and execute regular expression
SYNOPSIS
char *regcmp (stringl [, string2, ... j, (char *)0)
char *stringl, *string2, ... j
char *regex (re, subject[, retO, ... J)
char *re, *subject, *retO, ... j
extern char *-----.loclj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
System V

Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Regcmp compiles a regular expression and returns a pointer to the compiled form. Malloc(3C) is
used to create space for the vector. It is the user's responsibility to free unneeded space so aIlocated. A NULL return from regcmp indicates an incorrect argument. Regcmp(I) has been written
to generaIly preclude the need for this routine at execution time.

Regex executes a compiled pattern against the subject string. Additional arguments are passed to
receive values back. Regex returns NULL on failure or a pointer to the next unmatched character
on success. A global character pointer _loel points to where the match began. Regcmp and
regex were mostly borrowed from the editor, ed(I); however, the syntax and semantics have been
changed slightly. The foIlowing are the valid symbols and their associated meanings.
[j

* .'

These symbols retain their current meaning.

Matches the end of the string; \n matches a new-line.
Within brackets the minus means through. For example, [a-z] is equivalent to
[abcd ...xyz]. The - can appear as itself only if used as the first or last character.
For example, the character class expression [j-] matches the characters] and-.
A regular expression foIlowed by + means one or more times. For example, [0-9]+ is
equivalent to [0-9][0-9]*.

{m} {m,} {m,u}
Integer values enclosed in {} indicate the number of times the preceding regular
expression is to be applied. The value m is the minimum number and u is a number,
less than 256, which is the maximum. If only m is present (e.g., {m}), it indicates the
exact number of times the regular expression is to be applied. The value {m,} is analogous to {m,infinity}. The plus (+) and star (*) operations are equivalent to {I,} and
{O,} respectively.
( ... )$n The value of the enclosed regular expression is to be returned. The value will be stored
in the (n+l)th argument foIlowing the subject argument. At most ten enclosed regular
expressions are allowed. Regex makes its assignments unconditionaIly.

(

... )

Parentheses are used for grouping. An operator, e.g., *, +, {}, can work on a single
character or a regular expression enclosed in parentheses. For example, (a*(cb+)*)$O.

By necessity, all the above defined symbols are special. They must, therefore, be escaped to be
used as themselves.
EXAMPLES
Example 1:
char *cursor, *newcursor, *ptr;

newcursor

Hewlett-Packard

= regex«ptr = regcmpC"\n", 0)), cursor);
-1-

July 2, 1985

REGCMP(3X)

free(ptr);
This example will match a leading new-line in the subject string pointed at by cursor.
Example 2:
char retO[9];
char *newcursor, *name;
name = regcmp("([A-Za-z][A-za-zO-L]{0,7} )$0",0);
newcursor = regex(name, "123Testing321", retO);
This example will match through the string "Testing3" and will return the address of the character after the last matched character (cursor+ll). The string "Testing3" will be copied to the
character array reW.
Example 3:
#include "filej"
char *string, *newcursor;
newcursor

= regex(name, string);

This example applies a precompiled regular expression in file.i (see regcmp(l)) against string.
This routine is kept in /lib/libPW.a.
SEE ALSO

ed(1), regcmp(1), malloc(3C).
BUGS

The user program may run out of memory if regcmp is called iteratively without freeing the vectors no longer required. The following user-supplied replacement for malloc(3C) reuses the same
vector saving time and space:
/ * user's program */
char *
malloc(n)
unsigned n;
{
static char rebuf[512];
return (n <= sizeof rebuf) ? rebuf : NULL;

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2,1985

SCANF(3S)

NAME
scanf, fscanf, sscanf - formatted input conversion, read from stream file
SYNOPSIS
#include
int scanf (format [ , pointer 1
char *format;
int fscanf (stream, format [ , pointer 1
FILE *stream;
char *format;
int sscanf (s, format [ , pointer 1 ...
char *s, *format;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Scanf reads from the standard input stream stdin. Fscanf reads from the named input stream.
Sscanf reads from the character string s. Each function reads characters, interprets them according to a format, and stores the results in its arguments. Each expects, as arguments, a control
string format described below, and a set of pointer arguments indicating where the converted
input should be stored.
The control string usually contains conversion specifications, which are used to direct interpretation of input sequences. The control string may contain:
1. White-space characters (blanks, tabs, new-lines, or form-feeds) which, except in two cases

described below, cause input to be read up to the next non-white-space character.
2. An ordinary character (not %), which must match the next character of the input stream.
3. Conversion specifications, consisting of the character %, an optional assignment suppressing
character *, an optional numerical maximum field width, an optional I (ell) or h indicating the
size of the receiving variable, and a conversion code.
A conversion specification directs the conversion of the next input field; the result is placed in the
variable pointed to by the corresponding argument, unless assignment suppression was indicated
by *. The suppression of assignment provides a way of describing an input field which is to be
skipped. An input field is defined as a string of non-space characters; it extends to the next inappropriate character or until the field width, if specified, is exhausted. For all descriptors except
"[" and "c", white space leading an input field is ignored.
The conversion code indicates the interpretation of the input field; the corresponding pointer
argument must usually be of a restricted type. For a suppressed field, no pointer argument is
given. The following conversion codes are legal:

%
d
u
o
x
e,f,g

a single % is expected in the input at this point; no assignment is done.
a decimal integer is expected; the corresponding argument should be an integer pointer.
an unsigned decimal integer is expected; the corresponding argument should be an
unsigned integer pointer.
an octal integer is expected; the corresponding argument should be an integer pointer.
a hexadecimal integer is expected; the corresponding argument should be an integer
pointer.
a floating point number is expected; the next field is converted accordingly and stored
through the corresponding argument, which should be a pointer to a float. The input
format for floating point numbers is an optionally signed string of digits, possibly containing a decimal point, followed by an optional exponent field consisting of an E or an e, followed by an optional +, -, or space, followed by an integer.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 2, 1985

SCANF(3S)

a character string is expected; the corresponding argument should be a character pointer
pointing to an array of characters large enough to accept the string and a terminating \0,
which will be added automatically. The input field is terminated by a white-space character. Note that scanfwill not read a null string.
a character is expected; the corresponding argument should be a character pointer. The
normal skip over white space is suppressed in this case; to read the next non-space character, use % 1s. If a field width is given, the corresponding argument should refer to a
character array; the indicated number of characters is read.
indicates string data and the normal skip over leading white space is suppressed. The left
bracket is followed by a set of characters, which we will call the scanset, and a right
bracket; the input field is the maximal sequence of input characters consisting entirely of
characters in the scanset. The circumflex ( • ), when it appears as the first character in
the scanset, serves as a complement operator and redefines the scanset as the set of all
characters not contained in the remainder of the scanset string. There are some conventions used in the construction of the scanset. A range of characters may be represented
by the construct first-last, thus [0123456789] may be expressed [0-9]. Using this convention, first must be lexically less than or equal to last, or else the dash will stand for itself.
The dash will also stand for itself whenever it is the first or the last character in the scanset. To include the right square bracket as an element of the scanset, it must appear as
the first character (possibly preceded by a circumflex) of the scanset, and in this case it
will not be syntactically interpreted as the closing bracket. The corresponding argument
must point to a character array large enough to hold the data field and the terminating
\0, which will be added automatically. At least one character must match for this
conversion to be considered successful.

The conversion characters d, U , 0, and x may be preceded by I or h to indicate that a pointer to
long or to short rather than to int is in the argument list. Similarly, the conversion characters
e, f, and g may be preceded by I to indicate that a pointer to double rather than to float is in
the argument list. The I or h modifier is ignored for other conversion characters.
Scanf conversion terminates at EOF, at the end of the control string, or when an input character
conflicts with the control string. In the latter case, the offending character is left unread in the
input stream.
Scanf returns the number of successfully matched and assigned input items; this number can be
zero in the event of an early conflict between an input character and the control string. If the
input ends before the first conflict or conversion, EOF is returned.
EXAMPLES

The call:
int i, n; float X; char namc[50];
n = scanf("%d%f%s", &i, &x, name);
with the input line:
25 54.32E-1 thompson
will assign to n the value 3, to i the value 25, to x the value 5.432, and name will contain
thompson\O. Or:
int i; float x; char name [50] ;
(void) scanf("%2d%f%*d %[0-9]", &i, &x, name);
with input:
56789 0123 56a72
will assign 56 to i, 789.0 to x, skip 0123, and place the string 56\0 in name. The next call to
getchar (see getc(3S)) will return a.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2,1985

SCANF(3S)

SEE ALSO
getc(3S), printf(3S), strtod(3C), strtol(3C).
NOTE
Trailing white space (including a new-line) is left unread unless matched in the control string.
DIAGNOSTICS
These functions return EOF on end of input and a short count for missing or illegal data items.
BUGS
The success of literal matches and suppressed assignments is not directly determinable.

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

July 2, 1985

SETBUF(3S)

NAME

setbuf, setvbuf - assign buffering to a .stream file
SYNOPSIS
#ioclude
void setbuf (stream, buf)
FILE *stream;
char *buf;
iot setvbuf (stream, buf, type, size)
FILE *stream;
char *buf;
iot type, size;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Setbu/ may be used after a stream has been opened but before it is read or written. It causes the
arr8!Y pointed to by bu/ to be used instead of an automatically allocated buffer. If bu/ is the NULL
pointer input/output will be completely unbuffered.
A constant BUFSIZ, defined in the header file, tells how big an array is needed:

char buf(BUFSIZ];
Setvbu/ may be used after a stream has been opened but before it is read or written. Type determines how stream will be buffered. Legal values for type (defined in stdio.h) are:

-IOFBF

causes input/output to be fully buffered.

-IOLBF

causes output to be line buffered; the buffer will be flushed when a newline is written, the buffer is full, or input is requested.

-IONBF

causes input/output to be completely unbuffered.

If bu/ is not the NULL pointer, the array it points to will be used for buffering instead of an
automatically allocated buffer (from malloc(3C) or memallc(2)). Size specifies the size of the
buffer to be used. The constant BUFSIZ in is suggested as a gQod buffer size. If
input/output is unbuffered, bu/ and size are ignored.

By default, output to a terminal is line buffered and all other input/output is fully buffered.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 500:
The system call memallc(2) is used instead of maUoc.
SEE ALSO
fopen(3S), getc(3S), malloc(3C), putc(3S), stdio(3S).
DIAGNOSTICS
If an illegal value for type or size is provided, setvbu/ returns a non-zero value. Otherwise, the
value returned will be zero.
NOTE
A common source of error is allocating buffer space as an "automatic" variable in a code block,
and then failing to close the stream in the same block.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

SETJMP(3C)

NAME

setjmp, longjmp - non-local goto
SYNOPSIS

#include
int setjmp (env)
jmp_buf enVj
void longjmp (env, val)
jmp_buf enVj
int valj
int ---Betjmp( env}
jmp_buf enVj
void ---.longjmp(env, val}
jmp_buf enVj
int valj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

These functions are useful for dealing with errors and interrupts encountered in a low-level subroutine of a program.
Betjmp saves its stack environment in env (whose type, jmp_bul, is defined in the
header file) for later use by longjmp. It returns the value o.
Longjmp restores the environment saved by the last call of Betjmp with the corresponding env
argument. After longjmp is completed, program execution continues as if the corresponding call
of Betjmp (which must not itself have returned in the interim) had just returned the value val.
Longjmp cannot cause Betjmp to return the value O. If longjmp is invoked with a second argument of 0, Betjmp will return 1. All accessible data have values as of the time longjmp was called.

Upon the return from a Betjmp call caused by a longjmp, the values of any non-static local variables are undefined. Depending on such values renders code using non-static local variables nonportable.
Betjmp and longjmp save and restore the signal mask (see Bigvector(2)), while _Betjmp and
_longjmp manipulate only the stack and registers. This distinction is only significant for programs which use Bigvector(2), Bigblock(2), and/or BigBetmaBk(2).

If a longjmp is executed and the environment in which the Betjmp was executed no longer exists,
errors can occur. The conditions under which the environment of the Betjmp no longer exists
include: exiting the procedure which contains the Betjmp call, and exiting an inner block with temporary storage (e.g. a block with declarations in C, a with statement in Pascal). This condition

mayor may not be detectable. An attempt is made by determining if the stack frame pointer in
env points to a location not in the currently active stack. If this is the case, longjmp will return a
-1. Otherwise, the longjmp will occur, and if the environment no longer exists, the contents of the
temporary storage of an inner block are unpredictable. This condition may also cause unexpected
process termination. If the procedure has been exited the results are unpredictable.
Passing longjmp a pointer to a buffer not created by Bety"mp, or a buffer that has been modified by
the user, can cause all the problems listed above, and more.
Some implementations of Pascal support a try/recover mechanism, which also creates stack
marker information. If a longjmp operation occurs in a scope which is nested inside a try/recover,
and the corresponding Betjmp is not inside the scope of the try/recover, the recover block will not
be executed and the currently active recover block will become the one enclosing the Betjmp (if

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

SETJMP(3C)

there is one).
NOTE

A call to longjmp to leave the guaranteed stack space reserved by 8ig8pace (2) may remove the
guarantee that the ordinary execution of the program will not extend into the guaranteed space.
It may also cause the program to forever loose its ability to automatically increase the stack size,
and the program may then be limited to the guaranteed space.
SEE ALSO

sigvector(2), sigblock(2), sigsetmask(2), sigspace(2), signal(2).
WARNING
If longimp is called even though env was never primed by a call to 8etimp, or when the last such
call was in a function which has since returned, absolute chaos is guaranteed.

Hewlett-Packard

- 2-

November 15, 1985

SINH(3M)

NAME
sinh, cosh, tanh - hyperbolic functions
SYNOPSIS
#include

double sinh (x)
double Xj

float fsinh (x)
tfloat Xj

double cosh (x)
double Xj

float fcosh (x)
tfloat Xj

double tanh (x)
double Xj

float ftanh (x)
tfloat Xj

:I: see important note below
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Sinh, cosh, and tanh return, respectively, the hyperbolic sine, cosine and tangent of their argument. These are double-precision routines.
IMPORTANT NOTE: The corresponding single-precision routines [sinh, [cosh, and [tanh expect
true single-precision arguments, and therefore cannot be called from standard C. They are provided for support of FORTRAN (Pascal does not support or use hyperbolic functions).
DIAGNOSTICS
Sinh and cosh set errno to ERANGE and return HUGE ( sinh may return -HUGE for negative
x) when the correct value would overflow.
Error handling is identical for both single- and double-precision routines, except for one consideration: In any situation where the double-precision routine would return ±HUGE, the
corresponding single-precision routine returns ±MAXFLOAT.
These error-handling procedures may be changed with the function matherr(3M).
SEE ALSO
matherr(3M).

Hew lett-Packard

-1-

July 11, 1985

SLEEP (3C)

NAME

sleep - suspend execution for interval
SYNOPSIS

unsigned long sleep (seconds)
unsigned long seconds;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX!RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

The current process is suspended from execution for the number of seconds specified by the argument. The actual suspension time may be less than that requested because any caught signal will
terminate the sleep following execution of that signal's catching routine. Also, the suspension
time may be longer than requested by an arbitrary amount due to the scheduling of other activity
in the system. The value returned by sleep will be the "unslept" amount (the requested time
minus the time actually slept) in case the caller had an alarm set to go off earlier than the end of
the requested sleep time, or premature arousal due to another caught signal.
The routine is implemented by setting an alarm signal and pausing until it (or some other signal)
occurs. The previous state of the alarm signal is saved and restored. The calling program may
have set up an alarm signal before calling sleep. If the sleep time exceeds the time till such alarm
signal, the process sleeps only until the alarm signal would have occurred. The caller's alarm
catch routine is executed just before the sleep routine returns. If the sleep time is less than the
time till such alarm, the prior alarm time is reset to go off at the same time it would have without
the intervening sleep.
Seconds must be less than 232 .
SEE ALSO

alarm(2), pause(2), signal(2).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

SPUTL(3X)

NAME

sputl, sgetl - access long integer data in a machine-independent fashion.
SYNOPSIS

void sputl (value, buffer)
long valuej
char *bufferj
long sgetl (buffer)
char *bufferj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Sput/ takes the four bytes of the long integer value and places them in memory starting at the
address pointed to by buffer. The ordering of the bytes is the same across all machines.
Sget! retrieves the four bytes in memory starting at the address pointed to by buffer and returns
the long integer value in the byte ordering of the host machine.
The combination of sput! and sgetl provides a machine-independent way of storing long numeric
data in a file in binary form without conversion to characters.
A program which uses these functions must be loaded with the object-file access routine library
!ibld.a.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

SSIGNAL (3C)

SSIGNAL(3C)

NAME

ssignal, gsignal - software signals
SYNOPSIS

#include
int (*ssignal (sig, action»)( )
int sig, (*action)( )j
int gsignal (sig)
int sigj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Sszgnal and gsignal implement a software facility similar to signal(2). This facility is used by the
Standard C Library to enable users to indicate the disposition of error conditions, and is also
made available to users for their own purposes.
Software signals made available to users are associated with integers in the inclusive range 1
through 15. A call to ssignal associates a procedure, actzon, with the software signal sig; the
software signal, sig, is raised by a call to gsignal. Raising a software signal causes the action
established for that signal to be taken.
The first argument to ssignal is a number identifying the type of signal for which an action is to
be established. The second argument defines the action; it is either the name of a (user-defined)
action function or one of the manifest constants SIG-.DFL (default) or SIG--.IGN (ignore). Ssignal returns the action previously established for that signal type; if no action has been established
or the signal number is illegal, sszgnal returns SIG-.DFL.

Gsignal raises the signal identified by its argument, sig:
If an action function has been established for sig, then that action is reset to SIG-.DFL and

the action function is entered with argument sig. Gsignal returns the value returned to it
by the action function.
If the action for sig is SIG--.IGN, gsignal returns the value 1 and takes no other action.
If the action for szg is SIG-.DFL, gsignal returns the value 0 and takes no other action.
If sig has an illegal value or no action was ever specified for sig, gsignal returns the value 0

and takes no other action.
SEE ALSO

signal(2).
NOTES

There are some additional signals with numbers outside the range 1 through 15 which are used by
the Standard C Library to indicate error conditions. Thus, some signal numbers outside the range
1 through 15 are legal, although their use may interfere with the operation of the Standard C
Library.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

STDlO(3S)

NAME
stdio - standard buffered input/output stream file package
SYNOPSIS
#include
FILE *stdin, *stdout, *stderr;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Level:
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
The functions described in the entries of sub-class 3S of this manual constitute an efficient, userlevel I/O buffering scheme. The in-line macros getc(3S) and putc(3S) hand.le characters quickly.
The macros getchar and putchar, and the higher-level routines fyetc, fgets, fprintf, fputc, fputs,
fread, fscanf, fwrite, gets, getw, printf, puts, putw, and scanf all use or act as if they use getc and
putc; they can be freely intermixed.
A file with associated buffering is called a stream and is declared to be a pointer to a defined type
FILE. Fopen(3S) creates certain descriptive data for a stream and returns a pointer to designate
the stream in all further transactions. Normally, there are three open streams with constant
pointers declared in the header file and associated with the standard open files:
stdin
stdout
stderr

standard input file
standard output file
standard error file

A constant NULL (0) designates a nonexistent pointer.
An integer-constant EOF (-1) is returned upon end-of-file or error by most integer functions that
deal with streams (see the individual descriptions for details).
An integer constant BUFSIZ specifies the size of the buffers used by the particular implementation.
Any program that uses this package must include the header file of pertinent macro definitions, as
follows:
#include
The functions and constants mentioned in the entries of sub-class 3S of this manual are declared
in that header file and need no further declaration. The constants and the following "functions"
are implemented as macros (redeclaration of these names is perilous): getc, getchar, putc,
putchar, ferror, feof, clearerr, and fileno.
A constant ---.NFILE defines the maximum number of open files allowed per process.
SEE ALSO
open(2), close(2), Iseek(2), pipe(2), read(2), write(2), ctermid(3S), cuserid(3S), fclose(3S),
ferror(3S), fopen(3S), fread(3S), fseek(3S), getc(3S), gets(3S), popen(3S), printf(3S), putc(3S),
puts(3S), scanf(3S), setbuf(3S), system(3S), tmpfile(3S), tmpnam(3S), ungetc(3S).
DIAGNOSTICS
Invalid stream pointers will usually cause grave disorder, possibly including program termination.
Individual function descriptions describe the possible error conditions.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

STDIPC(3C)

NAME

ftok - standard interprocess communication package
SYNOPSIS

#include
#include
key_t ftok(path, id)
char *path;
char id;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
All interprocess communication facilities require the user to supply a key to be used by the
msgget(2), semget(2), and shmget(2) system calls to obtain interprocess communication
identifiers. One suggested method for forming a key is to use the ftok subroutine described below.
Another way to compose keys is to include the project ID in the most significant byte and to use
the remaining portion as a sequence number. There are many other ways to form keys, but it is
necessary for each system to define standards for forming them. If some standard is not adhered
to, it will be possible for unrelated processes to unintentionally interfere with each other's operation. Therefore, it is strongly suggested that the most significant byte of a key in some sense refer
to a project so that keys do not conflict across a given system.

Ftak returns a key based on path and id that is usable in subsequent msgget, semget, and shmget
system calls. Path must be the path name of an existing file that is accessible to the process. Id
is a character which uniquely identifies a project. Note that ftok will return the same key for
linked files when called with the same id and that it will return different keys when called with
the same file name but different ids.
SEE ALSO
intro(2), msgget(2), semget(2), shmget(2).
DIAGNOSTICS
Ftak returns (key_t) -1 if path does not exist or if it is not accessible to the process.
WARNING
If the file whose path is passed to ftok is removed when keys still refer to the file, future calls to
ftok with the same path and id will return an error. If the same file is recreated, then ftok is likely
to return a different key than it did the original time it was called.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

STRING (3C)

NAME

strcat, strncat, strcmp, strncmp, strcpy, strncpy, strlen, strchr, strrchr, strpbrk, strspn, strcspn,
strtok - character string operations
SYNOPSIS
#include <8tring.h>

char *8trcat (a1, 82)
char *81, *a2;
char *8trncat (81, a2, n)
char *81, *82;
int n;
int 8trcmp (81, a2)
char *81, *a2;
int 8trncmp (81, 82, n)
char *81, *82;
int n;
char *atrcpy (a1, a2)
char *81, *82;
char *9trncpy (a1, 82, n)
char *81, *82;
int n;
int 8trlen (8)
char *8;
char *9trchr (9, c)
char *8;
int c;
char *8trrchr (8, c)
char *a;
int c;
char *8trpbrk (91, 92)
char *81, *82;
int 8tr8pn (a1, 82)
char *81, *82;
int 8trc8pn (81, 82)
char *91, *92;
char *8trtok (81, 82)
char *81, *82;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

"'-.

System V

DESCRIPTION
These functions operate on null-terminated strings. The arguments a1, a2 and 8 point to strings
(arrays of characters terminated by a null character). The functions strcat, strncat, strcpy, and
strncpy all alter 81. These functions do not check for overflow of the array pointed to by 81.
Strcat appends a copy of string 82 to the end of string 81. Strncat appends at most n characters.
It copies less if s2 is shorter than n characters. Each returns a pointer to the null-terminated
result (the original value of sl).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

STRING (3C)

Strcmp compares its arguments and returns an integer less than, equal to, or greater than 0,
according as 81 is lexicographically less than, equal to, or greater than 82. (NULL values for sl
and s2 are treated the same as pointers to null strings.) Strncmp makes the same comparison but
looks at at most n characters (n less than or equal to zero yields equality). Both of these routines
use unsigned char for character comparison.
Strcpy copies string s2 to 81, stopping after the null character has been copied. Strncpy copies
exactly n characters, truncating 82 or adding null characters to 81 if necessary. The result will
not be null-terminated if the length of 82 is n or more. If the lengthe of 82 is less than n, characters from the first null in 82 to the nth character are copied as nulls. Each function returns 8l.

Note that strncpy should not be used to copy n bytes of an arbitrary structure. If that structure
contains a null byte anywhere, strncpy will terminate the copy when it encounters the null byte,
thus copying fewer than n bytes.
Sirlen returns the number of characters in 8, not including the terminating null character.
SITchr (slrTchr) returns a pointer to the first (last) occurrence of character c (an 8-bit ASCII
value) in string 8, or a NULL pointer if c does not occur in the string. The null character terminating a string is considered to be part of the string.
Slrpbrk returns a pointer to the first occurrence in string 81 of any character from string s2, or a
NULL pointer if no character from s2 exists in 8l.

Sirspn (stTcspn) returns the length of the initial segment of string s1 which consists entirely of
characters from (not from) string 82.
Siriok considers the string 81 to consist of a sequence of zero or more text tokens separated by
spans of one or more characters from the separator string 82. The first call (with pointer 81
specified) returns a pointer to the first character of the first token, and will have written a null
character into s1 immediately following the returned token. The function keeps track of its position in the string between separate calls, so that subsequent calls (which must be made with the
first argument a NULL pointer) will work through the string 81 immediately following that token.
In this way subsequent calls will work through the string 81 until no tokens remain. The separator string 82 may be different from call to call. When no token remains in s1, a NULL pointer is
returned.

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200:
N is limited by the process size.

Series 500:
N is limited to about 500 Mbytes.
NOTE

For user convenience, all these functions are declared in the optional header file.
BUGS

The copy operations cannot check for overflow of any receiving string. NULL destinations cause
errors; NULL sources are treated as zero-length strings.
Character movement is performed differently in different implementations. Thus overlapping
moves may yield surprises.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

STRTOD(3C)

NAME

strtod, atof, nL.strtod, nLatof - convert string to double-precision number
SYNOPSIS

double strtod (str, ptr)
char *str, **ptr;
double atof (str)
char *str;
double nLstrtod (str, ptr, langid)
char *str, **ptr;
int langid;
double nL-atof (str, langid)
char *str;
int langid;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

Native Language Support:
8-bit data, customs, messages
DESCRIPTION
Strtod returns as a double-precision floating-point number the value represented by the character
string pointed to by str. The string is scanned up to the first unrecognized character.

Strtod recognizes an optional string of "white-space" characters (as defined by isspace in
ctype(3C)), then an optional sign, then a string of digits optionally containing a decimal point
then an optional e or E followed by an optional sign or space, followed by an integer.
If the value of ptr is not (char ** )NULL, a pointer to the character terminating the scan is
returned in the location pointed to by ptr. If no number can be formed, *ptr is set to str, and
zero is returned.
Ato!{str) is equivalent to strtad(str, (char **)NULL).
NLstrtod and nLatof are similar to the above routines, but use langid to determine what the
radix character should be (e.g. '.' or ','). If langid is not valid, or information for langid has not
been installed, the radix character defaults to a period.
SEE ALSO

ctype(3C), scanf(3S), strtol(3C), hpnls(7), langid(7).
DIAGNOSTICS
If the correct value would cause overflow, ±HUGE is returned (according to the sign of the value),
and erma is set to ERANGE.
If the correct value would cause underflow, zero is returned and erma is set to ERANGE.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

STRTOL(3C)

NAME
strtol, atol, atoi - convert string to integer
SYNOPSIS
long strtol (str, ptr, base)
char *str, **ptrj
int basej

long atol (str)
char *strj
int atoi (str)
char *strj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Strtol returns as a long integer the value represented by the character string pointed to by str.
The string is scanned up to the first character inconsistent with the base. Leading "white-space"
characters (as defined by isspace in ctype(3C)) are ignored.

** )NULL, a pointer to the character terminating the scan is
returned in the location pointed to by ptr. If no integer can be formed, that location is set to str,
and zero is returned.

If the value of ptr is not (char

If base is positive (and not greater than 36), it is used as the base for conversion. After an

optional leading sign, leading zeros are ignored, and "Ox" or "OX" is ignored if base is 16.
If base is zero, the string itself determines the base thusly: After an optional leading sign a leading

zero indicates octal conversion, and a leading "Ox" or "OX" hexadecimal conversion. Otherwise,
decimal conversion is used.

Atol(str) is equivalent to strtol(str, (char **)NULL, 10).
Atoi(str) is equivalent to (int) strtol(str, (char **)NULL, 10).
SEE ALSO
atof(3C), ctype(3C), scanf(3S), strtod(3C).
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/500:
A toi and atol are identical.
BUGS

Overflow conditions are ignored.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

SWAB (3C)

NAME

swab - swap bytes
SYNOPSIS

void swab (from, to, nbytes)
char *from, *tOj
int nbytesj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Swab copies nbytes bytes pointed to by from to the array pointed to by to, exchanging adjacent
even and odd bytes. It is useful for carrying binary data between byte-swapped and non-byteswapped machines. Nbytes should be even and non-negative. If nbytes is odd and positive swab
uses nbytes-1 instead. If nbytes is negative, swab does nothing.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

SYSTEM (3S)

NAME

system - issue a shell command
SYNOPSIS

#include

int system (string)
char *string;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
System causes the string to be given to sh(l) as input, as if the string had been typed as a com-

mand at a terminal. The current process waits until the shell has completed, then returns the
exit status of the shell.
FILES

/bin/sh
SEE ALSO

shell, exec(2).
DIAGNOSTICS
System forks to create a child process that in tum exec's /bin/sh in order to execute string. If
the fork or exec fails, system returns a negative value and sets errno.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

TERMCAP (3X)

TERM CAP (3X)

NAME
tgetent, tgetnum, tgetflag, tgetstr, tgoto, tputs - emulate /etc/termcap access routines
SYNOPSIS
tgetent(bp, name)
char *bp, *name;

tgetnum(id)
char *id;
tgetflag(id)
char *id;
char *
tgetstr(id, area)
char *id, **area;
char *
tgoto(cm, destcol, destline)
char *cm;
tputs(cp, affcnt, outc)
register char *cp;
int affcnt;
int (*outc)O;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Termcap(3) functions extract and use capabilities from the compiled terminal capability data
bases (see terminfo(5)}. They are emulation routines that are provided as a part of the curses(3X}
library.
Tgetent extracts the compiled entry for terminal name into buffers accessible by the programmer.
Unlike previous termcap routines, all capability strings (except cursor addressing and padding
information) are already compiled and stored internally upon return from tyetent. The buffer
pointer bp is redundant in the emulation, and is ignored. It should not be relied upon to point to
meaningful information. Tgetent returns -1 if it cannot access the terminfo directory, 0 if there is
no capability file for name, and 1 if all goes well. If a TERMINFO environment variable is set,
tgetent first looks for TERMINFO/?/name (where? is the first character of name), and if that file
is not accessible, it looks for /usr/lib/terminfo/?/name.
Tgetnum gets the numeric value of capability id, returning -1 if it is not given for the terminal.
Tgetnum is useful only with capabilities having numeric values.
Tgetflag returns 1 if the specified capability is present in the terminal's entry, and 0 if it is not.
Tgetflag is useful only with capabilities that are boolean in nature (Le. either present or missing in
terminfo(5».
Tgetstr returns a pointer to the string value of capability id. In addition, if area is not a NULL
pointer, tgetstr will place the capability in the buffer at area and advance the area pointer. The
returned string capability is compiled except for cursor addressing and padding information.
Tgetstr is useful only with capabilities having string values. Tgetstr returns a NULL pointer if the
capability is not available on the terminal or id is not a string capability.
Tgoto returns a cursor addressing string decoded from em to go to column desteol in line destline.
(Programs which call tgoto should be sure to turn off the TAB3 bit(s), since tgoto may now output a tab. See termio(4). Note that programs using termeap should in general turn off TAB3
anyway since some terminals use control-I for other functions, such as nondestructive space.) If a

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

TERMCAP(3X)

% sequence is given which is not understood, then tgoto returns OOPS.
Tputs decodes the padding infonnation of the string cpo Affcnt gives the number of lines affected
by the operation, or 1 if this is not applicable. Outc is a routine which is called with each character in turn. The terminfo variable pad_char should contain a pad character to be used (from
the pc capability) if a null C@) is inappropriate.
FILES

/usr/lib/libcurses.a
/usr /lib/tenninfo/? 1*

-lcurses library
data bases

SEE ALSO

ex(l), termio(4), terminfo(5).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

TMPFILE (3S )

TMPFILE ( 38 )

NAME
tmpfile - create a temporary file
SYNOPSIS
#include
FILE *tmpfile ()
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/NUCLEUS
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Tmpfile creates a temporary file using a name generated by tmpnam(3S), and returns a
corresponding FILE pointer. If the file cannot be opened, an error message is printed using
perror(3C), and a NULL pointer is returned. The file will automatically be deleted when the process using it terminates. The file is opened for update ("w+").
SEE ALSO
creat(2), unlink(2), fopen(3S), mktemp(3C), perror(3C), tmpnam(3S).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

TMPNAM(3S)

NAME
tmpnam, tempnam - create a nameJor a temporary file
SYNOPSIS
#include
char *tmpnam (s)
char *Sj
char *tempnam (dir, pfx)
char *dir, *pfxj
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/NUCLEUS
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
These functions generate file names that can safely be used for a temporary file.
Tmpnam always generates a file name using the path-prefix defined as P _tmpdir in the
header file unless has been locally modified. If s is NULL, tmpnam leaves its
result in an internal static area and returns a pointer to that area. The next call to tmpnam will
destroy the contents of the area. If s is not NULL, it is assumed to be the address of an array of
at least L_tmpnam bytes, where L_tmpnam is a constant defined in ; tmpnam
places its result in that array and returns s.
Tempnam allows the user to control the choice of a directory. The argument dir points to the
name of the directory in which the file is to be created. If dir is NULL or points to a string which
is not a name for an appropriate directory, the path-prefix defined as P _tmpdir in the
header file is used. If that directory is not accessible, /tmp will be used as a last
resort. This entire sequence can be up-staged by providing an environment variable TMPDIR in
the user's environment, whose value is the name of the desired temporary-file directory.

Many applications prefer their temporary files to have certain favorite initial letter sequences in
their names. Use the pfx argument for this. This argument may be NULL or point to a string of
up to five characters to be used as the first few characters of the temporary-file name.
Tempnam uses mal/oe(3C) to get space for the constructed file name, and returns a pointer to
this area. Thus, any pointer value returned from tempnam may serve as an argument to free (see
mal/oe(3C»). If tempnam cannot return the expected result for any reason, i.e. malloe(3C) failed,
or none of the above mentioned attempts to find an appropriate directory was successful, a NULL
pointer will be returned.

NOTES
These functions generate a different file name each time they are called.
Files created using these functions and either fopen(3S) or ereat(2) are temporary only in the
sense that they reside in a directory intended for temporary use, and their names are unique. It is
the user's responsibility to use unlink (2) to remove the file when its use is ended.
File names are initially of the form [a-z][a-z][a-z]XXXXXX in the directory specified by either dir
(in tempnam) or L_tmpnam (in tmpnam) and are then passed to mktemp before returning the
result.
SEE ALSO
creat(2), unlink(2), fopen(3S), malloc(3C), mktemp(3C), tmpfile(3S).
BUGS
If called more than 17,576 times in a single process, these functions will start recycling previously
used names.
Between the time a file name is created and the file is opened, it is possible for some other process
to create a file with the same name. This can never happen if that other process is using these

Hewlett-Packard

July 2, 1985

TMPNAM(3S)

functions or mktemp, and the file names are chosen so as to render duplication by other means
unlikely.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

TRIG (3M)

NAME
sin, cos, tan, asin, acos, atan, atan2 - trigonometric functions
SYNOPSIS
#include

double sin (x)
double Xi

float fsin (x)
jfloat Xi

double cos (x)
double Xi

float fcos (x)
jfloat Xi

double tan (x)
double Xi

float ftan (x)
jfloat Xi

double asin (x)
double Xi

float fasin (x)
jfloat x;

double acos (x)
double Xi

float facos (x)
jfloat x;

double atan (x)
double Xi

float fatan (x)
jfloat x;

double atan2 (y, x)
double y, Xi

float fatan2 (y, x)
jfloat y, Xi

t see important note below
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Sin, cos and tan return respectively the sine, cosine and tangent of their argument, x, measured
in radians.
Asin returns the arcsine of x, in the range

-7r /2

to 7r /2.

Acosreturns the arccosine of x, in the range 0 to
Atan returns the arctangent of x, in the range

7r.

-7r /2

Atan2 returns the arctangent of y/x, in the range
determine the quadrant of the return value.

to 7r/2.
-7r

7r,

using the signs of both arguments to

IMPORTANT NOTE: The corresponding single-precision routines fsin, fcos, ftan, fasin, facos,
fatan, and fatan2 expect true single-precision arguments, and therefore cannot be called from
standard C. They are provided for support of FORTRAN and Pascal.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/500:
The approximate limit for the values passed to these functions is 2.98E8 for sin and cos,
1.49E8 for tan, 1.29E4 for fsin and fcos, and 6.43E3 for ftan.
The algorithms used for all functions except atan2 and fatan2 are from HP 9000 BASIC.
DIAGNOSTICS
Sin, cos, and tan lose accuracy when their argument is far from zero. For arguments sufficiently
large, these functions return zero when there would otherwise be a complete loss of significance.
In this case a message indicating TL088 error is printed on the standard error output. errno is
set to ERANGE.
If the magnitude of the argument of asin or acos is greater than one, or if both arguments of
atan2 are zero, zero is returned and errno is set to EDOM. In addition, a message indicating

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

TRIG (3M)

DOMAIN error is printed on the standard error output ..

matherr{3M).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9,1985

TSEARCH ( 3C )

NAME
tsearch, tfind, tdelete, twalk - manage binary search trees
SYNOPSIS
#include
char *tsearch «char *) key, (char **) rootp, compar)
int (*compar)( )j
char *tfind «char *) key, (char **) rootp, compar)
int (*compar)( )j
char *tdelete «char *) key, (char **) rootp, compar)
int (*compar)( )j
void twalk «char *) root, action)
void (;"action)( )j
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Tsearch, tfind, tdelete, and twalk are routines for manipulating binary search trees. They are
generalized from Knuth (6.2.2) Algorithms T and D. All comparisons are done with a usersupplied routine, compar. This routine is called with two arguments, the pointers to the elements
being compared. It returns an integer less than, equal to, or greater than 0, according to whether
the first argument is to be considered less than, equal to or greater than the second argument.
The comparison function need not compare every byte, so arbitrary data may be contained in the
elements in addition to the values being compared.
Tsearch is used to build and access the tree. Key is a pointer to a datum to be accessed or
stored. If there is a datum in the tree equal to *key (the value pointed to by key), a pointer to
this found datum is returned. Otherwise, *key is inserted, and a pointer to it returned. Only
pointers are copied, so the calling routine must store the data. Rootp points to a variable that
points to the root of the tree. A NULL value for the variable pointed to by rootp denotes an
empty tree; in this case, the variable will be set to point to the datum which will be at the root of
the new tree.

Like tsearch, tfind will search for a datum in the tree, returning a pointer to it if found. However,
if it is not found, tfind will return a NULL pointer. The arguments for tfind are the same as for
tsearch.
Tdelete deletes a node from a binary search tree. The arguments are the same as for tsearch.
The variable pointed to by rootp will be changed if the deleted node was the root of the tree.
Tdelete returns a pointer to the parent of the deleted node, or a NULL pointer if the node is not
found.
Twalk traverses a binary search tree. Root is the root of the tree to be traversed. (Any node in
a tree may be used as the root for a walk below that node.) Action is the name of a routine to be
invoked at each node. This routine is, in turn, called with three arguments. The first argument is
the address of the node being visited. The second argument is a value from an enumeration data
type typedef enum { pre order, postorder, endorder, leaf} VISIT; (defined in the
header file), depending on whether tWs is the first, second or third time that the node has been
visited (during a depth-first, left-to-right traversal of the tree), or whether the node is a leaf.
The third argument is the level of the node in the tree, with the root being level zero.

The pointers to the key and the root of the tree should be of type pointer-to-element, and cast to
type pointer-to-character. Similarly, although declared as type pointer-to-character, the value
returned should be cast into type pointer-to-element.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 2, 1985

TSEARCH ( 3C )

TSEARCH(3C)

EXAMPLE

The following code reads in strings and stores structures containing a pointer to each string and a
count of its length. It then walks the tree, printing out the stored strings and their lengths in
alphabetical order.
#include
#include
struct node {
/* pointers to these are stored in the tree */
char *stringj
int lengthj
}j
/ _ space to store strings _/
char string--"pace[lOOOO]j
/ _ nodes to store - /
struct node nodes[500]j
/ _ this points to the root _/
struct node *root = NULLj
main( )

{
char _strptr = string--"pacej
struct node -nodeptr = nodesj
void print-Ilode( ), twalk( )j
int i = 0, node_compare( )j
while (gets(strptr) != NULL && i++ < 500)
/* set node */
nodeptr- >string = strptrj
nodeptr->length = strlen(strptr)j
/* put node into the tree */
(void) tsearch«char *)nodeptr, &root,
node_compare) j
/* adjust pointers, so we don't overwrite tree
strptr += nodeptr->length + Ij
nodeptr++;

}
twalk(root, print-Ilode)j

This routine compares two nodes, based on an
alphabetical ordering of the string field.

int
node_compare(nodel, node2)
struct node _nodel, _node2j

{
return strcmp(nodel- >string, node2- >string)j

}

Hewlett~Packard

This routine prints out a node, the first time
twalk encounters it.

~2~

July 2, 1985

TSEARCH (3C)

void
print-Ilode(node, order, level)
struct node **node;
VISIT order;
int level;
{
if (order == preorder II order == leaf) {
(void)printf("string = %20s, length = %d\n",
(*node)->string, (*node)->length);
}
}
SEE ALSO
bsearch(3C), hsearch(3C), Isearch(3C).

DIAGNOSTICS
A NULL pointer is returned by tsearch if there is not enough space available to create a new node.
A NULL pointer is returned by tsearch, tfind and tdelete if rootp is NULL on entry.
If the datum is found, both tsearch and tfind return a pointer to it. If not, tfind returns NULL,
and tsearch returns a pointer to the inserted item.
WARNINGS
The root argument to twalk is one level of indirection less than the rootp arguments to tsearch
and tdelete.
There are two nomenclatures used to refer to the order in which tree nodes are visited. Tsearch
uses preorder, postorder and endorder to respectively refer to visting a node before any of its children, after its left child and before its right, and after both its children. The' alternate nomenclature uses preorder, inorder and postorder to refer to the same visits, which could result in some
confusion over the meaning of postorder.
BUGS
Ifthe calling function alters the pointer to the root, results are unpredictable.

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

July 2,1985

TTYNAME(3C)

NAME
ttyname, isatty - find name of a terminal
SYNOPSIS

char *ttyname (fildes)
int fildes;
int isatty (fildes)
int fildes;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Level:
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Ttyname returns a pointer to a string containing the null-terminated path name of the terminal
device associated with file descriptor fildes.
Isatty returns 1 if fildes is associated with a terminal device, 0 otherwise.

FILES
/dev/*, /dev/*/*
DIAGNOSTICS
Ttyname returns a NULL pointer if fildes does not describe a terminal device in directory /dev.
BUGS
The return value points to static data whose content is overwritten by each call.

Hewlett-Packard

July 2, 1985

TTY SLOT ( 3C)

TTYSLOT(3C)

NAME

ttyslot - find the slot in the utmp file of the current user
SYNOPSIS

int ttyslot ( )
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Ttyslot returns the index of the current user's entry in the /etc/utmp file. This is accomplished
by actually scanning the file /etc/inittab for the name of the terminal associated with the standard input, the standard output, or the error output (0, 1 or 2).
FILES

/etc/inittab
/etc/utmp
SEE ALSO

getut(3C), ttyname(3C).
DIAGNOSTICS

A value of is returned if an error was encountered while searching for the terminal name or if
none of the above file descriptors is associated with a terminal device.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

UNGETC(3S)

NAME

ungetc - push character back into input stream
SYNOPSIS
#include
int ungetc (c, stream)
int c;
FILE *stream;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Ungetc inserts the character c into the buffer associated with an input stream. That character, c,
will be returned by the next getc(9S) call on that stream. Ungetc returns c, and leaves the file
stream unchanged.
One character of pushback is guaranteed, provided something has already been read from the
stream and the stream is actually buffered. In the case that stream is stdin, one character may be
pushed back onto the buffer without a previous read statement.
If c equals EOF, ungetc does nothing to the buffer and returns EOF.

Fseek(3S) erases all memory of inserted characters.
SEE ALSO

fseek(3S), getc(3S), setbuf(3S).
DIAGNOSTICS

Ungetc returns EOF if it cannot insert the character.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2, 1985

VPRINTF ( 3S )

NAME

vprintf, vfprintf, vsprintf - print formatted output of a varargs argument list
SYNOPSIS
#include
#include
int vprintf (format, ap)
char *format;
va~ist ap;
int vfprintf (stream, format, ap)
FILE *stream;
char *format;
va~ist ap;
int vsprintf (s, format, ap)
char *s, *format;
v~ist ap;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
vprintf, vfprintf, and v8printf are the same as printf, fprintf, and 8printf respectively, except that
instead of being called with a variable number of arguments, they are called with an argument list
as defined by varargs (5).
EXAMPLE
The following demonstrates how vfprintf could be used to write an error routine.

#include
#include

*
*

error should be called like
error(function-Ilame, format, arg1, arg2".);

*/
/*VARARGSO*/
void
error( v1L-alist)
/* Note that the function-Ilame and format arguments cannot be
separately declared because of the definition of varargs.

*/
v1L-dcl
{
args;
char *fmt;

v~ist

va-start (args);
/* print out name of function causing error */
(void)fprintf(stderr, "ERROR in %s: ", v1L-arg(args, char *»;
fmt = v1L-arg( args, char *);
/* print out remainder of message */
(void)vfprintf(stderr, fmt, args);

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 2,1985

VPRINTF ( 3S )

v1L-end (args ) j
(void)abort( )j

}
SEE ALSO
printf(3S), varargs(5).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 2, 1985

INTRO(4)

NAME
intro - introduction to special files
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Remarks: In general, device drivers are not portable across systems; however, every effort has
been made to make their behavior portable. Due to variation in hardware, this is not
always possible. Programs which use these drivers directly are at higher than average
risk of not being portable.
DESCRIPTION
This section describes various special files that refer to specific HP peripherals and device drivers.
The names of the entries are usually derived from the type of device being described (disc, plotter,
etc.), not the names of the special files themselves. Characteristics of both the hardware device
and the corresponding HP-UX device driver are discussed where applicable.
The devices are divided into two catagories, unblocked and blocked. An unblocked device is
also called a raw or character-mode device. An unblocked device, such as a line printer, uses a
character special file.
Blocked devices, as the name implies, transfer data in blocks via the system's normal buffering
mechanism. Block devices use block special files.
For specific details about the default special files shipped with your system, consult the System
Administrator Manual for your system.
The desired name is associated with a specific device when mknod(lM) is used to create a special
file for that device. The following naming convention is recommended for use when creating special files (special file names are are independent of the hardware):
[r]

dev~d

[procL.no] [modeLinitial] [sldli] [.] [digit]

where:
r

if present, indicates that the device is treated as a raw device;
otherwise, the file is a block-mode file.

dev~d

consists of one of the following mnemonics:
ct
hd
mt
fd
lp
dig
pit

CS/80 cat ridge tape drive
hard disc
9-track tape drive
flexible disc
line printer
digitizer·
plotter or graphics CRT display

procL.no

HP product number for the device;

modeLinitial

the letter suffix (if any) associated with the device model
number;

sldli

used with the HP 9895A to specify Single-sided, Double-sided,
or IBM media format;

.digit

used when two or more identical devices are connected to the
system; for example, if two HP 2631G printers are connected to
the system, their special file names would be Ip263lg and
Ip263lg.l (they could also be named lp and lp.l).

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 500:
Block special files cannot be opened for reading or writing.
The IBM format capability in the HP 9895A is not officially supported on HP-UX.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 10, 1985

CT(4)

NAME

ct - cartridge tape access
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

DESCRIPTION
This page describes the actions of the general HP-UX cartridge tape drivers when referring to a
cartridge tape as either a block-mode or character-mode (raw) device.

Cartridge tapes are designed for use as "streaming" devices, and are not designed to start and
stop frequently. Like discs, they are technically "random access" devices, but such access is less
efficient and causes more tape and drive wear than streaming mode. While it is possible to use a
cartridge tape as a file slfstem or random access storage device, such use will dramatically reduce
the life expectancy of tape cartridges and the tape drive itself.
Any CS/80 cartridge tape unit, whether built into a disc drive or operated as a standalone device,
can be accessed as a blocked or raw device.
Block special files access cartridge tapes through normal system buffering mechanisms. Buffering
is handled such that concurrent accesses through multiple opens or mounts on the same physical
device do not get out of phase. Block special files can be read and written without regard to physical cartridge tape records. Each I/O operation results in one or more logical block transactions.
Use of this mode is discouraged because it increases wear on tapes and drives.
Character special files provide a raw interface for transferring data directly between the cartridge
tape and the user's read or write buffer. A single read or write operation always results in exactly
one I/O transaction. This is considerably more efficient than block-mode I/O which can require
several transactions to transfer the same amount of information and cannot handle the transfer
directly between the drive and user space.

Tcio(l) is provided on some systems so you can take advantage of the efficiencies of raw I/O,
while also making optimal use of the streaming capabilities of the cartridge tape drives. During
writes, buffers small transactions into larger data blocks that are optimal for cartridge tapes, and
reverses the process during reads. It is particularly designed for use as a complement to cpio for
handling backups.
During raw I/O, there may be implementation-dependent restrictions on the alignment of the
user buffer in memory and its maximum size. Also, each transfer must occur on a record boundary and must read a whole number of records. Record size is hardware dependent, but is usually
1024 bytes. Use of tcio (1) hides all these issues.
Each raw access is independent of other raw accesses and of block accesses to the same physical
device. Thus, transfers are not guaranteed to occur in any particular order. Having multiple programs access the cartridge tape is, in effect, random access, and is subject to the warnings above.
In raw I/O, each operation is completed to the device before the call returns. For block-mode
writes, data may be cached until it is convienient for the system to write it. In addition, blockmode reads potentially do a one (or more) block read-ahead. The interaction of block-mode and
raw access to the same cartridge tape is not specified, and in general is unpredictable. 'Because
block-mode writes can be delayed, it is possible for a program to generate requests much more
rapidly than the drive can actually process them. Flushing a large number of requests could take
several minutes, and during that time the system will not have use of the buffers taken by these
requests, and thus will suffer a possibly severe performance degradation. If the tape drive and the
system disc share a single controller, disc activity may be severely limited or stopped until the
buffers are flushed.
The name of a raw device (its character special file name) is typically the same as the name of the
corresponding blocked device (its block special file name) prefixed with an "r".

Hewlett-Packard

July 9, 1985

CT( 4)

CT(4)

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:
Block-special devices cannot be opened for I/O.
SEE ALSO

mkdev(IM), mknod(IM), tcio(I), intro(4), disc(4), mt(4), and the HP-UX System Administrator
Manual provided with your system.

Hew lett-Packard

-2-

July 9, 1985

DISC ( 4)

NAME

disc - direct disc access
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

DESCRIPTION

This page describes the actions of the general HP-UX disc drivers when referring to a disc as
either a blocked or unblocked (raw or character special) device.
Block special files access discs via the system's normal buffering mechanism. Buffering is done in
such a way that concurrent access through multiple opens or mounts of the same physical device
do not get out of phase. Block special files may be read and written without regard to physical
disc records. Each I/O operation results in one or more logical block transactions.
There is also a raw interface via a character special file which provides for direct transmission
between the disc and the user's read or write buffer. A single read or write operation results in
exactly one transaction. Therefore raw I/O is considerably more efficient when many bytes are
transmitted in a single operation because blocked disc access requires potentially several transactions and does not transmit directly to user space.
In raw I/O, there may be implementation dependent restrictions on the alignment of the user
buffer in memory. Also, each transfer must occur on a sector boundary and must read a whole
number of sectors. The sector size is a hardware dependent value (1024 bytes is the generally
preferred value).
Each raw access is independent of other raw accesses and of block accesses to the same physical
device. Thus, transfers are not guaranteed to occur in any particular order.
In both raw and blocked I/O, each operation is completed to the device before the call returns. In
addition, blocked I/O potentially does a one (or more) block read-ahead.
The name of a raw device (its character special file name) is typically the same as the name of the
corresponding blocked device (its block special file name) prefixed with an "r".
SEE ALSO

intro(4), mkdev(1M), mknod(IM), and the HP-UX System Administrator Manual included with
your system.
WARNING

On some systems, having both a mounted file system and a block special file open on the same
device is asking for trouble; this should be avoided if possible. This is because it may be possible
for some files to have private buffers in some systems.
Like discs, the cartridge tape units in command set 80 disc drives are also accessed as blocked or
raw devices. However, using a cartridge tape as a file system will severely limit the life expectancy of the tape drive. Tapes should only be used for system back-up and other needs where
data must be stored on tape, such as for transport or other uses.

Hew lett-Packard

July 9, 1985

GRAPHICS ( 4)

Series 200 and 300 Only

GRAPHICS ( 4)

NAME
CRT graphics - information for CRT graphics devices
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/NON-STANDARD
Origin:

Remarks: This information is valid for Series 200 and 300 only.
DESCRIPTION
CRT graphics devices are frame-buffer based raster displays. These devices use memory mapped
I/O to obtain much higher performance than is possible with tty-based graphics terminals. CRT
graphics devices should only be accessed through the STARBASE libraries. They cannot be piped
or redirected to because they are not serial devices.
Special (device) files for CRT graphics devices are character special files with major number 12.
The minor number for CRT graphics devices is of the form:
OxSSTTXX
where SS is a one-byte select code number, TT is a one-byte type specifier, and XX is an unused
byte (should be zero).
The type field in the minor number is defined as follows:

auto-configures to one of the following:
a)

low resolution graphics device at physical address Ox520000 (if present).

high resolution graphics device at physical address Ox560000 if low resolution
device at Ox520000 not present.

high resolution graphics device at physical address Ox560000 (unless there is no low
resolution device at Ox520000, in which case type 1 is invalid).
2

high or low resolution graphics device at the select code specified by the select code
field in the minor number.

Communication with a CRT graphics device is begun with an open
processes may concurrently have the graphics device open.

system call.

Multiple

Close shuts down the file descriptor associated with the graphics device. If the close is for the
last system wide open on the device then the graphics device is also unmapped from the user
address space; otherwise it is left mapped into the user address space (see GCUNMAP below).

Read and write system calls are undefined and will always return ENXIO.

loctl is used to control the graphics device. The valid ioctl commands (see )
are:

GClD

return the identity of the CRT graphics device. The possible identities are:
1 = 98204A
2 = 9826A
3 = 9836A
4 = 9836C
5 = 98627A
6 = 98204B
7 = 9837
8 = 98700

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

Series 200 and 300 Only

GRAPHICS (4)

GRAPHICS ( 4)

= hp9000s300 displays

GCON,GCOFF
turn graphics "on" or "off". May be a no-op for some devices.
GCAON,GCAOFF
turn alpha "on" or "off". May be a no-op for some devices.
GCMAP

map the CRT graphics device into the user address space at the address specified
in the ioctl argument. The argument is 'char **arg'. The value *arg is used as a
requested address. The actual mapping address is then returned in *arg. If *arg
is 0 then the system selects the first available address (see GCLOCKjGCUNLOCK
below).

GCUNMAP remove the mapping of the CRT graphics device from the user address space.
GCLOCK

ensure exclusive use of the CRT graphics device.

GCUNLOCK
relinquish exclusive use of the CRT graphics device.
For all frame buffers the data bytes scan from left to right and from top to bottom. Some
displays map in control areas which must be skipped over to reach the frame buffer. Some devices
map individual bits to pixels, (dots on the screen.) Some map bytes or parts of bytes to pixels.
Lsb stands for least significant bit; msb stands for most siguificant bit.
98204A and 9826A
There are 300 lines of 100 bytes each. Only the odd numbered bytes are used. There
is a one bit per pixel, with msb left, and lsb right.
9836A and 98204B
There are 390 lines of 64 bytes each. There is a one bit per pixel, with msb left, and
lsb right.
9836C

Starting Ox800 bytes from the base address, there are 390 lines of 512 bytes each. All
bytes are used. There is one byte per pixel. The bottom four bits of each byte are a
color map index for that pixel.

98627A

Starting Ox8000 bytes from the base address, there are 3 buffers of Ox8000 bytes each.
The 3 buffers are the data for red, green, and blue. There is one bit per pixel, with
msb left, and lsb right. There are 64 bytes per line. The number of lines depends on
the setting of control registers.

9837

Starting Oxl0000 bytes from the base address, there are 768 lines of 1024 bytes each.
There is one pixel per byte. The lsb of each byte corresponds to a pixel.

98700

Starting Ox10000 bytes from the base address, there are 768 lines of 1024 bytes each.
There is one pixel per byte. Each byte corresponds to the color map index of a pixel.

Hewlett-Packard

- 2-

November 15, 1985

GRAPHICS ( 4)

Series 200 and 300 Only

GRAPHICS ( 4 )

Series 300 Displays:
These displays have registers describing the display size. The following code computes
frame buffer width and height and determines what portion of the frame buffer is
being displayed.

/* unsigned char *base = ;
buffeLwidth = (base[5] « 8) + base[7];
buffeL...height = (base[9} « 8) + base[ll];
displayeLwidth = (base[13} « 8) + base[15};
displayecL..height = (base[17} « 8) + base[19};
not-.-Square = ((base[23} & 1) == 1);

Starting OxlOOOO bytes from the base address, there are lines of
bytcs each. There is one pixel per byte. Each byte corresponds to the color
map index of a pixel. On a monochrome display, the byte value is either 0, (black), or 1 (white).
If ((base[23] & 1) == 1) then pixels are twice as high as they are wide, and may be used in pairs
to produce square double pixels.
One shared memory descriptor (see shmget(2)) is used for each graphics device. Each shared
memory descriptor is accessible only through its graphics interface. Thus, any attempt to access
them through shmat(2», shmctl(2)), shmdt(2», etc. results in EACCESS errors.
ERRORS

[ENXIO}

no such device or read/write not supported.

[ENOSPC]

cannot allocate required resources for mapping.

[ENOMEM}

cannot allocate sufficient memory for mapping.

[ENOTTY}

bad ioctl command, or an ioctl was attempted on an open file.

SEE ALSO

mknod(8).

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

November 15, 1985

HPIB(4)

NAME
hpib - hpib interface information
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/NON-STANDARD
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
HP-IB is Hewlett-Packard's implementation of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation. For more information
about the standard, consult any of the following documents:
IEEE Std 488-1978
IEC Pub 625-1
ANSI MC1.l
A read operation on a device connected to an HP-IB configures the computer as "listener" and
the device as "talker". The read operation terminates when the number of bytes requested has
been transferred, a pattern termination character is matched, or the device asserts the EOI (end
or identify) line. A write operation configures the computer as "talker" and the device as
"listener". The write operation terminates when the number of bytes specified has been
transferred and it has asserted EOr.
Devices connected to an HP-IB are addressed using three values. The first value, called the
major value, is used to select the appropriate device driver. The second value is called the select
code. The select code refers to the I/O interface card or slot number to which the device is connected. The third value is called the HP-IB address. The HP-IB address is usually set by an
in-line or rotary switch on the device itself. Refer to the device reference manual for information
on setting the HP-IB address.
This driver is also used to access HP-IB plotters, digitizers and printers in raw mode. A printer
in raw mode is used as a graphics device.
The HP-IB address is in the range 0 through 30, unless you want to use the device-independent
library (DIL) to talk to an I/O interface card on a raw bus (no automatic addressing). In this
case, use HP-IB address 31. For more details on DIL, refer to the hpib*(3D), io*(3D), and
gpio*(3D) manual entries.
Terminating a write operation does not depend on an asserted EOr.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200:
The major value for HP-IB raw mode printers, plotters, and digitizers is always 21 (RAW
HP-IB).
Series 500:
The major value for HP-IB printers, plotters, and digitizers is always 12 for HP 27110
cards and 37 for the Model 550 internal HP-IB.
SEE ALSO
intro(4), mknod(lM), documentation for the specific device.

Hewlett-Packard

-1- ,

July 9, 1985

IOMAP(4}

Series 200/300 Implementation

IOMAP( 4)

Status: R
NAME
iomap -- physical address mapping
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/NON-STANDARD
HP

Origin:

Remarks: This information is valid for Series 200 and 300 only.
DESCRIPTION
The iomap mechanism allows the mapping (thus direct access) of physical addresses into the user
process address space. For Series 200/300 computers, the physical address space begins at
OxOOOOOO and extends to Oxffffff.
The special (device) files for iomap devices are character special files with major number 10.
The minor number for iomap devices is of the form:
OxAAAANN
where AAAA is a two-byte address, and NN is a one-byte field.
The address portion of the minor number is formed by dividing the physical address by 65536.
NN*65536 is the size of the region to be mapped. For example, the minor number for a device at
Ox720000 and 128k in size is Ox007202.
Access to the iomap devices is controlled by the file permissions set on the character special file.
Multiple processes may concurrently have iomap devices opened and mapped. It is the responsibility of the processes to synchronize their accesses.

Read and write system calls are not supported.
Ioctl is used to control the iomap device. The valid ioctl commands (see ) are:
IOMAPMAP
map the iomap device into the user address space at the address specified in the
ioctl argument. If the argument is 0 then the system selects the first available
address. Multiple processes may concurrently have the iomap device mapped.
IOMAPUNMAP
unmap the iomap device from the user address space.

Close shuts down the file descriptor associated with the iomap device. If the close is for the last
system wide open on the device then the iomap device is also unmapped from the user address
space; otherwise it is left mapped into the user address space (see IOMAPUNMAP above).
One shared memory descriptor (see shmget(2)) is used for each iomap device. Shared memory
descriptors are accessible only through the iomap interface. Consequently, attempts to access
them through shmat(2), shmctl(2), shmdt(2), etc. result in EACCESS errors.
WARNING
Iomap devices should be created and used with extreme caution. Inappropriate accesses to io devices or ram may result in a system crash.
ERRORS
[ENINVAL]
[ENOMEM]

address field out of range, ioctl command invalid.
cannot allocate required memory for mapping.

[ENODEV]

read/write unsupported.

[ENXIO]

no such address.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

IOMAP(4}

Series 200/300 Implementation

[ENOSPC]

cannot allocate required resources for mapping.

[ENOTTY]

bad ioctl command, or an ioctl was attempted on an open file.

IOMAP(4}

SEE ALSO

mknod(8).

Hewlett-Packard

- 2-

November 15, 1985

LP(4)

LP{ 4)

NAME
lp - line printer
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/NUCLEUS
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
All file names in / dey containing the mnemonic lp are special files providing the interface to a
particular line printer. A line printer is a character special device which may optionally have an
interpretation applied to the data.
If the lp mnemonic is preceded by the character r, then data is sent to the printer in raw mode.
(This could assume, for example, a graphic printer operation.) In raw mode, no interpretation is
done on the data to be printed, and no page formatting is performed. The bytes are simply sent
to the printer and printed as is.
H the lp mnemonic is not preceded by the character r, then the data is interpreted according to
rules discussed below. The driver understands the concept of a printer page in that it has a page
length (in lines), line length (in characters), and indent from the left margin (in characters). The
default line length, indent, lines per page, open and close page eject, and handling of backspace
are set to defaults determined when the printer is opened and recognized by the system the first
time. If the printer is not recognized, the default line length is 132 characters, indent is 4 characters, lines per page is 66, one page is ejected on close and none on open, and backspace is handled
for a character printer.
The following rules describe the interpretation of the data stream.
A form feed causes a page eject and resets the line counter to zero.
Multiple consecutive form-feeds are treated as a single form-feed.
The new-line character is mapped into a carriage-return/line-feed sequence, and if an
offset is specified a number of blanks are inserted after the carriage-return/line-feed
sequence.
A new-line that extends over the end of a page is turned into a form-feed.
Tab characters are expanded into the appropriate number of blanks (tab stops are
assumed to occur every eight character positions).
Backspaces are interpreted to yield the appropriate overstrike either for a character
printer or a line printer.
Lines longer than the line length minus the indent (Le., 128 characters, using the above
defaults) are truncated.
Carriage-return characters cause the line to be overstruck.
Two ioctl(2) system calls are available to control the lines per page, characters per line, and
indent. At either open or close time, if no page eject is requested, the paper will not be moved.
#include
ioctl (fildes, command, arg)
struct lprio *arg;
The commands are:
LPRGET

Get the current printer status information and store in the lprio structure
referenced by argo

LPRSET

Set the current printer status information from the structure referenced by
argo

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

LP{ 4)

LP(4)

Thus, indent, page width and page length can be set with an external program. If the columns
field is set to zero, the defaults are restored at the next open.
FILES
/dev/lp

default or standard printer used by some HP-UX commands;

/dev /[r]lp*

special files for printers

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 500:
The number of characters per line (80 or 132) and wrap-around can be selected/enabled
via the minor number in the mknod(lM) command. See the System Administrator
Manual for details.
The LPRGET and LPRSET ioetl commands are not currently supported.
Series 200:
The uppercase-only flag, the no-overprint flag, the raw-mode flag, and no-page-ejecton-open-or-close flag can be selected (enabled) by appropriate use of the minor number
in the mknod(lM) command. See the HP-UX System Administrator Manual for details.
Integral PC:
This version of Ip is not supported on the Integral PC. Refer to the Integral Personal
Computer Programmer's Guide for more information about the Ip implementation on the
Intregral PC.
SEE ALSO
Ip(l), ioctl(2), intro(4).

Hewlett-Packard

July 9,1985

MEM(4)

NAME

mem, lanem - core memory
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/Optional
Origin:

System III

Remarks: Not all HP-UX systems provide the mem and kmem files. Programs which use them
cannot expect to be portable from one HP-UX implementation to another.
DESCRIPTION

Mem is a special file that is an image of the core memory of the computer. It may be used, for
example, to examine, and even to patch the system.
Byte addresses in mem are interpreted as memory addresses. References to non-existent locations
cause errors to be returned.
Examining and patching device registers is likely to lead to unexpected results when read-only or
write-only bits are present.
The file kmem is the same as mem except that kernel virtual memory rather than physical
memory is accessed.
Mem and kmem should always be protected so that only the super-user can read and write them,
othewise both privacy and system security are compromised.
FILES

/dev/mem, /dev/kmem
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:
Mem and kmem are not provided.
Series 200:
Memory does not begin at physical address O. Instead, it occupies the upper portion of the
physical address space from Ox900000 through Oxffffff, beginning at address Oxffffff and
moving downward. Thus, if one megabyte of RAM is installed, it occupies addresses
OxfOOOOO through Oxffffff.
BUGS
On some machines memory files are accessed one byte at a time, an inappropriate method for
some device registers.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

MODEM(4)

MODEM (4)

NAME

modem - asynchronous serial modem line control
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin: HP
DESCRIPTION

This section describes the two modes of modem line control and the three types of terminal port
access. It also discusses the effect of several bits of the termio structure which affect modem line
control. The modem related ioctl(2) system calls are discussed at the end of the document.
There are several terms that are used within the following discussion which will be defined here
for reference. "Modem control lines" (CONTROL) are generally defined as those outgoing modem
lines that are automatically controlled by the driver. "Modem status lines" (STATUS) are generally defined as those incoming modem lines that are automatically monitored by the driver.
CONTROL and STATUS for a terminal file vary according to the modem line control mode of the
file (see Modem line control modes below). An open(2) to a port will be considered to be
blocked if it is waiting for another file on the same port to be closed. An open to a port will be
considered to be pending if it is waiting for the STATUS to be raised. An open to a port will be
considered to be successful if the open system call has returned to the calling process without
error.
Open flag bits
The only open flag bit recognized by the driver is the O-.NDELAY bit. When this bit is set, an
open call to the driver will never become blocked. If possible, the open will be returned immediately as successful, and the driver will continue the process of opening the tty file. If it is not possible, then the open will be returned immediately with the appropriate error code as described in
the appropriate section.
Termio bits
The CLOCAL bit in the termio structure (see termio(4) ) is used to remove the driver's automatic
monitoring of the modem lines. However, the user's ability to control the modem lines is determined only by the mode in effect and does not depend on the state of CLOCAL. Normally, the
driver will monitor and require the STATUS to be raised. An open system call will raise the CONTROL and wait for the STATUS before completing unless the CLOCAL bit is set. (If the
O-.NDELAY bit is set, the open will be returned immediately, but the driver will otherwise continue to monitor the modem lines as normal based on the state of the CLOCAL bit.) If CLOCAL is
set when the last close(2) is issued to the port, the driver will not attempt to break any modem
connection which may exist unless the HUPCL bit is set (see below). Normally, loss of the
STATUS will cause the driver to break the modem connection and lower the CONTROL; however,
if CLOCAL is set, any changes in the STATUS will be ignored. A connection is required before any
data may be read or written, unless CLOCAL is set. Any timers that would normally be in effect
(see Modem line control modes and Modem timers below) will be stopped while CLOCAL is
set.
When the CLOCAL bit is changed from clear to set, the driver will assume the existence" of an
active device (such as a modem) on the port regardless of the STATUS. If any of the CONTROL
are raised at that point in time, they will continue in that state. The STATUS will no longer be
actively monitored. When the CLOCAL bit is changed from set to clear, the driver will resume
actively monitoring the STATUS. If all of the CONTROL are raised at that point in time, the
driver will attempt to begin or continue a modem connection. If any of the CONTROL are not
raised, the driver will break the modem connection. If any of the STATUS are not raised, the
driver will act as though those signals were lost as described in Modem line control modes
below. If the device is a controlling terminal, a hangup signal will be sent to the process group.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

MODEM(4)

The HUPCL bit in the termio structure determines the action of the driver regarding the CONTROL when the last close system call is issued to a terminal file. If the HUPCL bit is set, the
driver will lower the CONTROL at close time and the modem connection will be broken. If
HUPCL is not set and a modem connection exists, it will continue to exist, even after the close is
issued.
Terminal port access types
There are three types of modem access: call-in connections, call-out connections, and direct (no
modem control) connections. A given port may be accessed through all three types of connection
by accessing different files. The modem access type of a terminal file is determined by the file's
major and/or minor device numbers.
The call-in type of access is used when the connection is expected to be established by an incoming call. This is the type that would be used by getty(lM) to accept logins over a modem. When
an open is issued to such a file, the driver may wait for an incoming call and will then raise the
CONTROL based on the current mode (see below) of the port. When the port is closed, the driver
may lower the CONTROL depending on the HUPCL bit.
The call-out type of access is used when the connection is expected to be established by an outgoing call. This would be used by programs such as uucp(l). When an open is issued to such a file,
the driver will immediately raise the CONTROL and wait for a connection based on the mode
currently in effect. When the port is closed, the driver may lower the CONTROL depending on
the HUPCL bit.
The direct type of access is used when no driver modem control is desired. This could then be
used for directly connected terminals that use a three-wire connection, or to talk to a modem
before a connection has been established. The second case allows a program to give dialing
instructions to the modem. Neither the CLOCAL nor the HUPCL bits have any effect on a port
accessed through a direct file. (However, both bits may be inherited by other types of files; see
Terminal port access interlock below.) An open to a direct file does not affect the CONTROL
and does not depend on any particular state of the STATUS to succeed. When the file is closed,
the driver will not affect the state of the CONTROL. If a modem connection has been established,
it will continue to exist. Setting the speed of a direct file to BO (see termio(4) ) will be considered
an impossible speed change and will be ignored. It will not affect the CONTROL.
Modem line control modes
There are two modes of modem line control: CCITT mode and simple mode. A given port may
have only one of these two modes in effect at any given point in time. An attempt to open a port
with a mode other than the one in effect (from a pending or successful open on a different file) will
cause the open to be returned with an ENXIO error. The modem access type of a terminal file is
determined by the file's major and/or minor device numbers.
CCITT mode is used for connections to switched line modems. The CONTROL for CCITT mode
are Data Terminal Ready (DTR) and Request to Send (RTS). The STATUS are Data Set Ready
(DSR) , Data Carrier Detect (DCD), and Clear to Send (CTS). Additionally, the Ring Indicate (RI)
signal indicates the presence of an incoming call. When aconnection is begun (an incoming call
for a call-in file or an open issued to a call-out file), the CONTROL are raised and a connection
timer (see Modem timers below) is started. If the STATUS become raised before the time period
has elapsed, a connection is established and the open request is returned successfully. If the time
period expires, the CONTROL are lowered and the connection is aborted. For a call-in file, the
driver will wait for another incoming call; for a call-out file, the open will be returned with an EIO
error. Once a connection is established, loss of either DSR or CTS will cause the CONTROL to be
lowered and a hangup signal to be generated if the device is a controlling terminal. If DCD is lost,
a timer is started. If DCD resumes before the time period has expired, the connection will be
maintained. However, no data transfer will occur during this time. The driver will stop transmitting characters, and any characters received will be discarded. If DCD is not restored within the
allotted time, the connection will be broken as described above for DSR and CTS. If the modem

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

November 15, 1985

MODEM(4)

connection is to be broken when the close system call is issued (i.e. HUPCL is set), then the CONTROL will be lowered and the close will be returned as successful. However, no further opens will
be allowed until after both DSR and CTS have been lowered by the modem, and the hangup timer
(see Modem timers below) has expired. The action taken in response to an open during this
time will be the same as if the port were still open. (See Terminal port access interlock
below.)
When a port is in CCITT mode, the driver has complete control of the modem lines and the user
is not allowed to change the setting of the CONTROL or affect which STATUS are actively monitored by the driver (see Modem ioctls below). This is to provide strict adherence with the
CCITT recommendations.
Simple mode is used for connections to devices which require only a simple method of modem line
control. This can include devices such as black boxes, data switches, or for system-to-system connections. It can also be used with modems which can not operate under the CCITT recommendations. The CONTROL for simple mode consists of only DTR. The STATUS consists of only DCD .
When an open is issued, the CONTROL is raised but no connection timer is started. When the
STATUS becomes raised, a connection is established and the open request is returned successfully.
Once a connection is established, loss of the STATUS will cause the CONTROL to be lowered and a
hangup signal to be generated if the device is a controlling terminal.
When a port is in simple mode, the driver will normally control the modem lines. However, the
user is allowed to change the setting of the CONTROL (see Modem ioctls below).
Terminal port access interlock
An interlock mechanism is provided between the three access types of terminal files. It prevents
more than one file from being successfully opened at a time, but allows certain opens to succeed
while others are pending so that a port can be opened through a call-out connection while getty
has a pending open at a call-in connection. The three access types are given a priority that determines which open will succeed if more than one file has an open issued against it. The three
access types are ordered from lowest priority to highest as follows: call-in, call-out, and direct.
If an open is issued to a port which already has a successful open on it of a lower priority type,
the new open will be returned with an EBUSY error. (EBUSY will also be returned if a CCITT
call-in file is not yet successful, but has received an incoming call indication.) If the lower priority
open is pending, the new open will succeed if possible, or will be left pending if waiting for the
STATUS. If a higher priority open has succeeded or is pending, the new open will be blocked,
unless the new open has the O--..NDELAY flag bit set, in which case the open will be returned with
an EBUSY error. Once an open on one type of file is successful, any pending opens on lower

priority files will become blocked.
When a file of one priority is closed, a blocked open on the next lower priority type file will
become active. If all of the STATUS are raised, the open will succeed, otherwise the open will
become pending waiting for the STATUS. If the lower priority open is successful (because the
connection was maintained when the higher priority file was closed), the port characteristics
(speed, parity, etc.) that were set by the higher priority file will be inherited by the lower priority
file. If the connection is not maintained through the close, the port characteristics will be set to
default values at the next successful open.
Modem timers
There are four timers currently defined for use with modem connections. The first three of the
timers are applicable only to CCITT mode connections. In general, the effect of changing a timer
value while the timer is running is system dependent. However, setting the timer value to zero is
guaranteed to disable the timer even if it is running.
The connect timer is used to limit the amount of time to wait for a connection to be established
once it has been begun. This timer is started when an incoming call has been received on a call-in
file, or when an open has been issued on a call-out file for which no opens are already pending. If

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

November 15, 1985

MODEM(4)

the connection is completed in time, the timer is aborted. If the time period expires, the connection is aborted. For a call-in file, the driver will again wait for an incoming call and the open will
remain pending. For a call-out file, the open will be returned with an EIO error.
The carrier detect timer is used to limit the amount of Lime Lo wait before causing a disconnect if
DCD drops. If carrier is not re-established in this time, a disconnect will occur. If carrier is reestablished before the timeout, the timer will be aborted and the connection maintained. During
the period when carrier is not raised, no data will be transferred across the line.
The no activity timer is used to limit the amount of time a connection will remain open with no
data transfer across the line. When the data line becomes quiescent with no data transfer, this
timer will be started. If data is again transferred over the line in either direction before the time
limit, the timer will be aborted. If no activity occurs before the timeout has occurred, the driver
will disconnect the line. This can be used to avoid long and costly telephone connections when
data transfer has been stopped either normally or abnormally.
The last timer defined, the hangup timer, is used for both CCITT and simple modes. This timer
controls the amount of time to wait after disconnecting a modem line before allowing another
open to be allowed. This time period should be made long enough to guarantee that the connection has been terminated by the telephone switching equipment. If this period is not long enough,
the telephone connection may not be broken and a succeeding open may complete with the old
connection.
Modem ioctls
Several ioetl system calls apply to manipulation of modem lines. They use the following information defined in .
#define NMTIMER
6
typedef unsigned long mflag;
struct mtimer {
unsigned short m_timers[NMTIMER];
};
Individual modem lines are represented by bits in an unsigned long variable as follows:
MRTS
MCTS
MDSR
MDCD
MDTR
MRI
MDRS

00010000000
00004000000
00002000000
00000400000
00000000040
00000000010
00000000004

Request to Send
Clear to Send
Data Set Ready
Data Carrier Detect
Data Terminal Ready
Ring Indicator
Data Rate Select

outbound
inbound
inbound
inbound
outbound
inbound
outbound

The timer values are defined in the array IIL-timers. The relative position of the timer and
default initial values and units for each timer are as follows:
0
1
2
3
4
5

(

"'-

MTCONNECT
25 s
400 ms
MTCARRIER
MTNOACTIVITY o min
MTHANGUP
250 ms
Reserved
Reserved

A value of zero for any timer will disable that timer.
The modem line ioetl system calls have the form:
ioctl (fildes, command, arg)
unsigned long *arg;

Hewlett-Packard

- 4-

November 15, 1985

MODEM (4)

The commands using this form are:
MCGETA

Get the current state of both inbound and outbound modem lines and store
in the unsigned long referenced by argo A raised line will be indicated by a
one bit in the appropriate position.

MCSETA

Set the outbound modem lines from the unsigned long referenced by argo
Setting an outbound bit to one causes that line to be raised and zero to be
lowered. Setting bits for inbound lines has no effect. Setting any bits while
in CCITT mode has no effect. The change to the modem lines is immediate
and using this form while characters are still being output may cause
unpredictable results.

MCSETAW

Wait for the output to drain and set the new parameters as described
above.

MCSETAF

Wait for the output to drain, then flush the input queue and set the new
parameters as described above.

The timer value ioctl system calls have the form:
ioctl (fildes, command, arg)
struct mtimer *arg;
The commands using this form are:
MCGETT

Get the current timer value settings and store in the mtimer structure referenced by argo

MCSETT

Set the timer values from the structure referenced by argo

For any timer, setting the timer value to its previous value has no effect.
FILES
/dev/tty*
/dev/ttyd*
/dev/cul*
/dev/cua*
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 500:
For the HP27140A 6-port modem multiplexer, the ranges and resolutions of the timers are
as follows:
MTCONNECT
0-255 sec, 1 sec resolution
0-2550 msec, 10 msec resolution
MTCARRIER
MTNOACTIVITY
0-1092 min, 1 min resolution
MTHANGUP
0-65535 msec, 10 msec resolution
If a timer is set out of its range, then the maximum value that timer can assume is used
instead.
For the HP27128A Asynchronous Serial Interface, the ioctl requests described above are
not supported. The timers have fixed values as follows:
MTCONNECT
25 sec
MTCARRIER
400 msec
MTNOACTIVITY
0 min
MTHANGUP
500 msec
This interface only supports the call-in and call-out port access types, and does not support the direct access type.
It is not possible to change the state of the CLOCAL bit when using CCITT mode.

Hewlett-Packard

-5-

November 15, 1985

MODEM(4)

Simultaneous call-in and call-out open atempts in CCITT mode are not allowed.
The default state of the CLOCAL bit upon first open is determined by the state of switch
on the interface (See the System Administrator Manua~.
SEE ALSO

stty(I), mknod(1M), ioctJ(2), termio(4).
HP-UX System Administrator Manual
WARNING

It is occasionally possible that a process may open a call-out file at approximately the same time
as an incoming call is received. In some cases, the call-out connection may be satisfied by the
incoming call. In general, however, the results are indeterminate. If necessary, the situation can
be avoided by the use of two modems and ports, one for call-out connections and the other for
receiving incoming calls.

Hewlett-Packard

- 6-

November 15, 1985

MT(4)

NAME
magtape - magnetic tape interface and controls
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Magnetic Tape Support - HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

UCB and HP

DESCRIPTION
The files / dey /mh and / dey /rmh refer to specific tape drives; the behavior of the specific unit
is specified by several bits in the least significant digit of the minor number in the mknod(1M)
command.
There are three bits controlling the operation of the tape drive. These bits are usually encoded
into the minor number of mknod(8). Refer to the System Administrator Manual for your computer for details.
rewind

When this bit is cleared, the tape is automatically rewound upon close. This is normally
done for units numbered 0-3 and 8-11.

mode

When this bit is set, the tape drive behaves like the Berkeley tape drivers; when clear the
driver behaves like System III. The details are described below. The ioetl operations
described below work in both modes on raw tapes only.

density When cleared, the tape drive is run at 1600 bpi; when set it is run at 800 bpi. The 800
bpi drives are usually numbered 0-7, and 1600 bpi are usually numbered 8-15.
When opened for reading or writing, the tape is assumed to be positioned as desired.
When a file is opened for writing and then closed, a double end-of-file (double tape mark) is written. If the device has the rewind bit set, the tape is rewound; otherwise, the tape is positioned
before the second EOF just written.
When a read-only file is closed and the rewind bit is set, the tape is rewound. If the rewind bit is
not set, the behavior depends on the mode bit. For System III compatibility, the tape is positioned after the EOF following the data just read. For Berkeley compatibility, the tape is not repositioned in any way.
The EOF is returned as a zero-length read.
By judiciously choosing mt files, it is possible to read and write multi-file tapes.
A tape treated as a block device consists of several 512 byte records terminated by an EOF. To
the extent possible, the system makes it possible to treat the tape like any other file. Seeks have
their usual meaning and it is possible to read or write a byte at a time (although very inadvisable).
The mt files discussed above are useful when it is desired to access the tape in a way compatible
with ordinary files. When foreign tapes are to be dealt with, and especially when long records are
to be read or written, the raw interface is appropriate. The raw interface is described below.
The special files associated with a raw tape interface are named rmh. Each read or write call
reads or writes the next record on the tape. In the write case the record has the same length as
the buffer given.
During a read, the record size is passed back as the number of bytes read, up to the buffer size
specified. The number of bytes ignored is available in the mt_resid field of the mtget structure
via the MTIOCGET call of ioetl. In raw tape I/O, the buffer and size may have implementation
. dependent alignment restrictions. Seeks are ignored, instead the ioetl operations described below
are available. An EOF is returned as a zero-length read, with the tape positioned after the EOF,
so that the next read will return the next record.
Using loctl With Magnetic Tape
The ioetl system call can be used to manipulate magnetic tapes; refer to the include file

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 10, 1985

MT(4)

/usr/inelude/sys/mtio.h for a description of the possible operations.
The following code fragment shows how an ioetl call might be used to perform several mag tape
operations:
#include
#include
#include
main(argc, argv)
int argc;
char *argv[];

{
int fd;
struct mtop top;
/* open mag tape device file */
top.mt_count = 1;
switch( *argv[l]) {
case Ill:

/* write an eof */
top.mt_op = MTWEOF;
break;

case 121:

/* rewind the tape */
top.mt_op = MTREW;
break;

case 131:

/ * backspace record */
top.mt_op = MTBSR;
break;

default:
fprintf(stderr, "Unknown option: %sO, argv[I]);
exit(I);
break;

}
fd

= ioctl(fd, MTIOCTOP, &top);

}
This program accepts one argument which selects the operation to perform. The structure template mtop is defined in sys/mtio,h, and contains two parameters defining the operation to perform (mLop) and how many operations to perform (mLeount). All constants used above (plus
many others not used) are defined in sys/mtio.h.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200:
Block magnetic tape is not supported.
The density bit cannot select 800 bpi; 800 bpi is not supported.
The settings of the mode, rewind, and density bits are reflected in the minor numbers
used to create the special file names (see mkdev(8)).
Series 500:
Block magnetic tape is not supported.
The density bit cannot select 800 bpi; 800 bpi is not supported.
FILES

/dev/mt*
/dev/rmh

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 10, 1985

MT(4)

SEE ALSO

intro(4), mkdev(1M), mknod(lM), and the HP-UX System Administrator Manual included with
your system.

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

July 10, 1985

NULL ( 4)

NULL(4)

NAME

null- null file ("bit bucket")
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System III

DESCRIPTION

Data written on a null special file is discarded.
Reads from a null special file always return 0 bytes.
FILES

/dev/null

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

PTY(4)

NAME

pty - pseudo terminal driver
SYNOPSIS

pseudo-device pty
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

Berkeley 4.2

DESCRIPTION
The pty driver provides a conununication path between an HP-UX application process and a supporting server process, and behaves much like a terminal/computer communication path. It is

structured so that output from either process acts as input to the other, thus the term
pseudo terminal. The slave-side of pty interacts with the application process, and its behavior is
defined by termio(4). The master-side of pty interacts with the server process which controls the
application process through pty as if pty were a hardware terminal interface.
The following ioctl requests, defined in , apply only to master side of pty:
TIOCBREAK
Causes a break operation to be done on the slave side of the pty. This action is the same
as if a user had hit the break key on a real terminal. Takes no parameters.
TIOCSIGSEND
Causes a signal to be sent on the slave side of the pty to the current tty process group of
the slave side. The value of the parameter is taken to be the signal number to be sent.
An EINV AL error will be returned and no signal sent if the specified signal number does
not refer to a legal signal (see signal(2)). Note that this request allows the server process
to send signals to processes that are not owned by the same user id.
TIOCSTOP
Stops data flowing from the slave side of the pty to the master side (e.g. like typing'S).
Takes no parameters.
TIOCSTART
Restarts output (stopped by TIOCSTOP or by typing '8). Takes no parameters.
TIOCPKT
Enable/disable packet mode. Packet mode is enabled by specifying (by reference) a
nonzero int parameter and disabled by specifying (by reference) a zero int parameter.
When applied to the master side of a pseudo terminal, each subsequent read from the
master side will return data written on the slave part of the pseudo terminal preceded by
a zero byte (symbolically defined as TIOCPKT---.DATA), or a single byte reflecting control status information. In the latter case, the byte is an inclusive-or of zero or more of
the bits:
TIOCPKTJLUSHREAD
whenever the read queue for the slave side is flushed.
TIOCPKTJLUSHWRITE
whenever the write queue for the slave side is flushed.
TIOCPKT--.STOP
whenever data flowing from the slave side of the pty to the master side is stopped
by means of '8, TIOCSTOP, or TCXONC.
TIOCPKT--.START
whenever data flowing from the slave side of the pty to the master side is restarted.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 10, 1985

PTY(4)

TIOCPKT~OSTOP

whenever the stop and start characters get set to ·S(Q.
TIOCPKT-.NOSTOP
whenever the stop and start characters get set to something other than ·S(Q.
TIOCREMOTE
A mode for the master half of a pseudo terminal, independent of TIOCPKT. This mode
causes input to the pseudo terminal to be flow controlled and not input edited (regardless
of the terminal mode). Each write to the master side produces a record boundary for the
process reading the slave side. In normal usage, a write of data is like the data typed as a
line on the terminal; a write of 0 bytes is like typing an end-of-file character (the EOF
character as defined in termio(4)). The data read by the slave side is identical to the
data written on the master side. Data written on the slave side and read on the master
side with TIOCREMOTE enabled is still subject to the normal termio(4) processing.
TIOCREMOTE can be used when doing remote line editing in a window manager, or
whenever flow controlled input is required. The request takes one int sized parameter,
passed by value. When zero, it disables TIOCREMOTE; when one it enables
TIOCREMOTE. TIOCREMOTE is only effective when TIOCTTY (explained below) is
also enabled, and all data buffered in the pseudo terminal will be flushed when this
request is made.
TIOCTTY
Enable or disable all termio( 4) processing by pty. When disabled, all data is passed
through the pty with no modification. Termio(4) processing (of input and output such as
tab expansion) is enabled by specifying (by reference) a nonzero int parameter and disabled by specifying (by reference) a zero int parameter. Default is to be enabled. When
TIOCTTY is disabled, the following pty modes are also inoperable: TIOCBREAK,
TIOCSTOP, TIOCSTART, TIOCPKT, TIOCREMOTE, and TIOCMONITOR. Issuing
a TIOCTTY ioctl request will also flush all data buffered in the pseudo terminal, and
release any processes currently blocked waiting for data.
When TIOCTTY is enabled (the default case), all termio(4) ioctl requests are handled by
the pty driver itself. When TIOCTTY is disabled, slave side termio(4) ioctl requests are
either ignored completely or passed to the master side depending upon the state of TIOCTRAP below. Slave side non-termio(4) ioctl requests are not affected by the state of
TIOCTTY. They are always ignored completely or passed to the master side depending
upon the state of TIOCTRAP below.
Data being written through a pseudo terminal with TIOCTTY disabled will be handled in
a manner similar to the way data flows through a pipe. A write request will block in the
pty until all of its data has been written into the pty. A read request will block if there is
no data available unless the O-.NDELA Y flag is set (see fcntl(2)). When data is available to be read, the read request will return whatever is available, and will not wait for
the number of bytes requested to be satisfied. The number of bytes a pty can contain in
its internal memory is implementation dependent, but will always be at least 256 bytes in
each direction. For example, a write on the slave side of a pty of 1024 bytes might be
read on the master side by four read requests returning 256 bytes each. The size of the
chunks of data that are read is not guaranteed to be consistent, but no data will be lost.
Opening and closing of the master side acts as a modern connection/disconnection on a real terminal as far as the slave side is concerned. Having no server on the master side will cause opens on
the slave side to hang until there is a server. (termio( 4) description of O-.NDELAY interaction
with pty is also supported.) Opens to the master side are exclusive. Attempts to open an already
open master side of a pty will return errno(2) error EBUSY. (Attempts to open a non-existent
pty will return errno(2) ENXIO.) Closing the master side of a pty sends a 8IGHUP hangup signal to the tty process group number of the corresponding slave side and flushes pending input and

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 10, 1985

PTY(4)

output.
Any termio(4) ioctl request can also be applied to the master side of the pty, unless TIOCTTY
has been disabled.
IOCTL/OPEN/CLOSE TRAPPING
The capabilities that follow give additional flexibility and control for servers connected to the
master side.
When trapping of ioctl/open/close is enabled, ioctl(2), open(2), and close(2) requests made to the
slave side will notify the server on the master side of each request. The close request will only
notify the server and continue to completion, while the open and ioctl requests will not complete
until the master side has had a chance to handle them. The master side acknowledges completion
via an ioctl to the master side. If the pty is not enabled to pass ioctl(2), open(2), and close(2)
from the slave to the master, then they will be ignored (except for termio(4) related processing).
The following ioctl calls apply only to the master side of a pty and pertain to trapping open, close,
and ioctl. They are also defined in :
TIOCTRAP
Enable or disable trapping of ioctl, open, and close from the slave side. Trapping is
enabled by specifying (by reference) a nonzero int parameter and disabled by specifying
(by reference) a zero int parameter. Default is to be disabled. (termio(4) ioctl requests
will not be trapped, unless TIOCTTY is also disabled or TIOCMONITOR is enabled.)
TIOCTRAPSTATUS
Find out if any ioctl/open/close traps are pending. The argument points to an int, that
will be set to one if anything is pending and zero if nothing is pending. This ioctl request
is used when the preferred method of a select(2) "exceptional condition" is not available.
TIOCREQGET
In response to a select(2) "exceptional condition" on the master side, this ioctl request
will read the pending ioctl, open, or close information into memory pointed to by the
argument in the form:
struct request--info {
int request;
int argget;
int argset;
short pgrp;
short pid;
int errno_error;
int return_value;
};
All elements of request--info refer to the slave side of the pty. Enumerating the elements:
request

is the ioctl command received.

argget

is the ioctl request to apply to master side to receive the trapped ioctl
structure if there is one to receive, (a zero value means there is none).
(When nonzero, argget is a TIOCARGGET request with the size field
precomputed. )

argset

is the ioctl request to apply to master side to send back the resulting ioctl
structure if there is one to send back, (a zero value means there is none).
(When nonzero, argset is a TIOCARGSET request with the size field
precomputed. )

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

July 10, 1985

PTY(4)

pgrp

is the process group number of the process doing the operation.

pid

is the process id of the process doing the operation.

errno_error

is the errno (2) error code (initialized to zero) to be returned by ioctl on
the slave side.

retum.-value

(initialized to zero) is the success value to be returned by ioctl on the
slave side when errno_error is not set.

For the case that the ioctl argument received on the slave side is not a pointer, its value
is stored as four bytes that can be retrieved with an ioctl request to the master side equal
to argget.
When an open or close is being passed, request will be set to TIOCOPEN or TIOCCLOSE, respectively. For TIOCOPEN and TIOCCLOSE, both argget and argset will be
of zero because there is no ioctl structure. When TIOCTTY is enabled, the termio(4)
definition of open/close will be executed first, before being passed to the master side.
Note, while all opens are trapped, only the last close on a particular inode for a pty slave
side is trapped by the pty.
If a TIOCREQGET is done before anything has been trapped, this master side ioctl will
block until a slave side ioctl, open, or close is trapped.

TIOCREQSET
Done to complete the handshake started by a previous TIOCREQGET. The argument
should point to the request~nfo structure as defined by the TIOCREQGET.
Before doing this ioctl, to complete the handshake, the server should set errno_error to
an errno(2) error value to be passed back to the slave side. If there is no error,
errno_error can be left alone because the pty will have initialized it to zero. Also, when
there is no error, retur1L-value should be set, if other than a zero result is desired. It
should be noted that the ability to determine the return value and error code for a
request to the slave side is only available for trapped ioctl requests. The server will not
be able to set these values if the trapped request is an open or a close.
If the TIOCREQSET request is made and request in the passed request~nfo structure
does not equal the trapped value, errno(2) EINVAL will be returned. (EINVAL is also
returned if there is no trapped ioctl/open/close.)
If the trapped slave-side request has been interrupted by a signal between the time that
the server has done the TIOCREQGET and the TIOCREQSET, an EINVAL error will
be returned by the TIOCREQSET request.
TIOCMONITOR
Enable or disable read only trapping of termio ioctl requests when TIOCTTY is also
enabled. (When TIOCTTY is disabled, TIOCMONITOR has no effect. Also TIOCMONITOR is independent of TIOCTRAP.) Trapping is enabled by specifying (by reference) a nonzero int parameter and disabled by specifying (by reference) a zero int parameter. Default is to be disabled.
This allows a server process attached to the master side of the pty to know when characteristics of the line discipline in the pty are changed by an application on the slave side.
The mechanism for handshaking trapped termio(4) requests (when TIOCTTY is enabled)
is the same as that for non-termio( 4) ioctl requests; except that any changes or error conditions set by the server on the master side will have no effect. (It is recommended that
termio( 4) ioctl requests be used on the master side to interrogate the configured state of
the line discipline in the pty. One reason for this is to compensate for the window of time
before TIOCMONITOR is enabled, when termio(4) ioctls were not trapped.)
When using select(2) on the master side of a pty, the "exceptional condition" refers to an open,
close, or ioctl pending on the slave side. Ready for reading or writing refers to a read, or write

Hewlett-Packard

-4-

July 10, 1985

PTY(4)

PTY( 4)

pending respectively, from the point of view of the master side.
Of the ioctls that are subject to being trapped, only one per pty may be handled at one time.
This means that when an application does a non-termio(4) ioctl to the slave side, all other ioctls
to the same pty slave side will be blocked until the first one is handshaked back by the master
side. (Ioctls that are not trapped, such as termio(4) when TIOCTTY is enabled and TIOCMONITOR is disabled, will not be blocked.) This permits the implementation of indivisible operations
by an ioctl call on the slave side that is passed to the server process.
In summary, handshaking of an ioctl/open/close on the master side is done using the following
steps:
Slave Side open/close/ioctl Trapped.
This is indicated via a select(2) exceptional condition or via the TIOCTRAPSTATUS ioctl request.
TIOCREQGET ioctl request.
This is done to find out what slave open/ciose/ioctl is trapped.
argget ioctl request.

This optional ioctl is done if argget is nonzero and the server wants to do more
than just reject the trapped slave ioctl.
argset ioctl request.

This optional ioctl is done if argset is nonzero and the server wants to pass back a
modified ioctl structure. It is done after the trapped ioctl is processed via the
server on the master side.
TIOCREQSET ioctl request.
This is done to complete the trapped slave open/c1ose/ioctl. In case the trapped
request is an iodl, errno_error should be set appropriately. retur1L-value should
be set for trapped slave ioctls if errno_error is set to zero.
While a process is waiting in the slave side of the pty for the server to complete a handshake, it is
susceptible to receiving signals. The following master side ioctl allows the server process to control how the pty will respond when a signal attempts to interrupt a trapped open or ioctl request.
TIOCSIGMODE
Sets the signal handling state of the pty to the mode specified as the argument. The
mode can have three values, which are TIOCSIGBLOCK, TIOCSIGABORT, and TIOCSIGNORMAL.
TIOCSIGBLOCK
Causes some signals that are destined for the process whose open/ioctl is trapped
to be postponed. The signals that are blocked are those which would otherwise
cause the process to jump to an installed signal handler. Signals that are
currently being ignored or would cause the slave-side process to be aborted will
not be held off. When the server process completes the handshake by means of
the TIOCREQSET ioctl request, the slave-side process will return to the calling
program, and any pending signals will then be acted upon. Any signals that the
user has blocked by means of sigblock(2) will continue to be blocked.
TIOCSIGABORT
Forces all signals that interrupt a trapped open/ioctl request to not be restartable. The server process will set this mode when it wants the interrupted
requests to return to the calling program with an EINTR error.
TIOCSIGNORMAL
This is the default mode of the pty. If a signal interrupts a trapped open/ioctl
request, the user's signal handler routine has the option of specifying whether the
request is to be restarted. If the request is to be restarted, it will be executed

Hewlett-Packard

-5-

July 10, 1985

PTY(4)

again from the begining, and the server will have to do another TIOCREQGET
to start the handshake over again. If the user's signal handler routine specifies
that the interrupted request is not to be restarted, then the request will return to
the calling program with EINTR upon completion of the signal handler. Note
that it is not guaranteed that the restarted request will be the very next one to
be trapped.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200:
The largest ioctl argument passable between master and slave sides is currently
limited to 128 bytes.
Series 500:
The largest ioctl argument passable between master and slave sides is currently
limited to 128 bytes.
The TIOCREMOTE mode is not currently implemented.
FILES
/dev /ptym/pty[pqrstuvw]*
/dev /pty /tty[pqrstuvw]*

master pseudo terminals
slave pseudo terminals

DIAGNOSTICS
None.
BUGS
It is not possible for the slave side to indicate an end-of-fle condition to the master side.

When using TIOCREMOTE, a single write to the master side of greater than 256 bytes may result
in multiple smaller records being read from the slave side instead of only one record.
SEE ALSO
termio(4), ioctl(2), select(2), signal(2).

Hewlett-Packard

-6-

July 10, 1985

STTYV6(4)

NAME
stty - terminal interface for Version 6/PWB compatability
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD - Version 6 and PWB Compatability
Origin:

System V

Remarks: These faclilities are included to aid in conversion of old programs, and should not be
used in new code. Use the interface described in termio( 4). Note that these conversions do not work for programs ported from Version 7 UNIX, since some Version 7
flags are defined differently.
DESCRIPTION
These routines attempt to map the Version 6 and PWB stty and gtty calls into the current ioctls
that perform the same functions. The mapping cannot be perfect. The way the features are
translated is described below. The reader should be familiar with termio (4) before studying this
page.
The following data structure is defined in the include file sgtty.h:
struct sgttyb {
char
char
char
char
int

sg~speed;

sg_ospeed;
sg_erase;
sg-kill;
sg--Rags;

1* input speed */
1* output speed */

1* erase character */
1* kill character */
1* mode flags */

The flags, as defined in sgtty.h, are:
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define

HUPCL
XTABS
LCASE
ECHO
CRMOD
RAW
ODDP
EVENP
ANYP
NLDELAY
TBDELAY
CRDELAY
VTDELAY
BSDELAY

01
02
04
010
020
040
0100
0200
0300
001400
002000
030000
040000
0100000

#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define

CRO
CR1
CR2
CR3
NLO
NL1
NL2
NL3
TABO
TAB1
NOAL
FFO
FF1

0
010000
020000
030000
0
000400
001000
001400
0
002000
004000
0
040000

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 10, 1985

STTYV6(4)

#define
#define

BSO
BS1

o
0100000

When the 8tty(2) command (ioctl TIOCSETP) is executed, the flags in the old sgttyb structure
are mapped into their new equivalents in the termio structure. Then the TCSET A command is
executed.
The following table shows the mapping between the old sgttyb flags and the current termio
flags. Note that flags contained in the termio structure that are not mentioned below are
cleared.
HUPCL (if set)
sets the termio HUPCL flag;
HUPCL (if clear)
clears the termio HUPCL flag;
XTABS (if set)
sets the termio T AB3 flag;
XTABS (if clear)
clears the termio T AB3 flag;
TBDELAY (if set)
sets the termio TAB1 flag;
TBDELAY (if clear)
clears the termio TAB1 flag;
LCASE (if set)
sets the termio mCLC, OLCUC, and XCASE flags;
LCASE (if clear)
clears the termio mCLC, OLCUC, and XCASE flags;
ECHO (if set)
sets the termio ECHO flag;
ECHO (if clear)
clears the termio ECHO flag;
NOAL (if set)
clears the termio ECHOK flag;
NOAL (if clear)
sets the termio ECHOK flag;
CRMOD (if set)
sets the termio ICRNL and ONLCR flags; also, if CR1 is set, the termio CR1 flag is set,
and if CR2 is set, the termio ONOCR and CR2 flags are set;
CRMOD (if clear)
sets the termio ONLRET flag; also, if NL1 is set, the termio CR1 flag is set, and if NL2 is
set, the termio CR2 flag is set;
RAW (if set)
sets the termio CS8 flag, and clears the termio ICRNL and IUCLC flags; also, default
values of 6 characters and 0.1 seconds are assigned to MIN and TIME, respectively;
RAW (if clear)
sets the termio BRKINT, IGNPAR, ISTRIP, IXON, IXANY, OPOST, CS7, PARENB,
ICANON, and ISIG flags; also, the default values control-D and null are assigned to the
control characters EOF and EOL, respectively;
ODDP (if set)
if EVENP is also set, clears the termio INPCK flag; otherwise, sets the termio P ARODD
flag;
VTDELAY (if set)
sets the termio FFDL Y flag;
VTDELA Y (if clear)
clears the termio FFDLY flag;

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 10, 1985

STTYV6(4)

BSDELAY (if set)
sets the termio BSDL Y flag;
BSDELAY (if clear)
clears the termio BSDLY flag.
In addition, the termio CREAD bit is set, and, if the baud rate is 110, the CSTOPB bit is set.
When using TIOCSETP, the ispeed entry in the sgttyb structure is mapped into the appropriate speed in the termio CBAUD field. The erase and kill sgttyb entries are mapped into the
termio crase and kill characters.
When the gtty(2) (ioetl TIOCGETP) command is executed, the termio(4) TCGETA command
is first executed. The resulting termio structure is then mapped into the sgttyb structure,
which is then returned to the user.
The following table shows how the termio flags are mapped into the old sgttyb structure. Note
that all flags contained in the sgtty b structure that are not mentioned below are cleared.
HUPCL (if set)
sets the sgttyb HUPCL flag;
HUPCL (if clear)
clears the sgttyb HUPCL flag;
ICANON (if set)
clears the sgttyb RAW flag;
ICANON (if clear)
sets the sgttyb RAW flag;
XCASE (if set)
sets the sgttyb LCASE flag;
XCASE (if clear)
clears the sgttyb LCASE flag;
ECHO (if set)
sets the sgttyb ECHO flag;
ECHO (if clear)
clears the sgttyb ECHO flag;
ECHOK (if set)
clears the sgttyb NOAL flag;
ECHOK (if clear)
sets the sgttyb NOAL flag;
PARODD (if set)
sets the sgttyb ODDP flag;
PARODD (if clear)
clears the sgttyb ODDP flag;
INPCK (if set)
sets the sgttyb EVENP flag;
PARODD, INPCK (if both clear)
sets the sgttyb ODDP and EVENP flags;
ONLCR (if set)
sets the sgttyb CRMOD flag; also, if CR1 is set, the sgttyb CR1 flag is set, and if CR2 is
set, the sgttyb CR2 flag is set;
ONLCR (if clear)
if CR1 is set, the sgttyb NL1 flag is set, and if CR2 is set, the sgttyb NL2 flag is set;
T AB3 (if set)
sets the sgttyb XTABS flag;
T AB3 (if clear)
clears the sgttyb XTABS flag;
TAB1 (if set)
sets the sgttyb TBDELAY flag;

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

July 10, 1985

STTYV6(4)

TAB1 (if clear)
clears the sgttyb TBDELAY flag;
FFDL Y (if set)
sets the sgttyb VTDELA Y flag;
FFDLY (if clear)
clears the sgttyb VTDELAY flag;
BSDLY (if set)
sets the sgttyb BSDELAY flag;
BSDLY (if clear)
clears the sgttyb BSDELA Y flag.
When using TIOCGETP, the termio CBADD field is mapped into the ispeed and ospeed
entries of the sgttyb structure. Also, the termio erase and kill characters are mapped into the
erase and kill sgttyb entries.
Note that, since there is not a one-to-one mapping between the sgttyb and termio structures,
unexpected results may occur when using the older TIOCSETP and TIOCGETP calls. Thus,
the TIOCSETP and TIO(]GETP calls should be replaced in all future code by the current
equivalents, TCSETA and TCGETA, respectively.
SEE ALSO

termio(4), stty(2).

Hewlett-Packard

-4-

July 10, 1985

TERMIO(4)

NAME
termio - general terminal interface
HP-UX COMPATABILITY
Level: HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin: System V
DESCRIPTION
All of the asynchronous communications ports use the same general interface, no matter what
hardware is involved. The remainder of this section discusses the common features of this interface.
When a terminal file is opened, it normally causes the process to wait until a connection is established. In practice, users' programs seldom open these files; they are opened by getty and become
a user's standard input, output, and error files. The very first terminal file opened by the process
group leader of a terminal file not already associated with a process group becomes the control
terminal for that process group. The control terminal plays a special role in handling quit and
interrupt signals, as discussed below. The control terminal is inherited by a child process during a
/ork(2). A process can break this association by changing its process group using setpgrp(2).
A terminal associated with one of these files ordinarily operates in full-duplex mode. Characters
may be typed at any time, even while output is occurring, and are only lost when the system's
character input buffers become completely full, which is rare, or when the user has accumulated
the maximum allowed number of input characters that have not yet been read by some program.
This limit is dependent on the particular implementation, but is at least 256. When the input
limit is reached, all the saved characters are thrown away without notice.
Normally, terminal input is processed in units of lines. A line is delimited by a new-line (ASCII
LF) character, an end-of-file (ASCII EOT) character, or an end-of-line character. This means that
a program attempting to read will be suspended until an entire line has been typed. Also, no
matter how many characters are requested in the read call, at most one line will be returned. It is
not, however, necessary to read a whole line at once; any number of characters may be requested
in a read, even one, without losing information.
During input, erase and kill processing is normally done. By default, the character # erases the
last character typed, except that it will not erase beyond the beginning of the line. By default,
the character @ kills (deletes) the entire input line, and optionally outputs a new-line character.
Both these characters operate on a key-stroke basis, independently of any backspacing or tabbing
that may have been done. Both the erase and kill characters may be entered literally by preceding them with the escape character (\). In this case the escape character is not read. The erase
and kill characters may be changed.
Certain characters have special functions on input. These functions and their default character
values are summarized as follows:
INTR

(Rubout or ASCII DEL) generates an interrupt signal which is sent to all processes with
the associated control terminal. Normally, each such process is forced to terminate, but
arrangements may be made either to ignore the signal or to receive a trap to an
agreed-upon location; see signal(2).

QUIT

(Control-lor ASCII FS) generates a quit signal. Its treatment is identical to the interrupt signal except that, unless a receiving process has made other arrangements, it will
not only be terminated but a core image file (called core) will be created in the current
working directory if the implementation supports core files.

ERASE

(#) erases the preceding character. It will not erase beyond the start of a line, as delimited by a NL, EOF, or EOL character.

KILL

(@) deletes the entire line, as delimited by a NL, EOF, or EOL character.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4)

EOF

(Control-d or ASCII EOT) may be used to generate an end-of-file from a terminal.
When received, all the characters waiting to be read are immediately passed to the program, without waiting for a new-line, and the EOF is discarded. Thus, if there are no
characters waiting, which is to say the EOF occurred at the beginning of a line, zero
characters will be passed back, which is the standard end-of-file indication.

(ASCII LF) is the normal line delimiter. It can not be changed or escaped.

EOL

(ASCII NUL) is an additional line delimiter, like NL. It is not normally used.

STOP

(Control-s or ASCII DC3) can be used to temporarily suspend output. It is useful with
CRT terminals to prevent output from disappearing before it can be read. While output
is suspended, STOP characters are ignored and not read.

START

(Control-q or ASCII DOl) is used to resume output which has been suspended by a
STOP character. While output is not suspended, START characters are ignored and not
read. The start/stop characters can not be changed or escaped.

The character values for INTR, QUIT, ERASE, KILL, EOF, and EOL may be changed to suit individual tastes. The ERASE, KILL, and EOF characters may be escaped by a preceding \ character, in
which case no special function is done.
When a modem disconnect is detected, a hang-up signal is sent to all processes that have this terminal as the control terminal. Unless other arrangements have been made, this signal causes the
processes to terminate. If the hang-up signal is ignored, any subsequent read returns with an
end-of-file indication. Thus, programs that read a terminal and test for end-of-file can terminate
appropriately when hung up on.
When one or more characters are written, they are transmitted to the terminal as soon as
previously-written characters have finished typing. Input characters are echoed by putting them
in the output queue as they arrive. If a process produces characters more rapidly than they can
be typed, it will be suspended when its output queue exceeds some limit. When the queue has
drained down to some threshold, the program is resumed.
Several ioctl(2) system calls apply to terminal files. The primary calls use the following structure,
defined in :
#define
struct

NCC
termio {
unsigned
unsigned
unsigned
unsigned
char
unsigned

8
short
short
short
short
char

c~flag;

c_oflag;
c_cflag;
c---.lflag;
c---.line;
c_cc[NCCJ;

/* input modes */
/ * output modes */
/* control modes */
/ * local modes */
/* line discipline */
/* control chars */

};
The special control characters are defined by the array c_cc. The relative positions and initial
values for each function are as follows:
o VINTR DEL
1 VQUIT
FS
2 VERASE #
3 VKILL
@
4
VEOF
EOT
5
VEOL
NUL
6
reserved
7
reserved
The c_ifiag field describes the basic terminal input control:

Hewlett-Packard

- 2-

November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4)

IGNBRK
BRKINT
IGNPAR
PARMRK
INPCK
ISTRIP
INLCR
IGNCR
ICRNL
IUCLC
IXON
IXANY
IXOFF
IENQAK

0000001
0000002
0000004
0000010
0000020
0000040
0000100
0000200
0000400
0001000
0002000
0004000
0010000
0020000

Ignore break condition.
Signal interrupt on break.
Ignore characters with parity errors.
Mark parity errors.
Enable input parity check.
Strip character.
Map NL to CR on input.
Ignore CR.
Map CR to NL on input.
Map upper-case to lower-case on input.
Enable start/stop output control.
Enable any character to restart output.
Enable start/stop input control.
Enable output pacing control.

If IGNBRK is set, the break condition (a character framing error with data all zeros) is ignored,

that is, not put on the input queue and therefore not read by any process. Otherwise if BRKINT
is set, the break condition will generate an interrupt signal and flush both the input and output
queues. If IGNPAR is set, characters with other framing and parity errors are ignored.
If PARMRK is set, a character with a framing or parity error which is not ignored is read as the

three-character sequence: 0377, 0, X, where X is the data of the character received in error. To
avoid ambiguity in this case, if ISTRIP is not set, a valid character of 0377 is read as 0377, 0377.
If PARMRK is not set, a framing or parity error which is not ignored is read as the character NUL
(0).
If INPCK is set, input parity checking is enabled. If INPCK is not set, input parity checking is disabled. This allows output parity generation without input parity errors.
If ISTRIP is set, valid input characters are first stripped to 7-bits, otherwise all 8-bits are pro-

cessed.
If INLCR is set, a received NL character is translated into a CR character. If IGNCR is set, a
received CR character is ignored (not read). Otherwise if ICRNL is set, a received CR character is
translated into a NL character.
If IUCLC is set, a received upper-case alphabetic character is translated into the corresponding

lower-case character.
If IXON is set, start/stop output control is enabled. A received STOP character will suspend output and a received START character will restart output. All start/stop characters are ignored and
not read. If IXANY is set, any input character, will restart output which has been suspended.
If IXOFF is set, the system will transmit START jSTOP characters when the input queue is nearly
empty/full.
If IENQAK is set, the system will transmit ASCII ENQ after every 80 characters sent and then wait

until the terminal responds with ASCII ACK. The terminal will respond in this way when it has
sufficiently emptied its buffer. If the terminal does not respond after 5 seconds, the system will
resume transmission anyway. The ASCII ACK that the terminal sends will not get entered into
the input queue if it was sent in response to ASCII ENQ.
The initial input control value is all-bits-clear.
The c_oftag field specifies the system treatment of output:
OPOST
OLCUC
ONLCR
OCRNL
ONOCR

Hewlett-Packard

0000001
0000002
0000004
0000010
0000020

Postprocess output.
Map lower case to upper on output.
Map NL to CR-NL on output.
Map CR to NL on output.
No CR output at column O.

-3-

November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4)

ONLRET
OFILL
OFDEL
NLDLY
NLO
NLl
CRDLY
CRO
CRl
CR2
CR3
TABDLY
TABO
TABl
TAB2
TAB3
BSDLY
BSO
BSl
VTDLY
VTO
VTl
FFDLY
FFO
FFl

0000040
0000100
0000200
0000400
0
0000400
0003000
0
0001000
0002000
0003000
0014000
0
0004000
0010000
0014000
0020000
0
0020000
0040000
0
0040000

NL performs CR function.
Use fill ,characters for delay.
Fill is DEL, else NUL.
Select new-line delays:

Select carriage-return delays:

Select horizontal-tab delays:

Expand tabs to spaces.
Select backspace delays:

Select vertical-tab delays:

GlOOOOO Select form-feed delays:
0
0100000

If OPOST is set, output characters are post-processed as indicated by the remaining flags, other-

wise characters are transmitted without change.
If OLCUC is set, a lower-case alphabetic character is transmitted as the corresponding upper-case
character. This function is often used in conjunction with IUCLC.
If ONLCR is set, the NL character is transmitted as the CR-NL character pair. If OCRNL is set,
the CR character is transmitted as the NL character. If ONOCR is set, no CR character is
transmitted when at column 0 (first position). If ONLRET is set, the NL character is assumed to

do the carriage-return function; the column pointer will be set to 0 and the delays specified for CR
will be used. Otherwise the NL character is assumed to do just the line-feed function; the column
pointer will remain unchanged. The column pointer is also set to 0 if the CR character is actually
transmitted.
The delay bits specify how long transmission stops to allow for mechanical or other movement
when certain characters are sent to the terminal. In all cases a value of 0 indicates no delay. If
OFILL is set, fill characters will be transmitted for delay instead of a timed delay. This is useful
for high baud rate terminals which need only a minimal delay. If OFDEL is set, the fill character
is DEL, otherwise NUL.
If a form-feed or vertical-tab delay is specified, it lasts for about 2 seconds.

New-line delay lasts about 0.10 seconds. If ONLRET is set, the carriage-return delays are used
instead of the new-line delays. If OFILL is set, two fill characters will be transmitted.
Carriage-return delay type 1 is dependent on the current column position, type 2 is about 0.10
seconds, and type 3 is about 0.15 seconds. If OFILL is set, delay type 1 transmits two fill characters, and type 2, four fill characters.
Horizontal-tab delay type 1 is dependent on the current column position. Type 2 is about 0.10
seconds. Type 3 specifies that tabs are to be expanded into spaces. If OFILL is set, two fill characters will be transmitted for any delay.

Hewlett-Packard

- 4-

November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4)

Backspace delay lasts about 0.05 seconds. If OFILL is set, one fill character will be transmitted.
The actual delays depend on line speed and system load.
The initial output control value is all bits clear.
The c_cfiag field describes the hardware control of the terminal:
CBAUD
BO
B50
B75
B110
B134
B150
B200
B300
B600
B900
B1200
B1800
B2400
B3600
B4800
B7200
B9600
B19200
B38400
EXTA
EXTB
CSIZE
CS5
CS6
CS7
CS8
CSTOPB
CREAD
PARENB
PARODD
HUPCL
CLOCAL

0000037
0
0000001
0000002
0000003
0000004
0000005
0000006
0000007
OOOOOlD
0000011
0000012
0000013
0000014
0000015
0000016
0000017
0000020
0000021
0000022
0000036
0000037
0000140
0
0000040
0000100
0000140
0000200
0000400
0001000
0002000
0004000
OOlDOOO

Baud rate:
Hang up
50 baud
75 baud
110 baud
134.5 baud
150 baud
200 baud
300 baud
600 baud
900 baud
1200 baud
1800 baud
2400 baud
3600 baud
4800 baud
7200 baud
9600 baud
19200 baud
38400 baud
External A
External B
Character size:
5 bits
6 bits
7 bits
8 bits
Send two stop bits, else one.
Enable receiver.
Parity enable.
Odd parity, else even.
Hang up on last close.
Local line, else dial-up.

The CBAUD bits specify the baud rate. The zero baud rate, BO, is used to hang up the connection. If BO is specified, the modem control lines (see modem(4) ) will cease to be asserted. Normally, this will disconnect the line. For any particular hardware, impossible speed changes are
ignored.
The CSIZE bits specify the character size in bits for both transmission and reception. This size
does not include the parity bit, if any. If CSTOPB is set, two stop bits are used, otherwise one
stop bit. For example, at 110 baud, two stops bits are required.

If PARENB is set, parity generation and detection is enabled and a parity bit is added to each
character. If parity is enabled, the PARODD flag specifies odd parity if set, otherwise even parity
is used.
If CREAD is set, the receiver is enabled. Otherwise no characters will be received.
The specific effects of the HUPCL and CLOCAL bits depend on the mode and type of the modem
control in effect. See modem( 4) for the details.

Hewlett-Packard

-5-

November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4)

If HUPCL is set, the modem control lines for the port will be disconnected when the last process

with the port open closes it or terminates.
If CLOCAL is set, a connection does not depend on the state of the modem status lines.
Under normal circumstances, an open will wait for the type of modem connection requested to
complete. However, if the O--.NDELAY bit is specified (see open(2) ) or the CLOCAL bit has been
set, the open will return immediately without waiting for the connection. For those files on which
the connection has not been established or has been lost, and for which the CLOCAL bit is not set,
both read and write will return a zero character count. For read, this is equivalent to an end-offile condition.
The initial hardware control value after open is B300, CS8, CREAD, HUPCL.
The c_lflag field of the argument structure is used by the line discipline to control terminal functions. The basic line discipline (0) provides the following:
ISIG
ICANON
XCASE
ECHO
ECHOE
ECHOK
ECHONL
NOFLSH

0000001 Enable signals.
0000002 Canonical input (erase and kill processing).
0000004 Canonical upper/lower presentation.
OOOOOlD Enable echo.

0000020 Echo erase character as BS-SP-BS.
0000040 Echo NL after kill character.
OOOOlDO Echo NL.

0000200 Disable flush after interrupt or quit.

If ISIG is set, each input character is checked against the special control characters INTR and
QUIT. If an input character matches one of these control characters, the function associated with
that character is performed. If ISIG is not set, no checking is done. Thus these special input functions are possible only if ISIG is set. These functions may be disabled individually by changing
the value of the control character to an unlikely or impossible value (e.g., 0377).
If ICANON is set, canonical processing is enabled. This enables the erase and kill edit functions,
and the assembly of input characters into lines delimited by NL, EOF, and EOL. If ICANON is not

set, read requests are satisfied directly from the input queue. A read will not be satisfied until at
least MIN characters have been received or the timeout value TIME has expired between characters. This allows fast bursts of input to be read efficiently while still allowing single character
input. The MIN and TIME values are stored in the position for the EOF and EOL characters,
respectively. The time value represents tenths of seconds.
If XCASE is set, and if ICANON is set, an upper-case letter is accepted on input by preceding it

with a \ character, and is output preceded by a \ character. In this mode, the following escape
sequences are generated on output and accepted on input:
lor:

{
}

use:

\'
\!
\'

\\

For example, A is input as \a, \n as \ \n, and

\N as \ \ \n.

If ECHO is set, characters are echoed as received.
When ICANON is set, the following echo functions are possible. If ECHO and ECHOE are set, the
erase character is echoed as ASCII BS SP BS, which will clear the last character from a CRT screen.
If ECHOE is set and ECHO is not set, the erase character is echoed as ASCII SP BS. If ECHOK is
set, the NL character will be echoed after the kill character to emphasize that the line will be
deleted. Note that an escape character preceding the erase or kill character removes any special

Hewlett-Packard

-6-

November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4)

function. If ECHONL is set, the NL character will be echoed even if ECHO is not set. This is useful for terminals set to local echo (so-called half duplex). Unless escaped, the EOF character is not
echoed. Because EOT is the default EOF character, this prevents terminals that respond to EOT
from hanging up.
If NOFLSH is set, the normal flush of the input and output queues associated with the quit and
interrupt characters will not be done.

The initial line-discipline control value is all bits clear.
The primary ioctl(2) system calls have the form:
ioctl (fildes, command, arg)
struct termio *arg;
The commands using this form are:
TCGETA

Get the parameters associated with the terminal and store in the lermio
structure referenced by argo

TCSETA

Set the parameters associated with the terminal from the structure referenced by argo The change is immediate.

TCSETAW

Wait for the output to drain before setting the new parameters. This form
should be used when changing parameters that will affect output.

TCSETAF

Wait for the output to drain, then flush the input queue and set the new
parameters.

Additional ioctl(2) calls have the form:
ioctl (fildes, command, arg)
int arg;
The commands using this form are:
TCSBRK

Wait for the output to drain. If arg is 0, then send a break (zero bits for at
least 0.25 seconds).

TCXONC

Start/stop control. If arg is 0, suspend output; if 1, restart suspended output.

TCFLSH

If arg is 0, flush the input queue; if 1, flush the output queue; if 2, flush
both the input and output queues.

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300:
Data loss may occur with HP 98626/98644 serial interfaces if the effective combined data
rate for all installed serial interfaces exceeds 2400 baud (for example, two interfaces running at 1200 baud and a third at 300 baud is equivalent to 2700 baud combined).
The c_ifiag field parameter IXANY (enable any character to restart output) is not supported by the HP 98628B interface card.
The c_ifiag field parameter IENQAK (enable output pacing control) is not supported.
Timed delays are not supported.
The HP 98628B interface does not support the following baud rates: 900, 7200, 38400.
The c_lfiag field parameter XCASE is not supported.
Series 500:
38400 baud is not supported by the RS-232 interface.

Hewlett-Packard

- 7-

November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4)

European modems are not currently supported.
HP27140 Six-Channel Modem Multiplexer:
Timed output delays (as opposed to fill-character delays) are not supported.
The XCASE flag is not supported.
These baud rates are not supported: 200, 38400, EXTA, and EXTB.
HP27128 Asynchronous Serial Interface, HP27130 Eight-Channel Multiplexer:
These baud rates are not supported: 200, 38400, EXTA, and EXTB.
There is no support for tab expansion, case mapping, or output delays for control
characters.
The line kill character is always echoes as , so the
ECHOK flag is not setable, and will always have the same state as the ECHO flag.
When type-ahead limit is reached, input is not flushed, but further input is simply ignored.
The P ARMRK flag is not supported.
The echoing of carriage-return and new-line characters may not be quite as
expected in the more obscure driver configurations.
The echoing of the EOF character is not suppressed.
The ONLRET, ONOCR, and OCRNL flags are not supported.
The VMIN and VTIME parameters for raw terminal input are not supported.
The ECHONL flag is not supported.
When ECHOE is set and ECHO is clear, a is not echoes for the erase
character.
(27130 only) The CLOCAL flag is permanently set.
(27128 only) The default setting of baud rate, bits per character, parity, and
CLOCAL bit are determined by the switches on the interface.
(27128 only) The "direct connect" cable (female connector) does not contain a
Data Carrier Detect line, so a hangup signal will be sent if the CLOCAL flag is
cleared when this cable is being used.
Model 520 Console, HP98700 Terminal, Pseudo Terminal (pty):
Since these devices do not deal with real asynchronous serial data links, the following flags are meaningless: IGNPAR, PARMRK, INPCK, IXOFF, IENQAK,
CBAUD, CSIZE, CSTOPB, PARENB, PARODD, HUPCL, and CLOCAL.
FILES
/dev/tty*
/ dev / console
SEE ALSO
stty(I), fork(2), ioctl(2), stty(2), setpgrp(2), signal(2), tty(4), modem(4), mknod(8).

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200/300:
Data loss may occur with the 98626/98644 if the effective input of all 98626/98644 cards
exceeds 2400 baud.
The c_iflag field parameter IXANY (enable any character to restart output) is not supported by the HP 98628B interface card.

Hewlett-Packard

-8-

November 15, 1985

TERMIO(4)

The c_iflag field parameter IENQAK (enable output pacing control) is not supported.
Timed delays are not supported.
The HP 98628B interface does not support the following baud rates: 900, 7200, 38400.
The c_lftag field parameter XCASE is not supported.

Hewlett-Packard

-9-

November 15, 1985

TTY(4)

NAME

tty - controlling terminal interface
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

The file / dey /tty is, in each process, a synonym for the control terminal associated with the process group of that process, if any. It is useful for programs or shell sequences that wish to be sure
of writing messages on the terminal no matter how output has been redirected. It can also be
used for programs that demand the name of a file for output, when typed output is desired and it
is tiresome to find out what terminal is currently in use.
FILES

/dev/tty
/dev /tty*
SEE ALSO

termio( 4).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

INTRO(5)

NAME

intro - introduction to Iile formats
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Remarks: Header files are often used to hide hardware incompatibilities.
DESCRIPTION

This section outlines the formats of various files. The C struct declarations for the file formats
are given where applicable. Usually, these structures can be found in the directories
/usr /include or /usr /include/sys.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

A.OUT(5)

Series 200/300 Implementation

A.OUT(5)

NAME
a.out - assembler and link editor output
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX!RUN ONLY
Origin:

System III

Remarks: This manual page describes the a.out file format for Series 200 and 300 computers.
Refer to other a.out(5) manual pages for descriptions of other valid implementations.
DESCRIPTION
A.out is the output file of the link editor ld. Ld will make a.out executable if there were no linking errors and no unresolved external references. The assembler as produces non-executable files
with the same structure.
File a.out has seven sections: a header, the program text and data segments, a pascal interface
section, a symbol table, information for debugger support, and text and data relocation information (in that order). The pascal interface text will only be present in those pascal code segments
that have not been linked. The last three sections may be missing if the program was linked with
the -s option of Id(l) or if the symbol table, debug information, and relocation bits were removed
by strip(I). Also note that if there were no unresolved external references after linking, the relocation information will be removed.
The file section containing information for debugger support has three tables-the debug name
table (DNTT), the source line table (SLT), and the value table (VT). These tables contain symbolic information used by the HP-UX debugger cdb(I). HP-UX compilers create this information
under control of the -g option.
When an a.out file is loaded into memory for execution, three logical segments are set up: the
text segment, the data segment (initialized data followed by uninitialized, the latter actually being
initialized to all O's), and a stack. The text segment begins at location OXO in the core image; the
header is not loaded. If the magic number (the first field in the header) is EXEC-MAGIC, it indicates that the text segment is not to be write-protected or shared, so the data segment will be
contiguous with the text segment. If the magic number is SHARE-MAGIC or DEMAND-MAGIC,
the data segment begins at the first 0 mod OxlOOO byte boundary following the text segment, and
the text segment is not writable by the program; if other processes are executing the same a.out
file, they will share a single text segment. If the magic number is DEMAND-MAGIC, the text and
data segments are not read in from the file until they are referenced by the program.
The stack will occupy the highest possible locations in the core image and grow downward (the
stack is automatically extended as required). The data segment is only extended as requested by
the brk(2) system call.
The start of the text segment in the a.out file is given by the macro TEXT_OFFSET(hdr), where
hdr is a copy of the file header. The macro DATLOFFSET(hdr) provides the starting location of
the data segment.
The value of a word in the text or data portions that is not a reference to an undefined external
symbol is exactly the value that will appear in memory when the file is executed. If a word in the
text or data portion involves a reference to an undefined external symbol, as indicated by the relocation information (discussed below) for that word, then the value of the word as stored in the file
is an offset from the associated external symbol. When the file is processed by the link editor and
the external symbol becomes defined, the value of the symbol will be added to the word in the file.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

A.OUT(5)

Series 200/300 Implementation

A.OUT(5)

Header
The format of the a.out header for the MC68000 is as follows (segment sizes are in bytes):
struct exec {
MAGIC
short
short
long
long
long
long
long
long
long
long
long
long
long
long
long
long
}j

3-II1agicj
3.-Stampj
3.-unusedj
3.-Sparehpj
3.-textj
3.-dataj
3.-bssj
3.-trsizej
3.-drsizej
3.-pasintj
uesymsj
3.-dn t tsize j
3.-entryj
3.-Sltsizej
3.-vtsizej
3.-Spare3j
3.-Spare4j

/* magic number */

/ * version stamp */

/* size of text segment */

/ * size of data segment */

/ * size of bss segment */

/ * size of text relocation info */

/* size of data relocation info */
/* size of interface text */

/ * size of symbol table */
/ * debug name table size */
/ * entry point of program */
/* source-line table size */

/ * value table size */

Pascal Interface Section
The Pascal interface section consists of the ascii representation of the interface text for that Pascal module.
The start of the Pascal interface section is given by the macro MODCAL_OFFSET(hdr).
Symbol Table
The symbol table consists of entries of the form:
struct nlist {
long
unsigned char
unsigned char
short
short
}j

IL-valuej
IL-typej
n--.lengthj
IL-almodj
IL-unusedj

Following this structure is n-length ascii characters which compose the symbol name.
The n-type field indicates the type of the symbolj the following values are possible:
00
01
02
03
04

undefined symbol
absolute symbol
text segment symbol
data segment symbol
bss segment symbol

One of these values ANDed with 040 indicates an external symbol. One of these values ANDed
with 020 indicates an aligned symbol.
The start of the symbol table is given by the macro LESYM_OFFSET(hdr).

Hewlett-Packard

- 2-

November 15, 1985

A.OUT(5)

Series 200/300 Implementation

Relocation
If relocation information is present, it amounts to eight bytes per relocatable datum.
The format of the relocation data is:
struct

r_info
long
short
char
char

{
r_address;
L....8ymbolnum;
r-segment;
r-.length;

};
The r_address field indicates the position of the relocation within the segment.
The r_segment field indicates the segment referred to by the text or data word associated with
the relocation word:
00
01
02
03

indicates
indicates
indicates
indicates

the
the
the
the

reference
reference
reference
reference

is
is
is
is

to
to
to
to

the text segment;
initialized data;
bss (uninitialized data);
an undefined external symbol.

The field r_symbolnum contains a symbol number in the case of external references, and is
unused otherwise. The first symbol is numbered 0, the second 1, etc.
The field r_length indicates the length of the datum to be relocated.
00
01
02
03

indicates
indicates
indicates
indicates

it
it
it
it

is
is
is
is

a
a
a
a

byte
short
long
special align symbol

The start of the text relocation section is provided by the macro RTEXT_OFFSET(hdr).
The start of the data relocation section is provided by the macro RDATA_OFFSET(hdr).
SEE ALSO
as(l), Id(l), nm(l), strip(l), magic(5).

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

November 15,1985

A.OUT(5)

Series 500 Implementation

A.OUT(5)

NAME
a.out - executable linker output file
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

Remarks: This manual entry describes the a. out file format for the Series 500. Refer to other
a.out manual pages for information valid for other implementations.
DESCRIPTION
A.out is the output file of the linker /d(l). Ld will make a.out executable if there are no errors
during compilation and linking, and no unresolved external references.
This file has five sections - a file header, a segment table, a segment information section, a symbol
table(s) section, and a name pool(s) section. It looks as follows:
File Header
Segment Table
Segment Information
- segment image (code/data)
- fix-up information (loader)
- relocation information (ld)
Symbol Tables:
- linker symbol table
- information for debugger
support
Name Pool (strings)

Note that the above pictorial representation represents the logical order of the file, not necessarily
the physical order. A description of each section of the file follows.
File Header
The a. out file header is conceptually divided into two pieces. The first is a section of "scalar"
values, and the second is a "file map" containing data pertaining to the rest of the file. The entire
file header is made up of 128 bytes of information, 32 of which make up the scalar section. The
following is a pictorial representation of the scalar section:
Byte

Hewlett-Packard

SystemlD :

File Type

Reserved for Future Use

Flags

Program Entry Point

Version Stamp

Memory Offset

Working Set Guarantee

Reserved for Future Use

- 1-

July 10, 1985

A.OUT(5)

Series 500 Implementation

A.OUT(5)

Each horizontal "slice" represents a word made up of four eight-bit bytes. The first word is
called the "magic number", which is made up of two half-words called the system ID and the file
type. The system ID identifies the target machine upon which the object code will run. The file
type specifies whether or not the file is executable (hex 107), shareable (hex 108), or relocatable
(hex 106).
The third word is used to specify the settings of three flags. The left-most three bits of this word
are significant; the remainder of the word is ignored. Bit 1, the left-most of the flag bits, marks
the program as using a single data segment, if set. You can override this with the -T or -A ld
options, which force the program to reside in one or two data segments, respectively. Bit 2 marks
the file as relinkable, if set (meaning that the file contains relocation records and a symbol table).
Bit 3 marks the file as debuggable, if set.
The Program Entry Point word contains an external program pointer (EPP) referencing the
starting code for the program. Ld normally assigns the starting address of the main program to
this word. This can be changed with the -e linker option.
The Version Stamp is a user-supplied 32-bit integer which is used to distinguish one version of an
application program from another. The user can specify this integer using the -V ld( I} option at
link time.
The file map portion of the header looks as follows:
Byte

Byte

VT: offset

Code Segment Tbl: size

VT: Size

Code Seg Images: offset

88
92

SLT: offset

Code Segment Tbl: offset

36
40
44

Code Seg Images: size

SLT: size

Data Segment Tbl: offset

Name Pool: offset

Data Segment Tbl: size

100

Name Pool: size

Data Seg Images: offset

104

Interface Info: offset

Data Seg Images: size

108

Interface Infor: size

Link Symbol Tbl: offset

112

Reserved for Future Use

Link Symbol Tbl: size

116

Reserved for Future Use

DNTT: offset

120

Reserved for Future Use

DNTT: Size

124

Reserved for Future Use

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 10, 1985

A.OUT(5)

Series 500 Implementation

A.OUT(5)

Each offset entry in the file map shows where the given section starts, relative to the beginning of
the a. out file. Each size entry gives the size, in bytes, for that section.
Segment Table
The segment table collects, in one place, all information about the code and data segments making
up the program. The segment table consists of an array of entries. Each entry describes one code
or data segment of the program.
The following information is given for both code and data segment table entries:
a segment name, which consists of an offset into the name pool, relative to the beginning
of the name pool. This is useful for symbolically referring to code or data segments (not
currently implemented).
a segment type, which specifies one of three possible types of segments - code, direct data
(in GDS), or indirect data (in GDS or EDS).
a list of segment attributes. The segments can be paged, virtual, demand loadable, writable, and privileged. The linker sets the attributes for executable files.
a segment offset, which references a particular code or data segment within the segment
image area. The reference is given relative to the beginning of the segment image area.
a segment size, which is the size, in bytes, of the particular code or data segment being
described in the entry.
a segment fixup size, which specifies the size, in bytes, of the loader fixup area in the particular segment being described.
a segment relocation information size, which specifies the number of bytes of relocation
records for this segment.
The following information is given for data segment table entries only:
a segment limit, which specifies the maximum number of bytes that the indirect data segment can contain. Attempting to increase the size beyond this stated limit results in an
error. The linker assigns a default value of 1.5 megabytes to this field, but it may be
changed with the -m chatr(l) option.
a segment zero-padding size, which is a byte count of the uninitialized data area. The
linker computes this value from the data relocation records.
The following information is given for code segment table entries only:
a segment local procedures count, which specifies the number of procedures defined in that
segment, but only known locally within it.
a segment external procedures count, which specifies the number of procedures defined in
that segment, but externally known.
Several words are left unused in each segment table entry to allow for future growth.
Segment Information
This section of the file contains the segment images for each segment included in the final, executable file. This section contains a subsection for each program segment. Each subsection is in turn
made up of three parts - the contents of the segment (code or data), a list of pointers that the
loader must "fix up" in that segment, and the relocation records for that segment. Each subsection looks as follows:
Code/Data Image
Loader Initialization. Information
Loader Fixup Information
Relocation Records

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

July 10, 1985

A.OUT(5)

Series 500 Implementation

A.OUT(5)

The code image contains the compiled machine code for each program segment. The data image
contains an image of initialized data for the program. Contained in this code are pointers. The
loader fixup information area contains offsets that reference these pointers (the offsets are given
relative to the beginning of the code/data image area). These offsets must be "fixed up" at run
time (i.e., the program loader exec must update the segment number fields with the correct
values). The linker generates the loader fixup information.
Symbol Tables
The linker symbol table contains data on relocatable symbols relevant to the linker (e.g. name and
type for each global symbol). Refer to nm(l) (Series 500 only) for a complete description of each
symbol type and the parameters associated with them. The contents of the symbol table may be
listed in several different ways with nm.
Name Pool
The name pool contains a list of null-terminated strings, which specify the names of the symbols
in the program. The symbol table entries contain indexes into the name pool instead of the
names themselves. This permits arbitrarily long names to be used instead of fixed-length names.
The first string in the name pool is always a null string. This enables zero to be used as an index
into the name pool for entities which have no names.
SEE ALSO

chatr(l), Id(l), nm(l), strip(l), magic(5).

Hewlett-Packard

-4-

July 10, 1985

ACCT(5)

NAME

acct - per-process accounting file format
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin: System V
SYNOPSIS

#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/EXTENDED

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Files produced as a result of calling acct(2) have records in the form defined by ,
whose contents are:
typedef ushort comp_tj
struct

/* "floating point" */
/ * 13-bit fraction, 3-bit exponent */

acct

{
char
char
ushort
ushort
dev_t
time_t
comp_t
comp_t
comp_t
comp_t
comp_t
comp_t
char

ac_comm[8)j

/* Accounting flag */
/ * Exit status */
/* Accounting user ID */
/* Accounting group ID */
/ * control typewriter */
/ * Beginning time */
/ * acctng user time in clock ticks */
/ * acctng system time in clock ticks */
/ * acctng elapsed time in clock ticks */
/ * memory usage in clicks */
/ * chars trnsfrd by read/write */
/* number of block reads/writes */
/* command name */

01
02
0300

/ * has executed fork, but no exec */
/* used super-user privileges */
/ * record type: 00 = acct */

aCJagj
aC-Btatj
ac_uidj
ac_gidj
ac_ttyj
ac_btimej
ac_utimej
aC-Btimej
ac_etimej
aC---1llem;

ac_io;
aC-fWj

}j
#define AFORK
#define ASU
#define ACCTF

In ac_flag, the AFORK flag is turned on by each fork(2) and turned off by an exec(2). The
ac_comm field is inherited from the parent process and is reset by any exec. Each time the system charges the process with a clock tick, it also adds to ac_mem the current process size, computed as follows:
(data size) + (text size) / (number of in-core processes using text) +
sum of ((shared memory segment size) / (number of in-core processes attached to segment))
The value of ac_mem/ (ac_stime + ac_utime) can be viewed as an approximation to the mean
process size, as modified by text-sharing.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

ACCT(5)

The structure tacct.h, which resides with the source files of the accounting commands, represents
the total accounting format used by the various accounting commands:

1*
*

total accounting (for acct period), also for day

*/
struct

tacct {
uiLt
char
float
float
float
float
long
unsigned short
unsigned short
short

t1L-uid;
t1L-Uame [8];
t1L-cpu[2];
t
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Ar(l) is used to concatenate several files into an archival file. Archives are used mainly as
libraries to be searched by the link editor Id(I).
Each archive begins with the archive magic string.

#define ARMAG "karch> \n"
#define SARMAG 8

magic string

/ * length of magic ski::;; t,'

Each archive which contains object files (see a.out(5)) includes an archive symbol table. This
symbol table is used by the link editor Id(l) to determine which archive members must be loaded
during the link edit process. The archive symbol table (if it exists) is always the first file in the
archive (but is never listed) and is automatically created and/or updated by aT.
Following the archive magic string are the archive file members. Each file member is preceded by
a file member header which is of the following format:
#define ARFMAG

"'\n"

struct aL_hdr

/ * header trailer string */
/*

file member header

{
char
char
char
char
char
char
char

aL...llame[16];
ar_date[12];
aLuid[6];
ar_gid[6];
ar-=ode[8];
ar-'lize[10];
ar~mag[2];

/* '/' terminated file member name */
/* file member date */

/ * file member user identification */

/ * file member group identification */
/*
/*

file member mode (octal)
file member size */
/ * header trailer string */

};
All information in the file member headers is in printable ASCII. The numeric information contained in the headers is stored as decimal numbers (except for ar_mode which is in octal). Thus,
if the archive contains printable files, the archive itself is printable.
The ar_name field is blank-padded and slash U) terminated. The aT_date field is the
modification date of the file at the time of its insertion into the archive. Common format archives
can be moved from system to system as long as the portable archive command ar(l) is used.
Note that older versions or ar(l} did not use the common archive format, and those archives cannot be read or written by the common archiver. The conversion tool arcv(l) is provided for
changing non-common format archives to this format.
Each archive file member begins on an even byte boundary; a newline is inserted between files if
necessary. Nevertheless the size given reflects the actual size of the file exclusive of padding.
Notice there is no provision for empty areas in an archive file.
If the archive symbol table exists, the first file in the archive has a zero length name (i.e.,

ar-Ilame[Oj == 'I'). The contents of this archive member are machine dependent. Further

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

AR(5)

details can be found in the ranlib(5) manual page.
SEE ALSO
ar(l), arcv(l), Id(1), strip(l), ranJib(5).
WARNING

Strlp(l) will remove all archive symbol entries from the header. The archive symbol entries must
be restored via the ts option of the ar(l) command before the archive can be used with the link
editor Id(l).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9, 1985

BIF (5)

BIF( 5)

NAME

BIF - Bell Interchange Format utilities
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Bell System III - HP-UX/NUCLEUS

Origin:

DESCRIPTION
BIF (Bell Interchange Format) is the name given to the format of mounted media used by HPUX series 200 revisions 2.0 and 2.1. This format is based upon that used in System III Unix.

These utilities are provided for reading and writing data to and from BIF volumes. These utilities
(referred to hereafter as bit*(l)) may be used to retrieve and store information on a BIF volume.
The bit*(1) utilities are the only utilities within HP-UX where the internal contents of a BIF
volume are known. To the rest of HP-UX a BIF volume is simply a file/disk containing some
unspecified data. You must not use mount(l) on a BIF volume, since the operating system does
not recognize it.
BIF file names are specified to the bit*(!) utilities by concatenating the HP-UX path name for the
BIF volume with the BIF file name, separating the two with a colon (:). For example,
/dev /fd.O:/users/ivy

specifies ElF file
/dev/fd.O.

/users/ivy within HP-UX device special file

Note that this file naming convention is applicable only for use as arguments to the bit*(1) utilities and does not constitute a legal path name for any other use within HP-UX. The shell sh(l)
"meta" characters: * ? and [... ] do not work for specifying an arbitrary pattern for file name
matching when using the BIF utilities.
If the device name and a trailing colon are specified without a file or directory name following (e.g.
/dev/rfd.O:), then the root (f) of the BIF file system is assumed by convention.
A primitive form of data protection is provided by a lockfile /tmp/BIF .. LCK that only allows one
process and it's immediate children to use the bif utilities at a time.
SEE ALSO
bifchmod(I), bifchown(l), bifcp(l), bifdf(l), biffind(l), biffsck(I), biffsdb(I), bills(l), bifmkdir(l),
bifmkfs(l), bifrm(l).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

CHECKLIST ( 5 )

NAME

checklist - static information about the file systems.
SYNOPSIS

#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

Large Machine/HP Extension

Origin:

HP, System V and UCB

DESCRIPTION
Checkl~st is an ASCII file and resides in directory / etc. It is only read by programs, and not written; it is the duty of the system administrator to properly create and maintain this file.
/etc/checkl~st contains a list of mountable file system entries. The fields within each entry of a
file system are separated by one or more blanks. Each file system entry is contained on a separate
line. The order of entries in /etc/checklist is important because fsck, mount, and umount sequentially iterate through /ete/cheeklist.

Each file system entry must contain a special file name and may additionally contain all of the
following fields, in order:
block special file name
directory
type
pass number on parallel fsck
backup frequency
comment
These additional fields are ignored in an HP-UX system if the set of system administration tools
implemented on that system does not support them.
The special file name
the fsck(IM) command.

is either a character or block special file name. This field is used by

The block special file name is used by the mount(IM) and other commands.
The directory is the name of the root of the mounted file system which corresponds to the block
special file name. The directory must already exist and must be given as an absolute path name.
Type can be "rw", "ro", "sw" or "xx". If type is "rw" or "ro" then the file system whose name is
given in the block special file field is mounted read-write or read-only on the specified directory
by mount -a. If type is "sw" then the special file name is made available as a piece of swap
space by the swapon(IM) command. The fields pass number and backup frequency are ignored for
"sw" entries. Entries marked "xx" are ignored by all commands and can be used to mark unused
sections. If type is specified as either "xx" or "sw" the entry is ignored by the mount(IM) command.

The pass number field is used by the fsck(IM) command to determine the order in which file system checks are done when using the -p option of fsck. The root file system should be specified
with a pass number of 1, and other file systems should have larger numbers. File systems within
a drive should have distinct numbers, but file systems on different drives can be checked on the
same pass to utilize possible parallelism available in the hardware. A file system with a pass
number of zero will be ignored by the fsck(lM) command. If a pass number is not present, fsck
will check each such file system sequentially after all eligible file systems with pass numbers have
been checked.
The backup frequency field is reserved for possible use by future backup utilities.
The comment field is an optional field which starts with a pound sign (#) and ends with a newline. Space from the backup frequency up to the comment field, if present, or the newline is
reserved for future use.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 9,1985

CHECKLIST ( 5 )

Examples of file system entries specified in /etc/checklist:
For system which supports only spccial file name field:
/dev /rdsk/OsO
For system which supports multi-fields:
/dev/rdsk/OsO /dev/dsk/OsO / rw 1 0 #root disc
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:
All of the optional fields in a file system entry will be ignored.
Series 200 and 300
There is no limit to the number of special file names in /etc/checklist. However, the commands mount -a and umount -a give an error if the number of mountable file systcm
entries in /etc/checklist exceeds NMOUNT.
SEE ALSO

fsck(1M), getfsent(3X), mount(1M), swapon(1M).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9, 1985

NAME

col-Beq_8 - Collating sequence table for languages with 8-bit character sets
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

Native Language Support:
8-bit data, customs
DESCRIPTION

There are four language dependent collation algorithms for European languages. These algorithms
are:
2-to-l Cortversions: Some languages, like Spanish, require two adjacent characters to occupy
one position in the collating sequence. Examples are "CH" (which follows "C") and "LL" (which
follows "L").
I-to-2 Conversions: Some languages, like German, require one character (e.g. "sharp S") to
occupy two adjacent positions in the collating sequence.
Don't care Characters: Some languages designate certain characters to be ignored in character
comparisons. For example, if "-" is a "Don't Care" character, then the strings "REACT" and
"RE-ACT" would equal each other when compared.
Case and Accent Priority: Many languages require a "two pass" collating algorithm: in pass
one, the accents are stripped off the letters and the resulting two strings are compared; if they are
equal, a second pass with the accents back in place is performed to break the tie. The case of
letters may also be used in this fashion.
This table has four sections - a file header, a sequence table, a 2-to-1 mapping table and a 1-to-2
mapping table.
Header
Sequence Table
2-to-1 Mapping Table
1-to-2 Mapping Table
Length and pointers are in units of two bytes.
Header:
Bvte 0
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20

Hewlett-Packard

Bvte 1
Table Length
Language Id Number
Reserved
Pointer to Sequence Table
Length of Sequence Table
Pointer to 2-to-1 Mapping Table
Length of 2-to-1 Mapping Table
Pointer to 1-to-2 Mapping Table
Length of 1-to-2 Mapping Table
Lowest Char I Highest Char
Reserved

-1-

July 11, 1985

COL-BEQ-8 ( 5 )

Sequence Table:
Sequence Entry 0
Sequence Entry 1
(other entries from 2-254)
Sequence Entry 255
The byte value of a character is used as an index into the sequence table.
Sequence Entry Format: Each entry in the sequence table above uses two bytes and has one of
the following formats:
First Byte

Second Byte

Format Type

Bits: Hi-R
0
sequence no.
sequence no.
seq # (loch)

7-n
00
00
01
10

.'i-4-:1-2-1-0
0
priority
index
index

don't-care characters
all1-to-1 mapped characters wlo priority
2-to-1 mapped characters
1-to-2 mapped characters

The 6-bit index indexes into either the 2-to-1 or the 1-to-2 mapping table.
Mapping Table for 2-to-l Mapped Characters
2-to-1 Mannin" Table
Entry Pointer 1
Entry Pointer 2
(other entry pointers)
Entry Pointer n

Sequence Entry_Format for M~ed Pairs
Byte 1
Byte 0 I
I
Legal Char 1
0
Sequence Entry for this Pair
(other mapped pair entries)
Legal Char n
I
0
Seauence Entry for This Pair
Sentinel: -1
oriority_
0
I
I
The "legal" 2-to-1 characters are listed for each particular character. "Legal" means that the
combination of two characters is treated as a single character. If a match is found, then the
corresponding sequence entry is used for the two. Whenever a legal successor is not found in the
table, the character is treated according to 1-to-1 mapping, and the priority in the last entry,
combined with sequence number of the character, creates the sequence entry.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 11, 1985

COL-BEQ-8 ( 5 )

Mapping Table for l-to-2 Mapped Characters
1-to-2 Mannin!! Table
Sequence Entry
Sequence Entry
(other sequence entries)
Sequence Entr:L
Entries in the I-to-2 mapping table have the same format as entries in the sequence table. The
sequence number of the first character is known from the entry in the sequence table. The
sequence number of the second character is found in the 1-to-2 mapping entry, and the priority is
used for both characters.
SEE ALSO

sort(1), nL...string(3C).

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

July 11, 1985

Series 500 Only

CORE(5)

NAME
core - format of core image file
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD - Assembly option
Origin:

System III

DESCRIPTION
The HP-UX system writes out a core image of a terminated process when any of various errors
occur. See signal(2) for the list of reasons; the most common are memory violations, illegal
instructions, lioating point exceptions, and user-generated quit signals. The core image is called
core and is written in the process's working directory (provided it can be; normal access controls
apply). A process with an effective user ID different from the real user ID will not produce a core
image.
The first section of the core image is a header which contains information about the terminated
process. The remainder represents the actual contents of the user's core area when the core image
was written. This area contains the stack, user global data, and heap segments. The last object in
the core image is the code segment fixup map which ~aps user code segments into real addresses.
The format of the information in the first section is described by the user structure of the system,
defined in .
SEE ALSO
cdb(1), setuid(2), signal(2).

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

August 12, 1986

CPIO(5)

NAME
cpio - format of cpio archive
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD
Origin:

System V

Remarks: Not supported on the Integral Personal Computer.
DESCRIPTION
The header structure, when the -c option of cpio(1) is not used, is:
struct {
lLJnagic,
Ldev;
ushort Lino,
lLJnode,
Luid,
Lgid;
short ~link,
short

~dev,

lLJntime[2],
~amesize,

ILJilesize[2];
char

~ame[~amesize

rounded to word];

} Hdr;
When the -c option is used, the header information is described by:
sscanf( Chdr, "%6ho%6ho%6ho%6ho%6ho%6ho%6ho%6ho%11l0%6ho%11Io",
&Hdr.lLJnagic,&Hdr.Ldev,&Hdr.JLjno,&Hdr.lLJnode,
&Hdr.Luid,&Hdr.Lgid,&Hdr.~link,&Hdr.~dev ,
&Longtime,&Hdr .~amesize,&Longfile);

Longtime and Longjile are equivalent to Hdr.Lmtime and Hdr.Ljilesize, respectively. The
contents of each file is recorded together with other items describing the file. Every instance of
Lmagic contains the constant 070707 (octal). The items Ldev through Lmtime have meanings explained in stat(2). The length of the null-terminated path name Lname, including the
null byte, is given by Lnamesize.
The last record of the archive always contains the name TRAILER!!!. Directories and the trailer
are recorded with Ljilesize equal to zero.
It will not always be the case that Ldev and JLjno correspond to the results of stat(2), but the

values are always sufficient to tell whether two files in the archive are linked to each other.
When a device special file is archived by HP-UX cpio (using -x), ~dev will contain a magic
constant which is dependent upon the implementation which is doing the writing. H_rdev flags
the device file as an HP-UX 32-bit device specifier, and ILJilesize will contain the 32-bit device
specifier (see stat(2)).
Special files are not restored, and cpio(1) generates a warning, if either ILJilesize is zero, h~dev
is non-zero, or the identifying information is not that for the restoring system. If the -x option is
not present, special files are not archived or restored. Non-HP-UX device special files are never
restored.
SEE ALSO
cpio(1), find(1), stat(2).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

DIALUPS(5)

NAME

dialups, Lpasswd - dialup security control
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

Capability from System V, page by HP.

DESCRIPTION
Dialup8 and Lpa88wd are used to control the dialup security feature of login(l). If /etc/dialup8

is present, the first word on each line is compared with the name of the line upon which the login
is being performed. (Including the /dev /, as returned by ttyname(3)). If the login is occurring
on a line found in dialup8, dialup security is invoked. Anything after a space or tab is ignored.
When dialup security is invoked, login(l) will request an additional password, and check it
against that found in /etc/Lpa88wd. The command name found in the "program to use as
Shell" field of /etc/pa88wd is used to select the password to be used. Each entry in Lpa88wd
consists of three fields, separated by colons. The first is the command name, matching an entry in
pa88wd. The second is the encrypted password to be used for dialup security for those users logging in to use that program. The third is commentary, but the second colon is required to delimit
the end of the password. A null password is designated with two adjacent colons. The entry for
/bin/8h is used if no other entry matches the command name taken from pa88wd.
FILES

/etc/dialups

Dial in tty lines

/etc/Lpasswd

Passwords

SEE ALSO

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

DIR(5)

Series 200 Implementation

DIR(5)

NAME
dir - format of directories
SYNOPSIS
#include
#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD
Origin:

UCB and HP

Remarks: This entry describes the directory format for the HFS file system. Refer to other
dir(5) manual pages for information valid for other implementations.
DESCRIPTION
A directory behaves exactly like an ordinary file, except that no user may write into a directory.
The fact that a file is a directory is indicated by a bit in the flag word of its i-node entry (see
/8(5)). The structure of a directory entry as given in the dir.h include file is:
#define DIRSIZ
#define DIR....P ADSIZE
struct

(
'-

direct {
lL.long
11-Short
11-Short
char
char

14
10
cLino;
/* inode number of entry */

#inc1ude
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
HP-UX/STANDARD
Level:
Origin:

Remarks: This entry describes the SDF directory format for Series 500. Refer to other dir(5)
manual pages for information valid for other implementations.
DESCRIPTION
A directory behaves exactly like an ordinary file, except that no user may write into a directory.
The fact that a file is a directory is indicated by a bit in the flag word of its i-node entry (see
inode(5)). The structure of a directory entry as given in sys/dir.h is:
#ifndef DIRSIZ
#define DIRSIZ
#endif
struct direct

{
char
short
short
ino_t

d-Ilame[DIRSIZ+2];
cL.object_type;
cL1ile_code;
cLJno;

/*
/*
/*

16-char file name */
not referenced by HP-UX
not referenced by HP-UX
/ * use fir # for i-node */

*/
*/

};

The SDF directory implementation eliminates entries for . and... Instead, this information is
available as part of the i-node.
File names are stored in directories in a special manner in two cases:
When a file name contains embedded blanks, the blanks are represented by null characters on the disc. This is apparent when accessing the disc in raw (character) mode.
When a file name is blank padded, all unspecified characters are set to blanks. Again,
this is apparent only when reading from the disc in raw mode.
When a director has been opened vi open(2), file names appear as null-terminated, and contain
embedded blanks where they belong.
The direct structure defined here is the actual directory format for the SDF file system, and is not
compatible with other file systems supported on HP-UX. The direct structure defined in
/usr/include/ndir.h should be used in conjunction with the directory(3C) library routines for
compatibility across all HP-UX supported file systems.
SEE ALSO
fs(5), inode(5), directory(3C).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 10, 1985

DIR(5)

Integral PC Implementation

DIR(5)

NAME

dir - fonnat of directories
SYNOPSIS

#include
#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

System III

Remarks: This entry describes the directory format for the Bell file system. Refer to other dir(5)
manual pages for information valid for other implementations.
DESCRIPTION

A directory behaves exactly like an ordinary file, except that no user may write into a directory.
The fact that a file is a directory is indicated by a bit in the flag word of its i-node entry (see
/8(5)). The structure of a directory entry as given in the dir.h include file is:
#ifndef DIRSIZ
#define DIRSIZ
#endif
struct direct

d......ino;
d......name[DIRSIZ1;

};
By convention, the first two entries in each directory are for. and .. ("dot" and "dot dot"). The
first is an entry for the directory itself. The second is for the parent directory. The meaning of ..
is modified for the root directory of the master file system; there is no parent, so .. and. have
the same meaning.
The direct structure defined here is the actual directory format for the Bell file system and is not
compatible with other HP-UX supported file systems. The direct structure defined in
/usr/include/ndir.h should be used in conjunction with the directory(3C) library routines for
compatibility across all HP-UX supported file systems.
SEE ALBO

fs(5), directory(3C).

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 10, 1985

DISKTAB(5)

(HFS Implementation)

DISKTAB(5)

NAME

disktab - disc description file
SYNOPSIS

#inciude
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

Large Machine/HP Extension/HFS

Origin:

HP and UeB

DESCRIPTION
Disktab is a simple data base which describes disc geometries and disc section characteristics.
Entries in disktab consist of a number of ':' separated fields. The first entry for each disc gives the

names which are known for the disc, separated by 'I' characters. The last name given should be a
long name fully identifying the disc.
The following list indicates the normal values stored for each disc entry. Sectors are of size
DEV~SIZE, defined in on your system.
Name Type
ns
num
nt
num
nc
num
bO
num
bl
num
b-s:::n> num
fO
num
f1
num
f num
sO
num
sl
num
s num
rm
num
ty
str

Description
Number of sectors per track
Number of tracks per cylinder
Total number of cylinders on the disc
Block size for section '0' (bytes)
Block size for section '1' (bytes)
Block size for section '' (bytes)
Fragment size for section '0' (bytes)
Fragment size for section '1' (bytes)
Fragment size for section '' (bytes)
Size of section '0' in sectors
Size of section '1' in sectors
Size of section '' in sectors
Revolution per minute
Type of disc (e.g. removable, winchester)

Example:
hp7914:

:ty=winchester:ns#16:nt#7:nc#1061:s0#118832\
:bO#8192:fO#1024:rm#3600:

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200:
The Series 200 SM HP-UX 5.0 release can have only one section per disc drive.
FILES

/etc/disktab
SEE ALSO

newfs(IM)

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

ERRFILE(5)

Series 500 Implementation

ERRFILE(5)

NAME

err file - system error logging file
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD
Origin:

Remarks: This manual page describes errfile as implemented on the Series 500. Refer to other
errfile manual pages for information valid for other implementations.
DESCRIPTION

Errfile is a logging file containing lines of ASCII text. Each line describes certain system errors
that have occurred, or w'arnings about serious system conditions. Only those system error messages deemed serious enough to be of interest to the system administrator are logged. Urgent
messages are also written to /dev/console.

HP-UX creates errfile if it does not exist.
The system administrator should check the contents of errfile periodically and note errors that
need attention. Also, errfile tends to grow without bounds, so outdated information needs to be
removed on a regular basis.
FILES

usr / adm/ errfile

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 10, 1985

FS(5)

(HFS Implementation)

FS(5)

NAME

fs - format of file system volume
SYNOPSIS

#include
#include
#include
#include
#include
#include

HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: Large Machine/HP Extension/HFS
Origin: HP and DCB 4.2
DESCRIPTION

Every file system storage volume has a common format for certain vital infonnation. The first 8
kbytes on a volume contain a volume header which identifies that volume as a LIF volume. Such
volume may be divided into a number of sections.
Each section can contain a file system. The first 8 kbytes in each section is ignored, except where
it coincides with the volume header discussed above. The actual file system begins next with the
super block. The layout of the super block as defined by the include file is:
#define FS-.MAGIC
Ox011954
#define FS_CLEAN
Ox17
#define FS_OK
Ox53
#define FS~OTOK Ox31
struct fs {
struct fs *fs-link;
1* linked list of file systems */
struct fs *fs-Ilink;
/* used for inc ore super blocks */
daddr_t
fS-Bblkno;
1* addr of super-block in filesys */
daddr_t
fs_cblkno;
1* offset of cyl-block in filesys */
daddr_t
fs~blkno;
1* offset of inode-blocks in filesys */
daddr_t
fs_dblkno;
1* offset of first data after cg */
long
fs_cgoffset;
/* cylinder group offset in cylinder */
long
fs_cgmask;
1* used to calc mod fS-Iltrak */
time_t fs_time;
1* last time written */
long
fS-Bize;
/* number of blocks in fs */
1* number of data blocks in fs */
long
fs_dsize;
fS-Ilcg;
1* number of cylinder groups */
long
1* size of basic blocks in fs */
long
fs_bsize;
fs--.fsize;
1* size of frag blocks in fs */
long
fs--.frag;
1* number of frags in a block in fs */
long
1* these are configuration parameters */
fS-1Ilinfree;
1* minimum percentage of free blocks */
long
long
fS-Iotdelay;
1* num of ms for optimal next block */
long
fS-Ips;
1* disk revolutions per second */
/* these fields can be computed from the others */
long
fs_bmask;
1* "blkoff" calc of blk offsets */
long
fs--.fmask;
1* "fragoff" calc of frag offsets */
long
fs_bshift;
1* "Iblkno" calc of logical blkno */
long
fs--.fshift;
1* "numfrags" calc number of frags */
1* these are configuration parameters */
long
fS-1Ilaxcontig;
1* max number of contiguous blks */
long
fS-1Ilaxbpg;
1* max number of blks per cyl group */
1* these fields can be computed from the others */

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 10, 1985

FS(5)

(HFS Implementation)

long
fLlragshift;
/* block to frag shift */
long
fs---.fsbtodb;
1* fsbtodb and dbtofsb shift constant */
long
fs-sbsize;
/* actual size of super block */
long
fs_csmask;
/* csum block offset */
long
fs_csshift;
/* csum block number */
long
fS---1l.indir;
1* value of NINDIR */
long
fs-.inopb;
1* value of INOPB */
long
fS---1l.spf;
1* value of NSPF */
long
fs-sparecon[6];
/* reserved for future constants */
/* sizes determined by number of cylinder groups and their sizes */
daddr_t fs_csaddr;
1* blk addr of cyl grp summary area */
long
fs_cssize;
1* size of cyl grp summary area */
long
fs_cgsize;
1* cylinder group size */
1* these fields should be derived from the hardware */
long
fS---1l.trak;
1* tracks per cylinder */
long
fS---1l.sect;
1* sectors per track */
long
fs-spc;
1* sectors per cylinder */
1* this comes from the disk driver partitioning */
long
fS---1l.cyl;
1* cylinders in file system */
1* these fields can be computed from the others */
long
fs_cpg;
1* cylinders per group */
long
fs-.ipg;
/* i-nodes per group */
long
fs---.fpg;
1* blocks per group * fs---.frag */
1* this data must be re-computed after crashes */
1* cylinder summary information */
struct csum fs_cstotal;
1* these fields are cleared at mount time */
char
fs---.fmod;
1* super block modified flag */
char
fs_clean;
/* file system is clean flag */
char
fS-I"only;
/* mounted read-only flag */
char
fs-1lags;
1* currently unused flag */
char
fs---.fsmnt[MAXMNTLEN];
1* name mounted on */
1* these fields retain the current block allocation info */
/* last cg searched */
long
fs_cgrotor;
struct csum *fs_csp[MAXCSBUFS];/* list of fs_cs info buffers */
1* cyl per cycle in postbl */
long
fs_cpc;
short fs_postbl[MAXCPG][NRPOS];!* head of blocks for each rotation
long
fS---1Ilagic;
1* magic number */
char
fS---1l.ame[6];
1* name of file system */
char
fs---.fpack[6];
1* pack name of file system */
u_char fS-I"otbl[1];
1* list of blocks for each rotation */
!* actually longer */

};
A file system consists of a number of cylinder groups. Each cylinder group has i-nodes and data.
A file system is described by its super-block, which in turn describes the cylinder groups. The
super-block is critical data and is replicated in each cylinder group to protect against catastrophic
loss. This is done at file system creation time and the critical super-block data does not change,
so the copies need not be referenced further unless disaster strikes.
Addresses stored in i-nodes are capable of addressing fragments of 'blocks'. File system blocks of
at most size MAXBSIZE can be optionally broken into smaller pieces, each of which is addressable; these pieces may be DEV_BSIZE, or some multiple of a DEV_BSIZE unit.
Large files consist of exclusively large data blocks. To avoid undue wasted disk space, the last
data block of a file is allocated only as many fragments of a large block as are necessary, if that

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 10, 1985

FS(5)

(HFS Implementation)

FS(5)

file is small enough to not require indirect data blocks. The file system format retains only a single
pointer to such a fragment, which is a piece of a single large block that has been divided. The size
of such a fragment is determinable from information in the i-node, using the "blksize(fs, ip, Ibn)"
macro.
The file system records space availability at the fragment level; to determine block availability,
aligned fragments are examined.
I-numbers begin at O. I-nodes 0 and 1 are reserved. I-node 2 is used for the root directory of the
file system. The lost+found directory is given the next available inode when it is initially created
by mkfs.
fs_minfree gives the minimum acceptable percentage of file system blocks which may be free. If
the freelist drops below this level only the super-user may continue to allocate blocks. This may
be set to 0 if no reserve of free blocks is deemed necessary, however severe performance degradations will be observed if the file system is run dt greater than 90% full; thus the default value of
fs_minfree is 10%.

The best trade-off between block fragmentation and overall disk utilization and performance
varies for each intended use of the file system. Suggested values can be found in the System
Administrator's Manual for each implementation.
Cylinder group related limits: Each cylinder keeps track of the availability of blocks at different
rotational positions, so that sequential blocks can be laid out with minimum rotational latency.
NRPOS is the number of rotational positions which are distinguished. For example, with NRPOS
8 the resolution of the summary information is 2ms for a typical 3600 rpm drive.
fs_rotdelay gives the minimum number of milliseconds to initiate another disk transfer on the
same cylinder. It is used in determining the rotationally optimal layout for disk blocks within a
file; the default value for fs_rotdelay is 2ms. Suggested values of fS-I'otdelay for different disks
can be found in the System Administrator's Manual.

Each file system has a statically allocated number of i-nodes. An i-node is allocated for each
NBPI bytes of disk space. The i-node allocation strategy is extremely conservative.
MAXIPG bounds the number of i-nodes per cylinder group, and is needed only to keep the structure simpler by having only a single variable size element (the free bit map).
N.B.: MAXIPG must be a multiple of INOPB(fs).

MINBSIZE is the smallest allowable block size. With a MINBSIZE of 4096 it is possible to create
files of size 2'32 with only two levels of indirection. MINBSIZE must be big enough to hold a
cylinder group block, thus MINBSIZE must always be greater than sizeof(struct cg). Note that
super blocks are never more than size SBSIZE.
The path name on which the file system is mounted is maintained in fs_fsmnt. MAXMNTLEN
defines the amount of space allocated in the super block for this name. The limit on the amount
of summary information per file system is defined by MAXCSBUFS. It is currently parameterized
for a maximum of two million cylinders.
Per cylinder group information is summarized in blocks allocated from the first cylinder group's
data blocks. These blocks are read in from fs_csaddr (size ftLcssize) in addition to the super
block.
N.B.: sizeof (struct csum) must be a power of two in order for the "fs_cs" macro to work.

Super block for a file system: MAXBPC bounds the size of the rotational layout tables and is
limited by the fact that the super block is of size SBSIZE. The size of these tables is inversely
proportional to the block size of the file system. The size of the tables is increased when sector
sizes are not powers of two, as this increases the number of cylinders included before the rotational pattern repeats ( fs_cpc). The size of the rotational layout tables is derived from the

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

July 10, 1985

FS(5)

(HFS Implementation)

FS(5)

number of bytes remaining in (struct fs).
MAXBPG bounds the number of blocks of data per cylinder group, and is limited by the fact that
cylinder groups are at most one block. The size of the free block table is derived from the size of
blocks and the number of remaining bytes in the cylinder group structure (struct cg).
Inode: The i-node is the focus of all file activity in the HP-UX file system. There is a unique inode allocated for each active file, each current directory, each mounted-on file, text file, and the
root. An i-node is 'named' by its device/i-number pair. For the format of an i-node and its
flags, see inode (5)
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 200:
Series 200 HP-UX 5.0 release supports only one section per volume. Thus, there can only be one
file system on each volume and the first 8 kbytes of a file system is the boot area. This area contains the LIF volume header, the directory that defines the contents of the volume and the
bootstrapping program.
HFS file structure is not implemented on Series 500 or Integral PC.
SEE ALSO

lif(I), HP-UX System Administrator's Manual.

Hewlett-Packard

-4-

July 10, 1985

FS(5)

Series 500 Implementation

FS(5)

NAME

fs - format of system volume
SYNOPSIS

#include
#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

Remarks: This manual page describes the format of the system volume as implemented on the
Series 500. Refer to other Is manual pages for information valid for other implementations.
DESCRIPTION

Every Structured Directory Format (SDF) volume is divided into logical blocks, the size of which
is selected when init is executed. Block 0 is the superblock. It has the following format:
struct filsys {
ushort
ushort
char
time---.ios
int
daddr_t
int
daddr_t
int
daddr_t
char
time---.ios

s-±"ormat;
s_corrupt;
s-±"name[16] ;
s---.init;
s_blksz;
s_boot;
s_bootsz;
s-±"a;
s_version;
L.maxblk;
s_passwd[16] ;
s_bkup;

disc fmt, should = Ox700 Unix

/ * non-zero if directory corrupt */
/ * root dir name, blank padded */
/*
/*

date initialized / unique id */
no. bytes per block */
/ * boot area starting block */
/ * size of boot area in blks */
/ * FA file starting block */
/* version no., 0 for Unix */
/ * largest addressable blk */
/* volume password, Unix unused */
/* last backup date, Unix unused */
/* rest of blk unused */

};
The file attributes file (FA file) begins at the block specified by s_la in the superblock. It has five
major sections:

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 10, 1985

FS(5)

Series 500 Implementation

Each entry consists of 128 bytes. Entry 0 is the i-node of the FA file itself (see inode(5) for a
description of the i-node structure). Entry 1 is the i-node for the file system's root directory, j.
Entry 3 through entry n consists of the free map, which keeps track of every free (unused) block
of memory on the device. The free map contains a bit for each block on the device. If a bit is set,
the corresponding block of memory is free; otherwise, the corresponding block is being used. The
free map is zero-padded to guarantee that it ends on a 128-byte boundary.
Entry n+1 through the end of the FA file contains an entry for every file in the system. Each
entry is either an i-node, an extent map, or unused. An extent map contains 128 bytes of information, and looks as follows:
struct eIIL...Iec {
ushort
/* =2 for extent maps */
ushort
/* # extents in this rec. */
int
/* unused */
ino_t
e......next;
/* next map in list; none = neg */
ino_t
e-1ast;
/ * last map in list; none = neg */
ino_t
e_inode;
/ * owner i-node no. */
daddr_t
e_boffset; / * blk offset of 1st extent from start of file
struct {
daddr_t
e.....startblk;
/ * extent start blk */
int
e......numblk;
/* # blks in extent */
e_extent[13];

};
FILES

/usr /include /sys/param.h
/usr /include /sys / filsys.h
/usr /include/ sys/ino.h
SEE ALSO

inode(5), fsck(lM).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 10, 1985

FSPEC(5)

NAME
fspec - fonnat specification in text files
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD
System V

Origin:

Remarks: Not supported on the Integral Personal Computer.
DESCRIPTION
It is sometimes convenient to maintain text files on the HP-UX system with non-standard tabs,
(i.e., tabs which are not set at every eighth column). Such files must generally be converted to a
standard format, frequently by replacing all tabs with the appropriate number of spaces, before
they can be processed by HP-UX system commands. A format specification occurring in the first
line of a text file specifies how tabs are to be expanded in the remainder of the file.
A format specification consists of a sequence of parameters separated by blanks and surrounded
by the brackets <: and :>. Each parameter consists of a keyletter, possibly followed immediately
by a value. The following parameters are recognized:

ttabs

The t parameter specifies the tab settings for the file. The value of tabs must be one
of the following:
1. a list of column numbers separated by commas, indicating tabs set at the

specified columns;
2. a - followed immediately by an integer n, indicating tabs at intervals of n

columns;
3. a - followed by the name of a "canned" tab specification.

Standard tabs are specified by t-8, or equivalently, tl,9,17,25,etc. The canned tabs
which are recognized are defined by the tabs(1) command.
The s parameter specifies a maximum line size. The value of size must be an integer.
Size checking is performed after tabs have been expanded, but before the margin is
prepended.

ssize

mmargin The m parameter specifies a number of spaces to be prepended to each line. The
value of margin must be an integer.

The d parameter takes no value. Its presence indicates that the line containing the
format specification is to be deleted from the converted file.

The e parameter takes no value. Its presence indicates that the current format is to
prevail only until another fonnat specification is encountered in the file.

Default values, which are assumed for parameters not supplied, are t-8 and mO. If the s parameter is not specified, no size checking is performed. If the first line of a file does not contain a format specification, the above defaults are assumed for the entire file. The following is an example
of a line containing a fonnat specification:

* <:t5,10,15 s72:> *
If a fonnat specification can be disguised as a comment, it is not necessary to code the d parame-

ter.
Several HP-UX system commands have been specifically structured so they can correctly interpret
file format specifications.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 500:
Some earlier-design interface cards do not handle tab expansion correctly. This can cause
unexpected results.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 9, 1985

FSPEC(5)

FSPEC (5)

SEE ALSO

ed(1), newform(1), tabs(1).

BUGS
Does not work with vi(1) and ex(1).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9,1985

GETTYDEFS (5)

GETTYDEFS ( 5 )

NAME

gettydefs - speed and terminal settings used by getty
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

The /etc/gettydefs file contains information used by getty(1M) to set up the speed and terminal
settings for a line. It supplies information on what the login prompt should look like. It also supplies the speed to try next if the user indicates the current speed is not correct by typing a
character.
Each entry in /etc/gettydefs has the following format:
label# initial-flags # final-flags #login-prompt#next-label
The pound sign (#) is the field separator for lines in gettydefs. The spaces must appear as
shown. Each entry is followed by a blank line. Lines that begin with # are ignored and may be
used to comment the file. The various fields can contain quoted characters of the form \b, \n,
\c, etc., as well as \nnn, where nnn is the octal value of the desired character. The various fields
are:
label

This is the string against which getty tries to match its second argument. It is
often the speed, such as 1200, at which the terminal is supposed to run, but it
need not be (see below).

initial-flags

These flags are the initial ioctl(2) settings to which the terminal is to be set. The
flags that getty understands are the same as the ones listed in
/usr/include/termio.h (see tty(4)). Normally only the speed flag is required in the
initial-flags. Getty automatically sets the terminal to raw input mode and takes
care of most of the other flags. The initial-flag settings remain in effect until getty
executes login(1).

final-flags

These flags take the same values as the initial-flags and are set just prior to when
getty executes login. The speed flag is again required. The composite flag SANE
takes care of most of the other flags that need to be set so that the processor and
terminal are communicating in a rational fashion. The other two commonly
specified final-flags are T AB3, so that tabs are sent to the terminal as spaces, and
HUPCL, so that the line is hung up on the final close.

This entire field is printed as the login-prompt. Unlike the above fields where
white space is ignored (a space, tab or new-line), they are included in the loginprompt field. Thus, it is important that only the characters making up the login
prompt be included between the #'s in this field, with no extra white space.

next-label

If this entry does not specify the desired speed, indicated by the user typing a
character, then getty searches for the entry with next-label as its label
field and sets up the terminal for those settings. Usually, a series of speeds are
linked together in this fashion, into a closed set: for instance, 2400 linked to 1200,
which in tum is linked to 300, which finally is linked to 2400.

If getty is called without a second argument, then the first entry of /etc/gettydefs is used, thus
making the first entry of / etc / gettydefs the default entry. It is also used if getty cannot find the
specified label. If /etc/gettydefs itself is missing, there is one entry built into the command
which brings up a terminal at 300 baud.
It is strongly recommended that /etc/gettydefs be run through getty with the check option to

be sure there are no errors.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

GETTYDEFS (:;)

GETTYDEFS ( :; )

EXAMPLE

The following two lines show an example of a 300/1200 baud toggle, which is useful for dial-up
ports:
1200# B1200 HUPCL # B1200 SANE IXANY IXANY TAB3 #login: #300
300# B300 HUPCL # B300 SANE IXANY IXANY TAB3 #login: #1200
The following line shows a typical 9600 baud entry for a hard-wired connection:
9600# B9600 # B9600 SANE IXANY IXANY ECHOE TAB3 #login: #9600
FILES

/etc/gettydefs
SEE ALSO

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9,1985

GROUP(5)

NAME

group - group file, grp.h
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System III

DESCRIPTION

Group contains for each group the following infonnation:
group name
encrypted password
numerical group !D
comma-separated list of all users allowed in the group
This is an ASCII file. The fields are separated by colons; each group is separated from the next by
a new-line. If the password field is null, no password is associated with the group.
There are two files of this fonn in the system, /etc/group and /etc/logingroup. /etc/group exists
to supply names for each group, and to support changing groups via newgrp(I). /etc/logingroup
provides a default group access list for each user via login(l) and initgroups(3c).
The real and effective group !D set up by login for each user is defined in /etc/passwd (see
passwd(5). If /etc/logingroup is empty or non-existent, the default group access list is limited to
this effective group !D. If /etc/logingroup and /etc/group are links to the same file, the default
access list includes the entire set of groups associated with the user. The group name and password fields 'in /etc/logingroup are never used; they are included only to give the two files a unifonn fonnat, allowing them to be linked together.
All group !D's used in /etc/logingroup or /etc/passwd should be defined in /etc/group. No user
should be associated with more than NGROUPS (see setgroups(2)) groups in /etc/logingroup.
These files reside in directory /etc. Because of the encrypted passwords, they can and do have
general read permission and can be used, for example, to map numerical group !D's to names.

Grp.h describes the group structure returned by getgrent(3), etc:
struct

group {
char
char
int
char

1* see getgrent(3) */
*gr__llame;
*gr__passwd;
gr__gid;
**gr-illem;

};
FILES

/etc/group /etc/logingroup
SEE ALSO

groups(I), newgrp(1), passwd(I), setgroups(2), crypt(3C), getgrent(3), initgroups(3c), passwd(5).
BUGS

There is no tool that helps you ensure that /etc/passwd, /etc/group, and /etc/logingroup are
compatible.
There is no tool that helps you set group passwords in /etc/group.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

INITTAB( 5)

INITTAB(5)

NAME
inittab - script for the in it process
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System V

Remarks: Not supported on the Integral Personal Computer.
DESCRIPTION
The inittab file supplies the script to init's role as a general process dispatcher. The process that
constitutes the majority of init's process dispatching activities is the line process /etc/getty that
initiates individual terminal lines. Other processes typically dispatched by init are daemons and
the shell.
The inittab file is composed of entries that are position dependent and have the following format:
id:rstate:action:process
Each entry is delimited by a newline, however, a backslash (\) preceding a newline indicates a
continuation of the entry. Up to 512 characters per entry are permitted. Comments may be
inserted in the process field using the sh(l) convention for comments. Comments for lines that
spawn gettys are displayed by the who (1) command. It is expected that they will contain some
information about the line such as the location. There are no limits (other than maximum entry
size) imposed on the number of entries within the initlab file. The entry fields are:
id

This is one or two characters used to uniquely identify an entry.

rstate

This defines the run-level in which this entry is to be processed. Run-levels effectively
correspond to a configuration of processes in the system. That is, each process spawned
by init is assigned a run-level or run-levels in which it is allowed to exist. The runlevels are represented by a number ranging from 0 through 6. As an example, if the
system is in run-levell, only those entries having a 1 in the rstate field will be processed. When init is requested to change run-levels, all processes which do not have an
entry in the rstate field for the target run-level will be sent the warning signal
(SIGTERM) and allowed a 20-second grace period before being forcibly terminated by a
kill signal (SIGKILL). The rstate field can define multiple run-levels for a process by
selecting more than one run-level in any combination from 0-6. If no run-level is
specified, then the process is assumed to be valid at all run-levels 0-6. There are three
other values, a, band c, which can appear in the rstate field, even though they are not
true run-levels. Entries which have these characters in the rstate field are processed
only when the telinit (see init(IM)) process requests them to be run (regardless of the
current run-level of the system). They differ from run-levels in that init can never enter
run-level a, b or c. Also, a request for the execution of any of these processes does not
change the current run-level. Furthermore, a process started by an a, b or c command
is not killed when init changes levels. They are only killed if their line in /etc/inittab
is marked off in the action field, their line is deleted entirely from /etc/inittab, or init
goes into the SINGLE USER state.

action

Key words in this field tell init how to treat the process specified in the process field.
The actions recognized by init are as follows:

Hewlett-Packard

respawn

If the process does not exist then start the process, do not wait for its termination (continue scanning the inittab file), and when it dies restart the
process. If the process currently exists then do nothing and continue scanning the inittab file.

wait

Upon init's entering the run-level that matches the entry's rstate, start
the process and wait for its termination. All subsequent reads of the inittab file while init is in the same run-level will cause init to ignore this

- 1-

July 9, 1985

INITTAB(5)

entry.
once

Upon init's entering a run-level that matches the entry's rstate, start the
process, do not wait for its termination. When it dies, do not restart the
process. If upon entering a new run-level, where the process is still running from a previous run-level change, the program will not be restarted.

boot

The entry is to be processed only at init's boot-time read of the inittab
file. [nit is to start the process, not wait for its termination; and when it
dies, not restart the process. In order for this instruction to be meaningful, the rstate should be the default or it must match init1s run-level at
boot time. This action is useful for an initialization function following a
hardware reboot of the system.

bootwait

The entry is to be processed only at init's boot-time read of the inittab
file. [nit is to start the process, wait for its termination and, when it dies,
not restart the process.

powerfail

Execute the process associated with this entry only when init receives a
power fail signal (SIGPWR see signal(2)).

powerwait Execute the process associated with this entry only when init receives a
power fail signal (SIGPWR) and wait until it terminates before continuing
any processing of inittab.
off

If the process associated with this entry is currently running, send the

warning signal (SIGTERM) and wait 20 seconds before forcibly terminating the process via the kill signal (SIGKILL). If the process is nonexistent, ignore the entry.
on demand

This instruction is really a synonym for the respawn action. It is functionally identical to respawn but is given a different keyword in order to
divorce its association with run-levels. This is used only with the a, b or
c values described in the rstate field.

initdefault

An entry with this action is only scanned when init initially invoked. [nit
uses this entry, if it exists, to determine which run-level to enter initially.
It does this by taking the highest run-level specified in the rstate field
and using that as its initial state. If the rstate field is empty, this is interpreted as 0123456 and so init will enter run-level 6. Additionally, if init
does not find an in it default entry in /etc/inittab, then it will request
an initial run-level from the user at reboot time.

sysinit

Entries of this type are executed before init tries to access the console. It
is expected that this entry will be only used to initialize devices on which
init might try to ask the run-level question. These entries are executed
and waited for before continuing.

process This is a sh command to be executed. The entire process field is prefixed with exec and
passed to a forked sh as sh -c lexec commandl. For this reason, any legal sh syntax can
appear in the process field. Comments can be inserted with the; #comment syntax.
FILES
/ etc/inittab
SEE ALSO
sh(l), who(l), getty(lM), init(lM), exec(2), open(2)), signal(2).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9,1985

INODE(5)

HFS Implementation

INODE(5)

NAME

inode - format of an i-node
SYNOPSIS

#include
#include ,sys/inode.h>
#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level: Large Machine/HP Extension/HFS
Origin:

HFS

Remarks: This entry describes the i-node structure for the HFS file system. Refer to other
inode(5) manual pages for information valid for other implementations.
DESCRIPTION

An i-node for a plain file or directory in a file system has the following structure defined by
and .

1* Inode structure as it appears on a disk block *1
struct

dinode

{
1L-short
short
short
short
quad
time_t
long
time_t
long
time_t
long
daddr_t
daddr_t
long
long
long

dUnode;
dLnlink;
dLuid;
di_gid;
dLsize;
di_atime;
di_atspare;
dLmtime;
dUntspare;
di_ctime;
di_ctspare;
dLdb[NDADDR] ;
dUb[NIADDR];
diJags;
di_blocks;
di--'lpare[5] ;

I * mode and type of file *1
1* number of links to file *1
1* owner's user id *1
/* owner's group id *1
I * number of bytes in file *I
I * time last accessed *1
I * time last modified *1
I * time oflast file status change *1
I * disk block addresses *I
I * indirect blocks *I
I * status, currently unused *1
I * blocks actually held *1
I * reserved, currently unused *1

};
For the meaning of the defined types 11-short, quad, daddr_t and time_t see types(7).
See /usr/include/sys/inode.h for the definition of i-node structures for special files, pipes, or
FIFO's.
FILES

lusr linclude/sys/ino.h
SEE ALSO

stat(2), fs(5), types(7).

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 11, 1985

INODE(5)

Series 500 Implementation

INODE(5)

NAME

inode .. fonnat of an i-node
SYNOPSIS

#incIude
#incIude
#incIude
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

Remarks: This entry describes the i-node structure for the Series 500. Refer to other inode
manual pages for infonnation valid for other implementations.
DESCRIPTION

An i-node for an ordinary file or directory in a file system has the following structure, as defined
in sys/ino.h:

* I-node structure as it appears on disc.
* a file infonnation record
*/

struct din ode {
ushort
ushort
ushort
short
time--ios
unsigned
ino_t
ino_t
int
int
ushort
ushort
struct {

This i-node is actually
(FIR) in the HP SDF disc format.

dLtype
dUtype;
di_count;
di_uftype;
di_ctime;
di_other;
di_protect;
di-1abel;
di_blksz;
dL...ma.x;
di_exsz;
di_exnum;

int
} di_extent[4];
ino_t
di_exmap;
int

di-Bize;

/* =1 for inodes */

/* file type */
/ * reference count */
/ * user file type (LIF) */
/ * time created */
/* public capabilities */
/ * file protect rec. none=-1 */
/ * file label rec. none=-1 */
/ * file size in blocks */
* largest byte writable */
/ * recom. extent size */
/* no. i-node extents (1-4) */
dL...Btartblk;/ * extent start blk */
di-Ilumblk;/* no. blks in extent */
/* inode 1st extent map
/* none = -1 */
/ * current size, bytes */

/ * Warning! Next 2 fields apply only to directories */
di_parent;
di-Ilame[16];

/ * inode of parent */
/ * name of this directory

/ * The remaining fields defined only for local */
/ * implementation of structured directory format.
time_t
time_ios
int
ushort
ushort
ushort

Hewlett-Packard

di_atime;
dL...lIltime;
dL...recsz;
di_uid;
di_gid;
di......mode;

*/
*/

/* time last accessed */
/* time last mod. */

/ * logical record size */
/ * owner's user id */
/* owner's group id */
/* mode, type of file */

-1-

July 10, 1985

Series 500 Implementation

INODE(5)

char

di-I"es2[2];

unused

INODE(5)

/ * The next field used only if file

is */
/ * a device file; otherwise it is zero */

dev_t

di_dev;

description of device

};
The meaning of the type declarations included above can be found in types(7).
FILES

/usr /include/sys/ino.h
SEE ALSO

dir(5), fs(5), types(7).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 10, 1985

ISSUE ( 5)

NAME

issue - issue identification file
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/NUCLEUS

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

The file jete/issue contains the issue or project identification to be printed as a login prompt.
This is an ASCII file which is read by program getty and then written to any terminal spawned or
respawned from the lines file.
FILES

/etc/issue
SEE ALSO

getti(lm),login(l).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

LIF(5)

LIF (5)

NAME

LIF - Logical Interchange Format description
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/NUCLEUS

Origin:

DESCRIPTION

LIF (Logical Interchange Format) is a Hewlett-Packard standard disc format that may be used
for interchange of files among various HP computer systems. A LIF volume contains a header
(identifying it as a LIF volume) and a directory that defines the contents (i.e. files) of the volume.
The size of the directory is fixed when the volume is initialized (see liJinit(1)) and sets an upper
bound on the number of files that may be created on the volume.
HP-UX contains a set of utilities (referred to hereafter as li!*(1)) that may be used to initialize a
LIF volume (i.e. create a header and an empty directory), copy files to and from LIF volumes, list
the contents of LIF volumes, remove LIF files, and rename LIF files.
The li!*(1) utilities are the only utilities within HP-UX where the internal structure of a LIF
volume is known. To the rest of HP-UX a LIF volume is simply a file containing some unspecified
data. The term 'LIF volume' should in no way be confused with the HP-UX notion of a file system volume or mountable volume.
The LIF utility on HP-UX currently supports three file types, ASCII(l), BINARY(-2) and
BIN(-23951).
There are three copying modes associated with them.

ASCII

If the copying mode is ASCII, and an HP-UX file is being copied to a LIF volume, the
utility strips the trailing LF and prepends two bytes of record length to each record.
These records are then written to a LIF formated media. When copying a LIF ASCII
file to HP-UX the two byte record length are stripped and a trailing LF is appended.
These records are then written to the destination. In this mode of copying the length of
the file is preserved. The default file type for this mode of copying is ASCII(1).

BINARY
If the copying mode is BINARY, and an HP-UX file is being copied to a LIF volume,
the utility simply appends two bytes for record length to each lk byte record. A trailing
fractional block will have a count reflecting the number of bytes in that block. No
interpretation is placed on the content of the records. These records are then written to
a LIF formated media. When copying a LIF file to an HP-UX file in BINARY copying
mode, the record lengths are stripped and the content of records is directly written to
the destination. In this mode of copying the length of the binary file is preserved. The
default file type for this mode of copying is BINARY(-2).
RA W

If the copying mode is RAW, and an HP-UX file is being copied to a LIF volume, the
utility simply copies the raw data to the destination. File sizes which are not mUltiples
of 256 bytes will be padded with nulls to the next higher multiple. Therefore, the file
sizes are not preserved. When copying a LIF file to an HP-UX file in RAW mode, the
information is directly copied without any interpretation placed on the content of the
source. The default file type for this mode of copying is BIN(-23951).

A LIF volume may be created on any HP-UX file (either regular disc file or device special file)
that supports random access via Iseek(2). Note that you should not mount the special file before
using the li!*(1) routines. See lifinit(l) for details. Within a LIF volume, individual files are
identified by 1 to 10 character file names. File names may consist of upper-case alphanumeric
characters (A through Z, 0 through 9) and the underscore character (_). The first character of a
LIF file name must be a letter. The li!*(1) utilities will accept any file name, including illegal file
names generated on other systems, but will only create legal names. For example, file names

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

LIF (5)

containing lower-case letters will be read but not created.
LIF file names are specified to the li!*(1) utilities by concatenating the HP-UX path name for the
LIF volume with the LIF file name, separating the two with a colon (:). For example,
/dev/fd.O:ABC

specifies LIF file ABC within HP-UX device special file /dev/fd.O.

myfile:ABC

specifies LIF file ABC within HP-UX disc file 'myfile'.

Note that this file naming convention is applicable only for use as arguments to the li!*(1) utilities
and do not constitute legal path names for any other use within HP-UX.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:
You must use a character special file to access the media.
SEE ALSO

lifcp(l), lifinit(l), lills(l), lifrename(l), lifrm(l).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9,1985

MAGIC(5)

MAGIC (5)

NAME
magic - magic numbers for HP-UX implementations
SYNOPSIS
#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Use: HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Header: HP-UX/DEVELOPMENT
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Magic.h localizes all information about HP-UX "magic numbers" in one file, and thus facilitates
uniform treatment of magic numbers. This file specifies the location of the magic number in a file
(always the start of the file) and the structure of the magic number:
struct magic.number

{
unsigned short systenL...id;
unsigned short file_type;
};
typedef struct magic.number MAGIC;
Magic.h includes definitions for the system IDs of all HP machines running HP-UX, and file types
that are common to all implementations. There may be additional implementation-dependent file
types. The predefined file types are:
for object code files */
#define RELOC-.MAGIC Ox106
#define EXEC-.MAGIC Ox107
#define SHARE-.MAGIC Ox108

relocatable only

/* normal executable */
/* shared executable */

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200:
The following additional file type is defined:
#define

DEMAND~AGIC

Ox10B

SEE ALSO
ar(1), chatr(1), Id(1), a.out(5), ar(5), model(5).
BUGS

Cpia files use a different form of magic number that is incompatible with magic(5).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

Series 200 Only

MASTER(5)

MASTER (5)

NAME

master - master device information table
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

Config(lM) Support - HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System V and HP

DESCRIPTION

This file is used by config(lM) to obtain device information that enables it to generate the
configuration file. Master contains lines of various Master contains lines of various forms rameters.
Software drivers are defined as follows:
Field 1: device name, used in the user-specified dfile (8 chars maximum)
Field 2: handler name, used by the kernel to prefix routines such as cs80--.read, lp_write, ...
Field 3: element characteristics:
Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 -

5 bits make up the mask
card
specified only once
required driver
block device
character device

Field 4: functions for the device: 10 bits make up the mask
Bit 1 - size handler
Bit 2 - link routine
Bit 3 - open handler
Bit 4 - close handler
Bit 5 - read handler
Bit 6 - write handler
Bit 7 - ioctl handler
Bit 8 - select handler
Bit 9 - seltru handler
Bit 10 - C~LLCLOSES flag
Field 5: major device number, if a block-type device
Field 6: major device number, if a character-type device
Aliases for names are defined as follows:
Field 1: alias name => product number
Field 2: device name
Parameters are defined as follows:
Field 1: parameter name, as used in the user-specified
dfile
Field 2: parameter name, as used in the #define statement
in conf.c
Field 3: parameter value
SEE ALSO

config(lM)

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 11, 1985

MKNOD(5)

NAME
mknod - create a special file entry
SYNOPSIS
#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Mknod.h provides utilities to pack and unpack device names as used by mknod(2). It contains
the macro dey
makedev(major, minor) which packs the major and minor fields into a form
suitable for mknod(2). It also contains major (dev) and minor(dev) which extract the
corresponding fields.

The macro MINORJORMAT is a print! specification that prints the minor field in the format
best suited to the particular implementation. The specification given by MINORJORMAT must
cause the resulting string to indicate the base of the number in the same format as that used for
C: no leading zero for decimal, leading zero for octal, and leading zero and 'x' for hexadecimal.
When a minor field is printed in the format specified by MINORJORMAT, each sub-field contained in the minor will be wholly contained in the mininum possible number of digits of the
resulting string. (Splitting a field across unnecessary digits for the sake of packing is not done.)
SEE ALSO
mknod(lM), mknod(2), section 4.
WARNING
All of the macros defined in are also defined in for Bell System V
compatibility. Mknod.h only exists for compatibility with previous releases of HP-UX, and should
not be used for new development.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 9, 1985

MNTTAB(5)

NAME

mnttab - mounted file system table
SYNOPSIS

#include
#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

Large Machine/SVID

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Mnltab resides in directory fete and contains a table of devices, mounted by the mount(lM)
command, in the following structure as defined by :

struct

mnttab
char
char
short
time_t

{
mt_dcv[MNTLEN);
mL.JilslYs[MNTLEN);
mL..roJg;
mt_time;

};

Each entry is (2 x MNTLEN + 6) bytes in length (MNTLEN is defined in /usr/includefmnttab.h).
The first MNTLEN bytes are the null-padded name of the place where the special file is mounted;
the next MNTLEN bytes represent the null-padded root name of the mounted special file; the
remaining 6 bytes contain the mounted special file's read/write permissions and the date on
which it, was mounted. The minimum value for MNTLEN is 32.
The maximum number of entries in mnttab is based on the system parameter NMOUNT located
in /usr/includle/mnttab.h, which defines the number of allowable mounted special files.
WARNING

The table is present only for programs to return information about the mounted file systems. It
does not matter to mount if there are duplicated entries nor to umount if a name cannot be
found.
SEE ALSO

mount(lM), setmnt(lM).

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 9,1985

MODEL(5)

NAME
model - HP-UX machine identification
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

SYNOPSIS
#include
DESCRIPTION
There are some distinctions between the implementations of HP-UX due to hardware differences.
Where such distinctions exist, conditional compilation or other definitions can be used to isolate
the differences. Flags and typedefs to resolve these distinctions are collected in model.k. This file
contains constants indentifying various HP-UX implementations.
For example, the header file model.k contains the constants HP _S_200 for Series 200 and
HP_8_500 for Series 500. Other such constants will be added as HP-UX extends to other
machines.
Model.k also has a statement defining the preprocessor constant MYSYS to represent the specific
implementation for which compilation is desired. MYSYS will be equal to one of the constants
above (HP_8_200 or HP_8_500).

Conditional compilation may be used to adapt one file for execution on more than one HP-UX
implementation, if it contains implementation- or architecture-dependent features. For instance,
#if MYSYS==HP_S_200

#endif
will cause the statements following the if statement to be compiled only for the HP 9000 Series
200.
Mode/.k also contains typedefs for several predefined types to enhance portability of certain types
of code and of files.

intS
u~ntS

Signed and unsigned 8-bit integers.
int16
u_int16
Signed and unsigned 16-bit integers.
int32
11-int32
Signed and unsigned 32-bit integers.
maehptr
u--IIlaehptr
Signed and unsigned integers large enough to hold a pointer.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 200:
A conditional compilation variable, hp9000s200, is implemented. It is predefined to the C
preprocessor.
Series 500:
A conditional compilation variable, hp9000s500, is implemented. It is predefined to the C
preprocessor.
SEE ALSO
cell), cpp(l), magic(5).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

NLIST( 5)

NLIBT(5)

NAME

nlist - nlist structure format
SYNOPSIS

#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UXjRUN ONLY

Origin:

System III

Remarks: The exact content of the structure defined below can be best found by exammmg
/usr/include/nlist.h. It varies somewhat between the various implementations of HPUX.

Nlist is currently implemented on the Series 200 and Integral PC only.
DESCRIPTION

Nlist(3) can be used to extract information from a the symbol table in an object file. Because
symbol tables are machine dependent (as defined in each implementation's copy of
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

Remarks:
Implemented on Series 200/300 only.
DESCRIPTION

Setprivgrp(2) sets a mask of privileges, and Getprivgrp(2) returns an array of structures giving
privileged group assignments on a per group-id basis. Privgrp.h contains the constants and structures needed to deal with these system calls, and contains:

1*
* Privileged group definitions -* the numeric values may vary between implementations.
*1
#define PRIV-.-RTPRIO
#define PRIV~LOCK
#define PRIV_CHOWN

1
2
3

1* Maximum number of privileged groups in system *1
#define PRIV~AXGRPS 32

1*
* Size of the privilege mask,
* based on largest numbered privilege
*1
#define PRIV~ASKSIZ

/*
* Structure defining the privilege mask
*1
struct privgrp-Illap {
int priv_groupnoj
unsigned int priv-Illask[PRIV~ASKSIZ] j
}j

1*
* Structure returned to user on getprivgrp system call.
*1
struct privgrp-.list {
struct privgrp-Illap[PRIV~AXGRPS+ 1] j
}j
PRIV-.-RTPRIO allows access to the rtprio(2) system call.
PRIV~LOCK allows access to the plock(2) system call.
PRIV_CHOWN allows users to give files away.

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

November 15, 1985

PRIVGRP(5)

Series 200/300 Only

PRIVGRP(5)

Privileges are described in a multi-word mask. The value of the #define for each privilege is
interpreted as a bit index (counting from 1). Thus a group-id may have several different
privileges assocaited with it by having different bits or'ed into the mask.
The system is configured with a maximun number of groups with special privileges.
PRIV--MAXGRPS defines this maximum.
PRIV--MASKSIZ defines the size of the multi-word mask used defining privileges associated with
a group-id.
Privileges are returned to the user from the getprivgrp(2) system call in array of structures of type
struct privgrp-IIlask. The structure associates a multi-word mask with a group-id.
SEE ALSO

getprivgrp(2)

Hewlett-Packard

- 2-

November 15, 1985

PROFILE(5)

NAME
profile - set up user's environment at login time
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/ST ANDARD
Origin:

System III

DESCRIPTION
If the file /etc/profile exists, it is executed by the shell for every user who logs in. /etc/profile
should be set up to do only those things that are desirable for every user on the system, or to set
reasonable defaults. If your login (home) directory contains a file named .profile, it will be executed before your session begins. Profile files are useful for setting various environment parameters, setting terminal modes, or overriding some or all of the results of executing /etc/profile.
The following example is typical (except for the comments):

# Make some environment variables global
export MAIL PATH TERM
# Set file creation mask
umask 22
# Tell me when new mail comes in
MAIL= /usr /mail/myname
# Add my /bin directory to the shell search sequence
PATH=$PATH:$HOME/bin
FILES
$HOME/.profile
/etc/profile
SEE ALSO
env(l), login(l), mail(l), sh(l), stty(1), sU(l), environ(7), term(7).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

RANLIB(5)

NAME

ranlib - archive symbol table format for object libraries
SYNOPSIS

#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

DESCRIPTION

Any archive containing object files also includes an archive symbol table, thus allowing the linker
ld to scan libraries in random (rather than sequential) order.
The archive symbol table (if it exists) is always the first file in the archive, but it is never listed.
It is automatically created and/or updated by aT.

The archive symbol table lists each externally known name in the archive, together with the offset
of the archive element that defines that name. This offset is useful as an input argument to
Iseek(2) or fseek(3).
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Series 500:
The archive symbol table file contains the symbol table and a name pool of strings (the
names of external symbols). This allows for symbols with arbitrarily long names. The
rl~dr structure defines the layout of the file, and the rl_ref structure defines the contents of an archive symbol table entry. These structures have the following format:
struct rl--11dr {
long int
long int
long int
long int

1* offset of table */
1* length of table */
1* offset of name pool */
1* length of name pool */

rl_tcbas;
r1_tclen;
rL-Ilmbas;
rL.nmlen;

};
struct r1-I'ef {
long int name_pos;
long int Iib_pos;

1* index into name pool */
1* offset of defining file */

};
Series 200:
The archive symbol table file contains a header, a name pool of strings (the names of
external symbols), and the archive symbol table. This allows for symbols with arbitrarily
long names. The header contains a short integer which specifies the number of entries,
and a long integer which specifies the size of the string table. Following this is the name
pool. The last section of the file contains the archive symbol table entries. The structure
of these entries is defined below:
typedef.long off_t;
struct

ranlib {
union {
off_t ran-Btrx;
char HalL.1lame;
} ran_un;
off_t
raIL-off;

string table index

lib member offset

};

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 9,1985

RANLIB(5)

SEE ALSO

ar(l), Id(l), ar(5).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9,1985

SCCSFILE ( 5 )

NAME
sccsfile - format of SCCS file
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
HP-UX/STANDARD
Level:
System III

Origin:

DESCRIPTION
An SCCS file is an ASCII file. It consists of six logical parts: the checksum, the delta table (contains information about each delta), user names (contains login names and/or numerical group
IDs of users who may add deltas), flags (contains definitions of internal keywords), comments
(contains arbitrary descriptive information about the file), and the body (contains the actual text
lines intermixed with control lines ).
Throughout an SCCS file there are lines which begin with the ASCII SOH (start of heading) character (octal 001). This character is hereafter referred to as the control character and will be
represented graphically as @. Any line described below which is not depicted as beginning with
the control character is prevented from beginning with the control character.
Entries of the form DDDDD represent a five digit string (a number between 00000 and 99999).
Each logical part of an SCCS file is described in detail below.
Checksum
The checksum is the first line of an SCCS file. The form of the line is:

@hDDDDD
The value of the checksum is the sum of all characters, except those of the first line. The
@h provides a magic number of (octal) 000550 (0168 hex).
Delta table
The delta table consists of a variable number of entries of the form:
@sDDDDD/DDDDD/DDDDD
@d yr/mo/da hr:mi:se DDDDD DDDDD
@iDDDDD .,.
@xDDDDD .. .
@gDDDDD .. .
@m

@c ...

@e
The first line (@s) contains the number of lines inserted/deleted/unchanged respectively.
The second line (@d) contains the type of the delta (currently, normal: D, and removed:
R), the SCCS ID of the delta, the date and time of creation of the delta, the login name
corresponding to the real user ID at the time the delta was created, and the serial
numbers of the delta and its predecessor, respectively.
The @i, @x, and @g lines contain the serial numbers of deltas included, excluded, and
ignored, respectively. These lines are optional.
The @m lines (optional) each contain one MR number associated with the delta; the @c

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

SCCSFILE ( 5 )

lines contain comments associated with the delta.
The @e line ends the delta table entry.

User names
The list of login names and/or numerical group IDs of users who may add deltas to the
file, separated by new-lines. The lines containing these login names and/or numerical
group IDs are surrounded by the bracketing lines @u and @U. An empty list allows anyone to make a delta.
Flags----Keywords used internally (see admin(l) for more information on their use). Each flag
line takes the form:
@f
The following flags
@f t
@fv
@fi
@fb
@fm
@ff
@fc
@fd
@fn
@fj
@fl
@fq

are defined:

The t flag defines the replacement for the %Y% identification keyword. The v flag controls prompting for MR numbers in addition to comments; if the optional text is present
it defines an MR number validity checking program. The i flag controls the
warning/error aspect of the "No id keywords" message. When the i flag is not present,
this message is only a warning; when the i flag is present, this message will cause a
"fatal" error (the file will not be gotten, or the delta will not be made). When the b flag
is present the -b key letter may be used on the get command to cause a branch in the
delta tree. The m flag defines the first choice for the replacement text of the %M%
identification keyword. The f flag defines the "floor" release; the release below which no
deltas may be added. The c flag defines the "ceiling" release; the release above which no
deltas may be added. The d flag defines the default SID to be used when none is specified
on a get command. The n flag causes delta to insert a "null" delta (a delta that applies
no changes) in those releases that are skipped when a delta is made in a new release (e.g.,
when delta 5.1 is made after delta 2.7, releases 3 and 4 are skipped). The absence of the
n flag causes skipped releases to be completely empty. The j flag causes get to allow concurrent edits of the same base SID. The I flag defines a list of releases that are locked
against editing (get(l) with the -e keyletter). The q flag defines the replacement for the
%Q% identification keyword.

Comments
Arbitrary text surrounded by the bracketing lines @t and @T. The comments section
typically will contain a description of the file's purpose.
Body----The body consists of text lines and control lines. Text lines don't begin with the control
character, control lines do. There are three kinds of control lines: insert,- delete, and

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9,1985

SCCSFILE ( 5 )

end, represented by:
@IDDDDD
@DDDDDD
@EDDDDD

respectively. The digit string is the serial number corresponding to the delta for the controlline.
SEE ALSO

admin(l), delta(l), get(l), prs(l).

sees User's

Hewlett-Packard

Guide in HP-UX Concepts and Tutorials.

-3-

July 9, 1985

TERM(5)

NAME
term - format of compiled term file.
SYNOPSIS
term
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
HP-UX/STANDARD
Level:
Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION
Compiled terminfo descriptions are placed under the directory /usr /lib/terminfo. In order to
avoid a linear search of a huge HP-UX system directory, a two-level scheme is used:
/usr/lib/terminfo/c/name where name is the name of the terminal, and c is the first character
of name. Thus, act4 can be found in the file /usr/lib/terminfo/a/act4. Synonyms for the
same terminal are implemented by mUltiple links to the same compiled file.
The format has been chosen so that it will be the same on all hardware. An 8 or more bit byte is
assumed, but no assumptions about byte ordering or sign extension are made.
The compiled file is created with the tic (lM) program, and read by the routine setupterm. Both
of these pieces of software are part of curses(3X). The file is divided into six parts: the header,
terminal names, boolean flags, numbers, strings, and string table.
The header section begins the file. This section contains six short integers in the format described
below. These integers are (1) the magic number (octal 0432); (2) the size, in bytes, of the names
section; (3) the number of bytes in the boolean section; (4) the number of short integers in the
numbers section; (5) the number of offsets (short integers) in the strings section; (6) the size, in
bytes, of the string table.
Short integers are stored in two 8-bit bytes. The first byte contains the least significant 8 bits of
the value, and the second byte contains the most significant 8 bits. (Thus, the value represented
is 256*second+first.) The value -1 is represented by 0377, 0377, other negative value are illegal.
The -1 generally means that a capability is missing from this terminal. Machines where this does
not correspond to the hardware read the integers as two bytes and compute the result.
The terminal names section comes next. It contains the first line of the terminfo description, listing the various names for the terminal, separated by the' I' character. The section is terminated
with an ASCII NUL character.
The boolean flags have one byte for each flag. This byte is either 0 or 1 as the flag is present or
absent. The capabilities are in the same order as the file .
Between the boolean section and the number section, a null byte will be inserted, if necessary, to
ensure that the number section begins on an even byte. All short integers are aligned on a short
word boundary.
The numbers section is similar to the flags section. Each capability takes up two bytes, and is
stored as a short integer. If the value represented is -1, the capability is taken to be missing.
The strings section is also similar. Each capability is stored as a short integer, in the format
above. A value of -1 means the capability is missing. Otherwise, the value is taken as an offset
from the beginning of the string table. Special characters in 'X or \c notation are stored in their
interpreted form, not the printing representation. Padding information $ and parameter
information %x are stored intact in uninterpreted form.
The final section is the string table. It contains all the values of string capabilities referenced in
the string section. Each string is null terminated.
Note that it is possible for setupterm to expect a different set of capabilities than are actually
present in the file. Either the database may have been updated since setupterm has been recompiled (resulting in extra unrecognized entries in the file) or the program may have been recompiled

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

JUly 9,1985

TERM(5)

more recently than the database was updated (resulting in missing entries). The routine setupterm must be prepared for both possibilities - this is why the numbers and sizes are included.
Also, new capabilities must always be added at the end of the lists of boolean, number, and string
capabilities.
As an example, an octal dump of the description for the Microterm ACT 4 is included:
micro term I act41 micro term act iv,
cr=AM, cudl=A J, ind=' J, bel='G, am, cubl='H,
ed=' _, el=", c1ear='L, cup=AT%pl%c%p2%c,
cols#80, Iines#24, cufl='X, cuul='Z, home='j,
000 032 001

\0 025

\0 212

040
060

100

\0 377 377 030

120 377 377 377 377
140

020

\0 002

\0 377 377 377 377

160 377 377 377 377 034

\0 001

\0 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377
\0 377 377 377 377 004
\0 026

\0 377 377 036

\0 030

\0 006

\0 377 377 032

\0 377 377 377 377 377 377

200 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377

520 377 377 377 377

\0 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377 377

540 377 377 377 377 377 377 007

560 024
600

\f
c

\0 030

\0 032

\0 036

\0 037

\0 035

Some limitations: total compiled entries cannot exceed 4096 bytes. The name field cannot exceed
128 bytes.
FILES

/usr /lib/terminfo/? 1*

compiled terminal capability data base

SEE ALSO
tic(IM), curses(3X), terminfo(5).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9,1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

NAME

terminfo - terminal capability data base
SYNOPSIS

/usr /lib/terminfo/? 1*
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

Terminfo is a data base describing terminals that is used by programs and subroutines such as
vi(l) and curses(3X). Terminals are described in terminfo by giving a set of capabilities which
they have, and by describing how operations are performed. Padding requirements and initialization sequences are included in term info.
Entries in terminfo consist of a number of ',' separated fields. White space after each ',' is
ignored. The first entry for each terminal gives the names which are known for the terminal,
separated by 'I' characters. The first name given is the most common abbreviation for the terminal, the last name given should be a long name fully identifying the terminal, and all others are
understood as synonyms for the tenninal name. All names but the last should be in lower case
and contain no blanks; the last name may well contain upper case and blanks for readability.
Terminal names (except for the last, verbose entry) should be chosen using the following conventions. The particular piece of hardware making up the terminal should have a root name chosen,
thus "hp2621". This name should not contain hyphens, except that synonyms may be chosen
that do not conflict with other names. Modes that the hardware can be in, or user preferences,
should be indicated by appending a hyphen and an indicator of the mode. Thus, a vt100 in 132
column mode would be vt100-w. The following suffixes should be used where possible:
Suffix
Meaning
Example
-w
Wide mode (more than 80 columns)
vt100-w
-am
With auto. margins (usually default)
vt100-am
-nam
Without automatic margins
vt100-nam
-n
Number of lines on the screen
aaa-60
-na
No arrow keys (leave them in local)
clOO-na
-np
Number of pages of memory
clOO-4p
-rv
Reverse video
clOO-rv
CAP ABILITIES

The variable is the name by which the programmer (at the terminfo level) accesses the capability.
The capname is the short name used in the text of the database, and is used by a person updating
the database. The Lcode is the two letter internal code used in the compiled database, and
always corresponds to the old termcap capability name.
Capability names have no hard length limit, but an informal limit of 5 characters has been
adopted to keep them short and to allow the tabs in the source file caps to line up nicely. Whenever possible, names are chosen to be the same as or similar to the ANSI X3.64-1979 standard.
Semantics are also intended to match those of the specification.
(P)

indicates that padding may be specified

(G)

indicates that the string is passed through tparm withparms as given (#i).

(*)

indicates that padding may be based on the number of lines affected

(# i)

indicates the ith parameter.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

Cap-

name

Code

auto--.-ieft-1Ilargin,

auto-fight-1Ilargin,
ceoL.standout~litch,

am
xsb
xhp

am
xb
xs

eat-Ilewline_glitch,

xenl

erase_overstrike,

generic_type,

eo
gn

harLcopy,
has-1Ileta....key,

hc
km

has.-status--.-iine,
memory_above,

hs
in
da

memory_below,

Variable
Booleans

beehive~litch,

insert-Ilull~litch,

Description
cub! wraps from column 0 to last
column
Terminal has automatic margins
Beehive (f1=escape, f2=ctrl C)
Standout not erased by overwriting
(hp)
newline ignored after 80 cols
(Concept)
Can erase overstrikes with a blank
Generic line type (e.g." ilialup,
switch).
Hardcopy terminal
Has a meta key (shift, sets parity
bit)
Has extra ··status line"
Insert mode distinguishes nulls
Display may be retained above the
screen

Display may be retained below the
screen

miT
msgr
os
eslok
xt

mi
ms
os
es
xt

Safe to move while in insert mode
Safe to move in standout modes
Terminal overstrikes
Escape can be used on the status line
Tabs ruin, magic so char (Teleray

hz
ul
xon

hz
ul
xo

Hazeltine; can not print -'s
underline character overstrikes
Terminal uses xon/xoff handshaking

lines_of-1Ilemory ,

cols
it
lines
1m

co
it
li
1m

Number of columns in a line
Tabs initially every # spaces
Number of lines on screen or page
Lines of memory if > lines. 0 means

magic_cookie_glitch,

xmc

move-1nsert-.lllode,

move.....standout-1Ilode,
over--..Strike,
status--.-iine_esc_ok,
teleray_glitch,

1061)
tilde_glitch,
transparent_underline,
XOD-Xoif,

Numbers:
columns,

init_tabs,
lines,

varies

Number of blank chars left by smso or
rmsa

padding_baud-I"ate,

virtual_terminal,
width.....status--.-iine,

vt
wsl

vt
ws

cbt
bel
cr
csr

bt
bl
cr
cs

tbc
clear
el

Strings:
bacLtab,
bell,
carriage-return,

change.-scroll-fegion,
cleaL.1l.ll_tabs,
clear-Bcreen,

clr_eol,

Hewlett-Packard

ct
ce

-2-

Lowest baud where crlnl padding is
needed
Virtual terminal number (UNIX system)
No. columns in status line

Back tab (P)
Audible signal (bell) (P)
Carriage return (P *)
change to lines #1 through #2 (vt100)
(PG)
Clear all tab stops (P)
Clear screen and home cursor (P*)
Clear to end of line (P)

July 9,1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

clr_eos,
columIL-address,
commanLcharacter,
cursor_address,

cd
hpa
cmdch
cup

cd
ch
CC
cm

cursor_down,

cursor---11ome,

cudl
home

cursor~nvisible,

civis

cursor-left,
cursor---'llelIl-llddress,

cubl
mrcup

cursof-Ilormal,

cnorm

cursor-1'ight,
cursor_to-1l,

cufl
II
cuul
cvvis
dchl
dll
dsl
hd
smacs
b!ink
bold
smcup
smdc
dim

rmul
flash
ff
fsl
isl
is2
is3
if
ichl
ill
ip

do
ho
vi
Ie
CM
ve
nd
II
up
vs
dc
dl
ds
hd
as
mb
md
ti
dm
mh
im
mp
mr
mk
so
us
ec
ae
me
te
ed
ei
se
ue
vb
ff
fs
il
i2
i3
if
ic
al
ip

kbs
ktbc
kclr
kctab

kb
ka
kC
kt

cursor_up,
cursor_visible,

deletc-character,
delete-1ine,
dis-Btatus-1ine,
dowIL..half-1ine,
enteL_alt_charset---'llode,
enter_blink---1llode,
enter_bold-fnode,
enter_ca---'llode,
enter_delete---'llode,
enter_diill---'1lode,
enter-inserL_lIlode,

enter_protected---1llode,
enter-I"everse-Illode,
enter~ecure-IllOde,

enter-Btandout---'llode,
enter_underline---'llode,
erase_chars
exit_alt_charset---'llode,
exit_attribute---'llode,
exit_c3.--.lIlode,
exit_delete---'llode,
exit-insert---'llode,
exit-Btandout---'llode,
exit_underline---'llode,
flash--Bcreen,
forIILleed,
from--Btatus-1ine,
init_lstring,
init_2string,
init_3string,
initJle,
inserLcharacter,
insert-1ine,
insert_padding,
key_backspace,
key_catab,
key_clear,
key_ctab,

Hewlett-Packard

smir
prot
rev
invis
smSD

smul
ech
rmacs
sgrO
rmcup
rmdc
rroir
rmso

-3-

Clear to end of display (P*)
Set cursor column (PG)
Term. settable cmd char in prototype
Screen reI. cursor motion row #1
col #2 (PG)
Down one line
Home cursor (if no cup)
Make cursor invisible
Move cursor left one space
Memory relative cursor addressing
Make cursor appear normal (undo vs/vi)
Non-destructive space (cursor right)
Last line, first column (if no cup)
Upline (cursor up)
Make cursor very visible
Delete character (P*)
Delete line (P*)
Disable status line
Half-line down (forward 1/2 !inefeed)
Start alternate character set (P)
Turn on blinking
Turn on bold (extra bright) mode
String to begin programs that use cup
Delete mode (enter)
Turn on half-bright mode
Insert mode (enter);
Turn on protected mode
Turn on reverse video mode
Turn on blank mode (chars invisible)
Begin stand out mode
Start underscore mode
Erase #1 characters (PG)
End alternate character set (P)
Turn off all attributes
String to end programs that use cup
End delete mode
End insert mode
End stand out mode
End underscore mode
Visible bell (may not move cursor)
Hardcopy terminal page eject (P*)
Return from status line
Terminal initialization string
Terminal initialization string
Terminal initialization string

Name of file containing is
Insert character (P)
Add new blank line (P*)
Insert pad after character inserted
(p*)
Sent by backspace key
Sent by clear-all-tabs key
Sent by clear screen or erase key
Sent by clear-tab key

July 9, 1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

key_dc,
key_dl,
key_down,
key_eic,
key_eol,
key_eos,
key-fll,
key~l,
key~lO,

key--.f2,
key~3,

key--E4,
key--E5,
key--E6,
key-IT,
key~8,

key--1'9,
key-home,
key_ic,
key~l,

key---.left,
key---.ll,
keY-llpage,
key_ppage,
key--"ight,
key-"f,
keY----Br,

key-"tab,
key_up,
keypad---.locaI,
keypad---X1l1it,
lab-fll,
lab~l,
lab~lO,

lab--.f2,
lab~3,
lab~4,
lab~5,
lab~6,

lab-IT,
lab--E8,
lab--1'9,
memory---.lock
memory_unlock
met~on,

met8-off,
newline,

pad_char,
parIlL...dch,
parIlL...delete---.line,
paI'IIL-dow~cursor ,
par~ich,
par~ndex,

Hewlett-Packard

TERMINFO ( 5 )

kdch1
kdll
kcud1
krmir
kel
ked
kfO
kfl
kflO
kf2
kf3
kf4
kf5
kf6
kf7
kf8
kf9
khome
kich1
kill
kcub1
kIl
knp
kpp
kcuf1
kind
kri
khts
kcuu1
rmkx
smkx
]fD
Ifl
IflD
1f2
1f3
If4
If5
1f6
1f7
]f8
1f9
meml

kD
kL
kd
kM
kE
kS
kO
k1
k;
k2
k3
k4
k5
k6
k7
k8
kg
kh
kI
kA
kl
kH
kN
kP
kr
kF
kR
kT
ku
ke
ks
10
II

smm
rmm
nel

la
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
ml
mu
mm
mo
nw

pad
dch
dl
cud
ich
indn

pc
DC
DL
DO
IC
SF

memu

-4-

Sent by delete character key
Sent by delete line key
Sent by terminal down arrow key
Sent by rmir or smir in insert mode
Sent by clear-to-end-of-line key
Sent by clear-to-end-of-screen key
Sent by function key fO
Sent by function key fl
Sent by function key flO
Sent by function key f2
Sent by function key f3
Sent by function key f4
Sent by function key f5
Sent by function key f6
Sent by function key f7
Sent by function key f8
Sent by function key f9
Sent by home key
Sent by ins char/enter ins mode key
Sent by insert line
Sent by terminal left arrow key
Sent by home-down key
Sent by next-page key
Sent by previous-page key
Sent by terminal right arrow key
Sent by scroll-forward/down key
Sent by scroll-backward/up key
Sent by set-tab key
Sent by terminal up arrow key
Out of "keypad transmit" mode
Put terminal in "keypad transmit" mode
Labels on function key fO if not fO
Labels on function key fl if not fl
Labels on function key flO if not flO
Labels on function key f2 if not f2
Labels on function key f3 if not f3
Labels on function key f4 if not f4
Labels on function key f5 if not f5
Labels on function key f6 if not f6
Labels on function key f7 if not f7
Labels on function key f8 if not f8
Labels on function key f9 if not f9
Enable memory lock
Disable memory lock
Turn on "meta mode" (8th bit)
Turn off "meta mode"
Newline (behaves like cr followed
by If)
Pad character (rather than nUll)
Delete #1 chars (PG*)
Delete #1 lines (PG*)
Move cursor down #1 lines (PG*)
Insert # 1 blank chars (PG *)
Scroll forward #1 lines (PG)

July 9,1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

parlIL-insert-1ine,
parnLJ.cft_cursor J

AL
LE

par~ight_cursor ,

il
cub
cuf

par~indexJ

rin

parIIL-up_CUrsof,

repeat_char,
reset_lstring,
reset_2string,
reset_3string,
reseL..file,
restore_cursor 1
row--B.ddress,

cuu
pfkey
plloc
pfx
mcO
mc4
mc5
rep
rs1
rs2
rs3
rf
rc
vpa

SR
UP
pk
pI
px
ps
pf
po
rp
r1
r2
r3
rf
rc
cv

save_cursor,
scrolL.forward,
scrolueverse,
set_attributes,
set_tab,
set_window,

sc
ind
ri
sgr
hts
wind

sc
sf
sr
sa
st
wi

tab,
to---status-1ine,
underline_char,
up-1lalf-1ine,
iniLprog,
key_a1,
key_a3,
key_b2,
key_c1,
key_c3,

ht
tsl
uc
hu
iprog
ka1
ka3
kb2
kc1
kc3
mc5p

ta
ts
uc
hu
iP
K1
K3
K2
K4
K5
pO

pkeYJey,
pkey-1ocal,
pkeY--->mlit,
print---Bcreen,
prtr_off,
prtr_on,

prtr---1lon,

Add #1 new blank lines (PG*)
Move cursor left #1 spaces (PG)
Move cursor right #1 spaces (PG*)
Scroll hackward #1 lines (PG)
Move cursor up #1 lines (PG*)
Prog funct key #1 to type string #2
Prog funct key #1 to execute string #2
Prog funct key #1 to xmit string #2
Print contents of the screen
Turn off the printer
Turn on the printer
Repeat char #1 #2 times. (PG*)
Reset terminal completely to sane modes.
Reset terminal completely to sane modes.
Reset terminal completely to sane modes.
N arne of file containing reset string
Restore cursor to position of last sc
Vertical position absolute
(set row) (PG)
Save cursor position (P)
Scroll text up (P)
Scroll text down (P)
Define the video attributes (PG9)
Set a tab in all rows, current column
Current window is lines #1-#2
cols #3-#4
Tab to next 8 space hardware tab stop
Go to status line, column #1
Underscore one char and move past it
Half-line up (reverse 1/2 lincfeed)
Path name of program for init
Upper left of keypad
Upper right of keypad
Center of keypad
Lower left of keypad
Lower right of keypad
Turn on the printer for #1 bytes

A Sample Entry
The following entry, which describes the Concept-lOO, is among the more complex entries in the
terminfo file as of this writing.
conceptl00
am,

I cl001 concept I c104 I cl00-4p I concept
bel="G,

C018#80.

blank=\EH.

blink=\EC,

cr="M$<9>.

cup=\Eal.pl;'·

cuul=\E;.

cubi="H,

'/'+l.ci'.p2j.'

cvvis=\EW.

100,

clear=A L$<2*>.

cudl=" J.

cnorm=\Ew,

cufl=\E=,

''!.+;'c,

db,

dchl=\E" A$<16*>.

ed=\E"C$<16*>.

,l=\E"U$<16>.

ill=\E~R$<3*>,

in,

ind:::~ J.

'0.

dim=\EE,

flaeh=\Ek$<20>\EK.

.ind:::~ J$<9>.

dl1=\E"B$<3*>.

ht=\t$<8>.

ip=$<16*>.

is2=\EU\Ef\E7\E5\E8\El \ENH\EK\E\200\Eo~\200\Eo\47\E.
kbs=~h.

kcubl=\E>.

kfl=\E5.

kf2=\E6.

lines#24,

rev=\ED.

mir,

pb#9S00.

rmcup=\Ev

rmso=\Ed\Ee,

Hewlett-Packard

kcudl=\E<.
kf3:::\E7,

rmul=\Eg.

kcuf1=\E=,

kcuul=\E;,

khome=\E? ,
prot=\EI,

rep=\Er%pl%c%p2%'

$<6>\Ep\r\n,
rmul=\Eg,

rmir=\E\20D.

'%+%c$< . 2*>.

rmkx=\Ex,

sgrO=\EN\200.

-5-

July 9, 1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

smcup"'\EU\Ev

smul=\EG.

Bp\Ep\r,

tabs,

ul.

smir"'\E~P.

vt#8,

smkx=\EX,

smso=\EE\ED.

xenl.

Entries may continue onto multiple lines by placing white space at the beginning of each line
except the first. Comments may be included on lines beginning with "#". Capabilities in termin/o are of three types: Boolean capabilities which indicate that the terminal has some particular feature, numeric capabilities giving the size of the terminal or the size of particular delays, and
string capabilities, which give a sequence which can be used to perform particular terminal operations.
Types of Capabilities
All capabilities have names. For instance, the fact that the Concept has automatzc margins (i.e.,
an automatic return and linefeed when the end of a line is reached) is indicated by the capability
am. Hence the description of the Concept includes am. Numeric capabilities are followed by the
character '#' and then the value. Thus cols, which indicates the number of columns the terminal
has, gives the value '80' for the Concept.
Finally, string valued capabilities, such as el (clear to end of line sequence) are given by the twocharacter code, an '=', and then a string ending at the next following ','. A delay in milliseconds
may appear anywhere in such a capability, enclosed in $< .. > brackets, as in el=\EK$<3>, and
padding characters are supplied by tputs to provide this delay. The delay can be either a number,
e.g., '20', or a number followed by an '*', i.e., '3*'. A ,*, indicates that the padding required is
proportional to the number of lines affected by the operation, and the amount given is the peraffected-unit padding required. (In the case of insert character, the factor is still the number of
lines affected. This is always one unless the terminal has xenl and the software uses it.) When a
,*, is specified, it is sometimes useful to give a delay of the form '3.5' to specify a delay per unit to
tenths of milliseconds. (Only one decimal place is allowed.)
A number of escape sequences are provided in the string valued capabilities for easy encoding of
characters there. Both \E and \e map to an ESCAPE character, 'x maps to a control-x for any
appropriate x, and the sequence:; \n \1 \r \t \b \f \s give a newline, linefeed, return, tab, backspace, formfeed, and space. Other escapes include \ 'for', \ \ for \, \, for comma, \: for :, and \0
for null. (\0 will produce \200, which does not terminate a string but behaves as a null character
on most terminals.) Finally, characters may be given as three octal digits after a \.
Sometimes individual capabilities must be commented out. To do this, put a period before the
capability name. For example, see the second ind in the example above.
Preparing Descriptions
We now outline how to prepare descriptions of terminals. The most effective way to prepare a
terminal description is by imitating the description of a similar terminal in termin/o and to build
up a description gradually, using partial descriptions with vi to check that they are correct. Be
aware that a very unusual terminal may expose deficiencies in the ability of the termin/o file to
describe it or bugs in vi. To easily test a new terminal description you can set the environment
variable TERMINFO to a pathname of a directory containing the compiled description you are
working on and programs will look there rather than in /usr/lib/termin/o. To get the padding for
insert line right (if the terminal manufacturer did not docnment it) a severe test is to edit
/etc/passwd at 9600 baud, delete 16 or so lines from the middle of the screen, then hit the 'u' key
several times quickly. If the terminal messes up, more padding is usually needed. A similar test
can be used for insert character.
Basic Capabilities
The number of columns on each line for the terminal is given by the cols numeric capability. If
the terminal is a CRT, then the number of lines on the screen is given by the lines capability. If
the terminal wraps around to the beginning of the next line when it reaches the right margin,
then it should have the am capability. If the terminal can clear its screen, leaving the cursor in
the home position, then this is given by the clear string capability. If the terminal overstrikes

Hewlett-Packard

-6-

July 9, 1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

(rather than clearing a position when a character is struck over) then it should have the os capability. If the terminal is a printing terminal, with no soft copy unit, give it both hc and os. (os
applies to storage scope terminals, such as TEKTRONIX 4010 series, as well as hard copy and APL
terminals.) If there is a code to move the cursor to the left edge of the current row, give this as
cr. (Normally this will be carriage return, control M.) If there is a code to produce an audible
signal (bell, beep, etc) give this as bel.
If there is a code to move the cursor one position to the left (such as backspace) that capability
should be given as cubl. Similarly, codes to move to the right, up, and down should be given as
cufl, cuul, and cudl. These local cursor motions should not alter the text they pass over, for
example, you would not normally use 'cufl= ' because the space would erase the character moved
over.
A very important point here is that the local cursor motions encoded in terminfo are undefined at
the left and top edges of a CRT terminal. Programs should never attempt to backspace around
the left edge, unless bw is given, and never attempt to go up locally off the top. In order to scroll
text up, a program will go to the bottom left corner of the screen and send the ind (index) string.
To scroll text down, a program goes to the top left corner of the screen and sends the ri (reverse
index) string. The strings ind and ri are undefined when not on their respective corners of the
screen.
Parameterized versions of the scrolling sequences are indn and rin which have the same semantics as ind and ri except that they take one parameter, and scroll that many lines. They are also
undefined except at the appropriate edge of the screen.
The am capability tells whether the cursor sticks at the right edge of the screen when text is output, but this does not necessarily apply to a cufl from the last column. The only local motion
which is defined from the left edge is if bw is given, then a cubl from the left edge will move to
the right edge of the previous row. If bw is not given, the effect is undefined. This is useful for
drawing a box around the edge of the screen, for example. If the terminal has switch selectable
automatic margins, the terminfo file usually assumes that this is on; i.e., am. If the terminal has
a command which moves to the first column of the next line, that command can be given as nel
(newline). It does not matter if the command clears the remainder of the current line, so if the
terminal has no cr and If it may still be possible to craft a working nel out of one or both of
them.
These capabilities suffice to describe hardcopy and glass-tty terminals. Thus the model 33 teletype is described as
33 I tty33 I tty I model
be1="G.

C01B#72,

33 teletype.

crooM.

cudi=" J.

hc.

indo" J.

06.

while the Lear Siegler ADM-3 is described as
adm3 I 3 I 16i adm3.
am,

be1="G,

ind=" J •

c1ear="Z,

C016#80.

croOM,

cubi="H.

cudi=" J,

lines#24.

Parameterized Strings
Cursor addressing and other strings reqmrmg parameters in the terminal are described by a
parameterized string capability, with printf(3S) like escapes %x in it. For example, to address
the cursor, the cup capability is given, using two parameters: the row and column to address to.
(Rows and columns are numbered from zero and refer to the physical screen visible to the user,
not to any unseen memory.) If the terminal has memory relative cursor addressing, that can be
indicated by mrcup.
The parameter mechanism uses a stack and special % codes to manipulate it. Typically a
sequence will push one of the parameters onto the stack and then print it in some format. Often
more complex operations are necessary.

Hewlett-Packard

-7-

July 9,1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

The % encodings have the following meanings:
%%
%d
%2d
%3d
%02d
%03d
%c
%s

outputs '%'
print popO as in printf
print popO like %2d
print popO like %3d

%p[I-9]
%P[a-z]
%g[a-z]
%'c'
%{nn}

push ith parm
set variable [a-z] to popO
get variable [a-z] and push it
char constant c
integer constant nn

as in printf
print popO gives %c
print popO gives %s

%+ %- %* %/ %m
arithmetic (%m is mod): push(popO op popOl
%& % I %'
bit operations: push(popO op popOl
%= %> %<
logical operations: push(popO op popOl
%! %unary operations push( op popOl
%i
add 1 to first two parms (for ANSI terminals)
%7 expr %t thenpart %e elsepart %;
if-then-else, %e elsepart is optional.
else-ifs are possible ala Algol 68:
%7 c1 %t b 1 %e c2 %t b 2 %e c3 %t b 3 %e c4 %t b 4 %e %;

ci are conditions, b i are bodies.
Binary operations are in postfix form with the operands in the usual order. That is, to get x-5
one would use "%gx%{5}%-".
Consider the HP2645, which, t::> get to row 3 and column 12, needs to be sent \E&a12c03Y padded for 6 milliseconds. Note that the order of the rows and columns is inverted here, and that the
row and column are printed as two digits.
Thus its cup capability is
cup=6\E&%p2%2dc%p1 %2dY.
The Microterm ACT-IV needs the current row and column sent preceded by a 'T, with the row
and column simply encoded in binary, cup='T%p1%c%p2%c. Terminals which use %c need to be
able to backspace the cursor (cub!), and to move the cursor up one line on the screen (cuu!).
This is necessary because it is not always safe to transmit \n 'D and \r, as the system may
change or discard them. (The library routines dealing with terminfo set tty modes so that tabs
are never expanded, so \ t is safe to send. This turns out to be essential for the Ann Arbor 4080.)
A final example is the LSI ADM-3a, which uses row and column offset by a blank character, thus
cup=\E=%p1%' '%+%c%p2%' '%+%c. After sending '\E=', this pushes the first parameter,
pushes the ASCII value for a space (32), adds them (pushing the sum on the stack in place of the
two previous values) and outputs that value as a character. Then the same is done for the second
parameter. More complex arithmetic is possible using the stack.
If the terminal has row or column absolute cursor addressing, these can be given as single parameter capabilities hpa (horizontal position absolute) and vpa (vertical position absolute). Sometimes these are shorter than the more general two parameter sequence (as with the hp2645) and
can be used in preference to cup. If there are parameterized local motions (e.g., move n spaces to
the right) these can be given as cud, cub, cur, and cuu with a single parameter indicating how
many spaces to move. These are primarily useful if the terminal does not have cup, such as the

Hewlett-Packard

-8-

July 9, 1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

TEKTRONIX 4025.

Cursor Motions
If the terminal has a fast way to home the cursor (to very upper left corner of screen) then this
can be given as home; similarly a fast way of getting to the lower left-hand corner can be given
as II; this may involve going up with euul from the home position, but a program should never
do this itself (unless II does) because it can make no assumption about the effect of moving up
from the home position. Note that the home position is the same as addressing to (0,0): to the
top left corner of the screen, not of memory. (Thus, the \EH sequence on HP terminals cannot be
used for home.)
Area Clears
If the terminal can clear from the current position to the end of the line, leaving the cursor where
it is, this should be given as el. If the terminal can clear from the current position to the end of
the display, then this should be given as ed. Ed is only defined from the first column of a line.
(Thus, it can be simulated by a request to delete a large number of lines, if a true ed is not available.)

Insert / delete line
If the terminal can open a new blank line before the line where the cursor is, this should be given
as ill; this is done only from the first position of a line. The cursor must then appear on the
newly blank line. If the terminal can delete the line which the cursor is on, then this should be
given as dU; this is done only from the first position on the line to be deleted. Versions of ill
and dU which take a single parameter and insert or delete that many lines can be given as it and
dl. If the terminal has a settable scrolling region (like the vt100) the command to set this can be
described with the esr capability, which takes two parameters: the top and bottom lines of the
scrolling region. The cursor position is, alas, undefined after using this command. It is possible to
get the effect of insert or delete line using this command - the se and rc (save and restore cursor)
commands are also useful. Inserting lines at the top or bottom of the screen can also be done
using ri or ind on many terminals without a true insert/delete line, and is often faster even on
terminals with those features.
If the terminal has the ability to define a window as part of memory, which all commands affect,

it should be given as the parameterized string wind. The four parameters are the starting and
ending lines in memory and the starting and ending columns in memory, in that order.
If the terminal can retain display memory above, then the da capability should be given; if
display memory can be retained below, then db should be given. These indicate that deleting a
line or scrolling may bring non-blank lines up from below or that scrolling back with ri may bring
down non-blank lines.

Insert/Delete Character
There are two basic kinds of intelligent terminals with respect to insert/delete character which
can be described using terminfo. The most common insert/delete character operations affect only
the characters on the current line and shift characters off the end of the line rigidly. Other terminals, such as the Concept 100 and the Perkin Elmer Owl, make a distinction between typed and
untyped blanks on the screen, shifting upon an insert or delete only to an untyped blank on the
screen which is either eliminated, or expanded to two untyped blanks. You can determine the
kind of terminal you have by clearing the screen and then typing text separated by cursor
motions. Type abc def using local cursor motions (not spaces) between the abc and the def.
Then position the cursor before the abc and put the terminal in insert mode. If typing characters
causes the rest of the line to shift rigidly and characters to fall off the end, then your terminal
does not distinguish between blanks and untyped positions. If the abc shifts over to the def which
then move together around the end of the current line and onto the next as you insert, you have
the second type of terminal, and should give the capability in, which stands for insert null. While
these are two logically separate attributes (one line vs. multiline insert mode, and special

Hewlett-Packard

-9-

July 9, 1985

TERMINFO (5)

TERMINFO ( 5 )

treatment of untyped spaces) we have seen no terminals whose insert mode cannot be described
with the single attribute.
Terminfo can describe both terminals which have an insert mode, and terminals which send a
simple sequence to open a blank position on the current line. Give as smir the sequence to get
into insert mode. Give as rmir the sequence to leave insert mode. Now give as ichl any
sequence needed to be sent just before sending the character to be inserted. Most terminals with
a true insert mode will not give ichl; terminals which send a sequence to open a screen position
should give it here. (If your terminal has both, insert mode is usually preferable to ichl. Do not
give both unless the terminal actually requires both to be used in combination.) If post insert
padding is needed, give this as a number of milliseconds in ip (a string option). Any other
sequence which may need to be sent after an insert of a single character may also be given in ip.
If your terminal needs both to be placed into an 'insert mode' and a special code to precede each
inserted character, then both smir/rmir and ichl can be given, and both will be used. The ich
capability, with one parameter, n, will repeat the effects of ichl n times.
It is occasionally necessary to move around while in insert mode to delete characters on the same
line (e.g., if there is a tab after the insertion position). If your terminal allows motion while in
insert mode you can give the capability mir to speed up inserting in this case. Omitting mir will
affect only speed. Some terminals (notably Datamedia's) must not have mir because of the way
their insert mode works.

Finally, you can specify dchl to delete a single character, dch with one parameter, n, to delete n
characters, and delete mode by giving smdc and rmdc to enter and exit delete mode (any mode
the terminal needs to be placed in for dchl to work).

A command to erase n characters (equivalent to outputting n blanks without moving the cursor)
can be given as ech with one parameter.
Highlighting, Underlining, and Visible Bells
If your terminal has one or more kinds of display attributes, these can be represented in a number
of different ways. You should choose one display form as standout mode, representing a good,
high contrast, easy-on-the-eyes, format for highlighting error messages and other attention
getters. (If you have a choice, reverse video plus half-bright is good, or reverse video alone.) The
sequences to enter and exit standout mode are given as smso and rmso, respectively. If the code
to change into or out of standout mode leaves one or even two blank spaces on the screen, as the
TVI 912 and Teleray 1061 do, then xmc should be given to tell how many spaces are left.

Codes to begin underlining and end underlining can be given as smul and rmul respectively. If
the terminal has a code to underline the current character and move the cursor one space to the
right, such as the Microterm Mime, this can be given as uc.
Other capabilities to enter various highlighting modes include blink (blinking) bold (bold or
extra bright) dim (dim or half-bright) invis (blanking or invisible text) prot (protected) rev
(reverse video) sgrO (turn off all attribute modes) smacs (enter alternate character set mode) and
rmacs (exit alternate character set mode). Turning on any of these modes singly mayor may
not turn off other modes.
If there is a sequence to set arbitrary combinations of modes, this should be given as sgr (set
attributes), taking 9 parameters. Each parameter is either 0 or 1, as the corresponding attribute
is on or off. The 9 parameters are, in order: standout, underline, reverse, blink, dim, bold, blank,
protect, alternate character set. Not all modes need be supported by sgr, only those for which
corresponding separate attribute commands exist.

Terminals with the "magic cookie" glitch (xmc) deposit special "cookies" when they receive
mode-setting sequences, which affect the display algorithm rather than having extra bits for each
character. Some terminals, such as the HP 2621, automatically leave standout mode when they
move to a new line or the cursor is addressed. Programs using standout mode should exit standout mode before moving the cursor or sending a newline, unless the msgr capability, asserting

Hewlett-Packard

-10-

July 9,1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

that it is safe to move in standout mode, is present.
If the terminal has a way of flashing the screen to indicate an error quietly (a bell replacement)
then this can be given as flash; it must not move the cursor.
If the cursor needs to be made more visible than normal when it is not on the bottom line (to
make, for example, a non-blinking underline into an easier to find block or blinking underline)
give this sequence as cvvis. If there is a way to make the cursor completely invisible, give that as
civis. The capability cnorm should be given which undoes the effects of both of these modes.
If the terminal needs to be in a special mode when running a program that uses these capabilities,
the codes to enter and exit this mode can be given as smcup and rmcup. This arises, for example, from terminals like the Concept with more than one page of memory. If the terminal has
only memory relative cursor addressing and not screen relative cursor addressing, a one screensized window must be fixed into the terminal for cursor addressing to work properly. This is also
used for the TEKTRONIX 4025, where smcup sets the command character to be the one used by
terminfo.
If your terminal correctly generates underlined characters (with no special codes needed) even

though it does not overstrike, then you should give the capability ul. If overstrikes are erasable
with a blank, then this should be indicated by giving eo.
Keypad
If the terminal has a keypad that transmits codes when the keys are pressed, this information can

be given. Note that it is not possible to handle terminals where the keypad only works in local
(this applies, for example, to the unshifted HP 2621 keys). If the keypad can be set to transmit or
not transmit, give these codes as smkx and rmkx. Otherwise the keypad is assumed to always
transmit. The codes sent by the left arrow, right arrow, up arrow, down arrow, and home keys
can be given as kcubl, kcufl, kcuul, kcudl, and khome respectively. If there are function
keys such as ro, fl, ... , flO, the codes they send can be given as kID, 'kfl, ... , kflO. If these keys
have labels other than the default ro through flO, the labels can be given as lID, Ifl, ... , IflO.
The codes transmitted by certain other special keys can be given: kll (home down), kbs (backspace), ktbc (clear all tabs), kctab (clear the tab stop in this column), kcJr (clear screen or erase
key), kdchl (delete character), kdll (delete line), krmir (exit insert mode), kel (clear to end of
line), ked (clear to end of screen), kichl (insert character or enter insert mode), kill (insert line),
knp (next page), kpp (previous page), kind (scroll forward/down), kri (scroll backward/up),
khts (set a tab stop in this column). In addition, if the keypad has a 3 by 3 array of keys including the four arrow keys, the other five keys can be given as kal, ka3, kb2, kcl, and kc3. These
keys are useful when the effects of a 3 by 3 directional pad are needed.
Tabs and Initialization
If the terminal has hardware tabs, the command to advance to the next tab stop can be given as

ht (usually control I). A "backtab" command which moves leftward to the next tab stop can be
given as cbt. By convention, if the teletype modes indicate that tabs are being expanded by the
computer rather than being sent to the terminal, programs should not use ht or cbt even if they
are present, since the user may not have the tab stops properly set. If the terminal has hardware
tabs which are initially set every n spaces when the terminal is powered up, the numeric parameter it is given, showing the number of spaces the tabs are set to. This is normally used by the
tset command to determine whether to set the mode for hardware tab expansion, and whether to
set the tab stops. If the terminal has tab stops that can be saved in nonvolatile memory, the terminfo description can assume that they are properly set.
Other capabilities include isl, is2, and is3, initialization strings for the terminal, iprog, the path
name of a program to be run to initialize the terminal, and if, the name of a file containing long
initialization strings. These strings are expected to set the terminal into modes consistent with
the rest of the terminfo description. They are normally sent to the terminal, by the tset program,
each time the user logs in. They will be printed in the following order: isl; is2; setting tabs

Hewlett-Packard

-11-

July 9,1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

using tbc and hts; if; running the program iprog; and finally is3. Most initialization is done
with is2. Special terminal modes can be set up without duplicating strings by putting the common sequences in is2 and special cases in isl and is3. A pair of sequences that does a harder
reset from a totally unknown state can be analogously given as rsl, rs2, rf, and rs3, analogous to
is2 and if. These strings are output by the reset program, which is used when the terminal gets
into a wedged state. Commands are normally placed in rs2 and rf only if they produce annoying
effects on the screen and are not necessary when logging in. For example, the command to set the
vt100 into SO-column mode would normally be part of is2, but it causes an annoying glitch of the
screen and is not normally needed since the terminal is usually already in SO column mode.
If there are commands to set and clear tab stops, they can be given as tbc (clear all tab stops)
and hts (set a tab stop in the current column of every row). If a more complex sequence is

needed to set the tabs than can be described by this, the sequence can be placed in is2 or if.
Delays
Certain capabilities control padding in the teletype driver. These are primarily needed by hard
copy terminals, and are used by the tset program to set teletype modes appropriately. Delays
embedded in the capabilities cr, ind, cub!, ff, and tab will cause the appropriate delay bits to be
set in the teletype driver. If pb (padding baud rate) is given, these values can be ignored at baud
rates below the value of pb.
Miscellaneous
If the terminal requires other than a null (zero) character as a pad, then this can be given as pad.
Only the first character of the pad string is used.

If the terminal has an extra "status line" that is not normally used by software, this fact can be
indicated. If the status line is viewed as an extra line below the bottom line, into which one can
cursor address normally (such as the Heathkit h19's 25th line, or the 24th line of a vt100 which is
set to a 23-line scrolling region), the capability hs should be given. Special strings to go to the
beginning of the status line and to return from the status line can be given as tsl and fsl. (fsl
must leave the cursor position in the same place it was before tsl. If necessary, the se and rc
strings can be included in tsl and fsl to get this effect.) The parameter tsl takes one parameter,
which is the column number of the status line the cursor is to be moved to. If escape sequences
and other special commands, such as tab, work while in the status line, the flag eslok can be
given. A string which turns off the status line (or otherwise erases its contents) should be given
as dsl. If the terminal has commands to save and restore the position of the cursor, give them as
sc and rc. The status line is normally assumed to be the same width as the rest of the screen,
e.g., cols. If the status line is a different width (possibly because the terminal does not allow an
entire line to be loaded) the width, in columns, can be indicated with the numeric parameter wsl.
If the terminal can move up or down half a line, this can be indicated with hu (half-line up) and

hd (half-line down). This is primarily useful for superscripts and subscripts on hardcopy terminals. If a hardcopy terminal can eject to the next page (form feed), give this as ff (usually control

L).
If there is a command to repeat a given character a given number of times (to save time transmit-

ting a large number of identical characters) this can be indicated with the parameterized string
rep. The first parameter is the character to be repeated and the second is the number of times to
repeat it. Thus, tparm(repeat_char, 'x', 10) is the same as 'xxxxxxxxxx'.
If the terminal has a settable command character, such as the TEKTRONIX 4025, this can be indicated with cmdch. A prototype command character is chosen which is used in all capabilities.

This character is given in the cmdch capability to identify it. The following convention is supported on some UNIX systems: The environment is to be searched for a CC variable, and if
found, all occurrences of the prototype character are replaced with the character in the environment variable.

Hewlett-Packard

-12 -

July 9,1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

Terminal descriptions that do not represent a specific kind of known terminal, such as switch,
dialup, patch, and network, should include the gn (generic) capability so that programs can complain that they do not know how to talk to the terminal. (This capability does not apply to virtual terminal descriptions for which the escape sequences are known.)
If the terminal uses xon/xoff handshaking for flow control, give xon. Padding information should
still be included so that routines can make better decisions about costs, but actual pad characters
will not be transmitted.
If the terminal has a "meta key" which acts as a shift key, setting the 8th bit of any character

transmitted, this fact can be indicated with km. Otherwise, software will assume that the 8th bit
is parity and it will usually be cleared. If strings exist to turn this "meta mode" on and off, they
can be given as smm and rmm.
If the terminal has more lines of memory than will fit on the screen at once, the number of lines of

memory can be indicated with 1m. A value of Im#O indicates that the number of lines is not
fixed, but that there is still more memory than fits on the screen.
If the terminal is one of those supported by the UNIX virtual terminal protocol, the terminal
number can be given as vt.

Media copy strings which control an auxiliary printer connected to the terminal can be given as
mcO: print the contents of the screen, mc4: turn off the printer, and mc5: turn on the printer.
When the printer is on, all text sent to the terminal will be sent to the printer. It is undefined
whether the text is also displayed on the terminal screen when the printer is on. A variation
mc5p takes one parameter, and leaves the printer on for as many characters as the value of the
parameter, then turns the printer off. The parameter should not exceed 255. All text, including
mc4, is transparently passed to the printer while an mc5p is in effect.
Strings to program function keys can be given as pfkey, pfloc, and pfx. Each of these strings
takes two parameters: the function key number to program (from 0 to 10) and the string to program it with. Function key numbers out of this range may program undefined keys in a terminal
dependent manner. The difference between the capabilities is that pfkey causes pressing the
given key to be the same as the user typing the given string; pfloc causes the string to be executed by the terminal in local; and pfx causes the string to be transmitted to the computer.
Glitches and Braindamage
Hazeltine terminals, which do not allow ,-, characters to be displayed should indicate hz.
Terminals which ignore a linefeed immediately after an am wrap, such as the Concept and vt100,
should indicate xenl.
If el is required to get rid of standout (instead of merely writing normal text on top of it), xhp

should be given.
Teleray terminals, where tabs turn all characters moved over to blanks, should indicate xt (destructive tabs). This glitch is also taken to mean that it is not possible to position the cursor on
top of a "magic cookie", that to erase standout mode it is instead necessary to use delete and
insert line.
The Beehive Superbee, which is unable to correctly transmit the escape or control C characters,
has xsb, indicating that the fl key is used for escape and f2 for control C. (Only certain Superbees have this problem, depending on the ROM.)
Other specific terminal problems may be corrected by adding more capabilities of the form xx.
Similar Terminals
If there are two very similar terminals, one can be defined as being just like the other with certain

exceptions. The string capability use can be given with the name of the similar terminal. The
capabilities given before use override those in the terminal type invoked by use. A capability can
be cancelled by placing xx@ to the left of the capability definition, where xx is the capability.

Hewlett-Packard

-13 -

July 9, 1985

TERMINFO ( 5 )

For example, the entry
2621-nl, smkx@, nnkx@, use=2621,
defines a 2621-nl that does not have the smkx or rmkx capabilities, and hence does not turn on
the function key labels when in visual mode. This is useful for different modes for a terminal, or
for different user preferences.
FILES

/usr/lib/terminfo/?1*

files containing terminal descriptions

SEE ALSO
tic(1M), curses(3X), printf(3S), term(5).

Hewlett-Packard

-14 -

July 9,1985

TTYTYPE(5)

NAME

tty type - data base of terminal types by port
SYNOPSIS

/ etc / tty type
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

UCB

Remarks: Not supported on the Integral Personal Computer.
DESCRIPTION

Ttytype is a database containing, for each tty port on the system, the kind of terminal that is
attached to that port. There is one line per port, containing the terminal kind (as a name listed
in termin/o(5)}, a space, and the name of the tty, less the initial" /dev/". For example, for an HP
2622 terminal on tty02:
2622 tty02
This information is read by tset(1} and by /ogin(1} to initialize the TERM variable at login time.
SEE ALSO

Some lines are only known as "dialup" or "plugboard".

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 9, 1985

UTMP(5)

NAME
utmp, wtmp, btmp - utmp, wtmp, btmp entry format
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD
Origin:

System V and UCB

SYNOPSIS
#inciude
#inciude
DESCRIPTION
These files, which hold user and accounting information for such commands as last(l), who(1),
write(l), and login(l), have the following structure as defined by :
#define UTMP ---.FILE
#define WTMP---.FILE

"/etc/utmp"
"/etc/wtmp"

#define ut-Ilame ut_user
struct

utmp
char
uLuser[8];
/ * User login name */
uLid[4];
char
/* /etc/inittab id (usually line #) */
uLJine[12];
char
/* device name (console, lnxx) */
ut_pid;
short
/* process id */
ut_type;
short
/* type of entry */
struct
exit---'ltatus {
short
e_termination;
/* Process termination status */
short
e_exit;
/ * Process exit status */
} ut_exit;
/ * The exit status of a process
* marked as DEADJROCESS. */
/* time entry was made */

};

/* Definitions for ut_type */
#define EMPTY
0
#define RUN--.LVL
1
2
#define BOOT_TIME
3
#define OLD_TIME
#defineNEW_TIME
4
5
#define INITJROCESS
#define LOGINJROCESS
6
#define USERJROCESS
7
#define DEADJROCESS
8
9
#define ACCOUNTING
#define UTMAXTYPE ACCOUNTING

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

/* Process spawned by "init" */
/* A "getty" process waiting for login */
/* A user process */

Largest legal value of ut_type

July 9, 1985

UTMP(5)

/* Special strings or formats used in the "uLJine" field when */

accounting for something other than a process */
No string for the ut.-line field can be more than 11 chars
a NULL in length */

#define RUNL VL~SG
#define BOOT ~SG
#define OTIME~SG
#define NTIME~SG

+ */

"run-level %c"
"system boot"
"old time"
"new time"

Ut-Dame is valid for login entries only; otherwise the first character is null. There are logout
entries in both utmp and wtmp. In utmp, these entries refer to terminals that are not
currently logged in; in wtmp, they record history. File btmp contains bad login entries for each
invalid logon attempt.
Note that wtmp and btmp tend to grow without bound, and should be checked regularly.
Information that is no longer useful should be removed periodically to prevent it from becoming
too large.
FILES

/etc/utmp
/etc/wtmp
/etc/btmp
SEE ALSO

acctcon(lM), fwtmp(1m), last(l), lastb(l), 10gin(1), who(l), write(1), getut(3C).

Hew lett-Packard

-2-

July 9, 1985

INTRO(7)

NAME

intro - introduction to miscellany
DESCRIPTION

This section describes miscellaneous facilities such as macro packages, character set tables, etc.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

ASCII (7)

NAME
ascii - map of ASCII character set
SYNOPSIS
cat /usr/pub/ascii
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD
Origin:

System III

DESCRIPTION
Ascii is a map of the ASCII character set, giving both octal and hexadecimal equivalents of each
character, to be printed as needed. It contains:
1000 nul
1010 bs
1020 dIe
1030 can
1040 sp
1050 (
1060 0
1070 8
1100@
1110 H
1120 P
1130 X
1140 '
1150 h
1160 p
1170 x
00
08
10
18
20
28
30
38
40
48
50
58
60
68
70
78

nul
bs
dIe
can
sp
(

0
8
@

P
X
'
h
p
x

1001
1011
1021
1031
1041
1051
1061
1071
1101
1111
1121
1131
1141
1151
1161
1171
01
09
11
19
21
29
31
39
41
49
51
59
61
69
71
79

soh
ht
del
em
!

9
A
I
Q

Y
a

q
y

1002
1012
1022
1032
1042
1052
1062
1072
1102
1112
1122
1132
1142
1152
1162
1172

stx
nl
dc2
sub

*
2
B
IT

R
Z
b
r

soh I 02 stx
ht I Oa nl
del
12 dc2
em
1a sub
22 ..
!
1
9
A
I
Q

Y
a

q
y

2a
32
3a
42
4a
52
5a
62
6a
72
7a

*
2

B
J

R
Z
b
r

1003
1013
1023
1033
1043
1053
1063
1073
1103
1113
1123
1133
1143
1153
1163
1173
03
Ob
13
1b
23
2b
33
3b
43
4b
53
5b
63
6b
73
7b

etx
vt
dc3
esc

+
3
;
C
K

S
[
c
k
s

1004
1014
1024
1034
1044
1054
1064
1074
1104
1114
1124
1134
1144
1154
1164
1174

eot
np
dc4
fs
$

,
4

<
D
L

\
d
I

etx I 04 eot
vt I Oc np
dc3 I 14 dc4
esc
Ie fs
24 $
#
2c
+
3
34 4
;
3c <
C
44 D
K
4c L
S
54 T
5c \
[
c
64 d
k
6c
s
74
7c
{

1005 enq
1015 cr
1025 nak
1035 gs
1045 %
1055 1065 5
1075 =
1105 E
1115M
1125 U
1135 1
1145 e
1155 m
1165 u
1175
05
Od
15
1d
25
2d
35
3d
45
4d
55
5d
65
6d
75
7d

enq
cr
nak
gs
%
5
=

E
M
U

1
e
m
u
}

1006 ack
1016 so
1026 syn
1036 rs
1046 &
1056 .
1066 6
1076 >
1106 F
1116N
1126 V
1136 •
1146 f
1156 n
1166 v
1176 06
Oe
16
Ie
26
2e
36
3e
46
4e
56
5e
66
6e
76
7e

ack
so
syn
rs

&
.
6

>
F

N
V

n
v

1007 be I
1017 si
1027 etb
1037 us
1047
1057 /
1067 7
1077
1107 G
11170
1127 W
1137 _
1147 g
1157 0
1167 w
1177 del
07 bel
Of si
17 etb I
1f us I
27
2f /
37 7
3f ?
47 G
4£ 0
57 W
5f _
67 g
6f 0
77 w
7£ del

FILES
/usr/pub/ascii

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

ENVIRON (7)

NAME
environ - user environment
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/NUCLEUS
Origin:

System III

DESCRIPTION
An array of strings called the "environment" is made available by exec(2) when a process begins.
By convention, these strings have the form "name=value". The following names are used by
various commands:
PATH The sequence of directory prefixes that sh(l), time(I), nice(I), nohup(I), etc., apply in
searching for a file known by an incomplete path name. The prefixes are separated by
colons (:). Login(l) sets PATH=:/bin:/usr/bin.
HOME Name of the user's login directory, set by login(l) from the password file passwd(5).
TERM The kind of terminal for which output is to be prepared. This information is used by
commands (such as mm(l) or vi(l)) that are able to exploit special capabilities of that
terminal.
TZ
Time zone information. The minimum format is tznamediffwhere tzname is an "alphabetic" string giving the time zone name or abbreviation, and dzff is the (positive or negative, and possibly fractional) difference in hours from GMT. NOTE: west is positive, east
is negative. If a summer time zone adjustment (such as Daylight Savings in the US) is to
be applied the format is tznamediffdstzname where dstzname is the name of the
"Daylight Savings" time zone.
LANG Language selection. This is one of the names listed in langid(7). It is used to select the
character set, lexicai order, up and down shift tables, and other information which varies
from one area to another.
Further names may be placed in the environment by the export command and "name=value"
arguments in sh(l), by the setenv command in csh(l), by the env(l) command, or by exec(2). It
is unwise to conflict with certain shell variables that are frequently exported by .profile files:
MAIL, PS1, PS2, IFS.
SEE ALSO
env(l), login(l), sh(l), exec(2), ctime(3C), getenv(3C), profile(5), tztab(5), hpnls(7), term(7).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

FCNTL(7)

NAME
fcnt! - file control options
SYNOPSIS
#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
Basic calls: HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Real time extensions: HP-UX/STANDARD - Real Time
Origin:

System III, System V, UCB, and HP

DESCRIPTION
The Jentl(2) function provides for control over open files. This include file describes requests and
arguments to Jentl and open(2).
/* Flag values accessible to open(2) and fcnt!(2) */
/* (The first three can only be set by open) */
#define O-RDONL Y
#define 0_WRONL Y
#define O-RDWR
#define O~DELA Y
#define O-.APPEND
#define O_SYNCIO

0
1
2
04
010
0100000

/* Non-blocking I/O */
/* append (writes guaranteed at the end)
/* Do write through caching */

/* Flag values accessible only to open(2) */
#define O_CREAT
00400
/* Open with file create (uses third open arg)*/
#define O_TRUNC
01000
/* Open with truncation */
#define O--.EXCL
02000
/* Exclusive open */
/* fcntl(2) requests */
#define L..DUPFD
#define F_GETFD
#define F _SETFD
#define F _GETFL
#define F_SETFL

0
1
2
3
4

/ * Duplicate fildes */
/ * Get fildes flags */
/ * Set fildes flags */
/* Get file flags */
/* Set file flags */

SEE ALSO

langinfo(3C), environ(7), hier(7), hpnls(7).
BUGS

Currently only supported in 'sh'.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

MAN(7)

NAME
man - macros for formatting entries in this manual
SYNOPSIS
nroff -man files
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level: Text Processing - HP-UX/STANDARD
Origin: System V
DESCRIPTION
These nroff(l) macros are used to layout the format of the entries of this manual. These macros
are used by the man(1) command.
The default page size is 8.5"xll", with a 6.5"x10" text area. The -rV2 option may be used to
set certain parameters to values appropriate for certain Versatec printers: it sets the line length
to 82 characters, the page length to 84 lines, and it inhibits underlining.
Any text argument below may be one to six "words". Double quotes ("") may be used to include
blanks in a "word". If text is empty, the special treatment is applied to the next line that contains text to be printed. For example, .1 may be used to italicize a whole line, or .SM followed by
.B to make small bold text. By default, hyphenation is turned off.
Type font and size are reset to default values before each paragraph and after processing fontand size-setting macros, e.g., .1, .RB, .SM. Tab stops are neither used nor set by any macro
except .DT and .TH.
Default units for indents in are ens. When in is omitted, the previous indent is used. This
remembered indent is set to its default value (5 ens in nroff-this corresponds to 0.5" in the default
page size) by .TH, .P, and .RS, and restored by .RE.
n Set the title and entry heading; t is the title, s is the section number, c is extra commentary, e.g., "local", n is new manual name. Invokes .DT (see below).
Place subhead text, e.g., SYNOPSIS, here .
.SH text
Place sub-subhead text, e.g., Options, here .
.SS text
.B text
Make text bold .
.1 text
Make text italic .
.SM text
Make text 1 point smaller than default point size .
.RI a b
Concatenate roman a with italic b, and alternate these two fonts for up to six arguments. Similar macros alternate between any two of roman, italic, and bold:
.IR .RB .BR .IB .BI
.P
Begin a paragraph with normal font, point size, and indent .. PP is a synonym for .P .
Begin paragraph with hanging indent .
.HP in
Begin indented paragraph with hanging tag. The next line that contains text to be
.TP in
printed is taken as the tag. If the tag does not fit, it is printed on a separate line.
Same as . TP in with tag t; often used to get an indented paragraph without a tag .
.IP tin
.RS in
Increase relative indent (initially zero). Indent all output an extra in units from the
current left margin.
.RE k
Return to the kth relative indent level (initially, k=l; k=O is equivalent to k=l); if k
is omitted, return to the most recent lower indent level.
.PMm
Produces proprietary markings; where m may be P for PRIVATE, or N for
NOTICE.
.DT
Restore default tab settings (every 5 ens in nroff) .
.PD v
Set the interparagraph distance to v vertical spaces. If v is omitted, set the interparagraph distance to the default value (lv in nroff).

.TH t

8 C

The following strings are defined:

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

MAN(7)

"(Reg.)" in nroff.
Change to default type size.
Trademark indicator.
The following number registers are given default values by . TH:
IN
LL
PD

Left margin indent relative to subheads (default is 5 ens in nroff).
Line length including IN.
Current interparagraph distance.

CAVEATS
In addition to the macros, strings, and number registers mentioned above, there are defined a
number of internal macros, strings, and number registers. Except for names predefined by nroff
and number registers d, m, and y, all such internal names are of the form XA, where X is one of
), J, and }, and A stands for any alphanumeric character.
If a manual entry needs to be preprocessed by tbl(I), it must begin with a special line (described
in man (1»), causing the man command to invoke the appropriate preprocessor( s).

The programs that prepare the Table of Contents and the Permuted Index for this Manual
assume the NAME section of each entry consists of a single line of input that has the following
format:
name[, name, name ... J \- explanatory text
The macro package increases the inter-word spaces (to eliminate ambiguity) in the SYNOPSIS
section of each entry.
The macro package itself uses only the roman font (so that one can replace, for example, the bold
font with a different font). Of course, if the input text of an entry contains requests for other
fonts (e.g., .1, .RB, \il), the corresponding fonts must be mounted.
FILES
/usr /lib/tmac/tmac.an
/usr/lib/macros/cmp.n.[dtJ.an
/usr /lib /macros/ucmp.n.an
SEE ALSO
man(1), nroff(I).

BUGS
If the argument to .TH contains any blanks and is not enclosed by double quotes (""), the output

can be incorrectly formatted.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9,1985

MATH(7)

NAME

math - math functions and constants
SYNOPSIS

#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

This file contains declarations of all the functions in the Math Library (described in Section 3M),
as well as various functions in the C Library (Section 3C) that return floating-point values.
It defines the structure and constants used by the matherr(3M) error-handling mechanisms,

including the following constant used as an error-return value:
HUGE

The maximum value of a single-precision floating-point number.

MAXFLOAT

The maximum value of a single-precision floating-point number.

For the definitions of various machine-dependent "constants," see the description of the
header file.
FILES

/usr /include/math.h
SEE ALSO

intro(3), matherr(3M), values(7).

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 10, 1985

MM(7)

NAME

mm - the MM macro package for formatting documents
SYNOPSIS

mm [ options ] [ files ]

nroff -mm [ options ] [ files ]
nroff -cm [ options ] [ files ]
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

Text Processing - HP-UX/STANDARD

Origin:

System V

DESCRIPTION

This package provides a formatting capability for a very wide variety of documents. The manner
in which a document is typed in and edited is essentially independent of whether the document is
to be eventually formatted at a terminal or is to be phototypeset. See the references below for
further details.
The -mm option causes nroff and troff(1) to use the non-compacted version of the macro package, while the -cm option results in the use of the compacted version, thus speeding up the process of loading the macro package.
FILES

/usr/lib/tmac/tmac.m
/usr/lib/macros/mmn
/usr/lib/macros/cmp.n.[dt].m
/usr/lib/macros/ucmp.[nt].m

pointer to the non-compacted version of the package
non-compacted version of the package
compacted version of the package
initializers for the compacted version of the package

SEE ALSO

mm(1), nroff(1).
MM-Memorandum Macros in HP-UX Concepts and Tutorials.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Compacted macros are not suppoprted on Series 500 implementations.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

!July 9,1985

REGEXP(7)

NAME
INIT, GETC, PEEKC, UNGETC, RETURN, ERROR, compile, step, advance - regular expression compile and match routines
SYNOPSIS
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define

INIT
GETC()
PEEKCO
UNGETC(c)
RETURN(pointer)
ERROR(val)

#include
char *compile (instring, expbuf, endbuf, eof)
char *instring, *expbuf, *endbuf;
int eof;
int step (string, expbuf)
char *string, *expbuf;
int advance (string, expbuf)
char *string, *expbuf;
extern char *locl, *loc2, *locs;
extern int circf, sed, nbra;
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System III

DESCRIPTION
This page describes general-purpose regular expression matching routines in the form of ed(l),
defined in /usr/include/regexp.h. Programs such as ed(l), sed(l), grep(l), bs(l), expr(l), etc.,
which perform regular expression matching use this source file. In this way, only this file need be
changed to maintain regular expression compatibility.
The interface to this file is complex. Programs that include this file must have the following five
macros declared before the "#include " statement. These macros are used by the
compile routine.
GETC()

Return the value of the next character in the regular expression pattern.
Successive calls to GETC() should return successive characters of the regular expression.

PEEKC()

Return the next character in the regular expression. Successive calls to
PEEKC() should return the same character (which should also be the next
character returned by GETC( ».

UNGETC(c)

Cause the argument c to be returned by the next call to GETC() (and
PEEKC( »). No more than one character of pushback is ever needed and
this character is guaranteed to be the last character read by GETC(). The
value of the macro UNGETC( c) is always ignored.

RETURN(pointer)

This macro is used on normal exit of the compile routine. The value of the
argument pointer is a pointer to the character after the last character of
the compiled regular expression. This is useful to programs which have
memory allocation to manage.

ERROR(val)

This is the abnormal return from the compile routine. The argument val is
an error number (see table below for meanings). This call should never

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

REGEXP(7)

return.
ERROR
11
16
25
36
41
42
43
44
45
46
49
50

MEANING
Range endpoint too large.
Bad number.
"\digit" out of range.
Illegal or missing delimiter.
No remembered search string.
\ ( \) imbalance.
Too many \(.
More than 2 numbers given in \{ \}.
} expected after \.
First number exceeds second in \{ \}.
[ J imbalance.
Regular expression overflow.

The syntax of the compile routine is as follows:
compile(instring, expbuf, endbuf, eof)
The first parameter instring is never used explicitly by the compile routine but is useful for programs that pass down different pointers to input characters. It is sometimes used in the INIT
declaration (see below). Programs which call functions to input characters or have characters in
an external array can pass down a value of «char *) 0) for this parameter.
The next parameter expbuf is a character pointer. It points to the place where the compiled regular expression will be placed.
The parameter endbuf is one more than the highest address that the compiled regular expression
may occupy. If the compiled expression cannot fit in (endbuf-expbuf) bytes, a call to ERROR(50)
is made.
The parameter eof is the character which marks the end of the regular expression. For example,
in ed (1), this character is usually a j.
Each program that includes this file must have a #define statement for INIT. This definition will
be placed right after the declaration for the function compile and the opening curly brace ({). It
is used for dependent declarations and initializations. Most often it is used to set a register variable to point to the beginning of the regular expression so that this register variable can be used
in the declarations for GETC(), PEEKC() and UNGETC(). Otherwise it can be used to declare
external variables that might be used by GETC() , PEEKC() and UNGETC(). See the example
below of the declarations taken from grep (1).
There are other functions in this file which perform actual regular expression matching, one of
which is the function step. The call to step is as follows:
step( string, expbuf)
The first parameter to step is a pointer to a string of characters to be checked for a match. This
string should be null terminated.
The second parameter expbuf is the compiled regular expression which was obtained by a call of
the function compile.
The function step returns non-zero if the given string matches the regular expression, and zero if
the expressions do not match. If there is a match, two external character pointers are set as a
side effect to the call to step. The variable set in step is loc1. This is a pointer to the first character that matched the regular expression. The variable loc2, which is set by the function
advance, points to the character after the last character that matches the regular expression.
Thus if the regular expression matches the entire line, loc1 will point to the first character of
string and loc2 will point to the null at the end of string.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9, 1985

REGEXP(7)

Step uses the external variable eire! which is set by compile if the regular expression begins with
'. If this is set then step will try to match the regular expression to the beginning of the string
only. If more than one regular expression is to be compiled before the first is executed the value
of cire! should be saved for each compiled expression and circ! should be set to that saved value
before each call to step.

The function advance is called from step with the same arguments as step. The purpose of step is
to step through the string argument and call advance until advance returns non-zero indicating a
match or until the end of string is reached. If one wants to constrain string to the beginning of
the line in all cases, step need not be called; simply call advance.
When advance encounters a * or \ { \} sequence in the regular expression, it will advance its
pointer to the string to be matched as far as possible and will recursively call itself trying to
match the rest of the string to the rest of the regular expression. As long as there is no match,
advance will back up along the string until it finds a match or reaches the point in the string that
initially matched the * or \ { \}. It is sometimes desirable to stop this backing up before the initial point in the string is reached. If the external character pointer locs is equal to the point in
the string where the match first occurred at sometime during the backing up process, advance will
break out of the loop that backs up and will return zero. This is used by ed(l) and sed(l) for
substitutions done globally (not just the first occurrence, but the whole line) so, for example,
expressions like s/y*/ /g do not loop forever.
The additional external variables sed and nbra are used for special purposes.
EXAMPLES
The following is an example of how the regular expression macros and calls look from an old version of grep (1):
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define
#define

INIT
GETC( )
PEEKC( )
UNGETC(c)
RETURN(c)
ERROR(c)

#inciude
(void) compile( *argv, expbuf, &expbuf[ESIZE], 1\0/);
if (step(linebuf, expbuf))
succeed( );
FILES
/usr /include/regexp.h
SEE ALSO
bs(l), ed(1), expr(l), grep(l), sed(l).
BUGS
The handling of cire! is poor.
The actual code is probably easier to understand than this manual page.

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

July 9,1985

ROMAN8(7)

NAME
roman8 - map of ROMAN8 character set used by NLS
SYNOPSIS

Is /usr/lib/nls/*
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD
Origin:

DESCRIPTION
Roman8 is a map of the ROMAN8 character set, giving the octal, decimal, and hexadecimal
equivalents of each character, to be printed as needed. It contains:

000
002
004
006
010
012
014
016
020
022
024
026
030
032
034
036
040
042
044
046
050
052
054
056
060
062
064
066
070
072
074
076
100
102
104
106

0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70

Hewlett-Packard

00
02
04
06
08
Oa
Oc
Oe
10
12
14

16
18
la
lc
le
20
22
24
26
28
2a
2c
2e
30
32
34
36
38
3a
3c
3e
40
42
44
46

001
003
005
007
011
013
015
017
021
023
025
027
031
033
035
037
041
043
045
047
051
053
055
057
061
063
065
067
071
073
075
077
101
103
105
107

nul
stx
eot
ack
bs
nl
np
so
dIe
dc2
dc4
syn
can
sub
fs
rs
sp

"
$
&
(
1<

0
2
4
6
8
:

>
@

B
D
F

-1-

1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71

01
03
05
07
09
Ob
Od
Of
11
13
15
17
19
lb
ld

soh
etx
eng
bel
ht
vt
cr
si
del
dc3
nak
etb
em
esc
gs
1f us
21 !
23 #
25 %
27
29 )
2b +
2d 2f /
31 1
33 3
35 5
37 7
39 9
3b ;
3d =
3f ?
41 A
43 C
45 E
47 G

July 11, 1985

ROMAN8(7)

72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
124
126
128
130
132
134
136
138
140
142
144
146
148
150
152
154
156
158
160
162
164
166
168
170
172
174

Hewlett-Packard

ROMAN8(7)

48
4a
4c
4e
50
52
54
56
58
5a
5c
5e
60
62
64
66
68
6a
6c
6e
70
72
74
76
78
7a
7c
7e
80
82
84
86
88
8a
8c
8e
90
92
94
96
98
9a
9c
ge
aO
a2
a4
a6
a8
aa
ac
ae

H
J
L
N
P
R

T
V
X
Z
\
A

,
b

d
f
h
j
1
n

r
t
v
x

z
I
-

ss2

A circumflex
ll: E circumflex
~

I circumflex
accent acute
circumflex
tilde accent
0 U circumflex
A

-2-

73
75
77
79
81
83
85
87
89
91
93
95
97
99
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
135
137
139
141
143
145
147
149
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
167
169
171
173
175

49
4b
4d
4f
51
53
55
57
59
5b
5d
5f
61
63
65
67
69
6b
6d
6f
71
73
75
77
79
7b
7d
7f
81
83
85
87
89
8b
8d
8f
91
93
95
97
99
9b
9d
9f
a1
a3
a5
a7
a9
ab
ad
af

I
K
M

0
Q

U
W
Y
[

-a
c
e
g
i
k
m
0

s
u
w
Y
{
}

del

ss3

accent grave
accent grave
umlaut
umlaut
accent grave
.. umlaut accent
U U accent grave
(: Italian lira
A A
E E
E E
:t I

July 11, 1985

ROMAN8(7)

260
262
264
266
270
272
274
276
300
302
304
306
310
312
314
316
320
322
324
326
330
332
334
336
340
342
344
346
350
352
354
356
360
362
364
366
370
372
374
376

176
178
180
182
184
186
188
190
192
194
196
198
200
202
204
206
208
210
212
214
216
218
220
222
224
226
228
230
232
234
236
238
240
242
244
246
248
250
252
254

ROMAN8(7)

bO
b2
b4
b6
b8
ba
bc
be
cO
c2
c4
c6
c8
ca
cc
ce
dO
d2
d4
d6
d8
da
dc
de
eO
e2
e4
e6
e8
ea
ec
ee
fO
f2
f4
f6
f8
fa
fc
fe

over line

C; C cedilla
t:t N tilde

I inv. exclamation

general currency

¥ Japanese yen

f Dutch guilder
a. a circumflex
I)

a
6

o
a
0
"A

a
fII

1>..

E
/3

I..
~

:t
0
C5
S
Y

0 circumflex
a accent acute
0 accent acute
a accent grave
0 accent grave
a umlaut
0 umlaut
A degree
0 crossbar
a degree
0 crossbar
A umlaut
0 umlaut
E accent acute
sharp s
A accent acute
a tilde
d stroke
I accent grave
0 accent grave
0 tilde
s caron
Y umlaut

THORN

- long dash

l- one half
2

•
±

masc. ordinal
solid
plus/minus

261
263
265
267
271
273
275
277
301
303
305
307
311
313
315
317
321
323
325
327
331
333
335
337
341
343
345
347
351
353
355
357
361
363
365
367
371
373
375
377

177
179
181
183
185
187
189
191
193
195
197
199
201
203
205
207
209
211
213
215
217
219
221
223
225
227
229
231
233
235
237
239
241
243
245
247
249
251
253
255

bl
b3
b5
b7
b9
bb
bd
bf
cl
c3
c5
c7
c9
cb
cd
cf
dl
d3
d5
d7
d9
db
dd
df
el
e3
e5
e7
e9
eb
ed
ef

degree
c;: c cedilla
i'I n tilde
(, inv. question
£ British pound
13 section
¢ U.S. cent
~ e circumflex
0. u circumflex
e e accent acute
11 u accent acute
~ e accent grave
U u accent grave
e e umlaut
(i u umlaut
1 i circumflex
IE AE ligature
f i accent acute
III ae ligature
1 i accent grave
0 U umlaut
i i umlaut
0 0 circumflex
~ A tilde
D D stroke
r. I accent acute
a 0 accent acute
fj 0 tilde
S S caron
U U accent acute
y y umlaut
f1 P thorn
f3
f5
f7 t one fourth
f9 JI. femin. ordinal
fb « open gUillemets
fd » close gUillemets
ff

FILES

/usr/lib/nls/*
SEE ALSO

ascii(7), hpnls(7), kana8(7).
WARNINGS

Peripheral or software limitations may garble this manual page. Some printers and terminals do
not support the ROMAN8 character set.

Hewlett-Packard

-3-

July 11, 1985

STAT(7)

NAME

stat - data returned by stat/fstat system call
SYNOPSIS

#include
#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System III

DESCRIPTION

The system calls stat and /stat(2) return data whose structure is defined by this include file. The
encoding of the field sLmode is defined in this file also.

1*
* Structure of the

result of stat

*/
struct

stat
dev_t
ino_t
ushort
short
ushort
ushort
dev_t
off_t
time_t
time_t
time_t

st_dev;
st~no;

sL.lIlode;
st-Illink;
st_uid;
st_gid;
st-I'dev;
st-Bize;
st_atime;
sL.lIltime;
st_ctime;

};
#define S-.lFMT
#define S-.lFDIR
#define S-.lFCHR
#define S-.lFBLK
#define S-.lFREG
#define S-.lFIFO
#define S-.lFNWK
#define S-.lSUID
#define S-.lSGID
#define S-.lSVTx
#define S-.lREAD
#define S-.lWRITE
#define S-.lEXEC

0170000
0040000
0020000
0060000
0100000
0010000
0110000
04000
02000
01000
00400
00200
00100

type of file

/ * directory */
/ * character special */

/ * block special */

/* regular */
/* fifo */
/* network special */
/ /* set user id on execution */
/ /* set group id on execution */

/ / * save swapped text even after use */
/ / * read permission, owner */
/ write permission, owner */
/ / * execute/search permission, owner

FILES

/usr /include/ sys/types.h
/usr/include/sys/stat.h
SEE ALSO

stat(2), types(5).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

STAT(7)

HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES

Integral PC:
The S--.lFNWK i-node type is not supported.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9,1985

TERM(7)

TERM (7)

NAME

term - conventional names for terminals
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY

Level:

HP-UX/RUN ONLY

Origin:

System III and UCB

DESCRIPTION

The environment variable TERM is used by certain commands (e.g., tabs(I), and is maintained as
part of the shell environment (see profile(4), and environ(5)) The tset(l) command can be used to
set the TERM variable When tset is used, the name to which TERM is set must be listed in the
/terminjo data base (see terminjo(5)).
hpsub
hp

9836
9826
262x
2622
2623
2624

Minimal subset of the capabilities of all Hewlett-Packard terminals and terminal
emulators supported on both Series 500 and Series 200 HP-UX.
Minimal subset of the capabilities of Hewlett-Packard terminals supported on both
Series 200 and Series 500 HP-UX (does not include 98x6 Internal Terminal Emulator).
Internal Terminal Emulator (ITE) for the HP 9000 Models 236 and 220 computers.
Internal Terminal Emulator (ITE) for the HP 9000 Model 226 computer.
Hewlett-Packard 262x family. Includes the HP 2622, HP 2623, and HP 2624 terminals.
Hewlett-Packard HP 2622 terminal.
Hewlett-Packard HP 2623 graphics terminal.
Hewlett-Packard HP 2624 terminal.

Other terminal names included in the /terminjo data base do not imply support of those terminals.
The TERM variable is also used by certain commands (e.g. nrojJ(I), man(I), tabs(I)), some of
which use terminal and printer description files from the /usr/lib/terms directory. TERM names
which have files in this directory include the following (note that the publication of these names
and presence of these files does not imply support of these devices):
2631
2631-c
2631-e
300
300-12
3008
3008-12
382
37
4000A
450
450-12
lp
tn300

Hewlett-Packard 2631 line printer.
Hewlett-Packard 2631 line printer - compressed mode.
Hewlett-Packard 2631 line printer - expanded mode.
DAS]/DTC/GS] 300 and others using the Hy Type I printer.
Same as 300, in 12-pitch mode.
DAS]/DTC/GS] 300s
Same as 3008, in 12-pitch mode.
DTC 382.
TELETYPE Model 27 KSR.
Trendata 4000A.
DAS] 450 (same as Diablo 1620).
Same as 450, in 12-pitch mode.
Generic name for a line printer.
General Electric TermiNet 300.

A basic terminal name can be up to eight characters chosen from A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and -. Terminal
sub-models and operational modes are distinguished by suffixes beginning with a -. Names should
generally be based on original vendors, rather than local distributors. A terminal acquired from
one vendor should not have more than one distinct basic name.
Commands whose behavior depends on the type of terminal should accept arguments of the form
-Tterm where term is one of the names given above; if no such argument is present, such commands should obtain the terminal type from the environment variable $TERM, which, in turn,
should contain term.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

TERM(7)

TERM (7)

SEE ALSO

ex(I), man(I), mm(I), more(I), nroff(I), sh(I), stty(l), tabs(I), tset(I), ul(I), curses(3), terminfo(5), profile(5), ttytype(5), environ(7).

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9, 1985

TYPES(7)

TYPES (7)

NAME
types - primitive system data types
SYNOPSIS
#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/RUN ONLY
Origin:

System III

Remarks: The example given on this page is a typical version; the type names are in general
expected to be present, although exceptions can be described in HARDWARE
DEPENDENCIES. The fundamental type which implements each typedef is implemetation dependent, as long as source code which uses those typedefs need not be
changed.
DESCRIPTION
The data types defined in the include file are used in HP-UX system code; some data of these
types are accessible to user code:

no. of regs saved

typedef struct { int r[ll; } *
physadr;
daddr_t;
typedef long
typedef char *
caddr_t;
typedef unsigned int
uint;
typedef unsigned short ushort;
typedef ushort
ino_t;
typedef short
cnt_t;
typedcf long
time_t;
typedef int
labeLt[NREGS_SI;
typedef long
dev_t;
typedef long
off_t;
typedef long
paddr_t;
typedef long
key_t;
Note that the defined names above are standardized, but the actual type to which they are
defined may vary between HP-UX implementations.
The form daddr_t is used for disc addresses except in an i-node on disc, see 18(5). Times are
encoded in seconds since 00:00:00 GMT, January 1, 1970. The major and minor parts of a device
code specify kind and unit number of a device and are installation-dependent. Offsets are measured in bytes from the beginning of a file. The labeLt variables are used to save the processor
state while another process is running.
HARDWARE DEPENDENCIES
Series 500:
The types NREGS_S and labeLt are not implemented.
SEE ALSO
fs(5).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

VALUES (7)

NAME
values - machine-dependent values
SYNOPSIS

#include
HP-UX COMPATIBILITY
Level:
HP-UX/STANDARD
Origin:

System V Release 2

DESCRIPTION
This file contains a set of manifest constants, conditionally defined for particular processor architectures.
The model assumed for integers is binary representation (one's or two1s complement), where the
sign is represented by the value of the high-order bit.

BITS(type)

The number of bits in a specified type (e.g., int).

HIBITS

The value of a short integer with only the high-order bit set (in most
implementations, Ox8000).

HIBITL

The value of a long integer with only the high-{)rder bit set (in most
implementations,Ox80000000).

HIBITI

The value of a regular integer with only the high-order bit set (usually the
same as HIBITS or HIBITL).

MAXSHORT

The maximum value of a signed short integer (in most implementations,
Ox7FFF == 32767).

MAXLONG

The maximum value of a signed long integer (in most implementations,
Ox7FFFFFFF == 2147483647).

MAXINT

The maximum value of a signed regular integer (usually the same as MAXSHORT or MAXLONG).

MAXFLOAT,

LN~AXFLOAT

MAXDOUBLE,
MINFLOAT,

LN~AXDOUBLE

LN~INFLOAT

MINDOUBLE,

LN~INDOUBLE

The maximum value of a single-precision floating-point
number, and its natural logarithm.
The maximum value of a double-precision floating-point
number, and its natural logarithm.
The minimum positive value of a single-precision floating-point
number, and its natural logarithm.
The minimum positive value of a double-precision floatingpoint number, and its natural logarithm.

FSIGNIF

The number of significant bits in the mantissa of a single-precision
floating-point number.

DSIGNIF

The number of significant bits in the mantissa of a double-precision
floating-point number.

FILES
/usr/incIude/values.h
SEE ALSO
intro(3), math(7).

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9, 1985

VARARGS(7)

NAME

varargs - handle variable argument list
SYNOPSIS

#inelude
va-alist
va-del
void va.....start(pvar)
v1L.list pvarj

type va-arg(pvar, type)
v1L.list pvarj
void va-end(pvar)
v1L.list pvarj
DESCRIPTION

This set of macros allows portable procedures that accept variable argument lists to be written.
Routines that have variable argument lists (such as print/(3S)) but do not use varargs are
inherently nonportable, as different machines use different argument-passing conventions.
va-alist is used as the parameter list in a function header.
va_del is a declaration for
va~ist

v~alist.

No semicolon should follow

v~dcl.

is a type defined for the variable used to traverse the list.

va.....start is called to initialize pvar to the beginning of the list.
va_arg will return the next argument in the list pointed to by pvar. Type is the type the argument is expected to be. Different types can be mixed, but it is up to the routine to know what
type of argument is expected, as it cannot be determined at runtime.
va-end is used to clean up.
Multiple traversals, each bracketed by

v~start...

v~end,

are possible.

EXAMPLE

This example is a possible implementation of execl(2).
#include
#define MAXARGS
/*

100

execl is called by
execl(file, argl, arg2, ... , (char *)0);

*/
execl( v8-alist)
v8-dcl

{
v3-list ap;
char *file;
char *args[MAXARGS];
int argno = 0;
v8-Start(ap);
file = v8-arg(ap, char *);
while «args[argno++] = v8-arg(ap, char *» != (char *)0)

,
v8-end(ap);
return execv (file, args);

Hewlett-Packard

- 1-

July 9, 1985

VARARGS(7)

SEE ALSO

exec(2), printf(3S).
BUGS
It is up to the calling routine to specify how many arguments there are, since it is not always possible to determine this from the stack frame. For example, execl is passed a zero pointer to signal
the end of the list. Print! can tell how many arguments are there by the format.
It is non-portable to specify a second argument of char, short, or float to VlL-arg, since arguments seen by the called function are not char, short, or float. C converts char and short arguments to int and converts float arguments to double before passing them to a function.

Hewlett-Packard

-2-

July 9, 1985

INTRO(8)

NAME

intro - introduction to system maintenance procedures
DESCRIPTION

This section outlines certain procedures that will be of lIltere,L to those charged with the task of
system maintenance. Included are discussions on such topics as boot procedures, recovery from
crashes, file backups, etc.
SEE ALSO

Section 1M. No manual pages are included in Section 8 for this printing. Commands formerly in
this section have been moved to Section 1M.

Hewlett-Packard

-1-

July 9,1985

INTRO(9)

NAME

intro - introduction to glossary section
DESCRIPTION

This section contains a glossary of common HP-UX terms. References to other HP-UX documentation are included as appropriate. References to entities such as wait(2), shell, or Jopen(3S)
refer to entries in the HP-UX Reference manual. References to items in italics but having no
parenthetical suffixes refer to other entries in the glossary. Finally, any references to italicized
manuals refer to separate manuals that are included with your system.

Hewlett-Packard

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

. a (" dot-oh'')

A general name for an object file; also the format of an unlinked
object file. See a.out.

absolute path name

A path name beginning with a slash (f). It indicates that the
file's location is given relative to the root directory (f), and that
the search begins there.

access

Access to system resources is governed by three entities: the
effective user ID, the effective group ID, and the group access
list.

access groups

The group access list is an additional set of group ID's used only
in determining resource accessibility. Access checks are performed as described below in file access permissions.

address

In the context of peripheral devices, a set of values which specify
the location of an I/O device to the computer. The exact details
of the formation of an address differ between systems. On the
Series 200 and 500, the address is composed of up to four elements: the select code, bus address, unit number (id), and
volume number (id).

affiliation

See terminal affiliation.

a.out

a.out is the default output file name used by the linker, Id(I),
and the C compiler, cc(I). It is also the format of executable
object code files on HP-UX. The format is machine-dependent,
and is described in the a. out( 5) reference page for each implementation. Object code which is as yet unlinked is in the same
format, but is referred to as a .0 ("dot-oh") file.

directory

A file which provides the mapping between the names of files and
their contents. For every file name contained in a directory, that
directory contains a pointer to the file's i-node called a link. A
file may have several links appearing anywhere on the same file
system. Each user is free to create (using mkdir( 1)) as many
directories as he needs, providing that the parent directory of the
new directory gives him permission to do so. Once a directory
has been created, it is ready to contain ordinary files and other
directories. An HP-UX directory is named and behaves exactly
like an ordinary file, with one exception: no user (including the
super-user) is allowed to write data on the directory itself; this
privilege is reserved for the HP-UX operating system.
By convention, a directory contains at least two links, " and ""'
referred to as dot and dot-dot respectively. Dot refers to the
directory itself and dot-dot refers to its parent directory. For
purposes of deletion, a directory containing only " and.. is considered empty. (In the root directory, "I", ".", and ",," are
identical.)

effective group ID

Every process has an effective group ID that is used to determine
file access permissions. A process's effective group ID is determined by the file (command) that process is executing. If that
file's set-group-ID bit is set (located in the mode of the file - see
mode), then the process's effective group ID is set equal to the
file's group ID. This makes the process appear to belong to the
file's group, perhaps enabling the process to access files which
must be accessed in order for the program to execute successfully.
If the file's set-group-ID bit is not set, then the process's
effective group lD can only be set by an explicit call to getuid(2)
or setuid(2). The id is always inherited from parent across a
fork(2). The setuid/getuid bit determines whether it is inhereted
across exec(2). See group, real group ID, and set-group-ID bit.

effective user ID

A process has an effective user ID that is used to determine file
access permissions (and other permissions with respect to system
calls, iF the effective user ID is 0 - that of the super-user). A
process's effective user ID is determined by the file (command)
that process is executing. If that file's set-user-ID bit is set
(located in the mode of the file - see mode), then the process's
effective user ID is set equal to the file's user ID. This makes the
process appear to be the file's owner, enabling the process to
access files which must be accessed in order for the program to
execute successfully. (Many HP-UX commands which are owned
by root, such as mail(1), have their set-user-ID bit set so other
users can execute these commands.) If the file's set-group-ID bit
is not set, then the process's effective group ID can only be set
by an explicit call to getuid(2) or setuid(2). The id is alwatys
inherited from parent across a fork(2). The setuid/getuid bit
determines whether it is inhereted across exec (2). See real user
ID and set-user-ID bit.

Hewlett-Packard

-4-

July 9,1985

GLOSSARY (9)

environment

The set of defined shell variables (some of which are PATH,
TERM, SHELL, EXINIT, HOME, etc.) which define the conditions under which your commands run. These conditions can
include your terminal characteristics, your home directory, and
your default search path. Each shell variable setting in the
current process is passed on to all child processes that are
created, provided that each shell variable setting has been
exported via the export command (see sh(1)) or setenv(l) with
esh(l). Unexported shell variable settings are meaningful only to
the current process, and any child processes created are given the
default settings given certain shell variables in jete/profile
and/or $HOME/profile (when using the Bourne shell) or
/ete/csh.login, .login, or eshrc (when using the C-shell).

end-of-file

(1) the data returned when attempting to read past the logical
end of a file via stdio(3S) routines. In this case end-of-file is not
properly a character. (2) The character [CTRL]-[D]. (3) A
character defined by stty(l) or ioctl(2) (see termio(4)). to act as
end-of-file on your terminal. Usually this is [CTRL]-[D]. (4)
The indication (as the function result) which indicates end of
data when using read(2).

file

An HP-UX file is simply a group of logically related bytes of
information. These bytes, for example, could be a bytes of executable code or bytes of data. Thus, directories, ordinary files,
special files, etc. can all be considered files. Every file must have
a file name (see file name) which enables the user (and many of
the HP-UX commands) to reference the contents of the file. The
size of a file is exactly the number of bytes the file contains - the
system imposes no particular structure on the contents of a file
(although some programs do). Files may be accessed serially or
randomly (indexed by byte offset). The interpretation of file
contents and structure is up to the programs that access the file.

file access permissions

Every file in the file system has a set of access per- missions.
These permissions are used in determining whether a process may
perform a requested operation on the file (such as opening a file
for writing). Access permissions are established at the time a file
is created. They may be changed at some later time through the
chmod(2) call.
File access is broken down according to whether a file may be:
read, written, or executed. Directory files use the execute permission to control if the directory may be searched.
File access permissions are interpreted by the system as they
apply to three different classes of users: the owner of the file,
those users in the file's group, anyone else. Every file has an
independent set of access permissions for each of these classes.
When an access check is made, the system decides if permission
should be granted by checking the access information applicable
to the caller.
Read, write, and execute/search permissions on a file are granted
to a process if:
The process's effective user ID is super-user.

Hewlett-Packard

-5-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

The process's effective user ID matches the user ID of the
owner of the file and the appropriate access bit of the
"owner" portion (0700) of the file mode is set.
The process's effective user ID does not match the user
ID of the owner of the file, and either the process's
effective group ID matches the group ID of the file, or the
group ID of the file is in the process's group access list,
and the appropriate access bit of the "group" portion
(070) of the file mode is set.
The process's effective user ID does not match the user
ID of the owner of the file, and the process's effective
group ID docs not match the group ID of the file, and the
appropriate access bit of the "other" portion (07) of the
file mode is set.
Otherwise, the corresponding permissions are denied.

file descriptor

A small integer identifier, which is used to refer to a file that has
been opened for reading and/or writing, and is an index into the
user's table of open files. The opened file must be identified by
its file descriptor when using system calls to read or write the
file.
The value of a file descriptor has a range from 0 to a system
defined maximum. For systems at HP-UX STANDARD and
above, the minimum value for this number is 60. For systems
below HP-UX STANDARD the minimum value is 20. No file
descriptor may have a value outside the range 0-59 or 0-19,
depending on the implementation.
A file descriptor is obtained through system calls such as
open(2), creat(2), dup(2), fcntl(2) or pipe(2). The file descriptor
is used as an argument by calls such as read(2), write(2), ioctl(2),
and close(2).

file name

A string of up to 14 characters which is used to refer to the contents of an ordinary file, special file, or directory. These characters may be any ASCII character except ASCII values 0 (null)
and 47 (slash - I). Note that it is generally unwise to use *, ?, [,
!, or 1 as part of file names because of the special meaning the
shell attaches to these characters (see sh(1)). It is also not wise
to begin a file name with -, +, or =, because some programs
assume that these characters indicate that a command argument
follows. Although permitted, it is advisable to avoid the use of
characters which do not have a printable graphic on the
hardware you commonly use, or which are likely to confuse the
hardware.

file pointer

A data element, obtained through any of the fopen(3S) standard
I/O library routines, which "points to" (refers to) a file opened
for reading and/or writing, and which keeps track of where the
next I/O operation will take place in the file (in the form of a
byte offset relative to the beginning of the file). After obtaining
the file pointer, it must thereafter be used to refer to the open file
when using any of the standard I/O library routines. (See
stdio(3S) for a list of these routines.)

Hewlett-Packard

-6-

July 9,1985

GLOSSARY (9)

file system

The supporting data structures, HP-UX directory structure, and
associated files that reside on one or more mass storage volumes.
Refer to the System Administrator Manual supplied with your
system for details concerning file system implementation and
maintenance.

filter

A command which reads data from the standard input, performs
a transformation on the data, and writes it to the standard output.

fork

An HP-UX system call (fork(2)) which, when invoked by an
existing process, causes a new process to be created. The new
process is called the child process; the existing process is called
the parent process. The child process is created by making an
exact copy of the parent process. The parent and child processes
are able to identify themselves by the value returned by their
corresponding fork call (see fork(2) for details).

group

A group is a set of a or more users who are usually logically
related in some way (e.g., all users who are working on a particular project) and who generally require the sharing of data
between each other. The members of a group are defined in the
file /etc/passwd via a numerical group ID (users with identical
group IDs are members of the same group). An ASCII group
name is associated with each group ID in the file /etc/group (the
members of each group can be listed in /etc/group, also, but this
information is purely for user benefit, and is of little use to the
system). A group ID is associated with every file in the file system, and the mode of each file contains a set of permission bits
which apply only to groups of which the file owner is a member.
Thus, if you are a member of the group associated with. the file,
and if the appropriate permissions are given to your group in the
file's mode, you may access the file. See real group ID, effective
group ID, accessgroups, privilegedgroup, and set-group-ID bit.

group access list

The group access list is an additional set of group ID's used only
in determining resource accessibility. Access checks are performed as described in file access permissions.

hierarchical directory

A directory (or file system) structure in which each directory
may contain other directories as well as files.

home directory

The directory name given by the value of the shell variable
HOME. When you first log in, login(l) automatically sets
HOME equal to your login directory (see login directory). You
may change its value at any time, however. This is usually done
in the .profile file contained in your login directory. Setting
HOME in no way affects your login directory, but simply gives
you a convenient way of referring to what should be your most
commonly-used directory.

host name

An ASCII string of at most 8 characters (of which only 6 are
supported by all the various manufactuer's UNIX systems) which
uniquely identifies an HP-UX system on a uucp network. The
host name for your system may be viewed and/or set with the
hostname(1) command. Systems without a defined host name
are described as "unknown" on the uucp network. Do not confuse a host name with a node name, which is a string that

Hewlett-Packard!

-7-

JUly 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

uniquely identifies
(LAN). Although
(and this is often
different software.

an HP-UX siYstem on a Local Area Network
your host and node names m~ be identical
advisable), they are set and used by totally
See no de name.

i-node

Each ordinary or special file, or directory has associated with it
an i-node. The i-node contains, among other things, the file's
size, protection mask, the number of links, and pointers to the
disc blocks where the file's contents can be found. Each connection between an i-node and its entry in one or more directories is
called a link.

image

The current state of your computer (or your portion of the computer, on a multi-user system) during the execution of a command. Often thought of as a "snapshot" of the state of the
machine at any particular moment during execution.

init

A special process (the initialization process) usually with a process ID 01 1. It is the ancestor of every other process in the system and is used to start login processes.

interleave factor

A number which determines the order in which sectors on a mass
storage medium are accessed. It can be optimized to make data
acquisition more efficient.

Internal Terminal Emulator (ITE)
The "device driver" code contained in the HP-UX kernel and
associated with the computer's built-in keyboard and display or
a particular keyboard and display connected to the computer,
depending on the Series and Model of your HP-UX computer.
See system console and the System Adminstrator Manual supplied with your system for details.
interrupt signal

The signal sent by SIGINT (see signal(2)). This signal generally
terminates whatever program you are running. The key which
sends this signal can be redefined with ioctl(2) or stty(1) (see termio(4)). It defaults to the ASCII DEL (rubout) character (the
[DEL] key) or the [BREAK] key. [CONTROL]-[C] is often used
instead.

intrinsic

See system call.

I/O redirection

A mechanism provided by the HP-UX shell for changing the
source of data for standard input and/or the destination of data
for standard output and standard error. See sh(1).

kernel

The HP-UX operating system. The kernel is the executable code
responsible for managing the computer's resources, such as allocating memory, creating processes, and scheduling programs for
execution.

library

An archive file containing a set of subroutines and variables
which may be accessed by user programs. For example,
/lib/libc.a is a library containing all functions of section 2, and all
functions of section 3 marked (3C) and (3S), in the HP-UX
Reference. Similarly, /lib/libm.a is a library containing all functions in section 3 marked (3M) in the HP-UX Reference. See
intro(3).

Hewlett-Packard

-8-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

£IF

An acronym for Logical Interchange Format. A standard format
for mass storage implemented on many Hewlett-Packard computers to aid in media transportability. The lif*(1) commands
are used to perform various functions using LIF.

link

A directory entry for any type of file. The information constituting a link includes the name of the file, and where the contents of
that file may be found on a mass storage medium. One physical
file may have several links to it. If the links appear in different
directories, the file mayor may not have the same name in each.
If the links appear in one directory, however, each link must have
a unique name in that directory. Multiple links to directories are
not allowed (except for the super-user). See cpr 1), link( 1),
link(2), and unlink(2). Also, to prepare a program for execution,
see linker.

linker

The linker combines one or more object programs into one program, searches libraries to resolve user program references, and
builds an executable file in a. out format. This executable file is
ready to be executed through the program loader, exec(2). The
linker is invoked with the ld(l) command. The linker is often
called a link editor.

logical block size

The smallest unit of memory which can be allocated on a Series
500 SDF volume; a multiple of the physical sector size. This
value is set at system initialization time; see sdfinit(lM).

The process of gaining access to HP-UX. This consists of successful execution of the login sequence defined by login(l) which
varies depending on the system configuration. It includes providing a login name and possibly one or more passwords.

The directory in which you are placed immediately after you log
in. This directory is defined for each user in the file /etc/passwd.
The shell variable HOME is set automatically to your login
directory by login(1) immediately after you log in. See home
directory.

magic number

The first word of an a.out(5) or archive file. This word contains
the system ID, which tells what machine (hardware) the file will
run on, and the file type (executable, shareable executable,
archive, etc.).

major number

A number used exclusively to create special files that enable I/O
to/from specific devices. This number indicates which device
driver to use for the device. Refer to mknod(1M) and the System
Administrator Manual supplied with your system for details.

message queue identifier

A message queue identifier (msqid) is a unique positive integer
created by a msgget(2) system call. Each msqid has a message
queue and a data structure associated with it. The data structure is referred to as msqiLds and contains the following
members:

struct
ushort
ushort
ushort
ushort

Hewlett-Packard

ipc_perm msg_perm; /* operation permission struct */
msg_qnum;
/* number of msgs on q */
msg_qbytes;
/* max number of bytes on q */
msg--.lspid;
/ * pid of last msgsnd operation */
msg--.lrpid;
/ * pid of last msgrcv operation */

-9-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY ( 9)

GLOSSARY (9)

time_t msg-Btime;
time_t msg-I'time;
time_t msg_ctime;

last msgsnd time

/ * last msgrcv time */

/ * last change time */
/ * Times measured in secs since */
/*

00:00:00 GMT, Jan. 1, 1970

Msg_perm is a ipc_perm structure that specifies the message
operation permission (see below). This structure includes the
following members:
ushort
ushort
ushort
ushort
ushort

cuid;
cgid;
uid;
gid;
mode;

/ * creator user id */

/ * creator group id */
/*
/*
/*

user id */
group id */
r/w permission

Msg_qnum is the number of messages currently on the queue.
Msg_qbytes is the maximum number of bytes allowed on the
queue. Msg~spid is the process id of the last process that performed a msgsnd operation. Msg~rpid is the process id of the
last process that performed a msgrcv operation. Msg-Btime is
the time of the last msgsnd operation, msg-I'time is the time of
the last msgrcv operation, and msg_ctime is the time of the
last msgctl(2) operation that changed a member of the above
structure.

message operation permissions In the msgop(2) and msgctl(2) system call descriptions, the permission required for an operation is given as "{token}", where
"token" is the type of permission needed interpreted as follows:
00400

Read by user

00200

Write by user

00060

Read, Write by group

00006

Read, Write by others

Read and Write permissions on a msqid are granted to a process
if one or more of the following are true:
The process's effective user ID is super-user.
The process's effective user ID matches msg_perm.[c]uid
in the data structure associated with msqid and the
appropriate bit of the "user" portion (0600) of
msg_perm.mode is set.
The process's effective user ID does not match
msg_perm.[c]uid and the process's effective group ID
matches msg_perm.[c]gid and the appropriate bit of the
"group" portion (060) of msg_perm.mode is set.
The process's effective user ID does not match
msg_perm.[c]uid and the process's effective group ID
does not match msg_perm.[c]gid and the appropriate bit
of the "other" portion (06) of msg_perm.mode is set.
Otherwise, the corresponding permissions are denied.

metacharacter

Hewlett-Packard

A character which has special meaning to the HP-UX shell. The
set of metacharacters includes: *,?,!, [, ], <, >, ;, I, ., " ", and
&. Refer to sh(l) for the meaning associated with each.

-10 -

July 9,1985

GLOSSARY (9)

minor number

GLOSSARY (9)

A number used exclusively to create special files that enable I/O
to/from specific devices. This number is passed to the device
driver and is used to select which device in a family of devices is
to be used, and possibly some operational modes. The exact format and meaning of the minor number is both system and driver
dependent. Refer to the System Administrator Manual supplied
with your system for details. See address.
On the Series 200 and 500, for HP-IB devices, this number indicates the HP-IB address, select code, and the unit and/or volume
numbers.

mode

A 16-bit word associated with every file in the file system, stored
in the i-node. The least-significant 12 bits of this word determine the read, write, and execute permissions for the file owner,
file group, and all others, and contain the set-user-ID, setgroup-ID, and "sticky" (save text image after execution) bits.
The least-significant 12 bits are settable by the chmod(1) command if you are the file's owner or the super-user. The sticky bit
can only be set by the super-user. These 12 bits are sometimes
referred to as permission bits. The most-significant 4 bits specify
the file type for the associated file and are set as the result of
creat(2), open(2), or mknod(2) system calls.

mountable file system

A (blocked special) file system contained on some mass storage
medium with its own root directory and an independent hierarchy of directories and files. See block special file and mount(1).

multi-user state

The condition of the HP-UX operating system in which terminals in addition to the system console are allowing communication between the system and its users. By default, the Series 200
multi-user state is state 2, and the Series 500 multi-user state is
state 1. Do not confuse the multi-user system with the multiuser state. A multi-user system is a system which may have
more than one user actively communicating with the system
when it is in the multi-user state. Multi-user states-there can
be more than one multi-user state in inittab- remove the
single-user restriction imposed by the single-user state. See
single-user state. See inittab(5).

new-line

The character with an ASCII value of 10 (line-feed) used to
separate lines of characters. It is represented by \n in the C
language and in various utilities. The terminal driver (see tty( 4))
normally interprets the carriage-return/line-feed sequence sent
by a terminal as a single new-line character.

node name

A string of up to 31 characters, not including control characters
or spaces, that uniquely identifies a node on a Local Area Network (LAN). The node name for each system is set by the
npowerup command, which is one of the commands supplied with
the optional LAN/9000 product. Do not confuse a node name
with a host name, which is a string that uniquely identifies an
HP-UX system on a uucp network. Your node and host names
can be identical, but they are used and set by totally different
software. See host name, LAN/9000 User's Guide, and
LAN/9000 Node Manager's Guide.

Hewlett-Packard

-11-

July 9,1985

GLOSSARY (9)

ordinary file

A type of HP-UX file containing ASCII text (e.g. program
source), binary data (e.g. executable code), etc. Ordinary files
can be created by the user through I/O redirection, editors, or
HP-UX commands.

orphan process

Whenever a parent process terminates for any reason and leaves
behind one or more child processes that are still active, those
child processes are called orphan processes. Init( 1M) inherits
(becomes the effective parent of) all orphan processes.

OSF

An acronym for Operating System File. An OSF resides in the
SDF boot area on a Series 500 system, and contains all or part of
an operating system. See osmgr(1M), oscp(1M), osck(1M), and
osmark(1M).

owner

The owner of a file is usually the creator of that file. However,
the ownership of a file can be changed by the super-user or the
current owner with the chownllj cUlllmand ur the chown(2) system call. The file owner is able to do whatever he wants with his
files, including remove them, copy them, move them, change
their contents, etc. He is also able to change the files' modes.

parent directory

A directory's parent directory is the directory one level above it
in the file hierarchy. All directories except the root directory U)
have one (and only one) parent directory. The parent directory
is sometimes referred to as the superior directory.

parent process

Whenever a new process is created by a currently-existing process (via fork(2) or vfork(2)) , the currently-existing process is
said to be the parent process of the newly-created process.
Every process has exactly one parent process (except the init
process - see init) , but each process can create several new
processes with the fork(2) system call. The parent process ID of
any process is the process ID of its creator.

password

A string of ASCII characters used to verify the identity of a user.
Passwords can be associated with users and groups. If a user has
a password, it is automatically encrypted and entered in the
second field of that user's line in the /etc/passwd file. A user
may create or change a password for himself with the passwd(1)
command.

path name

(sometimes written as one word, pathname). A sequence of
directory names separated by slashes, and ending with any file
name. All file names except the last in the sequence must be
directories. If a path name begins with a slash U), it is an absolute path name (see absolute path name); otherwise it is a relative
path name (see relative path name). A path name defines the
path to be followed through the hierarchical file system in order
to lind a particular file.
More precisely, a path name is a null-terminated character string
constructed as follows:
: := I I /
::= I/
::=/I/

Hewlett-Packard

- 12-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

where is a string of 1 to 14 characters other than
the ASCII slash and null, and is a string of 1 to 14
characters (other than the ASCII slash and nUll) that names a
directory or network special file with RFA (Remote File Access).
A slash by itself names the root directory.
Unless specifically stated otherwise, the null path name is treated
as if it named a non-existent file.
permission bits

The nine least-significant bits of a file's mode. These bits determine read, write, and execute permissions for the file's owner, the
file's group, and all others. See chmod(2) for further details.

pipe

An inter-process I/O channel used to pass data between two
processes. It is commonly used by the shell to transfer data from
the standard output of one process to the standard input of
another. On a command line, a pipe is signaled by a vertical bar
(I). The output from the command(s) on the left of the vertical
bar is channeled directly into the standard input of the
command(s) on the right. The pipe(2) intrinsic function allows
user programs to take advantage of this feature.

privileged groups

A privileged group is a group which has had a setprivgrp (see
getprivgrp(2)) operation performed on it giving it access to some
system calls otherwise reserved for the super-user.

proc1

See init.

process

An invocation of a program, or the execution of an image. No
command can be executed without a process in which it can execute. Alternately, a process cannot exist without a command or
image in some stage of execution. Several processes can all be
running the same program, but each may have different data and
be in different stages of execution.

process group

An association of one or more processes is called a process group.
A process's membership in a particular process group is established by a numerical process group ID. Each process can
belong to only one process group. Every process group has a
process group leader. See process group ID and process group
leader.

process group ID

A positive integer in the range 1 - 30 000 associated with every
active process, which establishes that process's membership with
a particular process group. All members of a process group have
the same process group ID. A process group ID is always the
process ID of the process group leader. This grouping permits
the signalling of related processes. See kill(2), process group, and
process group leader.

process group leader

A process group leader is a process whose process group ID and
process ID are equal. A process becomes a process group leader
through the setpgrp(2) system call. All processes created by the
process group leader become members of that process group. All
processes created by the init process (see in it) are process group
leaders. For example, when you log in on the system, the shell
you receive to interpret your commands is a process group leader,
and all subsequent process's created by your shell are members of

Hewlett-Packard

- 13-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

your shell's process group. See process group ID and process

group.
process ID

Each active process in the system is uniquely identified by a
positive integer called a process ID. The range of this ID is from
1 to 30000. This permits the selective sending of signals to
processes with kill(1), kill(2), or signal(2). The process ID of any
user process is available with the ps(1) command. If a background process is created, the shell reports its process ID to you
when execution has begnn.

program

A sequence of instructions, either binary (as machine object code)
or text (as source code or shell scripts), that define an algorithm
that can be carried out by a computer. C, FORTRAN, Pascal,
and BASIC source; awk source; shell scripts; and executable
object (a.out(5)) are all examples of programs.

prompt

The character(s) displayed by the shell on the display indicating
that the system is ready for a command. The prompt is usually
a dollar sign ($) for ordinary users and a pound sign (#) for the
super-user, but the user can re-define it to be any string by setting the shell variable PSl in his .profile file.

quit signal

The signal sent by SIGQUIT. See signal(2). The quit signal is
generated by typing the character defined by the teletype handler
as your quit signal. (See stty(1), ioctl(2), and termio(4).) The
default is the ASCII FS character (ASCII value 28, generated by
typing [CONTROL]-[\].) This signal usually causes a running
program to terminate and generates a file containing the "core
image" of the terminated process. The core image is useful for
debugging purposes. (Some systems do not support core images,
and on those systems no such file is generated.)

raw disc

The name given to a disc for which there exists a character special file which allows direct transmission between the disc and the
user's read or write buffer.

real group ID

A positive integer which is assigned to every user on the system.
The association of a user and his real group ID is done in the file
/etc/passwd. The modifier "real" is used because a user can also
have an effective group ID (see effective group ID). The real
group ID can then be mapped to a group name in the file
/etc/group, although it need not be. Thus, every user is a
member of some group (which may be nameless), even if that
group has only one member.
Every time a process creates a child process (via jork(2)), that
process has a real group ID equal to the parent process's real
group ID.

real user ID

A positive integer which is assigned to every user on the system.
A real user ID is assigned to every valid login name in the file
/etc/passwd. The modifier "real" is used because a user can also
have an effective user ID (see effective user ID).
Every time a process creates a child process (via jork(2)), that
process has a real user ID equal to the parent process's real user
ID.

Hewlett-Packard

- 14-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

GLOSBARY(9)

regular expression

A string of zero or more characters; the characters contained in
the string may all be literal, which means that the regular
expression matches itself only, or one or more of the characters
may be a metacharacter, which means that a single regular
expression could match several literal strings. Regular expressions are most often encountered in text editors (ed(1), ex(1),
vi(1)), where searches are performed for a specific piece of text,
or in commands that were created to search for a particular
string in a file (most notably grep(1)). Sh(1) and csh(1) also use
metacharacters to match one or more patterns; this is a different
mechanism that regular expressions. See ed(1).

relative path name

A path name that does not begin with a slash. It indicates that
a file's location is given relative to your current working directory, and that the search begins there (instead of at the root
directory). An example is dirl/fiIe2, which searches for the
directory dirl in your current working directory. Dirl is then
searched for the file file2.

root directory

1) The highest level directory of the hierarchical file system, from
which all other files branch. In HP-UX, the "/" character refers
to the root directory. The root directory is the only directory in
the file system which is its own parent directory.
2) Each process has associated with it a concept of a root directory for the purpose of resolving path name searches for those
paths beginning with" /". A process's root directory need not be
the root directory of the root file system, and can be changed by
the chroot(1) command or chroot(2) system call. Such a directory appears to the process involved to have ., pointing to itself.

root volume

The mass storage volume which contains the boot area (which
contains the HP-UX kernel) and the root directory of the HPUX file system.

saved user ID

Every process has a saved user ID which retains the process's
effective user ID from the last successful exec(2), or from the last
super-user call to setuid(2). Setuid(2) permits a process to set its
effective user ID to this remembered value. Consequently, a process which executes a program with the set-user-ID bit set and
with an owner ID of 5 (for example) can set its effective user ID
to 5, or to its real user ID, any time until the program terminates. See exec(2), setuid(2), saved group ID, effective user
ID, and set-user-ID bit.

saved group ID

Every process has a saved group ID which retains the process's
effective group ID from the last successful exec(2), or from the
last super-user call to setgid. Setgid permits a process to set its
effective group ID to this remembered value. Consequently, a
process which executes a program with the set-group-ID bit set
and with a group ID of 5 (for example) can set its effective group
ID to 5, or to its real group ID, any time until the program terminates. See exec(2), setuid(2), saved user ID, effective group
ID, and set-group-ID bit.

sees

An acronym for Source Code Control System. The Source Code
Control System is a set of HP-UX commands which enable you
to store changes to an SCCS file as separate "units" (called

Hewlett-Packard

-15 -

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

deltas). These units, each of which contains one or more textual
changes to the file, can then be applied to or excluded from the
SCCS file to obtain different versions of the file. The commands
that make up SCCS are admin(l), cdc(l), delta(l), get(l), prs(l),
rmdel(l), sact(l), sccsdiff(l), unget(1), val(l), and what(l). See
delta, sees file.

sees file

An ordinary text file which has been modified so that the Source
Code Control System (SCCS) may be used with it. This
modification is done automatically by the admin(l) command.
See sees, delta.

SDF

An acronym for Structured Directory Format. SDF is implemented on the Series 500 computers only, and provides treestructured access to files through the root directory of the
volume.

secondary prompt

One or more characters that the Bourne shell sh(l) prints on the
display, indicating that more input is needed. This prompt is
much less often encountered than the shell's primary prompt (see
prompt). When it occurs, it is usually caused by an omitted
right quote on a string (which confuses the shell), or when you
enter a shell programming language control-flow construct (such
as a for construct) from the command line. By default, the
shell's secondary prompt is the greater-than sign (», but you
can re-define it by setting the shell variable PS2 appropriately
in your .profile file.

select code

On the series 200 and 500 part of an address used for devices .. A
number determined by a setting on the interface card to which a
peripheral device is connected, or by the particular I/O slot the
I/O card resides in. Multiple peripherals connected to the same
interface card share the same select code.

semaphore identifier

A semaphore identifier (semid) is a unique positive integer
created by a semget(2) system call. Each semid has a set of
semaphores and a data structure associated with it. The data
structure is referred to as semiLds and contains the following
members:
struct
ushort
time_t
time_t

ipc_perm seIll-perm; / * operation permission struct */
sellLJJ.sems;
/* number of sems in set */
seIll-otime;
/* last operation time */
seIll-ctime;
/ * last change time */
/ * Times measured in secs since */
/* 00:00:00 GMT, Jan. 1, 1970 */
SeIIL-perm is a ipc_perm structure that specifies the semaphore operation permission (see below). This structure includes
the following members:
ushort
ushort
ushort
ushort
ushort

cuid;
cgid;
uid;
gid;
mode;

/ * creator user id */
/ * creator group id */
/* user id */
/* group id */
/* ria permission */

The value of sem---11sems is equal to the number of semaphores
in the set. Each semaphore in the set is referenced by a positive

Hewlett-Packard

- 16-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

integer referred to as a seffi-num. SeIlL..llum values run
sequentially from 0 to the value of seIlL..llsems minus 1.
SeIIL-otime is the time of the last semop(2) operation, and
seIIL-ctime is the time of the last semctl(2) operation that
changed a member of the above structure.
A semaphore is a data structure that contains the following
members:
ushort
short
ushort
ushort

semval;
sempid;
semncnt;
semzcnt;

semaphore value

/ * pid of last operation */

/* #
/* #

awaiting semval > cval
awaiting semval = 0 */

Semval is a non-negative integer. Sempid is equal to the process ID of the last process that performed a semaphore operation
on this semaphore. Semncnt is a count of the number of
processes that are currently suspended awaiting this semaphore's
semval to become greater than its current value. Semzcnt is a
count of the number of processes that are currently suspended
awaiting this semaphore's semval to become zero.

semaphore operation permissions
In the semop(2) and semctl(2) system call descriptions, the permission required for an operation is given as "{token}", where
"token" is the type of permission needed interpreted as follows:
00400

Read by user

00200

Alter by user

00060

Read, Alter by group

00006

Read, Alter by others

Read and Alter permissions on a semid are granted to a process
if one or more of the following are true:
The process's effective user ID is super-user.
The process's effective user ID matches sem_perm.[c]uid
in the data structure associated with semid and the
appropriate bit of the "user" portion (0600) of
sem_perm.mode is set.
The process's effective user ID does not match
sem_perm.[c]uid, and either the process's effective group
ID matches sem_perm.[c]gid or sem_perm.[c]gid is in
the process's group access list, and the appropriate bit of
the "group" portion (060) of sem_perm.mode is set.
The process's effective user ID does not match
sem_perm.[c]uid, and the process's effective group ID
does not match sem_perm.[c]gid and neither is
seIIL-perm.[c]gid in the process's group access list, and
the appropriate bit of the "other" portion (06) of
seIIL-perm.mode is set.
Otherwise, the corresponding permissions are denied.

set-group-ID bit

Hewlett-Packard

A single bit in the mode of every file in the file system. If a file is
executed whose set-group-ID bit is set, then the effective group
ID of the process which executed the file is set equal to the real

-17 -

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

GLOSSARY(9)

group ID of the owner of the file. See effective group ID, group,
and real group ID.
set-user-ID bit

A single bit in the mode of every file in the file system. If a file is
executed whose set-user-ID bit is set, then the effective user ID
of the process which executed the file is set equal to the real user
ID of the owner of the file. See effective user ID and real user
ID.

shared memory identifier

A shared memory identifier (shmid) is a unique positive integer
created by a shmget(2) system call. Each shmid has a segment
of memory (referred to as a shared memory segment) and a data
structure associated with it. The data structure is referred to as
shmiLds; some of its members are:

struct
int
ushort
ushort
short
time_t
time_t
time_t

ipc_perm slmL_perm; /* operation permission struct */
shII1-Segsz;
/ * size of segment */
shID-cpid;
/ * creator pid */
shnLlpid;
/* pid of last operation */
sh~attch;
/* number of current attaches */
shID-atime;
/ * last attach time */
shID-dtime;
/ * last detach time */
shID-ctime;
/ * last change time */
/ * Times measured in secs since */
/* 00:00:00 GMT, Jan. 1, 1970 */
8hm_perm is a ipc_perm structure that specifies the shared
memory operation permission (see below). This structure
includes the following members:
ushort
ushort
ushort
ushort
ushort

cuid;
cgid;
uid;
gid;
mode;

/ * creator user id */
/ * creator group id */
/* user id */
/* group id */
/* r/w permission */

ShID-segsz specifies the size (in bytes) of the shared memory
segment. Shm_cpid is the process id of the process that
created the shared memory identifier. 8hm---.lpid is the process
id of the last process that performed a shmop(2) operation.
Shm_nattch is the number of times the segments are currently
attaching to other processes. ShID-atime is the time of the last
shmat operation, shm_dtime is the time of the last shmdt
operation, and shID-ctime is the time of the last shmctl(2)
operation that changed one of the members of the above structure.
shared memory operation permissions

In the shmop(2) and shmctl(2) system call descriptions, the permission required for an operation is given as "{token}", where
"token" is the type of permission needed and is interpreted as
follows:
00400

Hewlett-Packard

Read by user

00200

Write by user

00060

Read, Write by group

00006

Read, Write by others

- 18-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

Read and Write permissions on a shmid are granted to a process
if one or more of the following are true:
The process's effective user ID is

super~user.

The process's effective user ID matches shID-perm.[cJuid
in the data structure associated with shmid and the
appropriate bit of the "user" portion (0600) of
shID-perm.mode is set.
The process's effective user ID does not match
sem_perm.[cJuid, and either the process's effective group
ID matches sem_perm.[cJgid or seID-perm.[cJgid is in
the process's group access list, and the appropriate bit of
the "group" portion (060) of seID-perm.mode is set.
The process's effective user ID does not match
seID-perm.[cJuid, and the process's effective group ID
does not match sem_perm.[cJgid and neither is
seID-perm.[cJgid in the process's group access list, and
the appropriate bit of the "other" portion (06) of
seID-perm.mode is set.
Otherwise, the corresponding permissions are denied.
A shell is a command which functions as both a command inter~
preter and an interpretive programming language. A shell is
usually automatically invoked (via /etc/passwd)foreveryuserwho
in order to provide a user~interface to the HP~UX operating sys~
tern. See sh(1), csh(1), or rsh(1), and the tutorials supplied with
your system for details.

shell

shell program

See shell script.

shell script

A sequence of shell commands and shell programming language
constructs stored in a file and invoked as a user command (pro~
gram). No compilation is needed prior to execution, because the
shell recognizes the commands and constructs that make up the
shell programming language. A shell script is often called a shell
program or a command file. See the shell programming article
included in HP~UX Concepts and Tutorials.

signal

Signals are software interrupts sent to processes, informing them
of special situations or events. They are frequently used to syn~
chronize the operation of two or more processes. See signal(2)
and kill(2).

single~user

special file

Hewlett~Packard

state

A condition of the HP~UX operating system in which the system
console provides the only communication mechanism between the
system and its user. By default, the Series 200 single~user state
is state 1, and the Series 500 multi~user state is state 2. Do not
confuse the single~user state, in which the software is limiting a
multi~user system to a single~user communication, with a
single~user system, which can never communicate with more
than one fixed terminal. See multi~user state.
Often called a device file, this is a file associated with an I/O
device. Special files are read and written just like ordinary files,
but requests to read or write result in activation of the associated
device. Most standard special files reside in /dev; however,

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

network special files reside in Inet, and fifo special files can exist
in any directory.

special processes

Processes with certain (small) process ID's are special. On a
typical system, the !D's of 0, 1, and 2 are assigned as follows:
Process 0 is the scheduler. Process 1 is the initialization process
init, and is the ancestor of every other process in the system. It
is used to control the process structure. On paging systems with
virtual memory process 2 is the paging daemon.
On the Series 500, there is no process 0 and the scheduler does
not exist as an identifiable entity. The paging demon also does
not exist as an identifiable entity.

standard error

The destination of error and special messages from a program.
The standard error file is often called stderr, and is automatically
opened for writing on file descriptor 2 for every command
invoked. By default, the user's terminal is the destination of all
data written to stderr, but it can be redirected elsewhere.

standard input

The source of input data for a program. The standard input file
is often called stdin, and is automatically opened for reading on
file descriptor 0 for every command invoked. By default, the
user's terminal is the source of all data read from stdin, but it
can be redirected from another source.

standard output

The destination of output data from a program. The standard
output file is often called stdout, and is automatically opened for
writing on file descriptor 1 for every command invoked. By
default, the user's terminal is the destination of all data written
to stdout, but it can be redirected elsewhere.

stream

A term most often used in conjunction with the standard I/O
library routines documented in section 3 of this manual. A
stream is simply a file pointer (declared as FILE *stream)
returned by the /open(3S) library routines. It mayor may not
have buffering associated with it (by default, buffering is
assigned, but this may be modified with sctbuJ(3S)).

sticky bit

A single bit in the mode of every file in the file system. If set,
then the data structure and heap storage for the text portion of
the file is retained even if no process is currently attaching
(using) to it. The objective is to reduce startup time of future
processes that may use the same text file. Only the super-user
can set the sticky bit. The sticky bit is read each time the file is
executed (via exec(2)).

sub-directory

A directory that is one (or perhaps more) levels lower in the file
system hierarchy than a given directory. Sometimes called a

subordinate directory

See sub-directory.

super block

A block on each file system's mass storage medium which
describes the file system. The contents of the super-block vary
between implementations. Refer to the System Administrator
Manual supplied with your system, and the appropriate /s(5)
entry for details.

subordinate directory.

Hewlett-Packard

- 20-

July 9, 1985

GLOSSARY (9)

super-user

The HP-UX system administrator. This user has access to all
files, and can perform privileged operations. He has a real and
effective user ID of 0, and, by convention, the user name of root.

superior directory

See parent directory.

system call

An HP-UX operating system kernel function available to the
user through a high-level language (such as FORTRAN, Pascal,
or C). Also called an "intrinsic" or a "system intrinsic". The
available system calls are documented in section 2 of the HP-UX
Reference manual.

system console

A keyboard and display (or terminal) given a unique status by
HP-UX and associated with the special file /dev/console. All
boot ROM or system loader error messages, HP-UX system error
messages, and certain system status messages are sent to the system console. Under certain conditions (such as the single-user
state), the system console provides the only mechanism for communicating with HP-UX. See HP-UX Concepts and Tutorzals
and the System Administrator Manual provided with your system
for details on configuration and use of the system console.

terminal affiliation

The means by which a process group leader establishes an association between itself and a particular terminal. A terminal
becomes affiliated with a process group leader (and subsequently
all processes created by the process group leader - see terminal
group) whenever the process group leader executes (either
directly or indirectly) an open(2) or creat(2) system call for that
a terminal. Then, if the process which is executing open(2) or
creat(2) is a process group leader, and if that process group
leader is not yet affiliated with a terminal, and if the terminal
being opened is not yet affiliated with a process group, the
affiliation is established.
An affiliated terminal keeps track of its process group affiliation
by storing the process group's process group ID in an internal
structure.
Two benefits are realized by terminal affiliation. First, all signals
sent from the terminal are sent to all processes in the terminal
group. Second, all processes in the terminal group can perform
I/O from/to the generic terminal driver /dev/tty, which
automatically selects the affiliated terminal.
Terminal affiliation is broken with a terminal group when the
process group leader terminates, after which the hangup signal is
sent to all processes remaining in the process group. Also, if a
process (which is not a process group leader) in the terminal
group becomes a process group leader via the setpgrp(2) system
call, its terminal affiliation is broken.
See process group, process group leader, terminal group, and
setpgrp(2).

terminal group

Hewlett-Packard

A terminal group is a process group whose process group leader
has established affiliation with a particular terminal. Once a
process group leader has established affiliation with a terminal,
all processes in that process group created after the affiliation

- 21 -

July 9,1985

GLOSSARY (9)

are members of that terminal group. Processes existing before
and during the time when affiliation is established do not inherit
the affiliation, and are thus not part of the terminal group. A
terminal group is sometimes called a tty group.
This grouping is used to terminate a group of related process
upon termination of one of the processes in the group; see exit (2)
and signal(2).
See process group, process group leader, terminal affiliation, and
setpgrp(2).
tty group ID

See terminal group.

unit number

Part of an address used for devices. A number whose meaning is
software- and device-dependent, but which is often used to
specify a particular disc drive in a device with a multi-drive controller. See the System Administrator Manual supplied with your
system for details.

volume number

Part of an address used for devices. A number whose meaning is
software- and device-dependent, but which is often used to
specify a particular volume on a multi-volume disc drive. See
the System Administrator Manual supplied with your system for
details.

working directory

Each process has associated with it the concept of a current
working directory. For a shell, this appears as the directory in
which you currently reside. This is the directory in which relative path name (Le. when a given path name does not begin with
"/") searches begin. It is sometimes referred to as the current
directory, or the current working directory.

zombie process

The state of a process where the only system resource allocated
to it is a slot in the process table data structure. This state is
arrived at when the process is being terminated. It is a harmless
occurrence which rectifies itself the next time that the parent
process waits. The ps(l) command lists zombie processes as
"".

Hewlett-Packard

- 22-

July 9, 1985

PERMUTED INDEX

[ ......................................................................................................................................................... test(1)
a64l ............... .............. ............................................... .............. ...... ............ ......... ................... ........ a641(3C)
abort ............ ............... ................... ... .......... ...... ........... ......... .......... ................... .......................... abort(3C)
abs .................................................................................................................................................. abs(3C)
absolute value, floating point ............... ............ .................................................. ........................... floor(3M)
absolute value, integer ..................................................................................................................... abs(3C)
access ............................................................................................................................................. access(2)
access long integer data in machine-independent manner ............................................................. sputl(3X)
access modes, change memory segment ................................................................................... memchmd(2)
access terminfo database .................................................................................................................. tput(1)
access utmp file entry ..... ................. .......................................... ......... ...... ......... .............. ............. getut(3C)
accessing discs, description of blocked/unblocked disc interface ........................................................ disc( 4)
accounting commands, miscellaneous ............................................................................................ acct(1M)
accounting commands, overview .................................................................................................... acct(1M)
accounting commands, process ................................................................................................... acctcom(1)
accounting: connect-time .......................................................................................................... acctcon(1M)
accounting, convert binary wtmp records to ASCII ................................................................... fwtmp(1M)
accounting, correct time/date stamps on wtmp records ............................................................. fwtmp(1M)
accounting: daily ...................................................................................................................... runacct(1M)
accounting file format ......................... ............................ .... ........................... ......... ................... ....... acct( 5)
accounting files: merge or add total............ ...... ........ ........................................ .................... acctmerg( 1M)
accounting: generate disc usage data by user ID ...................................................................... diskusg(1M)
accounting: process accounting ................................................................................................. acctprc(1M)
accounting, record login names and times ....................................................................................... utmp(5)
accounting records command summary ................................................................................... acctcms(1M)
accounting: shell procedures ........................................ .......... ............................ ......................... acctsh( 1M)
acctcms .................................................................................................................................... acctcms (1M)
acctcom ...................................................................................................................................... acctcom(1)
acctcon ..................................................................................................................................... acctcon(1M)
acctdisk ......................................................................................................................................... acct(1M)
acctdusg ........................................................................................................................................ acct (1M)
acctmerg ............................................................................................................................ ,... acctmerg(1M)
accton ............................................................................................................................................ acct(1M)
acctprc ...................................................................................................................................... acctprc(1M)
acctsh ......................................................................................................................................... acctsh(1M)
acctwtmp ....................................................................................................................................... acct(1M)
acos ................................................................................................................................................ trig(3M)
activity, terminate all current system activity ...................................................................... shutdown(1M)
adb .................................................................................................................................................... adb(1)
add a swap device for interleaved paging/signalling .................................................................... swapon(2)
add backing store devices ................................................................................................................. vson(2)
add or change environment value .............................................................................................. putenv(3C)
add or merge total accounting files ...................................... ................ .................................. acctmerg(1M)
address space, allocate and free .......... ........ ........ .......... .......................................... .............. ...... memallc(2)
address space, lock/unlock for process ........ ........ ...... ............................................................ ...... memlck(2)
addresses, get for program .............................................................................................................. end(3C)
adjust ............................................................................................................................................ adjust(1)
admin ............................................................................................................................................ admin(1)
advance ................ ...................................... .......... ........ ......... .......... ... ................ ... ...... .................. regexp(7)
advise OS about segment reference patterns .......................................................................... memadvise(2)
alarm .............................................................................................................................................. alarm(2)
alarm clock, set ..... ............. ......... ................. .......... ............................................... ......... ................ alarm(2)
allocate a block of memory................................ ................................................ .................... ..... malloc(3C)
allocate and free address space ........ .......... ...................................... .................. ......................... memallc(2)
allocate backing store space to backing store device ....................................................................... vsadv(2)
allocate data segment space for process ............................................................................................. brk(2)

- 1-

Permuted Index

a.out file format, description of ....................................................................................................... a.out(5)
append to an existing operating system ........................................................................................ oscp(lM)
appointments, reminder service for .............. ......... .......... ......... .......... ........ ................... ............. calendar( 1)
ar ......................................................................................................................................................... ar(l)
arc cosine function ... .......................... ............. ......... ................... .......... ................ ..................... .... trig( 3M)
arc sine function ............................................................................................................................. trig(3M)
arc tangent function ............................ ......... ....................................... .................................... ....... trig(3M)
archive, conversion to new format .......... ................................................ ................... ................... .... arcv(1)
archive file format, description of ......................................................................................................... ar(5)
archive file format, description of cpio archive file format ................................................................ cpio(5)
archive files on tape ........................................ ......... ............................. ................. ................... .......... tar( 1)
archive library, find ordering relation for ....................................................................................... lorder(l)
archive, table of contents format description ................................................................................. ranlib(5)
archives and libraries, create and maintain ........... .................................................. ...... ....................... ar(1)
archives, copy out to media .............................................................................................................. cpio(l)
archives, extract archive files from media ......................................................................................... cpio(l)
arcv .................................................................................................................................................. arcv(l)
argument list handling facility, variable ...................................................................................... varargs(7)
argv, get next option letter from ................................................................................................ getopt(3C)
array, allocate memory space for ................................................................................................ malloc(3C)
array, print formatted data into ................................................................................................... printf(3S)
array, read and format data from .................................................................................................. scanf(3S)
as ......................................................................................................................................................... as(l)
asa ..................................................................................................................................................... asa(l)
ASA carriage control characters, interpret ............ ............. ........ ............ ........ .................. .......... ........ asa(1)
ascii ...... .................... ..... ........... ....... ............ ........... ..................... ........ .................................... ......... ascii(7)
ASCII, convert base 64 ASCII to long integer ................................................................................ a641(3C)
ASCII, convert binary wtmp records to ..................................................................................... fwtmp(lM)
ASCII, convert floating point value to ........................................................................................... ecvt(3C)
ASCII, convert non-ASCII to ASCII ............................................................................................. conv(3C)
ASCII, convert to numbers ............................................................................................................ atof(3C)
asctime ......................................................................................................................................... ctime(3C)
asin ................................................................................................................................................ trig(3M)
assembler for MC68000 ........................................................................................................................ as(l)
assembler/linker executable output file, description of .................................................................... a.out(5)
assembly language, translate ......................................................................................................... atrans(l)
assert ..................................... .................. ....................................... ........ .................. ................... assert (3X)
assign buffering to an open file .................................................................................................... setbuf(3S)
assistance, get for SCCS ................................................................................................................... help(l)
assure sufficient signal stack space .............................................................................................. sigspace(2)
asynchronous terminal emulation ................................................................................................... aterm(l)
at ......................................................................................................................................................... at(l)
atan ................................. ............................................................................................................... trig( 3M)
atan2 ....... ........... ... ................ .......... ......... .......... ............................. ....... .................... ....... .......... ... trig(3M)
aterm ........................................... ............................ .................... .................................. ................ aterm (1)
atoa ......... .......... ......... .......... ................... .......................... .............. ...... ......... ................... ......... .... atof(3C)
atof ................................................................................................................................................. atof(3C)
atoi ................................................................................................................................................. atof(3C)
atol ................................................................................................................................................. atof(3C)
atrans ............................................................................................................................................ atrans(l)
attributes, change program's internal.... .......... ......... .......... ..... .... ................... ......................... ....... chatr(1)
automatically release blocked signals and wait for interrupt ...................................................... sigpause(2)
awk ................................................................................................................................................... awk(l)
backing store devices, add/remove device from those available ........................................................ vson(2)
backing store devices, allocate backing store space to .................................................................... vsadv(2)

- 2-

Permuted Index

backing store usage, advise system about ....................................................................................... vsadv(2)
backspaces and reverse line-feeds, interpret for nroff(l) ...................................................................... col(l)
backup ...................................................................................................................................... backup(lM)
backup Command Set 80 cartridge tape ............................................................................................ tcio(l)
backup or archive file system .................................................................................................... backup(lM)
banner .......................................................................................................................................... banner(l)
banners, make using large letters ................................................................................................. banner(l)
base-64 ASCII, convert to long integer ........................................................................................... a641(3C)
basename ................................................................................................................................. basename(l)
baud rate, settings for terminal .......................................................................................................... tty(4)
bcheckrc .......................................................................................................................................... brc(lM)
bdiff .......... ......... ......... ..... .............. ........ ........... .......... ........ ..... ..... ......... ..... .... .......... ........... ............ bdiff( 1)
Bell file system consistency check and interactive repair ....... .... ..... ... ....... .... ......... ...... ..... ... .......... biffsck( l)
Bell file system, construct ............................................................................................................ bifmkfs(l)
Bell file system debugger .............................................................................................................. biffsdb(l)
Bell Interchange Format file utilities ................................................................................................... bif(5)
Berkeley compatibility for magnetic tape, description of .................................................................... mt(4)
bessel functions ........................................................................................................................... bessel(3M)
bfs ...................................................................................................................................................... bfs(l)
BIF directory, list ........ ........ ..... ... .......... ....... .... ....... ........... ........ ........... ......... .......... .... ...... ....... ....... bifls( 1)
BIF directory, make ................................................................................................................... bifmkdir(l)
BIF file, change mode of ........................................................................................................... bifchmod(l)
BIF file copy .................................................................................................................................... bifcp(l)
BIF files or directories, remove .................. ..................................................................................... bifrm(l)
bifchmod ................................................................................................................................... bifchmod(l)
bifchown .................................................................................................................................... bifchown(l)
bifcp ................................................................................................................................................ bifcp(l)
bifdf ........ .... ...... ......... .......... ........... ........ ........ ............ ..... ... ......... ......... .......... ........... ... ...... ........ ..... bifdf( 1)
biffind .............................................................................................................................. .............. biffind (l)
biffis ................................................................................................................................................. biffis(l)
biffsck ..... .................. .......... ...... ... ......... ....... ........... ........... ... ... ............ .......... ........ ......... .... ....... .... biffsck( 1)
biffsdb ........................................................................................................................................... biffsdb(1)
bifmkdir ..................................................................................................................................... bifmkdir(l)
bifmkfs ......................................................................................................................................... bifmkfs(l)
bifrm ............................................................................................................................................... bifrm(l)
big file scanner .... .......... ........ ......... ............ ........ .......... ....... ... .......... ....... ........... ........ ........ ......... ........ bfs( 1)
binary search on a sorted table ................................................................................................. bsearch(3C)
bit bucket, special file equivalent to .................................................................................................. nUll(4)
block of memory, allocate ........................................................................................................... malloc(3C)
block of memory, change size of ................................................................................................. malloc(3C)
block of memory, deallocate ....................................................................................................... malloc(3C)
block signals ............................................................................................................................... sigblock(2)
block size, find for mounted file system ........................................................................................... ustat(2)
block special file, create ............................................................................................ mknod(2), mknod(lM)
blocked disc interface, description of ................................................................................................. disc( 4)
blocked signals, release and wait for interrupt ........................................................................... sigpause(2)
blocks, find number of free blocks for mounted file system ...................................... ....................... ustat(2)
blocks, report number of free disc blocks .......................................................................................... df(lM)
boot area, allocate bytes for ....................................................................................................... sdfinit(lM)
boot area, copy as from one or more SDF boot areas to another ................................................. oscp(lM)
boot area, set or get current settings for system parameters in ................................................ uconfig(lM)
brc .................................................................................................................................................. brc(lM)
break ................................................................................................................................................... sh(l)
break value, get maximum for process ........................................................................................... ulimit(2)
break value, set or get ....................................................................................................................... brk(2)

- 3-

Permuted Index

break-point debugging, enable for child process ............................................................................. ptrace(2)
brk ..................................................................................................................................................... brk(2)
bsearch .......................................... ........................................................................................... bsearch(3C)
buffered file I/O package, description of ........................................................................................ stdio(3S)
buffering, assign to open file ..................................................................................................... ... setbuf(3S)
buffers, flush those associated with an open file .. ............................................... ........................... fclose(3S)
byte offset of next I/O operation on file, set .................................................................................. fseek(3S)
byte swapping ............................................................................................................................... swab(3C)
C compiler ........................................................................................................................................... cc(l)
C compiler, preprocessor for .............................................................................................................. cpp(l)
C flow graph, generate .................................................................................................................... cflow(l)
C preprocessor ................................................................................................................................... cpp(l)
C program checker/verifier ................................................................................................................ lint(l)
C program, error message generator for ............................................................................ ;......... perror(3C)
C program formatter ........................................................................................................................... cb(l)
cache buffers, specify size and number of .................................................................................. uconfig(lM)
calendar ........ ......... .................. ........................... ............. ......... ....... ........ ........... ....... ................ calendar( 1)
call another UNIX/HP-UX system ...................................................................................................... curl)
calloc .......................................................................................................................................... malloc(3C)
captoinfo ................................................................................................................................ captoinfo(lM)
carriage control characters, interpret ASA ......................................................................................... asa(l)
cartridge tape, Command Set 80 utility ............................................................................................ tcio(l)
cartridge tape initialization ...................................................................................................... mediainit(l)
cartridge tape, perform input/output from/to ................................................................................... tcio(l)
cartridge tape, unpack/extract files from Command Set 80 ............................................................. upm(l)
cat ...................................................................................................................................................... cat(l)
cat, compress, uncompress files .................................................................................................. compact(l)
catman ..................................................................................................................................... catman(lM)
catread ........................................... ... ........................................ ..... .... ....................................... catread(3C)
cb ........................................................................................................................................................ cb(l)
cc .........................................................................................................................................................cc(l)
ccat ........ .................... .......................... ............................... ....... .................. ................... ........... compact (1)
cd .............................................................................................................................................. cd(l), sh(l)
cdc ..................................................................................................................................................... cdc(l)
ceil ............................. ..................................... .......... ......... .......... ............... ................... ............... floor(3M)
certify file system consistency ........................................................................................................ fsck(lM)
certify SDF volume .................................................................................................................... sdfinit(lM)
cflow ................................................................................................................................................ cflow(l)
change bars, create file containing. ......... ..................................... .................................................. diffmk( 1)
change data segment space allocation ................................................................................................ brk(2)
change delta commentary of SCCS delta ........................................................................................... cdc(l)
change file mode .......................................................................................................... chmod(l), chmod(2)
change file owner or group ........................................................................................................ bifchown(l)
change file owner or group ............................................................................................ chown(l), chown(2)
change group ID of user ..................................................................................................... newgrp(1), sh(l)
change login password ................................................................................................................. passwd(l)
change default login shell ....... ......... ................ ........... ............ ....... ...................................... ............. chsh( 1)
change memory segment access modes .................................................................................... memchmd(2)
change mode of a BIF file ..................... ......... .............................................. ............................. bifchmod( 1)
change or add value to environment .......................................................................................... putenv(3C)
change or read real-time priority .................................................................................................... rtprio(2)
change or set real-time priority ...................................................................................................... rtprio(l)
change program's internal attributes .............................................................................................. chatr(l)
change root directory for a command ...... .............................. ....... .......................... ....... ............ chroot(1M)
change root directory for duration of command ............................................................ chroot(l), chroot(2)

-4-

Permuted Index

change SCCS file parameters ......................................................................................................... admin(l)
change size of previously-allocated block of memory .................................................................. malloc(3C)
change system state ........................................................................................................................ init(lM)
change to another user . ............... ................... ............................. ............................ .................. .......... su( 1)
change to different operating system or version ...................... ...................................... .......... ..... chsys( 1M)
change working directory ............................................................................................ cd(l), sh(l), chdir(2)
character classification ................................................................................................................. ctype(3C)
character conversion, lower-case to upper-case .............................................................................. conv(3C)
character conversion, non-ASCII to ASCII .................................................................................... conv(3C)
character conversion, upper-case to lower-case .............................................................................. conv(3C)
character count ................................................................................................................................... wc(l)
character, description of special characters in terminal interface ........................................................ tty( 4)
character, push back into input stream ...................................................................................... ungetc(3S)
character, read from buffered open file ........................................................................................... getc(3S)
character, search for in string ...................... ........................................................ ........................ string( 3C)
character sets, NLS ........................................................................................ ascii(7), kana8(7), roman8(7)
character size, settings for terminal .................................................................................................... tty( 4)
character special file, create ..................................................................................... mknod(2), mknod(lM)
character, write on buffered open file or standard output .............................................................. putc(3S)
characters, count number contained in file .......................................................................................... wC(l)
characters, process characters from regular expression ........................................................ .......... regexp(7)
characters, translate into other characters ........................................................................................... tr(l)
chatr ............................................................................................................................................... chatr(l)
chdir ................... ........................ ......................................... ....... ........... .................. ........... ............ chdir(2)
check C program ............................................................................................................................... lint(l)
check file for accessibility ............................................................................................................... access(2)
check file system consistency ......................................................................................................... fsck(lM)
check integrity of as in SDF boot area(s) .................................................................................... osck(lM)
check internal revision numbers of HP-UX files ........................................................................... revck(lM)
check password and group files .................................................................................................... pwck(lM)
checklist, list of file systems to be checked by fsck(lM) ............................................................. checklist(5)
chgrp ............................................................................................................................................. chown(l)
child process, enable break-point debugging of .............................................................................. ptrace(2)
child process, time execution of ...................................................................................................... times(2)
child process, wait for termination of ............................ ....................................................................... sh( 1)
chmod .......................................................................................................................... chmod(l), chmod(2)
chown ........................................................................................................................... chown(l), chown(2)
chroot ........................................................................................................................... chroot(l), chroot(2)
chroot ........................................................................................................................................ chroot(lM)
chsh ................................................................................................................................................. chsh(l)
chsys ............................................................................................................................................ chsys( 1M)
classify characters for NLS ........................................... ......... .... ........................................ ..... nl_ctype(3C)
clean up uucp spool directory .................................................... .............................................. uuclean( 1M)
clear ................................................................................................................................................. clear(l)
clear error indicator on open file ............ ............................................................................ ........... ferror(3S)
clear i-node by zeroing it out .......................................................................................................... clri(lM)
clear terminal screen ........................................................................................................................ clear(l)
clear x.25 switched virtual circuit ............................................................................................... clrsvc(lM)
clearerr ......................................................................................................................................... ferror(3S)
clock ............................................................................................................................................. clock(3C)
clock, set/print time and date .......................................................................................................... date(l)
close .............................. ................................................................................................................... close( 2)
close a file descriptor ....................................................................................................................... close(2)
close group file ......................................................................................................................... getgrent(3C)
close or flush a stream .................................................................................................................. fclose(3S)

-5-

Permuted Index

close password file .................................................................................................................. getpwent(3C)
close pipe between process and command .................................................................................... popen(3S)
close-an-exec flag, get/set ................................................................................................................. fcntl(2)
clri .................................................................................................................................................. clri(lM)
clrsvc .......................................................................................................................................... clrsvc(lM)
cmp .................................................................................................................................................. cmp(l)
code portability between HP-UX implementations, typedefs for .................................................... model(5)
code segments, specify maximum number of ............................................................................. uconfig(lM)
col ....................................................................................................................................................... col(l)
collating sequence tables, NLS character set ................................................. coLseq_8(5), col_scq_16(5)
collation, non-ASCII string, used by NLS ............................................................................... nl-Btring(3C)
colon (:) command ............................................................................................................................... sh(l)
combine object files into program ........................................................................................................ ld(l)
comm ............................................................................................................................................. comm(l)
command, create/close pipe between process and command ........................................................ popen(3S)
command, execute from program ............................................................... '" ....... ....... ................ system(3S)
command, execute on another system ............ .............................. ........ .................... ........ .......... ....... uux( 1)
command, execute uucp commands on local system ................................................................... uuxqt(1M)
command, execute with different root directory ........................................................... chroot(l), chroot(2)
command interpreter, standard ........................................................................................................... sh(l)
command line options, parse ... ...................................................................................................... getopt (1)
command, report error information for . .... ..... ......... ......... ....... ......... .......... .............. ...... ....... ... ....... .... err( 1)
command, run at lower or higher priority ............................................................................ nice(l), nice(2)
command, run immune to hangups, logouts, and quits ... ....... .................... ............. .... ... ..... .......... nohup(1)
Command Set 80 Cartridge Tape Utility .......................................................................................... tcio(1)
command, set environment for .......................................................................................................... env(l)
command substitution ......................................................................................................................... sh(l)
command summary: per-process accounting records ................................................................ acctcms(lM)
command, time the execution of ...................................................................................................... time(l)
commands, execute at specified date(s) and time(s) ............................................................ at(l), cron(lM)
commands, install in file system ................................................................................................. install(lM)
commands, process accounting ................................................................................................... acctcom(l)
common lines, find after comparing two files ................................................................................. comm(l)
common logarithm ........................................................................................................................ : exp(3M)
communication, establish interactive communication with another UNIX/HP-UX system ................. cU(l)
compact ..................................................................................................................................... compact(l)
compare two directories .............................................................. ................................................. dircmp (1)
compare two files .................................................................................................... bdiff(I), cmp(I), diff(1)
compare two strings ....................................... ............................................. .......... ......... ........ ..... string( 3C)
compare two versions of SCCS file ..... ............ ......... .......... ......... ................... ......................... ...... sccsdiff(1)
compile ................. ............................... ...... ... .................... .................. ......... ............. .................... regexp(7)
compiled term file format ................................................................................................................. term(5)
compiler, C .......................................................................................................................................... cc(l)
compiler development ....................................................................................................................... yacc(l)
compiler, FORTRAN 77 ........................................................................................................... fc(1), f77(I)
compiler, Pascal ................................................................................................................................... pc(l)
compiler: terminfo ............................................................. ........................... .................................... tic (1M)
compiler-compiler ......................................................... .......... ................. .............................. ........... yacc (1)
complementary error function and error function ........................................................................... erf(3M)
compress and uncompress files, and cat them ............................................................................ compact(l)
compress and uncompress files, and cat them ............................................................................ compact(1)
concatenate, copy, and/or print files .................................................................................................. cat(l)
concatenate lines in one or more files ................. ................. ....... ... .................. ......... ....................... paste( 1)
concatenate two strings ............................................................................................................... string(3C)
conditional expressions, evaluate and test ............................................................................... sh(l), test(1)

-6-

Permuted Index

config ................. ....... ........ .................... ................. ........................................ ............................. config( 1M)
configure an HP-UX system ......................................................................................................... config(1M)
configure LP spooler system ......................................................................................................... mklp(1M)
connect to remote terminal ............................................................................................................. dial(3C)
connect-time accounting ........................................................................................................... acctcon(1M)
constants and functions, math ........... .................... ................... ................. ... ....... ........................... math(7)
construct a Bell file system .......................................................................................................... bifmkfs(1)
construct file system on special file ........ .......... ........... ........................ ............ ....................... ....... mkfs(1M)
construct new file system ............................................................................................................ newfs(1M)
contents of directory, list ...................................................................................................................... Is(1)
context-free grammar, create ............................................................................................................ yacc(1)
continue ............................................................................................................................................... sh(1)
control characters, interpret ASA carriage ......................................................................................... asa(1)
control device ...................................................................................................................... ioctl(2), stty(2)
control-flow constructs, shell programming language ........................................................................... sh(1)
conventional terminal names ............. ........ ........... .................. ................... ... ......................... .......... term(7)
convert archives to new format ........... ........... ........ ................... ........ .......... ........... .......... ........... ..... arcv( 1)
convert between 3-byte integers and long integers ......................................................................... 13tol(3C)
convert between long and base-64 ASCII ....................................................................................... a641(3C)
convert binary wtmp records into ASCII ................................................................................... fwtmp(1M)
convert date and time to ASCII ................................................................................................... ctime(3C)
convert floating point value to ASCII string .................................................................................. ecvt(3C)
convert, reblock, translate, and copy a (tape) file ............................................................................... dd(1)
convert string to double-precision integer ................................................................................... strtod(3C)
convert string to integer ............................................................................................................... strtol(3C)
convert tape file .................................................................................................................................. dd(1)
convert termcap description to terminfo description .................. ........... ............................... captoinfo( 1M)
copy an open file descriptor ................................................................................................. dup(2), fcntl(2)
copy, concatenate, and/or print files .................................................................................................. cat(1)
copy files between two systems .......................................................................................... uucp(1), uuto(1)
copy files out to media ...................................................................................................................... cpio(1)
copy files while simultaneously editing them ...................................................................................... sed(1)
copy line from standard input to standard output ............................................................................ line(1)
copy, link, or move files ........ ......... ..................... ....... ............ .......... .............. ........................ ........ ...... cp(1)
copy operating system from one or more SDF boot areas to another ............................................ oscp(1M)
copy string ................................................................................................................................... string(3C)
copy tape file ................................. ................... ........................................................... ........................ dd (1 )
copy to or from ElF files ......... .................. ................ ............. ........ ....... ... ....... ........ ... ........... ...... .... bifcp( 1)
copy to or from LIF files .................................................................................................................. lifcp(1)
core image, examine and/or modify for child process .................................................................... ptrace(2)
core image file, description of ............................................................................................................ core(5)
cos ......................................... ............................ .............................................. ............................... trig( 3M)
cosh ................ ......... ........ ......... ....... ... ....... ............. .................. ........................ ... ........ ... ............... sinh(3M)
cosine function ............................................................................................................................... trig(3M)
cosine, hyperbolic .......................................................................................................................... sinh(3M)
cp ........................................................................................................................................................ cp(1)
cpio ................................................................................................................................................... cpio(1)
cpio archive format, description of .................................................................................................... cpio(5)
cpio archives, unpack/extract from 5.25" flexible discs .................................................................... upm(1)
cpio archives, unpack/extract from Command Set 80 cartridge tape ............................................... upm(1)
cpp .................................................................................................................................................... cpp(1)
cpset ............................................................................................................................................ cpset(1M)
CPU type .................................................................................................................................... machid(1)
creat ................................................................................................................................................ creat(2)
create a directory ........................................................................................................................... mkdir(1)

- 7-

Permuted Index

create a directory file ..................................................................................................................... mkdir(2)
create a name for a temporary file ........................................................................................... tmpnam(3S)
create a new process ......................................................................................................................... fork(2)
create a special file entry .............................................................................................................. mknod(5)
create an interprocess channel ....................................................................................... :.................. pipe(2)
create and open temporary file ................................................................................................... tmpfile(3S)
create cat files for the manual .. ................... ........... ......... .................. ........ ........... ........ ............ catman( 1M)
create delta (change) for SCCS file .................................................................................................. delta(1)
create device files ....................................................................................................................... mkdev(lM)
create directory, block/character special, fifo, or ordinary file .................................. mknod(2), mknod(lM)
create encryption key ............................................................................................................. makekey(lM)
create libraries, archives ........................... ... ........ ... ...... ... ....... ............ ..... ..................... ......... ......... ...... ar( 1)
create link to file ............................................................................................................... link(1M),link(2)
create message catalog file for modification ....................... .......... ....... ..................... ....... ............. findmsg(1)
create mnttab table ................................................................................................................... setmnt(lM)
create new file, overwrite existing file .............................................................................................. creat(2)
create new operating system from ordinary files ........................................................................... oscp(lM)
create or change parameters of SCCS files ................... ........................... ...................................... admin(1)
create unique file name ............................................................................................................ mktemp(3C)
creation mask, get/set for file ............................................................................. sh(l), umask(l), umask(2)
cron ............................................................................................................................................... cron(lM)
crontab ........................................................................................................................................ crontab(l)
CRT, facilitate viewing of continuous text on ...................................................... ,.......................... more(1)
CRT, information about graphics devices with .......................................................................... graphics(4)
CRT screen handling and optimization routines ......................................................................... curses(3X)
crypt ..... ... ...... ........................... .................... ............ .................................... ......... .......... ............ crypt (3C)
C-source error messages into a file ................................................................................................. mkstr(l)
ct ......................................................................................................................................................... ct(4)
ctermid .. ... ........................... ..................................... ........ .......... ........ .................... ......... .......... ctermid( 3S)
ctime ............................................................................................................................................ ctime(3C)
cu ........................................................................................................................................................ cU(l)
current directory, print name of ....................................................................................................... pWd(l)
current events, print ........................................................................................................................ news(l)
current user id ............................................................................................................................ whoami(l)
current user in utmp file, find .................................................................................................... ttyslot(3C)
current working directory, change .............................................................................. cd(l), sh(l), chdir(2)
current working directory pathname ......................................................................................... getcwd(3C)
current working directory, print name of .......................................................................................... pWd(l)
curses .......................................................................................................................................... curses(3X)
cursor handling and optimization routines .................................................................................. curses(3X)
cuserid ........................................................................................................................................ cuserid(3S)
cut ..................................................................................................................................................... cut(l)
cut out selected fields of each line of a file ......................................................................................... cut(l)
daily accounting ....................................................................................................................... runacct(lM)
data access, long integer, machine independent ............................................................................ sputl(3X)
data base, relational data base operator ............................................................................................ join(l)
Data Encryption Standard .......................... ................................................................................. crypt(3C)
data segment, change space allocation for .......................................................................................... brk(2)
data segments, specify maximum number of ............................................................................. uconfig(lM)
data types, include file defining data types for system code ................ ..... ....................................... types(7)
database access ............................................................................................................................... query(l)
datacomm, accept/reject files received through uucp or unto .......................................................... uuto(1)
datacomm, copy files between two systems ........................................................................ uucp(l), uuto(l)
datacomm, execute command on another system .............................................................................. uux(l)
datacomm, list of known system names ........................................................................................... uucp(l)

-8-

Permuted Index

datacomm, log of uucp and uux transactions .................................................................................. uucp(1)
date .......................................... ........................................................ ....... ......................................... date( 1)
date and time, convert to ASCII string ........................................................................................ ctime(3C)
date and time, get more precisely ................................................................................................... ftime(2)
date, get/set ........................................................................................................................ gettimeofday(2)
date, set .......................................................................................................................................... stime(2)
date, set and/or print ....................................................................................................................... date(1)
dates, reminder service for important ........................................................................................ calendar(1)
daylight ........................................................................................................................................ ctime(3C)
daylight saving time, time corrected for ....................................................................................... ctime(3C)
dd ....................................................................................................................................................... dd(1)
deallocate a block of memory ..................................................................................................... malloc(3C)
debug damaged file system ............................................................................................................ fsdb(1M)
debugger ............................................................................................................................................ adb(1)
debugging, enable break-point debugging for child process ............................................................ ptrace(2)
decompiler: terminfo .................................................................................................................... untic(iM)
delays, settings and controls for terminal output ............................................................................... tty( 4)
delta ................................................................................................................................................ delta(1)
delta, add to SCCS file .................................................................................................................... delta(1)
delta, change commentary of SCCS ................................................................................................... cdc(1)
delta, inform user of any deltas being created for specific SCCS file ................................................. sact(1)
delta, remove from SCCS file ......................................................................................................... rmdel(1)
demand loadable, set for program ......................... ................... ..................... .................................. chatr( 1)
deroff ....... ............................ ............................ ....... ........................ ...... ......................... ................. deroff( 1)
DES password encryption ............................................................................................................ crypt(3C)
description of environment .................................. .......... ............................. ................................. environ(7)
description of /etc/passwd, pwd.h files ........................................................................................ passwd(5)
description of group file .................................................................................................................. group(5)
description of magic.h and magic numbers ..................................................................................... magic(5)
description of OS management commands ............ .................... ................................... .............. osmgr(1M)
descriptor, close file ......................................................................................................................... close(2)
descriptor, copy/duplicate file ............................................................................................. dup(2), fcntl(2)
descriptor, get value of file ........................................................................................................... ferror(3S)
device, description of hpib interface to ............................................................................................. hpib( 4)
device driver, select virtual device driver .................... .......... ................................................. ... uconfig( 1M)
device drivers, list ........................................................................................................................... Isdev(1)
device file, create block/character ............................................................................ mknod(2), mknod(1M)
device files, create .... ................ .......... ....... .... ...... ........... ........ .... ...... ............ ...... .... .................... mkdev( 1M)
device files, perform functions on ......................................................................................... ioctl(2), stty(2)
device names, pack/unpack for mknod(2) .................................................................................... mknod(5)
device I/O library .................................................................................... gpio_*(3I), hpib_*(3I), io_*(3I)
devices, backing store ....................................................................................................................... vson(2)
devices, information about those with graphics crt's .................................................................. graphics (4)
devnm ....................................................................................................................................... devnm(1M)
df ...................................................................................................................................................... df(1M)
diagnostics, add to program ........................................................................................................ assert(3X)
dial ................................................................................................................................................. dial(3C)
dial out to a remote terminal .......................................................................................................... dial(3C)
dialup security control ................................................................................................................. dialups(5)
diff ..................................................................................................................................................... diff(1)
differences between files, mark ...................................................................................................... diffmk(1)
differential file comparison, 3-way .................................................................................................... diff3(1)
diffh ................................................................................................................................................... diff(1)
diffmk ............................................................................................................................................ diffmk(1)
digitizer, description of hpib interface to .......................................................................................... hpib( 4)

-9-

Permuted Index

dircmp .......................................................................................................................................... dircmp(l)
directory, change root for duration of command ........................................................... chroot(l), chroot(2)
directory, change working ........................................................................................... cd(l), sh(1), chdir(2)
directory clean-up for uucp spool directory .............................................................................. uuclean(lM)
directory, compare two ................................................................................................................ dircmp(l)
directory, create ............................................................................................................ mkdir(l), mknod(2)
directory, description of internal SDF format of ................................................................................. dir(5)
directory, extract from path name ........................................................................................... basename(1)
directory, list contents of ............... ........ ............................. ......... ......... ................... ...................... ....... Is(1)
directory, list contents of LIF ............................................................................................................ lifls(l)
directory, move ........................................................................................................................... mvdir(lM)
directory, print name of current working .......................................................................................... pWd(l)
directory, remove ................................................................................................................................ rm(l)
directory, remove ........................................................................................................................... rmdir(2)
dirname .................................................................................................................................... basename(l)
disc blocks, report number of free ..................................................................................................... df(lM)
disc description file ...................................................................................................................... disktab(5)
disc drivers, information about blocked/unblocked interface ............................................................. disc( 4)
disc initialization ...................................................................................................................... mediainit(l)
disc storage, preallocate .............................................................................................................. prealloc(l)
disc usage accounting by user ID ..................................... ,. ................ ....................... ..... .......... diskusg(1M)
disc usage, summarize ......................................................................................................................... du(l)
disc, write current contents of memory to .......................................................................... sync(2), sync(l)
diskusg ..................................................................................................................................... diskusg(lM)
display buffering, specifY number of pages of ............................................................................ uconfig(lM)
documentation, on-line ..................................................................................................................... mantI)
documents, print using mm macros ................................................................................................... mm(1)
dot (.) command .................................................................................................................................. sh(l)
drand48 ................................................................................................................................... drand48(3C)
driver, information about blocked/unblocked disc interface .............................................................. disc( 4)
drivers, list device ........................................................................................................................... lsdev(l)
du ....................................................................................................................................................... dU(l)
dump, octal or hexadecimal ................................................................................................................. od(1)
dumpmsg ................................................................................................................................. dumpmsg(l)
dup ................................................................................................................................................... dup(2)
dup2 ................................................................................................................................................ dup2(2)
duplicate an open file descriptor .......................................................................................... dup(2), fcntl(2)
duplicate open file descriptor ........................................................................................................... dup2(2)
e .......................................................................................................................................................... ex(l)
echo .................................................................................................................................................. echo(l)
echo (print) arguments after shell interpretation ............................................................................. echo(l)
ecvt .............................................................................................................................. .................. ecvt (3C)
ed ........................................................................................................................................................ ed(l)
edata ............................................................................................................................................... end(3C)
edit ...................................................................................................................................................... ex(l)
editing activity, print for SCCS file .................................................................................................. sact(l)
editor, stream text ............................................................................................................................. sed(l)
editor, text ................................................................................................................................ ed(l), ex(l)
editor, visual text ................................................................................................................................. vi(l)
effective current user id ............................................................................................................... whoami(l)
effective user/group ID's, get for process ....................................................................................... getuid(2)
egrep ................................................................................................................................................ grep(l)
EMS .................................................................................................................................................. ems(2)
EMS, description of ........................................................................................................................... ems(2)
emulation of asynchronous terminal ............................................................................................... aterm(l)

- 10 -

Permuted Index

enable swapping and paging ..................................................................................................... swapon(1M)
encrypt passwords ........................................................................................................................ crypt(3C)
encryption key, generate ........................................................................................................ makekcy(1M)
end .................................................................................................................................................. end(3C)
endgrent .................................................................................................................................. getgrent(3C)
endpwent ................................................................................................................................ gctpwent(3C)
env .................................................................................................................................................... env(1)
environment, description of parameters and usage ............................................................ sh(l), environ(7)
environment, install parameters in ...................................................................................................... sh(1)
environment, print current ................................................................................................................ env(1)
environment, set for duration of one command ................................................................................. env(1)
environment, set up at login time ........... .......... ............................ .... ....... ....... ........................ ....... profile( 5)
environment variable, get value of ............................................................................................. getenv(3C)
EOF (end-of-file) character, description of ......................................................................................... tty(4)
EOF, indicate receipt of when reading file .................................................................................... ferror(3S)
EOL (end-of-line) character, description of ........................................................................................ tty(4)
eqn, tbl, nroff, troff constructs, remove from text .......................................................................... deroff(l)
erase character, description of ............. ... ...... .... ........ .... ................ ................... .......... ................. ........ tty( 4)
erf .............................................. ..................................................................................... ................. erf( 3M)
erfc .................................................................................................................................................. erf(3M)
err ....................................................................................................................................................... err(l)
errfile .......................................................................... .......................... ......................................... errfile (5)
errinfo ........................................................................................................................................... errinfo(2)
errinfo, report value for last command failure.... ............ ...... .......... ....... ..... ....... ....... ... ........... ....... ...... err( 1)
errno ............................................................................................................................................... errno(2)
errno, report value for last command failure .............. ... ....... ..................... .......................................... err(1)
ERROR ... ........... ... ... .......... ....... ........... ........ ......... .... ..... ... ....... ........... ....... .................. .... ...... ...... regexp(7)
error function and complementary error function ............................................................................ erf(3M)
error handling, mathematical..... ........ .......... .................. .... ...... ............ ....... ....... .... ................ matherr(3M)
error indicator ............................................................................................................................... errinfo(2)
error indicator for system calls ........................................................................................................ errno(2)
error indicator, reset status of ...................................................................................................... ferror(3S)
error indicator while reading file ................................................................................................... ferror(3S)
error information on last command failure ......................................................................................... err(1)
error logging file for system ...................... ...................................................................................... errfile (5)
error message generator from C programs .... ......... ................ .... ...... ..... ........ ...... .... ..... ..... .... ...... perror(3C)
etext ............................................................................................................................................... end(3C)
eval ...................................................................................................................................................... sh(1)
evaluate arguments as an expression ................................................................................................ expr(l)
ex ........................................................................................................................................................ ex(1)
examine text, facilitate on soft-copy terminals ................................................................................ more(1)
exec ........................................................................................................................................ sh(l), exec(2)
exeel .............................................................................................................................. .. .. ..... . . ..... ... exec (2)
exeele ................................................................................................................................................ exec(2)
exeelp ........ ................... .............................................. ...................................................................... exec (2)
executable file, extract symbol table (name list) entries from ........................................................ nlist(3C)
executable file, get size of .................................................................................................................. size(l)
executable linker/assembler output file, description of .................................................................... a.out(5)
execute a file in current process ........................................................................................................ exec(2)
execute command at lower or higher priority ....................................................................... nice(l), nice(2)
execute command immune to hangups, logouts, and quits ............................................................ nohup(l)
execute command on another system ............... ......... .......... ......... ............ ....... .......... ..... ..... .............. uux( 1)
execute command using different root directory ............................................................................ chroot(l)
execute commands at specified date(s) and time(s) ............................................................. at(l), cron(lM)
execute commands from file ................................................................................................................. sh(l)

- 11 -

Permuted Index

execute new program in existing process ................................................................................ sh(1), exec(2)
execute process with real-time priority ........................................................................................... rtprio(l)
execute HALGOL programs ......................................................................................................... opx25(lM)
execute uucp commands on local system .................................................................................... uuxqt(lM)
execute work requests on remote system ....................................................................... uucico(1M), uux(l)
execution profile, create for program ......................................................................... profil(2), monitor(3C)
execution, suspend process execution for time interval ................................................... slcep(l), sleep(3C)
execv .......................... ....... .......... ................... ........... ......... ......... ................. ................... ................. exec(2)
execve ............................................................................................................................................... exec(2)
execvp .............................................................................................................................................. exec(2)
_exit ................................................................................................................................................. exit(2)
exit .......................................................................................................................................... sh(l), exit(2)
exit from enclosing for or while loop .................................................................................................... sh(l)
exp ................................................................................................................................................. exp(3M)
expand ......................................................................................................................................... expand (1)
expand tabs to spaces, and vice versa ....................................................... ;.................................. expand(l)
exponent, raise 2 to a power ..... .................... ................................... .... .......... ..... .... ......... .......... ... frexp(3C)
exponential function ............. .......... ............................. ......... ......... ......... .......... ........ ............... .... ... exp(3M)
export .................................................................................................................................................. sh(l)
expr .................................................................................................................................................. expr(l)
expreserve ............................................................................................................................................ ex(l)
expression, evaluate arguments as .................................................................................................... expr(l)
exrecover .................................. .................... ....................................................................................... ex( 1)
Extended Memory System description .............................................................................................. ems(2)
external symbols, examine execution profile for ................................................................................ prof(l)
extract entries from symbol table (name list) of executable file ..................................................... nlist(3C)
extract error messages from C source into a file ............................................................................. mkstr(l)
extract files from 5.25" flexible discs ................................................................................................ upm(l)
extract files from Command Set 80 cartridge tape archives ............................................................. upm(1)
extract files from media .................................................................................................................... cpio(l)
extract portions of path names .. .................... ........................... .......... ................ ............ ......... basename(1)
f77 ........................................................................................................................................................ fc(l)
f77 .................................................................................................................................................. see fc(l)
fabs ............................................................................................................................................... floor(3M)
false .................................................................................................................................................. true (1)
fc .......................................................................................................................................................... fc(l)
fclose ............................................................................................................................................. fclose(3S)
fcntl ................................................................................................................................................. fcntl(2)
fcntl(2), description of requests and arguments for .......................................................................... fcntl(7)
fcntl.h, description of .. .................. .............. .................. ....... .......... ....... ........................ ....... ............ fcntl(7)
fcvt ................................................................................................................................................ ecvt(3C)
fdopen ........................................................................................................................................... fopen(3S)
feof ............................................................................................................................................... ferror(3S)
ferror ... .................. ................ .... ...... ............................... ...... .... ............... ... ...... .... ..... ............ ....... ferror(3S)
fflush ............................................................................................................................................. fclose(3S)
fgetc ........................ ........................... .......... .................. .......... .................. ..................................... getc (3S)
fgets . ............ ...... ............................ .................... ...... ........... ........................... ......... ........................ gets(3S)
fgrep ................................................................................................................................................. grep(l)
fifo special file, create ............................................................................................... mknod(2), mknod(lM)
file, assign another file name to already open file .......................................................................... fopen(3S)
file, assign buffering to open .......................................................... ;............................................. setbuf(3S)
file attributes file, description of ........................................................................................................... f8(5)
file, buffered read from .................................................................................................................. fread(3S)
file, buffered write to ..................................................................................................................... fread(3S)
file, change group ID of ................................................................................................ chown(l), chown(2)

- 12 -

Permuted Index

file, change mode of ..................................................................................................... chmod(I), chmod(2)
file, change owner ......................................................................................................... chown(I), chown(2)
file, change pemtission bits .......................................................................................... chmod(1), chmod(2)
file, check revision number for ..................................................................................................... revck(IM)
file, close a buffered open file ........................................................................................................ fclose(3S)
file comparison, three-way differential .............................................................................................. diff3(1)
file control ........................................................................................................................................ fcntl(2)
file control constants, file containing definitions of ..... .................. .................................................... fcntl(7)
file, copy LIF in or out ..................................................................................................................... lifcp(l)
file, copy to tape while performing certain conversions ....................................................................... dd(l)
file, count words, lines, and characters contained therein ................................................................... wc(l)
file, create and open temporary .................................................................................................. tmpfile(3S)
file, create device/special ........................................................................................................... mkdev(IM)
file, create or overwrite ordinary ..................................................................................................... creat(2)
file, create or remove link to/from .................................................................... link(IM), link(2), unlink(2)
file, create ordinary....... .......... .................. ......... .......... ......... ... .................................................... mknod(2)
file creation mask, set ......................................................................................... sh(I), umask(I), umask(2)
file, description of buffered I/O ..................................................................................................... stdio(3S)
file, description of password file, /etc/passwd .............................................................................. passwd(5)
file, description of SCCS file format .............................................................................................. sccsfile(5)
file descriptor, assign stream to .................................................................................................... fopen(3S)
file descriptor, close ......................................................................................................................... close(2)
file descriptor, copy /duplicate ............................................................................................. dup(2), fcntl(2)
file descriptor, create file pointer using ......................................................................................... fopen(3S)
file descriptor, determine if associated with terminal ............................................................... ttyname(3C)
file'descriptor, get value of ........................................................................................................... ferror(3S)
file, determine accessibility of ........................................................................................................ access(2)
file, error logging file for system ................ ............................ ................. ......... ........ ............. .......... errfile( 5)
file, find and/or remove duplicate lines in ........................................................................................ uniq(l)
file, find spelling errors in ................................................................................................................. spell(l)
file format, per-process accounting .................................................................................................... acct(5)
file, generate name for temporary........... ... ....... ........... ........ ... ................. ....... .... ..................... tmpnam(3S)
file, get information about ................................................................................................................. stat(2)
file, get/set status flags for ............................................................................................................... fcntl(2)
file, indicate the occurrence of an error while reading ................................................................... ferror(3S)
file, indicate when EOF is encountered when reading from .......................................................... ferror(3S)
file, locate in file system ............. ........................ ......... ... ............................. ........ ................. ............. find( 1)
file, move to new position in ............................................................................................................ Iseek(2)
file name, create file name vs. i-node list ...... ...................... .......... .......................................... ... ncheck(1M)
file name, create unique ........................................................................................................... mktemp(3C)
file name, extract from path name ........................................................................................... basename(l)
file name, find special file for mounted file system on which file lies .......................................... devnm(IM)
file name, generate for temporary file ....................................................................................... tmpnam(3S)
file name, generate for terminal ................................................................................................. ctermid(3S)
file, open for reading or writing ....................................................................................................... open(2)
file, open with assigoed buffering .................................................................................................. fopen(3S)
file owner or group, change .. ................ ......... ............................... .......................... ........... ........ bifchown( 1)
file pointer, create using file descriptor ......................................................................................... fopen(3S)
file pointer, move read/write (seek) ................................................................................................. Iseek(2)
file pointer, obtain for file ............................................................................................................. fopen(3S)
file pointer, re-assign to another file .............................................................................................. fopen(3S)
file, print last part of .............. ......... .................. ................... ................................................ ....... ...... tail( 1)
file, put line length specifications in text files .................................................................................. fspec(5)
file, put margin specifications in text files ........................................................................................ fspec(5)
file, put tab specifications in text files ............................................................................................. fspec(5)

- 13 -

Permuted Index

file, read and execute commands from ................................................................................................. sh(l)
file, read and format data from .............................. ....................................................................... scanf(3S)
file, read character from ......................................................... ......................................................... getc(3S)
file, read from ................................................................................................................................... read(2)
file, read string from ....................................................................................................................... gets(3S)
file, read word from ........................................................................................................................ getc(3S)
file, remove ......................................................................................................................................... rm(l)
file, remove a LIF ............................................................................................................................ lifrm(l)
file, remove extra new-line characters from ...................................................................................... rmnl(l)
file, remove selected fields from each line in ....................................................................................... cut(l)
file, remove selected table column entries from .................................................................................. cut(l)
file, rename LIF ........................................................................................................................ lifrename(l)
file, rewind before next I/O operation ........................................................................................... fseek(3S)
file scanner, big ................................................................................................................................... bfs(l)
file, search contents of for specified string(s) .................................................................................... grep(l)
file, set/clear set-user-ID, set-group-ID, sticky bits ...................................................... chmod(l), chmod(2)
file size limit, get for process .......................................................................................................... ulimit(2)
file, sort contents of .......................................................................................................................... sort(l)
file, split into pieces .......................................................................................................................... split(l)
file system, backup file system on cpio archive ......................................................................... backup(lM)
file system (Bell) consistency check and interactive repair ............................................................ biffsck(l)
file system (Bell) debugger ........................................................................................................... biffsdb(l)
file system consistency check and interactive repair ....................................................................... fsck(lM)
file system, construct on special file ..... ......... ........... ....... ................................................ ........... ... mkfs (1M)
file system debugger ...................................................................................................................... fsdb(lM)
file system descriptor file entry ................................................................................................. getfsent(3X)
file system, find special file associated with ..... ...................................... ...................... ............. devnm(1M)
file system hierarchy.... .................... ......... ................. ........... ....................................................... ..... hier(7)
file system, install commands in ................................................................................................. install(lM)
file system, list of those to be checked by fsck(lM) ................................................................... checklist(5)
file system, mount or unmount .............................................................. mount(lM), mount(2), umount(2)
file system name, get for mounted ................................................................................................... ustat(2)
file system pack name, get for mounted .......................................................................................... ustat(2)
file system shutdown status ....................................................................................................... fsclean(lM)
file system, table of mounted file systems .................................................................................... mnttab(5)
file, system's "bit bucket" special file ................................................................................................ null (4)
file transfer: XMODEM protocol .............................................................................................. umodem(lM)
file transfers: KERMIT-protocol ................................................................................................. kermit(lM)
file tree walk .................................................................................................................................... ftw(3C)
file, update access/modification/change times of ............................................................. touch(l), utime(2)
file utilities, Bell Interchange Format ................................................................................................ bif(5)
file, write character onto ................................................................................................................ putc(3S)
file, write formatted data onto ..................................................................................................... printf(3S)
file, write LIF volume header on ..................................................................................................... lifinit(l)
file, write string onto ...................................................................................................................... puts(3S)
file, write to .................................................................................................................................... write(2)
file, write word onto .... .......... ...... .............. .......... ............................ ............................ ................... putc(3S)
file-creation mode mask, get/set ................................................................................... umask(l), umask(2)
fileno ............................................................................................................................................ ferror(3S)
files, archive on tape ......... ............................... ............................. .................. ................... ......... ........ tar(1)
files, check password and group files ................. ........... ................... ........ ..................................... pwck(1M)
files, compare two ................................................................................................... bdiff(l), cmp(l), diff(1)
files, compare two and create change bars ..... .................. ............... .................................. ............. diffmk(1)
files, compare two and find lines common to both ......................................................................... comm(l)
files, compare two and find lines unique to each .................. ............................ .......... ....... ............. comm( 1)

- 14 -

Permuted Index

files, concatenate two or more ............................................................................................................ cat(l)
files, copy......... ................... ............ ................ ....... .... ................. ....... ...................................... .......... cat( 1)
files, copy and simultaneously edit ............. ............................. ............................. .................... ....... ... sed(1)
files, copy between two systems ......................................................................................... uucp(l), uuto(l)
files, copy out to media ............ .......... ......................................................................... ................... ... cpio (1)
files, description of /etc/profile and $HOMEj.profile .................................................................... profile(5)
files, extract from media ................................................................................................................... cpio(l)
files, format and print .......................................................................................................................... pr(l)
files, merge lines in one or more ...................................................................................................... paste(l)
files, move, link, or copy ...................................................................................................................... cp(l)
files, print ........................................................................................................................................... cat(l)
files, unpack/extract from 5.25" flexible discs .................................................................................. upm(1)
files, unpack/extract from Command Set 80 cartridge tape archives ................................................ upm(l)
filter reverse line-feeds and backspaces ............................................................................................... col(l)
find ................................................................................................................................................... find(l)
find current user slot in utmp file ............................................................................................... ttyslot(3C)
find duplicate lines in file ................................................................................................................. uniq(l)
find files ............................................................................................................................................ find(l)
find files in a BIF system .............................................. ;............................................................... biffind(l)
find name of a terminal ........................................................................................................... ttyname(3C)
find strings for inclusion in message catalog .................................................................................. findstr(l)
findmsg ....................................................................................................................................... findmsg(l)
findstr .......................... .................... ....................................... .................. ....... ............................. findstr( 1)
fix manual pages for faster viewing with man(l) .......................................................................... fixman(l)
fixman ........................................................................................................................................... fisman(l)
flag, get/set close-on-exec ................................................................................................................. fcntl(2)
flags, mapping pwb/V6 UNIX terminal flags into current HP-UX ..................................................... tty(4)
flags, set shell ...................................................................................................................................... sh(l)
flexible discs, unpack/extract files from ............... ... ...... ........... .... .... .............. ........................... ....... upm(1)
floating point number, split into integer and fractional parts ....................................................... frexp(3C)
floating point to ASCII conversion ................................................................................................. ecvt(3C)
floor .............................................................................................................................................. floor(3M)
flow graph, C, generate ................................................................................................................... cflow(l)
flush buffers associated with an open file . ........ ....... ...................................... .... ..... ........... ....... ..... fclose(3S)
fmod .............................................. ............................................................................................... floor( 3M)
fold long lines for finite-width output device ..................................................................................... fold(l)
fopen ............................................................................................................................................. fopen(3S)
for loop, exit from enclosing ................................................................................................................ sh(l)
for loop, resume the next iteration of .................................................................................................. sh(1)
fork ................................................................................................................................................... fork(2)
format and print files ........................................................................................................................... pr(l)
format C program ............................................................................................................................... cb(l)
format, compiled term file ................................................................................................................ term(5)
format data into string ................................................................................................................. printf(3S)
format data on buffered open file ................................................................................................. printf(3S)
format data on standard output ................................................................................................... printf(3S)
format, nlist structure ...................................................................................................................... nlist(5)
format of an i-node, description of .................................................................................................. inode(5)
format of a.out file, description of ................................................................................................... a.out(5)
format of core image file, description of ............................................................................................ core(5)
format of cpio archive, description of ................................................................................................ cpio(5)
format of library/archive file, description of ........................................................................................ ar(5)
format of SCCS file, description of ............................................................................................... sccsfile(5)
format, privileged values .............................................................................................................. privgrp(5)
format SDF volume .................................................................................................................... sdfinit(lM)

- 15 -

Permuted Index

fonnat specifications, put in text file ............................................................................................... fspec(5)
format tables for nroff or troff ............................................................................................................ tbl(1)
fonnat text ....... ......... ......... ........... .................................... ........... ............................ ......... .......... .... nroff( 1)
formatted output from varargs argument list ........................ .......... .............................. ........ ..... vprintf(3S)
formatted output with numbered arguments .......................................................................... printmsg(3C)
formatter, text, simple ................................................................................................................... adjust(1)
formatting text with the man macros ............. ........................ ........... .................. ........... ......... ......... man(7)
formatting text with the mm macros ................ .......................... .................... ......... .............. ........... mm(7)
FORTRAN 77 compiler ............................................................................................................ fc(1), f77(1)
fprintf ............ ...................................... ........................... ........... ........................... .......... .............. printf(3S)
fputc .............................................................................................................................................. putc(3S)
fputs ............................................................................................................................................... puts(3S)
fread .............. .......... ............................. ..................................... ............................. ......... ......... ..... fread(3S)
free ............................................................................................................................................. malloc(3C)
free blocks, find for mounted file system ......................................................................................... ustat(2)
free disc blocks, report number of .......................... ........................................................ .................. bifdf( 1)
free disc blocks, report number of ......... ......................................................... ....... .......... .................. df(1M)
free i-nodes, find for mounted file system ........................................................................................ ustat(2)
free memory space ...................................................................................................................... memallc(2)
freopen .......................................................................................................................................... fopen(3S)
frexp ............................................................................................................................................. frexp(3C)
fscanf ...... ......... ............................... ......... ........... ............................................. .............................. scanf(3S)
fsck ...................................................... ............... ... ........................... ............................ .......... ....... fsck( 1M)
fsck ................................................................................................................................................ fsck(1M)
fsck(1M), list of file systems to be checked by ........................................................................... checklist(5)
fsclean ....................................................................................................................................... fsclean(1M)
fsdb ............................................................................................................................................... fsdb(1M)
[seek .............................................................................................................................................. fseek(3S)
fstat .................................................................................................................................................. stat(2)
fstat(2)/stat(2), description of structure returned by these calls ....................................................... stat(7)
ftell ................................................................................................................................................ fseek(3S)
ftime ............................................................................................................................................... ftime(2)
ftw ..... ............................................... ............................................. ................... .......... ..... ............ .... ftw(3C)
functions and constants, math .................................. ......... ........... ......... .......... ............................... math(7)
fwrite ............................................................................................................................................. fread(3S)
fwtmp ........................................................................................................................................ fwtmp(1M)
gamma ............................... ............. ......... .......... .............. .................................. ................ ....... gamma(3M)
gcvt ................................................................................................................................................ ecvt(3C)
gencat ........................................................................................................................................... gencat(1)
general terminal interface .............................................................................................................. termio( 4)
generate a fonnatted message-catalog file ...................... .............. ............................ ................. .... gencat( 1)
generate C flow graph ..................................................................................................................... cflow(1)
generate encryption key ......................................................................................................... makekey(1M)
generate uniformly-distributed pseudo-random numbers ......................................................... drand48(3C)
get ...................................................................................................................................................... get(1)
get date and time more precisely .................................................................................................... ftime(2)
get entries from symbol table (name list) of executable file ........................................................... nlist(3C)
get file system descriptor file entry ........................................................................................... getfsent(3X)
get group access list ................................................................................................................. getgroups(2)
get message from a catalog ........................................................................................................ getmsg(3C)
get message queue .............................................................................................. :......................... msgget(2)
get name of current host ........... ..... ................ ........... .................... ........................... ........... gethostname(2)
get password file entry ............. ............................................... ........................... .......... .......... getpwent (3C)
get pathname of current working directory ................................................................................ getcwd(3C)
get real/effective user, real/effective group IDs .............................................................................. getuid(2)

- 16 -

Permuted Index

get set of semaphores ................................................................................................................... semget(2)
get shared memory segment ......................................................................................................... shmget(2)
get special attributes for group ... ............................ ........... ......... ......... .................... ............... getprivgrp( 1)
get x.25 line ............................................................................................................................... getx25(lM)
getc ................................................................................................................................................. getc(38)
GETC ........................................................................................................................................... regexp(7)
getchar ............................................................................................................................................ getc(38)
getcwd ....................................................................................................................................... getcwd(3C)
getegid ........................................................................................................................................... getuid(2)
getenv ........................................................................................................................................ getenv(3C)
geteuid .......................................................................................................................................... getuid(2)
getfsent .................................................................................................................................... getfsent(3X)
getgid ............................................................................................................................................ getuid(2)
getgrent ................................................................................................................................... getgrent(3C)
getgrgid ................................................................................................................................... getgrent(3C)
getgrnam ................................................................................................................................. getgrent(3C)
get groups ....................... ................... ......... ................... .................... ....................................... getgroups (2)
gethostname ........................................................................................................................ gethostname(2)
getitimer ..... .............. ............ ....... ... ...... .......... ........... ... .... .................... ... ................. ......... ....... getitimer(2)
getlogin .................................................................................................................................... getlogin(3C)
getmsg ....................................................................................................................................... getmsg(3C)
getmsg, insert calls using findstring output .............................................................................. insertmsg(1)
getopt ............................ ................... .......... ................................................................................... getopt (1 )
getopt ......................................................................................................................................... getopt(3C)
getpass ...................................................................................................................................... getpass(3C)
getpgrp .......................................................................................................................................... getpid(2)
getpid ............................................................................................................................................ getpid(2)
getppid .......................................................................................................................................... getpid(2)
getprivgrp ............................................................. getprivgrp(1), getprivgrp(2), setprivgrp(1M), privgrp(5)
getpw .......................................................................................................................................... getpw(3C)
getpwent ................................................................................................................................ getpwent(3C)
getpwnam ............................................................................................................................... getpwent(3C)
getpwuid ................................................................................................................................ getpwent(3C)
gets .... ........ ....... ........................................ .......... .......... ..... .... .................. ... ........ ......... ....... ..... ....... gets(3S)
get/set date and time .......................................................................................................... gettimeofday(2)
get/set special attributes for group ......................................................................................... getprivgrp(2)
get/set value of interval timer ................................................................................................... getitimer(2)
gettimeofday ....................................................................................................................... gettimeofday(2)
getty ............................................................................................................................................ getty(1M)
getuid ............................................................................................................................................ getuid(2)
getut ............................................................................................................................................. getut(3C)
getw ..................................................................... ............ ............................................................... getc (38)
getx25 ........................................................................................................................................ getx25(1M)
gmtime ......................................................................................................................................... ctime(3C)
goto, non-local ............................................................................................................................ setjmp(3C)
grammar, create context-free ............................................................................................................ yacc(1)
graphics devices, information for those with crt's ....................................................................... graphics(4)
grep .................................................................................................................................................. grep(1)
group ............................................................................................................................................. group(5)
group access list, set ................................................................................................................. setgroups(2)
group, change ID of user ................. ......... ...... .............................................................................. newgrp( 1)
group file, close ........................................................................................................................ getgrent(3C)
group file, description of /etc/group ............................................................................................... group (5)
group file, read one line from ................................................................................................... getgrent(3C)
group file, rewind ..................................................................................................................... getgrent(3C)

- 17 -

Permuted Index

group file, search for matching group ID ................................................................................. getgrent(3C)
group file, search for matching group name ............................................................................. getgrent(3C)
group ID, change for file ............................................................................................... chown(l), chown(2)
group ID, change for user .................................................................................................. newgrp(l), sh(1)
group ID, get for process ............................................................................................................... getpid(2)
group ID, print .................................................................................................................................... id(l)
group ID, search group file for matching ................................................................................. getgrent(3C)
group ID, set ................................................................................................................................. setuid(2)
group ID, set for process ............................................................................................................. setpgrp(2)
group memberships, show ............................................................................................................. groups(l)
group name, search group file for matching ............................................................................. getgrent(3C)
group/password file checkers ....................................................................................................... pwck(lM)
groups ........................................................................................................................................... groups(l)
group special attributes, get .................................................................................................... getprivgrp(l)
group special attributes, set ................................................................................................. setprivgrp(lM)
grpck ........................................................................................................................................... pwck(lM)
grp.h .............................................................................................................................................. group(5)
gsignal ........................................................................................................................................ ssignal(3C)
gtty ................................................................................................................................................... stty(2)
handling facility, variable argument list ..................................................................................... varargs(7)
hangups, run command immune to ............................................................................................... nohup(l)
hardware name, get ..................................................................................................... uname(l), uname(2)
hardware trap numbers, list of ..................................................................................................... trapno(2)
hash search tables . ....... ........... ......... ........... ....... ................ ........................ ....... ................. ....... hsearch(3C)
header, write LIF volume on file ..................................................................................................... lifinit(l)
heap size, change for program ...... ........ ........ ...................... .................... .................. ........ ........ ....... chatr(1)
help .................................................................................................................................................. help(l)
help, get for SCCS routines .............................................................................................................. help(l)
hexadecimal, octal dump ..................................................................................................................... od(l)
hier ....................... ....... ....... .... ............... ... ......... .......... ..... ..... ........ ................ ..... ........ ........ ....... ....... hier(7)
hierarchy, file system . .......... ...... ............ ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... .......... ....... ............ ....... ......... hier(7)
host name, get ..................................................................................................................... gethostname (2)
host name, set ...................................................................................................................... sethostname(2)
host system, set/print name of current .................................................................................... hostname(l)
hostname .................................................................................................................................. hostname(l)
hpib interface, description of ........................................................................................................... hpib( 4)
hpnls ..... ............ ......... ......... ............. .... ............... .................................. ....... ........ ........ ......... .... ...... hpnls(7)
HP-UX implementations, conditional compilation depending on ................................................... model(5)
HP-UX implementations, definition of constants which identify .................................................... model(5)
HP-UX machine identification ....................................................................................................... model(5)
HP-UX revision information, get ................................................................................................. revision(l)
HP-UX version name, get ............................................................................................ uname(1), uname(2)
hsearch ..................................................................................................................................... hsearch(3C)
hyperbolic functions ................... .................... .................. .......... ......... ................... ...... ........ .... ..... sinh(3M)
hypot .......................................................................................................................................... hypot(3M)
hypotenuse, function for calculating ........................................................................................... hypot(3M)
id ......................................................................................................................................................... id(l)
ID's, set user and group ................................................................................................................. setuid(2)
init ................................................................................................................................................. init(lM)
INIT .. ........... ..................................... ................... ... .......... ..... ... .................... ...... .... ... ............ ...... regexp(7)
init(lM), control information for .................................................................................................. inittab(5)
initgroups ............................................................................................................................. initgroups(3C)
initialization of system state and processes ..................................................................................... init(lM)
initialize group access list ...................................................................................................... initgroups(3C)
initialize hard disc, flexible disc, or cartridge tape media ......... ....................................... ......... mediainit(1)

- 18 -

Permuted Index

initialize SDF volume ................................................................................................................. sdfinit(lM)
initialize terminal type and mode on login .. ......... ....................... ........ ........... ................. ...... ............ tset(1)
inittab .......................................................................................................................................... inittab(5)
i-node, clear i-node by zeroing it out ............................................................................................... clri(lM)
i-node, description of i-node format ................................................................................................ inode(5)
i-node, enable access to i-node for file system repair ...................................................................... fsdb(lM)
i-nodes, create file name vs. i-node list ...................................................................................... ncheck(lM)
i-nodes, find number of free i-nodes in mounted file system ............................................................ ustat(2)
input and format data from buffered opcn file .............................................................................. scanf(3S)
input and format data from standard input .................................................................................. scanf(3S)
input and format data from string ................................................................................................ scanf(3S)
input commands to shell ...................................................................................................................... sh(l)
input control, description of input control for terminal ...................................................................... tty( 4)
input/output between process and command .............................................................................. popen(3S)
input/output, description of buffered file ....................................................................................... stdio(3S)
input/output operation, get current byte offset of ......................................................................... fseek(3S)
input/output operation, reposition next ........................................................................................ fseek(3S)
input/output, output character/word to open file or standard output ........................................... putc(3S)
input/output, push character back into input stream ................................................................. ungetc(3S)
input/output redirection ...................................................................................................................... sh(l)
input/output, write string to open file or standard output ............................................................. puts(3S)
insert calls to getmsg using findstring output ..... ..................................... ................... .......... .... insertmsg( 1)
install ......................................................................................................................................... install(lM)
install commands into file system ............................................................................................... install(lM)
install object files in binary directories ......................................................................................... cpset(lM)
integer, get largest integer smaller than x ..................................................................................... floor(3M)
integer, get smallest integer larger than x ..................................................................................... floor(3M)
integers, convert between 3-byte and long ..................................................................................... l3tol(3C)
integer trap control ................................................................................................................ intrapoff(3M)
integrity check of operating system in SDF boot area(s) ............................................................... osck(1M)
interactive IMAGE database access ................................................................................................. query(l)
interactively write (talk) to another user ........................................................................................ write(l)
interface, description of hpib ............................................................................................................ hpib( 4)
interface to blocked/unblocked disc, description of ........................................................................... disci 4)
interface to terminal I/O, description of ............................................................................................. tty( 4)
interleave factor, establish for SDF volume ................................................................................ sdfinit(lM)
interprocess communication, create .................................................................................................. pipe(2)
inter-process communication facilities status ..................................................................................... ipcs(l)
inter-process communication routines ......................................................................................... stdipc(3C)
interrupt character, description of ...................................................................................................... tty(4)
intrapoff ................................................................................................................................. intrapoff(3M)
I/O between process and command ............................................................................................. popen(3S)
I/O, description of bufl'ered file ..................................................................................................... stdio(3S)
I/O operation, get current byte offset of ........................................................................................ fseek(3S)
I/O operation, reposition next ....................................................................................................... fseek(3S)
I/O, output character/word to open file or standard output .......................................................... putc(3S)
I/O, push character back into input stream ............................................................................... ungetc(3S)
I/O redirection .................................................................................................................................... sh(l)
I/O: GPIO routines (device I/O library) ..................................................................................... gpio_ *(31)
I/O: HP-IB routines (device I/O library) .................................................................................... hpib_ *(31)
I/O: I/O routines (device I/O library) ............................................................................................ io_ *(31)
I/O, write string to open file or standard output ........................................................................... puts(3S)
ioctl .................................................................................................................................................. ioctl(2)
ioctl(2) system calls, description of ..................................................................................................... tty(4)
iomap ............................................................................................................................................ iomap(4)

- 19 -

Permuted Index

ipcrm .............................................................................................................................................. ipcrm(l)
ipcs ................................................................................................................................................... ipcs(l)
isalnum ........................................................................................................................................ ctype(3C)
isalpha ........... .................................................................................................................... ........... ctype(3C)
isascii ............................................... ............................ .................................. .............................. ctype(3C)
isatty .................................................... ................................................................................... ttyname(3C)
iscntrl ........................................................ ................... ................................................................ ctype(3C)
isdigit ........................................................................................................................................... ctype(3C)
isgraph ......................................................................................................................................... ctype(3C)
islower ......................................................... ...... ............. ............................ .................................. ctype(3C)
isprint ....................................... ............................................................................................. ...... ctype(3C)
ispunct ................................................................................................ ........................... .............. ctype(3C)
isspace .......................................................................................................................................... ctype(3C)
issue identification file ..................................................................................................................... issue(5)
isupper ........... ........................................................ ...................................... .................. .............. ctype(3C)
isxdigit ......................................................................................... ......... ....... ................................ ctype(3C)
jO ................................................................................................................................................ bessel(3M)
j1 ................................................................................................................................................ bessel(3M)
jn ................................................................................................................................................ bessel(3M)
join .................................................................................................................................................... join(l)
join, perform join of two data base relations ....................................................................... .............. join(1)
kana8 ............................................................................................................................................. kana8(7)
kermit ........................................................................................................................................ kermit(lM)
key, generate encryption ........................................................................................................ makekey(lM)
kill ...................................................................................................................................................... kill(l)
kill character, description of ............................................................................................................... tty( 4)
killall ............................................................ ............................................................................... killall (1M)
I ............................................................................................................................................................ Is(l)
13tol ............................................................................................................................................... 13tol(3C)
164a ................................................................................................................................................ a641(3C)
langid ....................................... ................... .................. .......... ......... .......................................... ... langid(7)
langinfo .................................................................................................................................... langinfo(3C)
language identification variable ..................................................................................................... langid(7)
language information ............................ ........ ................. ....................... ......................... ........... langinfo(3C)
last-accessed time, update for file .................................................................................... touch(l), utime(2)
last-changed time, update for file .............. ......................................................................... ............ touch(1)
last-modified time, update for file ................................................................................... touch(l), utime(2)
Id ......................................................................................................................................................... Id(l)
Idexp ............................................................................................................................................ frexp(3C)
leave ................................................................................................................................................ leave(l)
length of string, get ..................................................................................................................... string(3C)
lex ...................................................................................................................................................... lex(l)
lexical analysis of text, generate programs for .................................................................................... lex(l)
libraries and archives, create and maintain .......................................................................................... ar(l)
library file format, description of ......................................................................................................... ar(5)
library file format, description of cpio archive format ....................................................................... cpio(5)
library, find ordering relation for object ......................................................................................... lorder(1)
library, table of contents format description .................................................................................. ranlib(5)
LIF directory, list contents of ............................................................................................................ lifls(l)
LIF file, remove ............................................................................................................................... lifrm(l)
LIF file, rename ........................................................................................................................ lifrename(l)
LIF files, copy in or out .................................................................................................................... lifcp(l)
LIF volume header, write on file ..................................................................................................... Iifinit(l)
lifcp .................... .............................................................................................................................. Iifcp( 1)
lifini t ............................................................................................................................................... lifini t (1)

- 20 -

Permuted Index

lills .............................................................................................................................. ....................... lills (1 )
lifrename ................................................................................................................................... lifrename(l)
lifrm ................................................................................................................................................. lifrm(l)
line .................................................................................................................................................... line(l)
line, copy from standard input to standard output ........................................................................... line(l)
line count ............................................................................................................................................ wc(l)
line length, put line length specifications in text files ...................................................................... fspec(5)
linear search and update ........................ ................................ ....... ............................................. Isearch(3C)
lines, count number contained in file .................................................................................................. wc(l)
lines, find common lines in two files ............................................................................................... comm(l)
lines, find unique lines in two files ................................................................................................. comm(l)
lines, merge in one or more files ...................................................................................................... paste(l)
link .................................................................................................................................... link(IM), link(2)
link, copy, or move files ....................................................................................................................... cp(l)
link, create to or remove from file ..................................................................... link(IM), link(2), unlink(2)
link editor ............................................................................................................................................ ld(l)
link information utility, object files ............................................................................................ linkinfo(l)
linker .................................................................................................................................................... Id(l)
linker/assembler executable output file, description of .................................................................... a.out(5)
linkinfo ........................................................................................................................................ linkinfo(l)
lint .. ............................................ ............................. ........... ............................................................... lint (1)
list active processes in system .............................................................................................................. ps(l)
list contents of ElF directories .......................................................................................................... bills(l)
list contents of directories ..................................................................................................................... Is(l)
list contents of LIF directory ............................................................................................................. lills(l)
list current users on system .............................................................................................................. who(l)
list device drivers ............................................................................................................................ Isdev(l)
list file names with associated i-nodes ....................................................................................... ncheck(IM)
list spooled uucp transactions grouped by transaction ...................................................................... uuls(l)
list users and their current processes ......................................................................................... whodo(1M)
II ........................................................................................................................................................... Is(l)
In ......................................................................................................................................................... cp(l)
localtime ...................................................................................................................................... ctime(3C)
locate files in file system .................................................................................................................... find(l)
locate source, binary, and/or manual for program ....................................................................... whereis(l)
lock ................................................................................................................................................... lock(l)
lock process, text, or data in memory....................... ........... ............................... ............................ plock(2)
lock terminal ..................................................................................................................................... lock(l)
lockf ................ ................ ...................... ....................................... ......... ........................................... lockf(2)
lock/unlock process address space or segment ............................................................................. memlck(2)
log .................................................................................................................................................. exp(3M)
log gamma function .................................................................................................................. gamma(3M)
log results of work requests on remote system ........................................................................... uucico(IM)
loglO ............................................................................................................................................... exp(3M)
logarithm, common ......................................................................................................................... exp(3M)
logarithm, natural .......................................................................................................................... exp(3M)
logging file for system errors .......................................................................................................... errfile(5)
logging in on HP-UX ....................................................................................................................... login(l)
logical block, set number of bytes per logical block .................................................................... sdfinit(IM)
Logical Interchange Format description ............................................................................................... lif(5)
login ................................................................................................................................................ login(l)
login, establish baud rate and communication with terminal during ............................................ getty(IM)
login name, get ..................................................................................................... logname(I), getlogin(3C)
login name, get ASCII string representing .. ............. .................. ...... ... .................................. ..... cuserid(3S)
login name, print .................................................................................................................................. id(l)

- 21 -

Permuted Index

login name, record for each user (accounting) ................................................................................. utmp(5)
login shell, change default ................................................................................................................ chsh(l)
login time, record for each user (accounting) .................................................................................. utmp(5)
logname ...................................................................................................................................... logname(l)
logouts, run command immune to ................................................................................................. nohup(l)
long integer, convert to base-64 ASCII ........................................................................................... a641(3C)
long integer data access, machine independent ............................................................................. sputl(3X)
long integers, convert to/from 3-byte integers ............................................................................... 13tol(3C)
longjmp ...................................................................................................................................... setjmp(3C)
lorder ............................................................................................................................................. lorder(l)
lower-case to upper-case character conversion ............................................................................... conv(3C)
Is ........................................................................................................................................................... Is(l)
Isdev ................................................................................................................................................ lsdev(l)
Isearch .......... ................... ................... ......... ......... ........ ........... ................. ............................ ..... lsearch(3C)
lseek ................................................................................................................................................. Iseek(2)
Isf ......................................................................................................................................................... ls(l)
Isr ......................................................................................................................................................... ls(l)
lsx ......................................................................................................................................................... ls(l)
ltol3 ............................................................................................................................................... 13tol(3C)
m4 ...................................................................................................................................................... m4(1)
machid ......................................................................................................................................... machid(l)
machine ID, get ........................................................................................................... uname(I), uname(2)
machine processor type ................................................................................................................ machid(l)
machine-dependent values ...................... ......... ........ .................... ........... ................. ......... ............. values(7)
macro processor .................................................................................................................................. m4(1)
macros for formatting entries in the HP-UX Reference manual ........................................................ man(7)
macros for formatting text ...... ........... ....... .................... ... .................. ....... .......... ......... ......... ............ mm(7)
magic numbers, description of ........................................................................................................ magic(5)
magic.h, description of ................................................................................................................... magic (5)
magnetic tape, description of raw interface and controls .................................................................... mt( 4)
magnetic tape, manipulate and/or position ........................................................................................ mt(l)
mail .................................................................................................................................................. mail(l)
mail, read or send to other users ...................................................................................................... mail(l)
maintain libraries, archives .................................................................................................................. ar(l)
maintain, update, recompile programs ............................................................................................ make(l)
make ............................................................................................................................................... make(l)
make a BIF directory ................................................................................................................. bifmkdir(l)
make file system on special file ..................................................................................................... mkfs(IM)
make posters in large letters ......................................................................................................... banner(l)
make unprintable characters in a file visible or invisible ..................................................................... vis(l)
makekey ................................................................................................................................. makekey(IM)
malloc ......................................................................................................................................... malloc(3C)
man .................................................................................................................................................. man(l)
man macros, description of ............. ....... ......... ... ........... .......................... ..................... ....... ....... ....... man(7)
manage binary search trees ............................................................................ ,. .......... ............... tsearch(3C)
manage hash search tables ....................................................................................................... , hsearch(3C)
manipulate wtmp records .......................................................................................................... fwtmp(IM)
mantissa, get from floating point value .......... ...................... ...... .......... ................................. ........ frexp(3C)
manual, create preformatted manual pages for on-line ............................................................. catman(IM)
manual, on-line ................................................................................................................................. man(l)
manual page (on-line), locate for program ................................................................................... whereis(l)
map characters into other characters during copy to standard output ............................................ ,.... tr(l)
mapping, physical address ............................................................................................................. iomap(4)
margins, put margin specifications in text files ................................................................................ fspec(5)
mark Command Set 80 cartridge tape ............................................................................................... tcio(l)

- 22 -

Permuted Index

mark SDF operating system file as loadable/non-loadable ........................................................ osmark(1M)
mark/unmark volume as HP-UX root volume ....................................................................... rootmark(1M)
mask, get/set file-creation .................................................................................. sh(1), umask(1), umask(2)
master device information table ......... .......... ........... .......... ....... ................... ......... .................... ..... master( 5)
math ............................................................................................................................................... math(7)
math functions and constants ......................................................................................................... math(7)
mathematical error handling ................................................................................................... matherr(3M)
matherr ................................................................................................................................... matherr(3M)
MC68000 assembler ............................................................................................................................. as(l)
mediainit .................................................................................................................................. mediainit(l)
memadvise ............................................................................................................................. memadvise(2)
memallc ...................................................................................................................................... memallc(2)
memberships, show group ............................................................................................................. groups(l)
memchmd ............................................................................................................................... memchmd(2)
memfree ..................................................................................................................................... memallc(2)
memlck ........................................................................................................................................ memlck(2)
memory .................................................................................................................................... memory(3C)
memory, allocate a block of ........................................................................................................ malloc(3C)
memory, allocate for array ......................................................................................................... malloc(3C)
memory, change size of previously-allocated block ..................................................................... malloc(3C)
memory, deallocate block of ....................................................................................................... malloc(3C)
memory management, inform operating system about segment reference patterns ................ memadvise(2)
memory management, modify segment length .......................................................................... memvary(2)
memory operations ................................................................................................................... memory(3C)
memory segment access modes, change ................................................................................... memchmd(2)
memory space, allocate and free ................................................................................................. memallc(2)
memory, write to disc ......................................................................................................... sync(2), sync(l)
memulck ...................................................................................................................................... memlck(2)
memvary ................................................................................................................................... memvary(2)
merge contents of several files ........................................................................................................... sort(l)
merge lines in one or more files ....................................................................................................... paste(l)
merge or add total accounting files ........................................................................................ acctmerg(lM)
mesg ................................................................................................................................................ mesg(l)
message catalogs: MPE/RTE ..................................................................................................... catread(3C)
message control operations ............................................................................................................ msgctl(2)
message operations ........................................................................................................................ msgop(2)
messages, permit/deny to your terminal ......................................................................................... mesg(1)
messages, read or send to other users ............................................................................................... mail(l)
messages, send to all users ............................................................................................................. wall(lM)
messages, send to another user interactively ................................................................................... write(l)
mkdev ........................................................................................................................................ mkdev(lM)
mkdir ............................................................................................................................................. mkdir(l)
mkdir ............................................................................................................................................. mkdir(2)
mkfs ............................................................................................................................................. mkfs(lM)
mklp ............................................................................................................................................ mklp(lM)
mknod ...................................................................................................................... mknod(2), mknod(lM)
mknod.h, description of ................................................................................................................ mknod(5)
mkstr ............................................................................................................................................. mkstr(l)
mktemp ................................................................................................................................... mktemp(3C)
mm ................................................................................................................................................... mm(l)
mm macros, description of ................................................................................................................ mm(7)
mm macros, print documents formatted with ................................................................................... mm(l)
mnttab table, create .................................................................................................................. setmnt(lM)
mnttab.h, description of .............................................................................................................. mnttab(5)
mod function, floating point .......................................................................................................... floor(3M)

- 23 -

Permuted Index

mode, change for file ......................... ,.......................................................................... chmod(l), chmod(2)
model, Native Language Support .................................................................................................... hpnls(7)
model.h, description of ................................................................................................................... model(5)
modem ......................................................................................................................................... modem(4)
modem control special file ............................................................................................................ modem(4)
modf ............................................................................................................................................. frexp(3C)
modify parameters of SCCS files ................................................................................................... admin(1)
modify segment length .............................................................................................................. memvary(2)
monitor ............... ........ ...... ............ ......... .......... ............................ .................................... ........ monitor(3C)
monitor uucp network ................................................................................................................ uusub(lM)
more ................................................................................................................................................ more(l)
mount ....................................................................................................................... mount(lM), mount(2)
mount or unmount file system ............................................................... mount(lM), mount(2), umount(2)
mounted devices, create table of ........... .......... .......... ................. ... .......................... .................. setmnt(1M)
mounted devices, table of those mounted by mount(lM) ............................................................ mnttab(5)
mounted file system, find special file associated with ................................................................. devnm(lM)
mounted file system statistics ......................................................................................................... ustat(2)
move a directory ....... ......... ..... ....... ........................... ............ ................. ......................... ............ mvdir(lM)
move, link, or copy files ....................................................................................................................... cp(l)
move read/write file pointer; seek .................................................................................................... Iseek(2)
move to new working directory ................................................................................... cd(l), sh(1), chdir(2)
msgctl ........................................................................................................................................... msgctl(2)
msgget .......................................................................................................................................... msgget(2)
msgop ............................................................................................................................................ msgop(2)
mt ....................................................................................................................................................... mt(l)
mUltiple line-feeds, remove from output ............................................................................................. ssp(l)
mv ....................................................................................................................................................... cp(l)
mvdir .......................................................................................................................................... mvdir(lM)
name, get login ..................................................................................................... logname(l), getiogin(3C)
name list (symbol table), extract entries from executable file's name list ...................................... nlist(3C)
name list (symbol table), print from object file .................................................................................. nm(1)
Native Language Support model ..................................................................................................... hpnls(7)
natural logarithm ........................................................................................................................... exp(3M)
ncheck ....................................................................................................................................... ncheck(lM)
network, monitor uucp activity on ... ........... .......... ..................... ........ ......... ................... ............ uusub(1M)
network special file, create ....................................................................................... mknod(2), mknod(lM)
new file system ............................................................................................................................ newfs(lM)
newfs ........................................................................................................................................... newfs(lM)
newfs ........................................................................................................................................... newfs(lM)
newgrp ............................................................................................................................... newgrp(l), sh(l)
new-line character, description of ....................................................................................................... tty( 4)
new-line characters, remove extras from file .................................................................................... rmnl(l)
news ................................................................................................................................................ news(l)
news, print current events ............................................................................................................... news(l)
nice ...................................................................................................................................... nice(l), nice(2)
nlist ..................................... ............... ......... ......... ............................... .......................................... nlist(3C)
nlist structure format ................... ....... ..................... ............................ ......... ........................... ... ..... nlist (5)
NLS character classification ................................................................................................... nl_ctype(3C)
NLS character set collating sequence tables ................ ........... ....... .................... ..... col--seq_8, col--seq_16
NLS character sets ......................................................................................... ascii(7), kana8(7), roman8(7)
NLS model.... ........... .................. ............................. ..................... ...... ........................... ........... ....... hpnls(7)
NLS native language information ............................................................................................. langinfo(3C)
NLS non-ASCII string collation .................. .................. ...................................... .................... nl--string(3C)
NLS translate characters ......................................................................................................... nl_conv(3C)
nl--string ............................................................................................................................... nLstring(3C)

- 24 -

Permuted Index

(
"-

nm ..................................................................................................................................................... nm(1)
nodename, get ........................................................................................... revision(1), uname(1), uname(2)
nodename, set/print name of current ....................................................................................... hostname(1)
nohup ............................................................................................................................................ nohup(1)
non-ASCII string collation used by NLS ................................................................................. nL.Etring(3C)
nroff ........... ......... ......................... ............................... ........... .................. .......... .......... .................... nroff( 1)
nroff, format tables for .......... ........... .......... ............................................... .......................................... tbl( 1)
nroff, interpret output from nroff for printing .................................................................................... col(1)
nroff, troff, tbl, cqn constructs, remove from text .......................................................................... deroff(1)
numbered-argument print output formatting ......................................................................... printmsg(3C)
object code, locate for program .................................................................................................... whereis(1)
object file, debugger for ..................................................................................................................... adb(1)
object file, extract symbol table (name list) entries from ............................................................... nlist(3C)
object file, get size of ......................................................................................................................... size(1)
object file link information utility ...................... ..................................................... ..................... linkinfo( 1)
object file, print symbol table (name list) of ...................................................................................... nm(1)
object file, remove symbol table and relocation bits from ................................................................ strip(1)
object files, combine into program ....................................................................................................... Id(1)
object library, find ordering relation for ......................................................................................... lorder(1)
octal, hexadecimal dump ..................................................................................................................... od(1)
od ........................................................................................................................................................ od(1)
on-line manual command ................................................................................................................. man(l)
on-line manual, create preformatted manual pages for ............................................................. catman(1M)
open ................................................................................................................................................. open(2)
open a file and assign buffering to it ............ ... ......... .......... ........ ................................................... fopen(3S)
open file, assign buffering to ........................................................................................................ setbuf(3S)
open file descriptor, duplicate .......................................................................................................... dup2(2)
open file for reading or writing ........................................................................................................ open(2)
operating system, append to an existing operating system ............................................................ oscp(IM)
operating system, change to different as or different version of same as ................................. chsys(1M))
operating system, check integrity of as in SDF boot area(s) ........................................................ osck(1M)
operating system, copy from one or more SDF boot areas to another ........................................... oscp(IM)
operating system, create new operating system from ordinary files ............................................... oscp(1M)
operating system management package description .................................................................... osmgr(IM)
operating system, mark as loadable or non-Ioadable ................................................................. osmark(1M)
operating system, shut down as with optional re-boot ............................................................ stopsys(1M)
operating system, split into one or more ordinary files . ... ........ .................. ....... ............................. oscp( 1M)
optarg ......................................................................................................................................... getopt(3C)
opterr .............................................. ........ ............ .......... ................................... .......... ................ getopt (3C)
optimization routines: CRT screen and cursor control ................................................................ curses (3X)
optind ............................................ .............................. .......................... ................... .................. get opt (3C)
option letter, get from argv ........................................................................................................ getopt(3C)
options, parse command line ...................... .................... .......... ................ ..................... ... ............. getopt(1)
options, set for terminal .... ................................................................... ............................ ................. stty( 1)
options, set shell .................................................................................................................................. sh(l)
opx25 .......................................................................................................................................... opx25(IM)
ordering relation, find for object library or archive file .................................................................. lorder(1)
ordinary file, create ...................................................................................................................... mknod(2)
ordinary file, create or overwrite ..................................................................................................... creat(2)
as, append to an existing operating system .... ...................................................... ........ ......... ...... oscp(1M)
as, change to different as or different version of same as ........................................................ chsys(1M)
as, check integrity of operating system in SDF boot area(s) ........................................................ osck(1M)
as, copy from one or more SDF boot areas to another ................................................................ oscp(1M)
as, create new operating system from ordinary files ..................................................................... oscp(IM)
as management package description .......................................................................................... osmgr(IM)

- 25 -

Permuted Index

as,
as,
as,

mark as loadable or non-loadable ...................................................................................... osmark(lM)
shut down operating system with optional re-boot ............................................................ stopsys(lM)
split operating system into one or more ordinary files ............................................................ oscp(lM)
osck ............................................................................................................................................... osck(lM)
oscp ............................................................................................................................................... oscp(lM)
osmark ...................................................................................................................................... osmark(lM)
osmgr ......................................................................................................................................... osmgr(lM)
output character or word to open file or standard output .............................................................. putc(3S)
output, description of formatted/unformatted output to printer ......................................................... lp( 4)
output, description of system handling of terminal output ................................................................. tty( 4)
output, print formatted data into string ...................................................................................... printf(3S)
output, print formatted data on buffered open file ....................................................................... printf(3S)
output, print formatted data on standard output ........................................................................ printf(3S)
output string to open file or standard output ................................................................................. puts(3S)
overlay program onto existing process and execute ................................................................ sh(l), exec(2)
overview of accounting commands ................................................................................................. acct(lM)
owner, change for file .................................................................................................... chown(l), chown(2)
page ................................................................................................................................................. more(l)
page size, set for paged data ........ .................... ........... .............................................................. uconfig( 1M)
paged data, set for program ............................ .......... .......... ........ .................. .................................. chatr(1)
paging and swapping enable ..................................................................................................... swapon(lM)
PAM ................................................................................................................................................. pam(l)
parameter substitution ........................................................................................................................ sh(l)
parameters, environment ................................................................................................... sh(l), environ(7)
parameters, install in environment ...................................................................................................... sh(l)
parameters, mark as readonly .............................................................................................................. sh(l)
parameters, perform left-shift on positional ......................................................................................... sh(l)
parameters, set for terminal .............................................................................................................. stty(l)
parameters, set for terminal on login. .......... ................... ........... ......... ................. ...... ..... .......... ......... tset(1)
parent process ID, get for process ................... ............................................... ......... ....................... getpid (2)
parity, settings for terminal ................................................................................................................ tty( 4)
parse command line options .......................................................................................................... getopt(l)
Pascal compiler ................................................................................................................................... pc(l)
passwd ......................................................................................................................................... passwd(l)
password, change login ................................................................................................................ passwd(l)
password encryption ..................................................................................................................... crypt(3C)
password file, close ................................................................................................................. getpwent(3C)
password file, description of ......................................................................................................... passwd(5)
password file, get line containing matching user ID ................. .... ......... ................. ..................... getpw(3C)
password file, output line similar to those contained in ......................................................... putpwcnt(3C)
password file, read one line from ............................................................................................ getpwent(3C)
password file, rewind .............................................................................................................. getpwent(3C)
password file, search for matching user ID .......................... ... ........ ................... ................ ..... getpwent(3C)
password file, search for matching user name ......................................................................... getpwent(3C)
password, read from /dev /tty or standard input ...................................................................... getpass(3C)
password/ group file checkers ................................................... ........ .................. .................... ...... pwck (1M)
paste ............................................................................................................................................... paste(l)
path name, get for terminal ..................................................................................................... ttyname(3C)
path name, isolate directory name from ................................................................................... basename(l)
path name, isolate file name from ............................................................................................ basename(l)
pattern, find and process within text ................................................................................................ awk(l)
pattern, search contents of file for .................................................................................................... grep(l)
pause .............................................................................................................................................. pause(2)
pause, suspend process for interval ............................................................................................... sleep(3C)
pc ........................................................................................................................................................ pc(l)

- 26 -

Permuted Index

pclose ........................................................................................................................................... popen(3S)
PEEKC ....... ......... ...................................................... ... ............... ............ ...................................... regexp(7)
periodic, automatic sync ................................................................................................................ syncer(1)
permission bits, change for file ..................................................................................... chmod(1), chmod(2)
per-process accounting file format ..................................................................................................... acct(5)
perror .......................................................................................................................................... perror(3C)
personal applications manager, a command shell .............................................................................. pam(1)
physical address mapping .............................................................................................................. iomap(4)
pipe .................................................................................................................................................. pipe(2)
pipe, create/close between process and command ........................................................................ popen(3S)
pipe, get intermediate data from ................. ............................................ ................... ............ ............ tee(1)
pipeline, create ................................................................................................................................. pipe(2)
pipeline, get intermediate data from ................................................................................................... tee(1)
place error messages from C source into a file ....... ....... .............................. ................................ .... mkstr( 1)
plock ............................................................................................................................................... plock(2)
plotter, description of hpib interface to ............................................................................................ hpib( 4)
popen ........................................................................................................................................... popen(3S)
port, database listing terminal type connected to each ................................................................ ttytype(5)
portable code between HP-UX implementations, typedefs for ....................................................... model(5)
position magnetic tape ..... ....... ........ .......... .......... ........ .................. .................... .................... ........ ...... mt( 1)
positional parameters, perform left-shift on ......................................................................................... sh(1)
posters, make using large letters ................................................................................................... banner(1)
pow ................................................................................................................................................ exp(3M)
power function ............................................................................................................................... exp(3M)
powerfail .................................... ............................................... ..................................... ................. brc (1M)
pr ......................................................................................................................................................... pr(1)
prealloc ...................................................................................................... .................... ............. prealloc (1)
preallocate disc storage ......... ............................ ................... ................... .................................... prealloc (1)
preprocessor for C compiler .... ........ .................. ............................ ......... .......... .......... ................ ........ cpp(1)
print and format files ...... ......... ....... ......... ......... ............ .................. ..... .............. ......... .......... .... ........... pr( 1)
print and summarize an SCCS file ..................................................................................................... prs(1)
print arguments after shell interpretation ........................................................................................ echo(1)
print, copy, and/or concatenate files .................................................................................................. cat(1)
print current SCCS file editing activity ............................................................................................ sact(1)
print documents formatted with mm macros .................................................................................... mm(1)
print effective current user id ...................................................................................................... whoami(1)
print formatted data on standard output, open file, or string ...................................................... printf(3S)
print formatted output from varargs argument list .................................................................... vprintf(3S)
print formatted output with numbered arguments ................................................................. printmsg(3C)
print last part of file .......................................................................................................................... tail(l)
print list of users and their current processes ............................................................................ whodo(1M)
print name list (symbol table) of object file ....................................................................................... nm(1)
print name of current working directory..... ......... .......... ................... ....... ......... ................ ................ pwd( 1)
print news items .............................................................................................................................. news(1)
print time and date .......................................................................................................................... date(1)
print user, group IDs and names .......................................................................................................... id(1)
printer, description of formatted/unformatted output ......................................................................... Ip(4)
printer, description of hpib interface to ............................................................................................ hpib(4)
printer options, set .. ......... ......... .......... ... ........ ............ ..... .... .............. .......... ....... ............... .......... ....... slp( 1)
printf ............................................................................................................................................ printf(3S)
printmsg ................................................................................................................................. printmsg(3C)
priority, run command at lower or higher ............................................................................ nice(1), nice(2)
privileged values format ............................................................................................................... privgrp(5)
procedures: shell procedures for accounting ........................................................... ,. ...... ... .......... acctsh(1M)
process accounting .................................................................................................................... acctprc(1M)

- 27 -

Permuted Index

process accounting commands .................................................................................................... acctcom(l)
process and system state initialization ............................................................................................ init(lM)
process, change data segment space allocation for ............................................................................. brk(2)
process, change root directory of .................................................................................. chroot(l), chroot(2)
process, create a new ........................................................................................................................ fork(2)
process, create/close pipe between process and command ............................................................ popen(3S)
process, enable break-point debugging of child process .................................................................. ptrace(2)
process, format of core image of terminated process ......................................................................... core(5)
process, get ID, group ID, and parent process ID of ...................................................................... getpid(2)
process, get real/effective user and real/effective group ID's for .................................................... getuid(2)
process, get/set file size limit for .................................................................................................... ulimit(2)
process group ID, set ................................................................................................................... setpgrp(2)
process, lock/unlock address space or segment ............................................................................ memlck(2)
process number, get ............................................................................................. ;......................... getpid(2)
process, overlay new program onto existing ........................................................................... sh(1), exec(2)
process, print accumulated user and system time elapsed for .............................................................. sh(l)
process, send SIGIOT to .............................................................................................................. abort(3C)
process, send signal to ........................................................................................... kill(I), kill(2), abort(3C)
process, set group ID for ............................................................................................................. setpgrp(2)
process status, report ......................................... .................. .......... ...................................................... pst l)
process, suspend execution for interval of time ............................................................... sleep(I), sleep(3C)
process, suspend until signal ........................................................................................................... pause(2)
process, terminate ........................................................................... kill(I), sh(I), exit(2), kill(2), abort(3C)
process, time execution of ............................................................................................................... times(2)
process, wait for completion of .................................................................................. sh(1), wait(l), wait(2)
processes, list active ............................................................................................................................. ps(l)
processes, send signal to all user processes ................. ............. .................... ................................ killall(1M)
processes, specify maximum number of processes per user .............................. .................... ...... uconfig(1M)
processes, terminate all user processes .................................................................................. shutdown(IM)
processor type .......................... .................................................................................................... machid( l)
prof .............................................................. ..................................................................................... prof( I)
profil ............................................................................................................................................... profil(2)
profile, create for program during execution .............................................................. profil(2), monitor(3C)
profile data, display ........................................................................ .................................................. prof( I)
profile files, description of /etc/profile and $HOMEj.profile ......................................................... profile(5)
program, add diagnostics to ........................................................................................................ assert (3X)
program, change internal attributes of ............................................................................................ chatr(l)
program, check/verify C .................................................................................................................... lint(l)
program, create execution profile for ......................................................................... profil(2), monitor(3C)
program, create from object files .......................................................................................................... Id(l)
program, debugger for ....................................................................................................................... adb(l)
program, execute command from ................................................................................................ system(3S)
program, force action associated with signal to be taken ............................................................ ssignal(3C)
program, format C .............................................................................................................................. cb(l)
program, generate for lexical analysis of text ...................................................................................... lex(l)
program, get particular addresses associated with .......................................................................... end(3C)
program, get size of ........................................................................................................................... size(l)
program, locate source, binary, and/or on-line manual page for .................................................. whereis(l)
program, maintain, update, and recompile ...................................................................................... make(l)
program, overlay onto existing process and execute ............................................................... sh(I), exec(2)
program, run immune to hangups, logouts, and quits ................................................................... nohup(l)
program, set up signal handling for ............................................................................ signal(2), ssignal(3C)
program verification ......... .......... ...... .............. ................... .................. .................................... .... assert(3X)
provide semaphores and record locking on files ........................... ........ ............................................. lockf(2)
provide truth value about your processor type ............................................................................ machid(1)

- 28 -

Permuted Index

prs ...................................................................................................................................................... prs(l)
ps ......................................................................................................................................................... ps(l)
pseudo-random number generator ............................................................................................ drand48(3C)
pseudo-random numbers .......................................................................................................... drand48(3C)
pseudo-terminal driver ....................................................................................................................... pty( 4)
ptrace ............................................................................................................................................ ptrace(2)
pty ..................................................................................................................................................... pty( 4)
public UNIX-to-UNIX file copy ......................................................................................................... uuto(l)
push character back into input stream .................................. ........... ........ ........ ..................... ..... ungetc(3S)
putc ................................................................................................................................................ putc(3S)
putchar .......................................................................................................................................... putc(3S)
putenv ....................................................................................................................................... putenv(3C)
putpwent ............................................................................................................................... putpwent(3C)
puts ................................................................................................................................................ puts(3S)
putw ............................................................................................................................................... putc(3S)
pwck ............................................................................................................................................ pwck(lM)
pwd .................................................................................................................................................. pWd(l)
pwd.h ........................................................................................................................................... passwd(5)
Pythagorean theorem function .................................................................................................... hypot(3M)
qsort ................................... .......... ....... ......... ..................... .......... ........................... ...................... qsort(3C)
query .............................................................................................................................................. query(l)
quit character, description of .............................................................................................................. tty( 4)
quits, run command immune to .................................................................................................... nohup(l)
quoting, as used by the shell ................................................................................................................ sh(l)
rand .............................................................................................................................................. rand(3C)
random number generator ....................................................................................................... drand48(3C)
random number generator ............................................................................................................. rand(3C)
randomized library /archive, table of contents format description .................................................. ranlib(5)
ranlib.h, description of ................................................................................................................... ranlib(5)
raw interface to disc, description of ................................................................................................... disc( 4)
raw mode, description of raw mode interface to magnetic tape .......................................................... mt( 4)
raw mode, description of raw output to printer ................................................................................... Ip(4)
rc .................................................................................................................................................... brc(lM)
read ........................................................................................................................................ sh(l), read(2)
read and format data from buffered open file ................................................................................ scanf(3S)
read and format data from standard input .................................................................................... scanf(3S)
read and format data from string .................................................................................................. scanf(3S)
read character from buffered open file ............................................................................................ getc(3S)
read error indicator on open file ................................................................................................... ferror(3S)
read from a file using buffers ...... ...................................... ..................................... ................... ..... fread(3S)
read from file .................................................................................................................................... read(2)
read from standard input .................................................................................................................... sh(l)
read operation, reposition next ...................................................................................................... fseek(3S)
read password from / dey /tty or standard input ........ ................... ............................................ getpass(3C)
read text in convenient chunks on soft-copy terminal ..................................................................... more(l)
read word from buffered open file ................................................................................................... getc(3S)
read-ahead, set number of buffers allocated to .................................................... ...................... uconfig(1M)
readonly ............................................................................................................................................... sh(l)
read/write file pointer, move (seek) ................................................................................................. Iseek(2)
real group ID, get for process ........................................................................................................ getuid(2)
real user ID, get for process ........................................................................................................... getuid(2)
realloc ......................................................................................................................................... malloc(3C)
real-time priority, change or read ................................................................................................. rtprio(2)
real-time priority, execute process with ........................................................................................ rtprio(l)
reblock tape file ................................................................................................................................... dd(l)

- 29 -

Permuted Index

reboot ........................................................................................................................................ reboot(IM)
reboot ............................................................................................................................................ reboot(2)
re-boot operating system after shut-down ................................................................................ stopsys(IM)
reboot system ............................................................................................................................. reboot(IM)
reboot the system .......................................................................................................................... reboot(2)
record locking and semaphores on files ............................................................................................ lockf(2)
record login names, login times, and tty names for user ................................................................. utmp(5)
regexp.h, description of ................................................................................................................. regexp(7)
regular expression compile and match routines . .......... ....... ................ ............ ....... ... ....... ......... ..... regexp(7)
relational database operator .............................................................................................................. join(l)
release blocked signals and wait for interrupt ............................................................................ sigpause(2)
release Command Set 80 cartridge tape ............................................................................................. tcio(l)
release number, get current ....................................................................... revision(I), uname(I), uname(2)
relocation bits, remove from object file .... ... ...... .... ...... ... .... ... ........ ............ ........ ........ ............ ........ ... strip(1)
remind you when you have to leave ................................................................................................ leave(l)
remind you when you have to leave ................................................................................................ leave(l)
reminder service ............................ ........... ..................................... ............................................. calendar( 1)
remote system, execute work requests on ...................................................................... uucico(1M), uux(l)
remove a directory file .................................................................................................................... rmdir(2)
remove a LIF file ... ................ ......... ......... ... ........... ............... ....... .... ................................... .......... ... Iifrm(1)
remove backing store devices ........................................................................................................... vson(2)
remove BIF files or directories ........................................................................................................ bifrm (1)
remove delta from SCCS file .......................................................................................................... rmdel(l)
remove duplicate lines in file ............................................................................................................ uniq(l)
remove extra new-line characters from file ....................................................................................... rmnl(l)
remove files or directories .................. ...... ... ......... ....... ... .............. ..... .................. ................... ............. rm(1)
remove link to file .......................................................................................................... Iink(IM), unlink(2)
remove message queue .................................................................................................................... ipcrm(l)
remove multiple line-feeds from output .......................... ................. .......... ........... ..... .......... .... ...... ..... ssp(1)
remove nroff/troff, tbl, and eqn constructs ........................................................... ;......................... deroff(l)
remove selected fields from each line of a file ..................................................................................... cut(l)
remove selected table column entries from file ................................................................................... cut(l)
remove semaphore set .................................................................................................................... ipcrm(l)
remove shared memory id .............................................................................................................. ipcrm(l)
remove symbol table and relocation bits from object file ................................................................. strip(l)
rename LIF files ........................................................................................................................ Iifrename(l)
repair file system inconsistencies ................................................................................... fsck(1M), fsdb(IM)
report inter-process communication facilities status .......................................................................... ipcs(l)
report number of free disc blocks ..................................................................................................... bifdf(l)
report CPU time used ................................................................................................................... c1ock(3C)
reserve a terminal ............................................................................................................................. 10ck(l)
reset error indicator on open file .. ............ .......... .................. ......... .................................... ......... ... ferror(3S)
RETURN . .................. ...................... ......... ...................................... ....... ....... .... ......... ........ ........... regexp(7)
revck ........................................................................................................................................... revck(IM)
reverse line-feeds and backspaces, interpret for nroff(l) ...................................................................... col(l)
reverse previous get(1) of SCCS file ................................................................................................ ungct(l)
reVISIon ....................................................................................................................................... revision(l)
revision information, get HP-UX ................................................................................................. revision(l)
revision numbers, check for HP-UX files ..................................................................................... revck(lM)
rewind .. .... .......... ......................... ........ ............................ ............................ ........ ...................... .... fseek(3S)
rewind a file . ..................... ................... ......... .......... ........... ......... ...... ....... ..... ............................ ..... fseek(3S)
rewind group file ...................................................................................................................... getgrent(3C)
rewind magnetic tape ......................................................................................................................... mt(l)
rewind password file ............................................................................................................... getpwent(3C)
rm ....................................................................................................................................................... rm(l)

- 30 -

Permuted Index

rmail ................................................................................................................................................. mail(1)
rmdel .............................................................................................................................................. rmdel(1)
rmdir .................................................................................................................................................. rm(1)
rmdir .............................................................................................................................................. rmdir(2)
rmnl ................................................................................................................................................. rmnl(1)
romanS ................................................................... ................. ........... ........ ........... ...................... romanS(7)
root directory, change for duration of command ........................................................... chroot(1), chroot(2)
root volume, mark/unmark volume as HP-UX root volume .................................................. rootmark(1M)
rootmark ............................................................................................................................... rootmark(1M)
rtprio ............................................................................................................................................. rtprio(1)
run a command at low priority ............................................................................................ nice(1), nice(2)
run a command immune to hangups, logouts, and quits ............................................................... nohup(1)
run daily accounting ................................................................................................................ runacct(1M)
runacct ..................................................................................................................................... runacct(1M)
CPU time report ........................................................................................................................... c1ock(3C)
CS/80 cartridge tape special file ............................................................................................................ ct( 4)
GPIO routines (device I/O library) ............................................................................................. gpio_*(3I)
HALGOL programs ..................................................................................................................... opx25(1M)
HP-lB routines (device I/O library) ............................................................................................ hpib_ *(31)
IMAGE database access .................................................................................................................. query(1)
I/O routines (device I/O library) .................................................................................................... io_*(31)
KERMIT-protocol file transfer program ...................................................................................... kermit(1M)
LP spooler system, configure ........................................................................................................ mklp(1M)
MPE/RTE-style message catalog support .................................................................................. catread(3C)
MPE/RTE-style message catalog support .................................................................................. catread(3C)
UUCP system snapshot ................................................................................................................ uusnap(1)
XMODEM protocol file transfer program. ............... ... ...... ... .... ...... ........ ....... .................. .......... umodem(1M)
XMODEM protocol file transfer program ................................................................................. umodem(1M)
sact ................................................................................................................................................... sact(1)
sbrk ................................................................................................................................................... brk(2)
scan text for pattern and process ...................................................................................................... awk(1)
scanf .............................................................................................................................................. scanf(3S)
sees, ask for help concerning .......................................................................................................... help(1)
SCCS file, change delta commentary of ........... .......... ............ ...... ... ...... .................. .... ....... ... ....... ...... cdc( 1)
SCCS file, check for validity........ .......... ......... ............ .............. .... ...... .......... ................................ ...... val( 1)
SCCS file, compare two versions of .. ..... .... ......... ...... ............. ................... ....... ................. ..... ....... sccsdiff(1)
SCCS file, create delta (change) for ...... ...... ............ ....... ........ ............ ................. ... ................ .......... delta(1)
SCCS file, description of sces file format ................................................................................... sccsfile(5)
secs file, get identification information from ............ .......... ............ ....... .... ......... .......... ..... ............ what( 1)
sces file, get version of ..................................................................................................................... get(l)
SCCS file, print and summarize .. ......... ........ ....................................... .................. ................... .......... prs( 1)
SCCS file, print current editing activity for ...................................................................................... sact(1)
secs file, print delta summary of ...................................................................................................... get(1)
sees file, remove delta from ......................................................................................................... rmdel(1)
sees file, reverse previous get(1) of .............................................................................................. unget(1)
sees files, create or change parameters of ................................................................................... admin(1)
sccsdiff .............................. ................................... ................................................ ........................ sccsdiff( 1)
schedule commands at specified daters) and timers) ........................................................... at(l), cron(lM)
screen handling and optimization routines .................................................................................. curses(3X)
SDF boot area, copy as from one or more SDF boot areas to another ........................................ oscp(lM)
SDF, description of ............................................................................................................................. dir(5)
SDF, description of SDF volume .......................................................................................................... fs(5)
SDF volume, format, initialize, and certify ................................................................................ sdfinit(lM)
sdfinit ......................................................................................................................................... sdfinit(lM)
search an ASCII file for pattern ........................ ......... ........... ....... ......... ..... ....... ......... ..... ............ ...... grep(1)

- 31 -

Permuted Index

search tables, hash-coded .......................................................................................................... hsearch(3C)
security control, dialup ................................................................................................................ dialups(5)
sed ..................................................................................................................................................... sed(l)
seek to new position in file ............................................................................................................... Iseek(2)
segment length, modify ............................................................................................................. memvary(2)
segment, lock/unlock for process ................................................................................................. memlck(2)
segment reference patterns, inform operating system about ................................................... memadvise(2)
select ............................................................................................................................... ............... select(2)
select/reject common lines of two files ........................................................................................... comm(l)
semaphore control operations ........................ ................................................................................ semctl(2)
semaphore operations .................................................................................................................... semop(2)
semaphores and record locking on files ............................................................................................ lockf(2)
semaphores, get ............................................................................................................................ semget(2)
semctl ............................................................................................................................................ semctl(2)
semget .......................................................................................................................................... semget(2)
semop ............................................................................................................................................ semop(2)
send mail to users or read mail ........................................................................................................ mail(l)
send signal to all user processes ............ ................. .................................................................. .... killall(1M)
set ........................................................................................................................................................ sh(l)
set current signal mask ........................................................................................................... sigsetmask(2)
set group access list .................................................................................................................. set groups (2)
set name of host cpu ............................................................................................................ sethostname(2)
set options for terminal port ............................... ........ ...................................................................... stty(l)
set or change real-time priority ...................................................................................................... rtprio(1)
set or print name of current host system ................................................................................. hostname(l)
set printer options .............................................................................................................................. slp(1)
set process's alarm clock ................................................................................................................ alarm(2)
set special attributes for group ............................................................................................. setprivgrp(lM)
set system parameters ..................... ......... ........ ........... ....... .......... .......... ......... ................. ........ uconfig( 1M)
set tabs on a terminal ....................................................................................................................... tabs(l)
set the modes of a terminal .......................................................................................................... getty(1M)
set time and date .............................................................................................................. date(1), stime(2)
set user and group IDs ................................................................................................................... setuid(2)
setbuf ........................................................................................................................................... setbuf(3S)
setgid ............................................................................................................................................. setuid(2)
setgrent ......................................................... .......................................................................... getgrent(3C)
set-group-ID bit, set/clear for file ................................................................................ chmod(l), chmod(2)
setgroups .............................. ...... ................................................. ................... .......................... setgroups(2)
sethostname .......... .................. ....... ...................................................................................... sethostname(2)
setitimer .................................................................................................................................... setitimer(2)
setjmp ........................................................................................................................................ setjmp(3C)
setkey ........................................................................................................................................... crypt(3C)
setmnt ....................................................................................................................................... setmnt(lM)
setpgrp ........................................................................................................................................ setpgrp(2)
setprivgrp ............................................................................................................................. setprivgrp(lM)
setprivgrp ...................................................................................................... setprivgrp(1M), setprivgrp(2)
setpwent ............................................................. .................. .................................................. getpwent(3C)
settimeofday ........................................................................................................................ settimeofday(2)
setuid ...................................................................... ....................................................................... setuid(2)
set-user-ID bit, set/clear for file ................................................................................... chmod(l), chmod(2)
sh ......................................................................................................................................................... sh(1)
shareable, mark or unmark program code as .................................................................................. chatr(1)
shared memory control operations ................................................................................................ shmctJ(2)
shared memory operations ............................................................................................................ shmop(2)
shared memory segment, get ........................................................................................................ shmget(2)

- 32 -

Permuted Index

shell ..................................................................................................................................................... sh(1)
shell, change default login ................................................................................................................ chsh(1)
shell command, issue from program ................................................................................... ......... system(3S)
shell, command, Personal Applications Manager .............................................................................. pam(1)
shell, input commands to ..................................................................................................................... sh(1)
shell procedures for accounting ........................ ... ....................................................................... acctsh( 1M)
shell programming language ................................................................................................................ sh(1)
shell scripts, system initialization .................................................................................................... brc(1M)
shell, set/clear flags to ......................................................................................................................... sh(1)
shift ..................................................................................................................................................... sh(1)
shmctl ........................................................................................................................................... shmctl(2)
shmget ......................................................................................................................................... shmget(2)
shmop ........................................................................................................................................... shmop(2)
show group memberships .............................................................................................................. groups(1)
shut down operating system with optional re-boot ................................................................... stopsys(1M)
shutdown .............................................................................................................................. shutdown(1M)
shutdown status of specified file system .................................................................................... fsclean(1M)
sigblock ......... ........ ................... ................. ........... .................... ................. ................. ..... ...... ...... sigblock( 2)
sign on .......... .................... ....... ......... ......... .......... ........ ......... .... ................. ................... .......... ......... login( 1)
signal .............................................................................................................................................. signal(2)
signal facilities, software ............................................................................................................ sigvector(2)
signal, force action associated with signal to be taken .............. ...... ............ .................. ........ ...... ssignal(3C)
signal handling for program, set up ............................................................................ signal(2), ssignal(3C)
signal mask, set ...................................................................................................................... sigsetmask(2)
signal, send SIGIOT to process .................................................................................................... abort(3C)
signal, send to all user processes .................................................................................................. killall(1M)
signal, send to process ........................................................................................... kill(1), kill(2), abort(3C)
signal, set trap for ............................................................................................................................... sh(1)
signal stack space ....................................................................................................................... sigspace(2)
signal, suspend process until receipt of ........................................................................................... pause(2)
signgam .......................................................................................... .......................................... gamma(3M)
signs, make using large letters ........................................................ ..................... ......................... banner( 1)
sigpause ....................................................... .................... ........ ..................... ........ .......... ............ sigpause( 2)
sigsetmask ......... ...................... ................ ................. ................................ ........ ...................... sigsetmask( 2)
sigspace ...................................................................................................................................... sigspace(2)
sigvector .................................................................................................................................... sigvector(2)
simple text formatter ..................................................................................................................... adjust(1)
sin ........ ............ ........ ................................... ........... .......... ......... ................. .................... ................ trig( 3M)
sine function ...... ............................................. ....................... ..... .................................... ................ trig(3M)
sine, hyperbolic .............................................................................................................................. sinh(3M)
sinh .................. ............................................. ................................................................................ sinh(3M)
size .................................................................................................................................................... size(1)
size of an object file ........................................................................................................................... size(1)
sleep ................................................................................................................................................ sleep(1)
sleep .................... ................... .... .............. .................. ..................... .......... .................................... sleep(3C)
sip ....................................................................................................................................................... slp(1)
snapshot of the UUCP system ...................................................................................................... uusnap(1)
software signal facilities ............................................................................................................. sigvector(2)
sort ................................................................................................................................................... sort(1)
sort algorithm ................................ ............................ ................................................................... qsort(3C)
sort and/or merge files ...................................................................................................................... sort(1)
sort, topological ............................................................................................................................... tsort(1)
source code, locate for program ................................................................................................... whereis(1)
spaces, convert to tabs, and vice versa ........................................................................................ expand(1)
special characters in terminal interface, description of ....................................... ................................ tty( 4)

- 33-

Permuted Index

special file, create block/character/network ......................................... mkdev(lM), mknod(2), mknod(1M)
special file, create fifo ............................................................................................... mknod(2), mknod(lM)
special file, identify for file name on mounted file system .......................................................... devnm(lM)
special file, modem control ........................................................................................................... modem(4)
special file, CS/80 cartridge tape ........................................................................................................... ct( 4)
special file, system "bit bucket" ........................................................................................................ null (4)
special files, perform functions on ........................................................................................ ioctl(2), stty(2)
special files, utilities used in creating special files ......................................................................... mknod(5)
spell ................................................................................................................................................. spell(l)
spellin .............................................................................................................................. ........ ......... spell (1 )
spelling errors, find ........................................................................................................................... spell(l)
spellout ........................... ... ....... ..................... .................. ........... ......... ......................... ....... ............ spell (1 )
split ......................... ............... .... ..... .......................................... .................. ............ ...... ................ ... split( 1)
split a file into pieces ........................................................................................................................ split(l)
split operating system into one or more ordinary files ..... ................... ........................................... oscp(1M)
spool directory clean-up for uucp ............................................................................................. uuclean(lM)
sprintf ........................................................................................................................................ ,. printf(3S)
sput! ............................................................................................................................................. sput!(3X)
sqrt ................................................................................................................................................. exp(3M)
square root function ..................................... .................. ...... ............. ....... ................... .......... ... ...... exp(3M)
srand ............................................................................................................................................. rand(3C)
sscanf .............. ................... ............................ ........ ................... ... ................................... ......... ..... scanf(3S)
ssignal ........................................................................................................................................ ssignal(3C)
ssp ...................................................................................................................................................... ssp(l)
stack size, specify size in bytes .......................... ..... ................... ... .................. ........ ....... .... ........ uconfig(1M)
standard input, copy one line from to standard output ..................................................................... line(l)
standard input, read from .................................................................................................................... sh(l)
standard inter-process communication package ........................................................................... stdipc(3C)
start character, resume output, description of .................................................................................... tty( 4)
stat ................................................................................................................................................... stat(2)
stat(2)/fstat(2), description of structure returned by these calls ....................................................... stat(7)
state, defining system states for init(lM) .................................................................................... inittab(5)
state, initialization of system state and processes ............... ......... ............................. ............... ....... init( 1M)
stat.h, description of .................... .... ......... ................................... ........ .......... ......... ................. ......... stat(7)
status flags, get/set for file ............................................................................................................... fcntl(2)
status, get for file .............................................................................................................................. stat(2)
status, inter-process communication facilities .................................................................................... ipcs(l)
stdio .............................................................................................................................................. stdio(3S)
stdipc .......................................................................................................................................... stdipc(3C)
step ............................................ ............. ......... ..................................... .............. ..... ......... ..... ....... regexp(7)
sticky bit, set/clear for file ........................................................................................... chmod(l), chmod(2)
stime ............................................................................................................................................... stime(2)
stop character, suspend output, description of ................................................................................... tty( 4)
stop operating system with optional re-boot ............................................................................. stopsys(lM)
stopsys ........................................................ .......... .................................................................... stopsys (1M)
strcat ... ......... ................. .................. ........... ......... ..................................... ......................... .......... string(3C)
strchr ........................................................................................................................................... string(3C)
strcmp ........ ....... .... .................. .................. ............................ .................. ..... ................ ....... ........ string(3C)
strcpy ... ........ ...... ... ........ ................ ..................... ........... ...... ......... ................... .......... ... ...... ......... string(3C)
strcspn ......................................................................................................................................... string(3C)
stream, close or flush .................................................................................................................... fclose(3S)
stream text editor ... ....... ..................... ....... ........... .................. ...... .... .......... .............. .... ........ ............. sed( 1)
string collation, non-ASCII, used by NLS ............................................................................... nL.string(3C)
string, copy .................................................................................................................................. string(3C)
string, get length of ..................................................................................................................... string(3C)

- 34 -

Permuted Index

string, print formatted data into .................................................................................................. printf(3S)
string, read and format data from ................................................................................................. scanf(3S)
string, read from buffered open file ................................................................................................. gets(3S)
string, search contents of file for specified ... .... ....... .......... ........... ................... ....... ............ ....... ........ grep( 1)
string, search for particular character in ..................................................................................... string(3C)
string to double-precision integer conversion ............................................................................... strtod(3C)
string, write to open file or standard output .................................................................................. puts(3S)
strings, compare two ................................................................................................................... string(3C)
strings, concatenate two ............... ............................................................................................... string( 3C)
string-to-integer conversion .......................................................................................................... strtol(3C)
strip ................................................................................................................................................. strip(l)
strip multiple line-feeds from output .................................................................................................. ssp(1)
strlen ........................................................................................................................................... string(3C)
strncat ......................................................................................................................................... string(3C)
strncmp ....................................................................................................................................... string(3C)
strncpy ........................................................................................................................................ string(3C)
strpbrk ........................................................................................................................................ string(3C)
strrchr ....................... ............................. ..................................................................................... string( 3C)
strspn .......................................................................................................................................... string(3C)
strtod .......................................................................................................................................... strtod(3C)
strtok ........................................................................................................................................... string(3C)
strtol ............................................................................................................................................ strtol(3C)
structure, definition of structure returned by stat(2) and fstat(2) .................................................... stat(7)
Structured Directory Format, description of ....................................................................................... dir(5)
Structured Directory Format, description of SDF volume .................................................................... fs(5)
Structured Directory Format volume, format, initialize, and certify .......................................... sdfinit(lM)
stty ................................................................................................................................................... stty(l)
stty ................................................................................................................................................... stty(2)
sttyv6 . ........... ....... ................... ... ....... .................. ................... ... ..... ... ..... ....... ................. ... ....... ..... sttyv6( 4)
su ......................................................................................................................................................... sU(l)
summarize and print SCCS file .......................................................................................................... prs(l)
superblock, description of superblock in SDF volume ........................................................................... fs(5)
suspend process execution for interval of time ................................................................ sleep(l), sleep(3C)
suspend process until signal ............................................................................................................ pause(2)
swab ............................................................................................................................................. swab(3C)
swap bytes .................................................................................................................................... swab(3C)
swap device, add .......................................................................................................................... swapon(2)
swap time, set for virtual segment . ........ .... .............. ... ....... ... ............................ ....... ......... ........ uconfig(1M)
swapon ..................................................................................................................................... swapon(lM)
swapon ........................................................................................................................................ swapon(2)
swapping and paging enable .................................................................................................... swapon(lM)
symbol table, extract entries from executable file's symbol table (name list) ................................. nlist(3C)
symbol table, print from object file .................................................................................................... nm(l)
symbol table, remove from object file .......... ........ ........................ ......... ........ ................. ............. ..... strip (1 )
symbols, examine execution profile for ................. ........ ... .................... ........... ......................... .......... prof(1)
sync .................................................................................................................... sync(2), sync(l), syncer(l)
syncer .................................................................. ...................................................................... syncer( 1M)
sync, automatic periodic ............................................................................................................ syncer(lM)
synchronous I/O multiplexing ........................................................................................................ select(2)
sys_errlist .................................................................................................................................. perror(3C)
sYS-1lerr ..................................................................................................................................... perror(3C)
system ........................................................................................................................................ system(3S)
system activity, terminate all current activity ...................................................................... shutdown(lM)
system calls, error indicator for ....................................................................................................... errno(2)
system configuration ................................................................................................................... config(lM)

- 35 -

Permuted Index

system error logging file ................................................................................................................. errfile(5)
System III compatibility for magnetic tape, description of ................................................................. mt( 4)
system initialization shell scripts ................... ................... .............................................................. brc (1M)
system name, get ....................................................................................... revision(1), uname(l), uname(2)
system names, list of those known to uucp .. ................................................ .................................... uucp(1)
system parameters, set or list ................................................................................................... uconfig(lM)
system reboot ............................................................................................................................. reboot(lM)
system reconfiguration .............................................................................................................. uconfig( 1M)
system state, defining states for init(lM) ..................................................................................... inittab(5)
system state, initialization of .......................................................................................................... init(lM)
table of contents format description for archives/libraries ............................................................. ranlib(5)
table of devices mounted by mount(lM) ..................................................................................... mnttab(5)
table of mounted devices, create ............................................................................................... setmnt(lM)
table search, binary .... ........... ............ ...... ... ..... .................... ............ ................................... ...... bsearch(3C)
tables, format for nroff/troff ............................................................................................................... tbl(l)
tabs .................................................................................................................................................. tabs(l)
tabs, expand to spaces, and vice versa ......................................................................................... expand(l)
tabs, put tab specifications in text files ........................................................................................... fspec(5)
tabs, set on terminal ......................................................................................................................... tabs(l)
tail ..................................................................................................................................................... tail(l)
tan ......................... .......... ......... .......... ......... ........... ....... .................... ................ ............. ............... trig(3M)
tangent function .... ................ ... ..... ..... ...... ............ ....... ........... ......... ............................. .................. trig(3M)
tangent, hyperbolic ............. .... .......... ......................... ........... ...... ......... ... ................ ............ ........... sinh(3M)
tanh ............................................................................................................................................... sinh(3M)
tape, archive files on ........................................................................................................................... tar(l)
tape, Command Set 80 cartridge utility ............................................................................................ tcio(l)
tape density, how to set for magnetic tape ......................................................................................... mt(4)
tape, description of magnetic tape raw interface and controls .................................. ................ .......... mt( 4)
tape file archiver ................................................................................................................................. tar(l)
tape file, convert, reblock, translate and/or copy ................................................................................ dd(l)
tape initialization ..................................................................................................................... mediainit(l)
tape, manipulate and/or position ........................................................................................................ mt(1)
tape, unpack/extract files from Command Set 80 cartridge ............................................................. upm(l)
tar ...................................................................................................................................................... tar(l)
tbl ....................................................................................................................................................... tbl(l)
tbl, nroff, troff, eqn constructs, remove from text .......................................................................... deroff(1)
tcio .................................................................................................................................................... tcio(l)
tee ...................................................................................................................................................... tee(l)
temporary file, create and open .................................................................................................. tmpfile(3S)
temporary file, generate name for ................ ........................ .................................. .................. tmpnam(3S)
termcap ................................................................................................................ termcap(3C), terminfo(5)
termcap description to terminfo description, convert ........................................................... captoinfo(lM)
terminal capabilities, database for vi editor ............................................................................... terminfo(5)
terminal capabilities in terminfo(5), access ............................................................................. termcap(3C)
terminal commands, description of ioctl(2) system call commands ..................................................... tty( 4)
terminal, database listing terminal type for each port ................................................................. ttytype(5)
terminal dependent initialization ....................................................................................................... tset(l)
terminal, description of general interface to ....................................................................................... tty( 4)
terminal driver, pseudo- ..................................................................................................................... pty(4)
terminal emulation, asynchronous .................................................................................................. aterm(l)
terminal, establish communication with terminal for login .......................................................... gettY(lM)
terminal, facilitate viewing of continuous text on ............................................................................ more(l)
terminal, find baud rate of terminal during login process ............................................................ getty(lM)
terminal flags, mapping between pwb/V6 UNIX and current HP-UX ................................................ tty(4)
terminal, generate file name for ................................................................................................. ctermid(3S)

- 36 -

Permuted Index

terminal, get path name of ...................................................................................................... ttyname(3C)
terminal, get path name of user's ............................................................................................ ........... tty( 1)
terminal input control, description of ................................................................................................. tty(4)
terminal interface, general ............................................................................................................. termio( 4)
terminal interface, version 6/PWD-compatibility ........................................................................... sttyv6( 4)
terminal, permit/deny messages to .................................................................................................. mesg(1)
terminal screen, clear ....................................................................................................................... clear(1)
terminal screen handling and optimization routines .................................................................... curses(3X)
terminal, set options for .................................................................................................................... stty(1)
terminal, set tabs on ......................................................................................................................... tabs(1)
terminal, set type and mode on login ................................................................................................ tset (1)
terminal, test file descriptor for association with ..................................................................... ttyname(3C)
terminals, list of recognized terminal names ................................................ .................................... term(7)
terminals, list of supported terminals in terminfo(5) ....................................................................... term(7)
terminate a process ......................................................................... kill(1), sh(1), exit(2), kill(2), abort(3C)
terminate all users' processes ................................................................................................ shutdown(1M)
terminfo compiler ....... ......... ........... .................. ............ ...... ................................................ .............. tic( 1M)
terminfo database access ................................................................................................................. tput(1)
terminfo description from termcap description, convert ....................................................... captoinfo(1M)
termio ........................................................................................................................................... termio( 4)
test .......................................................................................................................................... sh(1), test(1)
test conditional expressions ..................................................................................................... sh(1), test(1)
text editor ................................................................................................................................. ed(1), eX(1)
text editor, database of terminal capabilities for vi .................................................................... terminfo(5)
text editor, stream ............................................................................................................................. sed(1)
text editor (variant of ex for casual users) ........................................................................................ edit(1)
text editor, visual ................................................................................................................................. vi(1)
text, facilitate CRT viewing of continuous ...................................................................................... more(1)
text file, put format specifications in ............................................................................................... fspec(5)
text, find spelling errors in ............................................................................................................... spell(1)
text format specifications, put in text file ........................................................................................ fspec(5)
text formatter ....... ......................... ............... ....... ............ ................ ... .......... ................................... nroff( 1)
text formatter, simple .................................................................................................................... adjust(1)
text formatting, description of man macros ...................................... ........ ............................ ............ man(7)
text formatting, description of mm macros ...................................... ................................................. mm(7)
text formatting, remove nroff/troff/tbl/eqn constructs from text .................................................. deroff(1)
text, generate programs for lexical analysis of .................................................................................... lex(1)
text pattern scanning and processing language ................................................................................. awk(1)
text, print using mm macros ............................................................................................................. mm(1)
tgetent ..................................................................................................................................... termcap(3C)
tgetflag .................................................................................................................................... termcap(3C)
tgetnum ................................................................................................................................... termcap(3C)
tgetstr ...................................................................................................................................... termcap(3C)
tgoto ........................................................................................................................................ termcap(3C)
three-way differential file comparison ............................................................................................... diff3(1)
tic ................ ......... .......... ............................ ....... .......... ................... ... .......... ............... ..................... tic( 1M)
time .................................................................................................................................................. time(1)
time .................................................................................................................................................. time(2)
time a command .............................................................................................................................. time(1)
time and date, convert to ASCII string ........................................................................................ ctime(3C)
time and date, get more precisely ................................................................................................... ftime(2)
time, corrected for daylight saving time and time zone ................ ................................................ ctime(3C)
time execution of a process and its child processes ......................................................................... times(2)
time, get seconds since 00:00:00 GMT, January 1, 1970 ................................................................... time(2)
time, get/set ....................................................................................................................... gettimeofday(2)

- 37 -

Permuted Index

time, print elapsed user and system time for process ........................................................................... sh(1)
time, set and/or print ....................................................................................................... date(l), stime(2)
time to leave ................................................................................................................................... leave(l)
time zone, time corrected for ........................................................................................................ ctime(3C)
time/date stamps, correct those on wtmp records ..................................................................... fwtmp(lM)
times ..................................................................................................................................... sh(I), times(2)
timezone ....................................................................................................................................... ctime(3C)
tmpfile ........................................................................................................................................ tmpfile(3S)
tmpnam ................................................................................................................................... tmpnam(3S)
toascii ............................................................................................................................................ conv(3C)
_tolower ....................................................................................................................................... conv(3C)
tolower .......................................................................................................................................... conv(3C)
topological sort ................................................................................................................................ tsort(l)
touch ....................... ... ........................... ........ ......... ........... ................... .......... ........ ........... ....... ...... touch( l)
_toupper ....................................................................................................................................... conv(3C)
toupper ......................................................................................................................................... conv(3C)
tput .................................................................................................................................................. tput(l)
tputs ........................................................................................................................................ termcap(3C)
tr .......................................................................................................................................................... tr(l)
transfer files between two systems ....... .................. .............................. ................. ............. uucp(1), uuto(1)
translate assembly language .......................................................................................................... atrans(l)
translate characters during copy from standard input to standard output ........................................... tr(1)
translate characters for NLS .................................................................................................... nl_conv(3C)
translate tape file ................................................................................................................................ dd(l)
trap ..................................................................................................................................................... sh(I)
trap numbers for hardware ........................................................................................................... trapno(2)
trap, set for particular signal ............................................................................ sh(I), signal(2), ssignal(3C)
trapno ........................................................................................................................................... trapno(2)
trapno, report value for last command failure .................................................................................... err(I)
trigonometric functions ................ ..................................... ................... ................ .......................... trig(3M)
troff, format tables for ........................................................................................................................ tbl(I)
troff, nroff, t bl, eqn constructs, remove from text ................... ..................................... .................. deroff( I)
true ................................................................................................................................................... true(l)
truth value about your processor type .. ........ ......................................... .......... ......................... ... machid( 1)
truth values ...................................................................................................................................... true(I)
tset .................................................................................................................................................... tset(I)
tsort .. ................................................................. ......... .......... ............................ ................... ............ tsort (1)
tty ...................................................................................................................................................... tty(I)
tty name, record for each user (accounting) ................................................................................... utmp(5)
tty port, database listing terminal type connected to each .......................................................... ttytype(5)
ttyname ................................................................................................................................... ttyname(3C)
ttyslot ........................................................................................................................................ ttyslot(3C)
tune a file system ....................................................................................................................... tunefs(IM)
type declarations, data type definitions for system code . .................... ............................................ types(7)
typedefs for code portability between HP-UX implementations ..................................................... model(5)
types.h, description of .... .............. ...... ......... .......... .......... ..................................... ......... .................. types(7)
tzname ......................................................................................................................................... ctime(3C)
tzset ............................................................................................................................................. ctime(3C)
uconfig ...................................................................................................................................... uconfig(IM)
ul ......................................................................................................................................................... ul(I)
ulimit ............................................................................................................................................. ulimit(2)
umask ................................................................................................................. sh(I), umask(I), umask(2)
umodem .................................................................................................................................. umodem(IM)
umount ................................................................................................................... mount(IM), umount(2)
uname .......................................................................................................................... uname(I), uname(2)

- 38 -

Permuted Index

unblocked disc interface, description of ............................................................................................. disc( 4)
uncompact ................................................................................................................................. compact(l)
uncompiler: terminfo .................................................................................................................... untic(lM)
underlining, translate underscores to terminal escape sequence ............................................................ ul(1)
underscores, translate to terminal escape sequence for underlining ...................................................... ul(l)
unexpand ..................................................................................................................................... expand(l)
unget .............................................................................................................................................. unget(l)
UNGETC ..................................................................................................................................... regexp(7)
ungetc ......................................................................................................................................... ungetc(3S)
uniformly-distributed pseudo-random number generator ......................................................... drand48(3C)
uniq .................................................................................................................................................. uniq(l)
unique lines, find after comparing two files .................................................................................... comm(l)
UNIX/HP-UX system, establish communication with another ............................................................ cU(l)
unlink ............................................................................................................................ link(lM), unlink(2)
unlock/lock process address space or segment ............................................................................. memlck(2)
unmount or mount file system ............................................................... mount(lM), mount(2), umount(2)
unpack cpio archives from HP media ............................................................................................... upm(l)
unprintable characters in a file visible or invisible .............................................................................. vis(l)
untic ........ ................................... ........... ... ..... .............. ........................... .......... ........................... untic( 1M)
update access/modification/change times of file .............................................................. touch(l), utime(2)
update, maintain, recompile programs ............................................................................................ make(l)
update super-block ............................................................................................................. sync(2), sync(l)
upm ..............................................................................................................................: .................. upm(l)
upper-case to lower-case character conversion ............................................................................... conv(3C)
use findstring output to insert calls to getmsg ......................................................................... insertmsg(l)
user crontab file .......................................................................................................................... crontab(l)
user environment, description of .................................................................................................. environ(7)
user ID, get line from password file with matching ..................................................................... getpw(3C)
user ID, print ....................................................................................................................................... id(l)
user ID, search password file for matching .......... ................................ ................................... getpwent(3C)
user ID, set .................................................................................................................................... setuid(2)
user name, print ................................................................................................................................... id(l)
user name, search password file for matching ......................................................................... getpwent(3C)
user processes, terminate all ................................................................................................. shutdown(lM)
user, switch to another ........................................................................................................................ su(l)
users, print list of current ................................................................................................................. who(l)
users, print list of users and their current processes .................................................................. whodo(lM)
ustat ...... ................... .................................................. ......................... ........................ ................... ustat (2)
utilities, Bell Interchange Format file operations ................................................................................ bif(5)
utime .............................................................................................................................................. utime(2)
utmp accounting file, description of ................................................................................................ utmp(5)
utmp file current user slot .......................................................................................................... ttyslot(3C)
utmp.h, description of ..................................................................................................................... utmp(5)
uucico ........................................................................................................................................ uucico(lM)
uuclean .................................................................................................................................... uuclean(lM)
uucp ................................................................................................................................................ uucp(l)
uucp command execution ............................................................................................................ uuxqt(lM)
uucp network, monitor activity .................................................................................................. uusub(lM)

~~~~ :~~tO::i::%~:~ I~!~a;:f~.~. . . . ~:·. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .·. . . . . .·. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .~~~Ie:~~~~l
uucp transactions grouped by transaction, list .................................................................................
uucp/uux transactions, log of ..........................................................................................................
uulog ...............................................................................................................................................
uuls ...................................................................................................................................................
uuname ............................................................................................................................................

- 39 -

uuls(l)
uucp(l)
uucp(l)
uuls(l)
uucp(l)

Permuted Index

uupick .............................................................................................................................................. uuto(l)
uusnap ......................................................................................................................................... uusnap(l)
uusub ......................................................................................................................................... uusub(lM)
uuto ................................................................................................................................................. uuto(l)
uux .................................................................................................................................................... uux(l)
uuxqt .......................................................................................................................................... uuxqt(lM)
val ...................................................................................................................................................... val(l)
validate password and group files ................................................................................................ pwck(lM)
validate SCCS file .............................................................................................................................. val(l)
values ............................................................................................................................................ values(7)
values, machine-dependent ............................................................................................................ values (7)
varargs ........................................................................................................................................ varargs(7)
varargs argument list, print formatted output from .................................................................. vprintf(3S)
variable argument list handling facility .. ..................................................................................... varargs(7)
verify C program ............................................................................................................................... lint(l)
verify Command Set 80 cartridge tape .............................................................................................. tcio(l)
verify file system consistency ......................................................................................................... fsck(lM)
verify password and group files ...... ...................................... ........................................ ................ pwck(lM)
version 6/PWD-compatibility terminal interface ..... .......... ................... ................. ........ ........... ...... sttyv6 (4)
version name, get for HP-UX ....................................................................................... uname(l), uname(2)
version number, get .................................................................................................................... revision(l)
versions, compare two SCCS file versions ........ .................. ........... ........ ........ .................... ........... sccsdiff( 1)
vfork ................................................................................................................................................. fork(2)
vi .......................................................................................................................................................... vi(l)
vi editor, database of terminal capabilities for ........................................................................... terminfo(5)
view ..................................................................................................................................................... vi(l)
viewing text, facilitate on soft-copy terminals ................................................................................. more(l)
virtual memory page pool, specify maximum size of .................... ..................................... ........ uconfig(lM)
virtual memory usage, set or clear for program .............................................................................. chatr(l)
virtual memory working set ratio, set ....................................................................................... uconfig(lM)
virtual segment, establish time segment remains memory resident ........................................... uconfig(1M)
vis ....................................................................................................................................................... vis(l)
visual text editor ..................... .......................................... ........................................... ........................ vi(l)
volume, description of SDF volume superblock .................................................................................... fs(5)
volume, format, initialize, and certify SDF volume .................................................................... sdfinit(lM)
volume header, write LIF on file ..................................................................................................... lifinit(l)
volume, mark/unmark as HP-UX root volume ...................................................................... rootmark(lM)
vprintf ...................... ........................................................ ........ ........... ....................................... vprintf(3S)
vsadv .............................................. ...................................... ........................ ............ ................ ..... vsadv(2)
vsoff .............................................................................................................................. ................... vson (2)
vson ................................................................................................................................................. vson(2)
wait .......................................................................................................................... sh(l), wait(l), wait(2)
wait for completion of process ................................................................................... sh(l), wait(l), wait(2)
walk a file tree ................................................................. .................... .................................... ........ ftw(3C)
wall ................................................................ ................... ....... ................... ............................... ... wall( 1M)
wc ....................................................................................................................................................... wc(l)
wc ....................................................................................................................................................... wc(l)
what ................................................................................................................................................ what(l)
whereis ........................................................................................................................................ whereis(l)
while loop, exit from enclosing ............................................................................................................. sh(l)
while loop, resume the next iteration of ............................................................................................... sh(l)
who ................................................................................................................................................... whorl)
whoami ................................................................... c................................................................... whoami(l)
whodo ........................................................................................................................................ whodo(lM)
word count .......................................................................................................................................... wc(l)

- 40 -

Permuted Index

word, read from buffered open file .................................................................................................. getc(3S)
word, write on buffered open file or standard output ..................................................................... putc(3S)
words, count number contained in file ................................................................................................ wc(1)
working directory, change ........................................................................................... cd(l), sh(l), chdir(2)
working directory, print name of ...................................................................................................... pwd(1)
write ................................................................................................................................. write(l), write(2)
write character on buffered open file or standard output ............................................................... putc(3S)
write current contents of memory to disc ........................................................................... sync(2), sync(1)
write interactively to another user .................................................................................................. write(l)
write LIF volume header on file ...................................................................................................... lifinit(l)
write on a file .................................................................................................................................. write(2)
write operation, reposition next ..................................................................................................... fseek(3S)
write password file entry ....................................................................................................... putpwent(3C)
write string to open file or standard output ................................................................................... puts(3S)
write to a file using buffers ............................................................................................................ fread(3S)
write to all users ............................................................................................................................ wall(1M)
write word on buffered open file or standard output ...................................................................... putc(3S)
wtmp accounting file, description of ............................................................................................... utmp(5)
wtmp records, convert from binary to ASCII ............................................................................ fwtmp(lM)
wtmp records, correct time/date stamps on ............................................................................... fwtmp(lM)
wtmpfix ..................................................................................................................................... fwtmp(lM)
x.25 line, get .............................................................................................................................. getx25(lM)
xd ........................................................................................................................................................ od(l)
yO . ......... ............................................... ............................ .............................................. ............ bessel (3M)
y1 ............................................................................................................................................... bessel(3M)
yacc .................................................................................................................................................. yacc(l)
yn ............................................................................................................................................... bessel(3M)

- 41 -

Permuted Index

- 42 -

MANUAL COMMENT CARD
HP- UX Reference
Manual Reorder No. 09000-90008

Name:
Company:

Address:

Phone No:

Please note the latest printing date from the Printing History (page ii) of this
manual and any applicable update(s); so we know which material you are
commenting on _____________

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
INTHE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS

PERMIT NO. 37

LOVELAND, COLORADO

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

Hewlett-Packard Company
Fort Collins Systems Division
Attn: Customer Documentation
3404 East Harmony Road
Fort Collins, Colorado 80525

r/iOW

HEWLETT

&!~ PACKARD

HP Part Number

09000-90008
Printed in U.S.A.

09000-90657
6/86

For Internal Use Only

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37
Create Date                     : 2010:04:09 08:18:39-08:00
Modify Date                     : 2010:04:09 12:09:11-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2010:04:09 12:09:11-07:00
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.31 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:fe3c9b6c-34c7-47ee-b792-096636c0c541
Instance ID                     : uuid:372902d6-bd73-43b7-8ca8-0b4fd5ec73e3
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 417

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

09000 90008_HP UX_Reference_Vol_3_3_4_5_7_9_Sep86 90008 HP UX Reference Vol 3 4 5 7 9 Sep86

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation